Home

MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

1. Remote I O station Remote I O station Station No 1 the number Station No 2 the number Local station Local station of occupied stations 1 of occupied stations 1 Station No 3 the number of Station No 7 the number of occupied stations 4 occupied stations 4 ORE URANO EM ____ expanded cyclic setting dout be expanded cyclic setting double Address Remote input RX i i Remote output RY Address A Remote output RY Address A Stati tt i H H Station i Station i Not 140004 RX F to RX 0 e _x0F t xo i i RYFtoRryo 4200 NOT R Forvo ao Neate i Station n RX 1F to RX 10 i 1 f XIF to x10 l i RY 1F to RY 10 ae i RY 1F to RY 10 inire i No2 40024 RX2F to RX20 T CF t x J RY2F to RY20 42020 No2 H RY2F to RY20 4202 No2 i 40034 RX3F to RX30 Pod RY 3F to RY30 42034 i RY 3F to RY30 4203 40044 RX4F to RX40 EL RY4F to RY40 42044 RY4F to RY40 4204 Station to to PIS NES i i 49 io Station D to to Station 1 Maa rot i i No3 i No3 400FH RXFF to RX FO MEN RYFF to RYFO 420F RYFF to RYFO 420F 40104 Rx 10D to RX 100 mE RY 10D to RY 100 4210 RY 10D to RY 100 4210H i 4011H RX 11F
2. Local station Local station Remote station Remote station the number of Remote station the number of the number of the number of occupied stations 1 the number of occupied stations 4 Master station occupied occupied Station number 4 occupied Station number 7 stations 2 stations 1 stations 2 Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 es ose eile E gose SOO OS The station does not become a data link faulty station Local station Local station Remote station Remote station the number of Remote station the number of the number of the number of occupied stations 1 the number of occupied stations 4 Master station occupied occupied Station number 4 occupied Station number 7 stations 2 stations 1 stations 2 Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 e Ran I ve A m IU p g p IL DALLLISuI EST n eal Point P When a slave station that has been set as an error invalid station is specified as a reserved station reserved station selection is prioritized lf an error occurs in all the slave stations set as an error invalid station the ERR LED turns on 1 Setting method Set an error in
3. Remote device station Programmable controller CPU Master station HT 2 Send data Request Device memory oT 4 Received data Response The send data S2 in the size specified in S1 2 are stored into the master station G P RDMSG 3 The send data are sent to the station specified in S1 1 Processing for the send data is executed at the station specified in S1 1 A processing result is received from the station specified in S1 1 AVNA The received data are stored in the area from the device specified in D1 and the device specified in D2 is set to ON b Simultaneous execution of the G P RDMSG instruction The G P RDMSG instruction can be simultaneously executed to multiple remote device stations up to four stations To the same remote device station however simultaneous execution of multiple instructions including other dedicated instruction s is not allowed Because several scans are required to complete the process of the dedicated instruction create a program so that the next dedicated instruction is executed after Completion device D2 turns on 224 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS c Check of the completion status There are two types of interlock signals for the G P RDMSG instruction Completion device D2 and Status display device at
4. Local station or Local station or Master station Remote I O station Remote I O station intelligent device intelligent device E aaa eal or remote or remote station station device station device station q S i 000 i NS O imum o O imu o 0000 0000 bapa bapa O00 OOO a IT a bag H p Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance e Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable a terminating resistor of 110Q used Transmission speed Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance 156kbps 1200m 625kbps 900m 2 5Mbps 20cm or longer 400m 5Mbps 160m 10Mbps 100m suoneoiuioeds eoueuuoLegd ZE OL L JOA xur1 29 e ueisip ejqeo jjeje o WNWIXEN z z 29 3 2 3 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link Ver 1 00 Configure a CC Link system where the transmission speed and the cable length satisfy the following conditions 1 When a system is configured with a remote I O station and remote device 30 station only Remote 1 O station or remote device station Master station Remote O station or remote device station Remote 1 0 station or remote device station Remote I O station or remote device station L TEN accom ER gom ae 5 E 000 0000 0000 0
5. CPU module Master station Local station CPU module 1 Command G P RIRD T Buffer memory 2 Device Device 3 Receive buffer 2 1 Thebuffer memory specified by S 2 and S 3 of the station specified by S 1 or the device in a CPU module is accessed 2 The data that has been read is stored in the receive buffer of the master station 3 The data that has been read after the device specified by D1 is stored and the device specified by D2 turns on b Simultaneous execution of the G P RIRD instruction The G P RIRD instruction can be simultaneously executed to multiple local stations or intelligent device stations But concurrent execution of the instruction is not allowed to the same station including other dedicated instructions If the dedicated instruction is executed before the completion of the former dedicated instruction the latter instruction is ignored Because several scans are required to complete the process of the dedicated instruction create a program so that the next dedicated instruction is executed after Completion device D2 turns on 177 qui d o ze c Check of the completion status There are two types of interlock signals for the G P RIRD instruction Completion device D2 and Status display device at completion D2 1 Completion device Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RIRD instruction i
6. SM400 1 H FROM H10 H5E2 K4SB20 LFROM H10 H620 SW20 Parameter setting SM402 SB6E SET G P RLPASET instruction Control data M300 LMOV KO MOV K15 VV K3 I wov K3 M 9 H1wov K1 pj jjpSp ov KO MOV KO MOV KO Slave station setting data M300 MOV H2101 MOV H102 SS Mv H103 Reserved station specification data M300 LMOV H4 Error invalid station specification data M300 LMOV H2 Communication and automatic update buffer assignment data M300 FM EBA dwov k100 MOV K100 MOV KO 214 1 Set the station number in hexadecimal Example Set 14u for station No 20 K30 K480 M300 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D10 D11 D12 D50 D60 D70 D71 D72 Data in SB0020 to SB01FF are read to SB0020 to SB01FF Data in SW0020 to SW01FF are read to SW0020 to SW01FF Instruct to set parameters Clear completion status All setting data Valid Total module connected 3 Retry count 3 times Automatic reconnection station count 1 Operation specification when CPU is down Stop Scan mode setting Delay time setting 0 First Local station occupies 1 station station number 1 Second Remote I O station occupies
7. Transmission speed Mode B Switch number setting Transmission speed 156kbps 0 Transmission speed 625kbps 1 Online Transmission speed 2 5Mbps 2 Transmission speed 5Mbps 3 Transmission speed 10Mbps 4 m Line test gt Page 87 Section 6 5 1 Transmission speed 156kbps 5 Transmission When the station number setting switches Transmission speed 625kbps 6 3 speed mode setting switch are set at 0 Transmission speed 2 5Mbps 7 Line test4 Transmission speed 5Mbps 8 When the station number setting switches are set at 1 to 64 Transmission speed 10Mbps 9 Line test 2 Transmission speed 156kbps A Transmission speed 625kbps B Hardware test gt Page 321 Section 11 5 Transmission speed 2 5Mbps C Transmission speed 5Mbps D Transmission speed 10Mbps E Setting not allowed F Used to connect a CC Link dedicated cable gt Page 78 Section 6 2 2 The SLD and FG terminals are connected inside the module 4 Terminal block Because a two piece terminal block is used the module can be replaced without disconnecting the signal line to the terminal block Before installing or removing the terminal block power off the module Serial number 5 Indicates the serial number on the rating plate display Point P The settings of the station number setting switches and the transmission speed mode setting switch are enabled by resetting the CPU module or po
8. 1 The LEDs may look dimly lit or off depending on the communication status 261 Jul ejep jo snjeis 9y Buppeus OL UOI E S E207 pue uoHels Jejse J e uee jeg suoneoiunuJuo Jo ejduex3 0L 10 3 5 Program example This section provides a program example 1 Devices to be used The following table lists the devices to be used in the program example a Devices in the master station Device Description Module X0 Module error X1 Host data link status v Module ready QJ61BT11N master station SW0080 0 Other station data link status station number 1 X20 Data send to the local station flag QX10 Y31 Output from RY1 in the local station Y3F Data link error flag station number 1 ae M100 Communication condition established flag X1000 to X101D Remote input RXO to RX1D Y1000 to Y101D Remote output RYO to RY1D QJ61BT11N local station WO to W3 Remote register RWr0 to RWr3 Page 255 Section 10 3 1 2 W100 to W103 Remote register RWw0 to RWw3 b Devices in the local station Device Description Module X0 Module error X1 Host data link status QJ61BT11N local station XF Module ready X21 Data send to the master station flag QX10 Y30 Output from RYO in the master station QY10 M100 Communication condition established flag X1000 to X101D Remote input RXO to RX1D Y1000 to Y101D Remote output RYO to RY1D
9. alalalalalalalalalalalalalalala SHEA EN EN EH EH ES EH EMEA EA GA EN EU E alalalalalalalalalalalalalalala alalalalalalalalalalata Default uoneis Jajsew e Jo sPumes z Z 0L uoHelS 99149 9jouie e pue uonels Jejse y e ueeweg suoreoiunuiuo Jo ejdurex3 ZOL Configuring the initial setting executes the following processes from the first condition Condition Description 1st The channels 1 and 2 are set to the A D conversion enable An input range is set 2nd Channel 1 0 to 5V Channel 2 User range setting 1 10 to 10V Whether a sampling process or averaging process is executed is set 3rd Channel 1 Sampling process Channel 2 Averaging process count average Ath The average count of the channel 2 is set to 16 5th Initial data processing completion flag is turned on 6th Initial data setting request flag is turned on 7th Initial data processing completion flag is turned off 8th Initial data setting request flag is turned off 243 Initial setting for an AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN station number 4 Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration Module 1 Target S amp Select HEX Input Format HEX Bm Execute Operational Condition iul Condition Details of Execution Flag ondition Device Execute Device Write Device No iti i Data 08 O0FC 09 0031 op 0000 18 ON v ain 18 OFF 19 OFF E
10. Station Range of Station the station No 1 Nat No 1 sending data Station Station No 2 No 2 pow pA JOU BJOWSY 9 Sopo N pue juowubissy 9 Station Station No 3 No 3 RWw RWw Range of the master station sending data to Station Station tesla iNet No 1 No 1 Dt 2 Station No 2 if Range of the master station sending data to the station No 3 Station No 2 Range of the station No 3 sending data s ay a a a ea a a ee a ee ESS gt Data sent from the master station Area where data is sent to other stations ndi Data sent from slave stations 1 The last two bits in RX and RY cannot be used for communications between a master station and a local station 2 A remote I O station does not have RWr or RWw However areas in RWr and RWw of the master station and a local station are occupied for the number of points of a remote I O station When areas in RWr and RWw should not be occupied use the remote net Ver 2 mode gt Page 47 Section 3 6 4 45 1 Points per module and per system For the points refer to the table of the performance specifications gt Page 24 Section 3 2 In CC Link increasing the number of occupied stations can increase the number of points per module The number of occupied stations is set for each slave station 7 gt Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 Page 119 Section 7 4 2 1 Item
11. CH O Line status Normal r Network Test CH 1 Line status ees Loop Test Loop Type TwisUSimge Bus Monitoring other station Stat bata tink eee rest the acquired info Bie ot a EEH EEE Close Point When stopping or restarting data link do not write data to the buffer memory area buffer memory address 5E0 400 APPENDICES 7 Setting and canceling a temporary error invalid station Even if a data link error occurs in a slave station the station is not detected as a faulty station in the master station and local station This setting can be configured even during data link unlike the error invalid station setting function This function is used to exchange slave stations during data link for maintenance or for other purposes 1 Open the CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics window Diagnostics 2 CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics 2 In Module Setting select CC Link Then select a master station to be monitored in Module No or I O Address 3 Click the Stat Monitoring button 4 Click the Monitoring other station button 5 Select the line of the station where the temporary error invalid station setting is configured or canceled Then click the Setting Cancel button CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics Other station Wer 1 Intelligent 1 Normal Invalid station if temporary error Setting Cancel For
12. AE 1 i i Remote ouput RY y D Li Li Li Li V Data for the station numbers 1 and 3 in the Ver 2 compatible slave station is O 2 How to set the mode Set the mode using the network parameter gt Page 98 Section 7 3 2 Page 116 Section 7 4 2 Page 212 Section 9 8 1 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 6 3 Remote net Ver 1 mode This mode is selected when a new CC Link system is configured When the system includes a Ver 2 compatible slave station select the remote net Ver 2 mode gt Page 47 Section 3 6 4 Remote device station Master station Intelligent device station Remote O station Local station Remote net Ver 1 mode Ver 1 compatible Ver 1 compatible Remote net Ver 1 mode a Station No 0 StationNo 1 N f StationNo2 d Station No 3 Ver 1 compatible area Ver 1 compatible RX area Range of Sree the station No 1 1 sending data Station No 1 Station No 1 Range of Station n the station No 2 Station No 2 sending data No2 Station 1 1 i No 3 1 Station m No 3 PO CEE PES RY 1 1 1 RY RY e i Range of the master 1 station sending data to Station the station No 1 No 1 Range of the master Stati A station sending data to ation Station the station No 2 No 2 Range of the master station sending data to LT the station No 3 ee ee Ed
13. Block guarantee of cyclic data per station 0 Not set 1 Set SW0064 No of retries The set number of retries upon an error response is stored A 6644 information 1 to 7 time O No of SW0065 The set number of automatic return stations in one link scan is stored automaticreturn i O x x 665p 1 to 10 station stations SWWCO66 Delay timer The set delay time is stored x x ime i 6664 information The parameter setting used is stored 04 Parameter written to the CPU module SW0067 Parameter 34 Parameter setting and data link start using the dedicated instruction Oo x Oo 667 4 information G P RLPASET Dj Default parameter automatic CC Link startup 351 SMS suajsibeu jeroeds yur ze xipueddy SMS susjsiBey jeroeds Ju pue sgs s ejew jeroeds yu e xipueddy Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether the parameters have been correctly set is stored SW0068 Host parameter 0 Correct O x x 6684 status Values other than 0 Error code gt Page 291 Section 11 3 2 Whether unique station numbers have been assigned for modules and whether parameter settings match with connected module status are stored 0 Normal SWO0069 Values other than 0 Loading status O x x 6694 Error code 5 Pag
14. NC IQ M module vsu d e O Q A DB Fo l ne B FO 2 Before power on check the following Example Universal Example High Performance Module mounting status model QCPU model QCPU Input power supply voltage RESET RUN STOP RUN The CPU module is set to STOP OD CD The CPU module is not set to RESET STOR RESET L CLR 03 3 Setthe transmission speed mode setting switch on gl CERAN inm the master local module to any of A to E ER MEN When setting the switch from A to E set the same transmission speed as that of during system operation 3 Page 21 CHAPTER 2 S9 QUEMPJEH S LL 4 Reset the CPU module or power off and on the system To the next page 321 QJ61BT11N RUN B LIL RUN MST E 1S MST W ON SD RD I Flashing ERR IL ERR 1 OFF 6 CPU module Master local module QJ61BT11N RUNO L RUN MST SMST W ON SD RD IL Flashing ERR I L ERR OFF CPU module Master local module QJ61BT11N RUN L RUN MST B S MST E on SD RD Il Flashing ERR L ERR OFF 2 Precautions a Cable connection The hardware test starts During the test the MST LED on the master local module is flashing The test is completed in about 30 seconds When the hardware test is completed t
15. Delectability Error code m Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station Please consult your local B31C and B31D System error SN O O Mitsubishi representative Status logging start Logging was started while logs B31E Delete the logs then start logging O O error were being deleted B31F Status logging clear Logs were deleted during Stop the logging then delete the O o error logging logs Logging was executed or logs Set the remote net mode then Status logging mode B320 invalid were deleted in the remote I O start the logging or delete the O invali net mode logs Please consult your local B321 System error VEN O O Mitsubishi representative The logs were deleted during Status logging flash Stop the data link then delete the B322 Ae data link with RAM Flash O O ROM deletion invalid logs ROM selected Although the logs had been set to be deleted with RAM Flash m Status logging flash Delete the logs again with RAM B323 ROM selected logging was O O ROM deletion failed Flash ROM selected started while the logs have not yet been deleted Delete the logs with RAM Flash Logs were tried to be stored on Status logging flash ROM selected then start logging B324 the flash ROM although the flash O O ROM storage error or start logging with RAM ROM was not ready for storage selected The
16. Outputs RY RWw from the standby master station are stored in inputs RX RWr of the master station shaded areas in the figure above Input of the standby master station Station number 2 Master station standby status Standby master station Station number 0 1 controlling The number of occupied stations 1 Station number 0 Remote Remote Remote Remote input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote I O station RX00 to RXOF RY00 to RYOF The number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F i The number of occupied stations p 2 2 4 1 RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to XOF Y00 to YOF Inputs RX RWr from slave stations to the standby master station are stored in outputs RY RWw of the master station shaded areas in the figure above 140 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS d Operation between the standby master station going down and the master station controlling data link If the standby master station goes down the master station takes over the control of data link Output from the master station Master station controlling Station number 1 0 Standby master station r 7 Remote Remote output R7 r 7 Remote Remote input RX output RY Remote I O station Station number 2
17. 4 5 No Name Application RUN LED Indicates the operating status ON Operating normally OFF A hardware failure or a watchdog timer error has occurred L RUN LED Indicates the data link status ON Performing data link OFF Not performing data link MST LED Indicates whether the module is operating as a master station ON Operating as a master station OFF Operating as a local station or a standby master station in standby status 1 S MST LED Indicates whether the module is operating as a standby master station ON Operating as a standby master station in standby status OFF Operating as a master station or a local station The LED also turns off when a standby master station switches to a master station SD LED Indicates whether the module is sending data ON Sending data OFF Not sending data RD LED Indicates whether the module is receiving data ON Receiving data OFF Not receiving data 21 No Name Application Indicates the error status of the master local module The details of errors can be checked by using the following ERR LED e CC Link diagnostics 7 gt Page 308 Section 11 4 Detailed LED display status SW0058 lt gt Page 348 Appendix 3 2 Any of the following errors has occurred The error on all the stations was detected The value outside the range is set for the station number setti
18. n3 O O O 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written Un xe 0 to FEy with three digits The station number of the intelligent device station 1 to 64 n1 tat Random access buffer specification FFy 16 bit binary The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent device Between 0 and parameter n2 station specified by the master station or the offset value of the random N setting value access buffer Within the range of the D Start number of the device to which data to be written is stored Ni Device specified device n3 Number of write points 0 to 40962 16 bit binary 200 1 The value that was set in the station information setting of the network parameter of a programming tool 2 No process is performed when 0 is set CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RITO instruction Master station co 3 Target station te ooo e i O m o CPU module Master station HT Intelligent device station Communication Buffer memory starts when conditions are met gt Automatic update buffer memory Automatic Device updat
19. Occupies 1 station Remote l O station Station number 3 Occupies 1 station YOOtoYOF Y10 to Y1F i i RX40 to AF RN ue Ryp LL ne 1 X00 to XOF 4F 5F EEE EA eee E E E ee ee EE Outputs RY RWw of the standby master station are stored in inputs RX RWr of the master station By transferring the inputs RX RWr of the master station to the outputs RY RWw outputs to the slave stations are continued shaded areas in the figure above lt 7 Page 147 Section 8 2 5 7 Input of the master station Master station controlling Station number 1 0 Standby master station r 7 po c c2c c2cc2 c22222222222 2 2 4 Remote Remote input RX output RY Remote Remote output R7 Remote I O station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Remote I O station Station number 3 M op Occupies 1 station Inputs RX RWr of the standby master station are stored in the outputs RY RWw of the master station By transferring the outputs RY RWw of the master station to the inputs RX RWr inputs from the slave stations are continued shaded areas in the figure above lt _ gt Page 147 Section 8 2 5 7 141 uonounij Jejseui Aqpuels Z8 Ayqey ueisAs eu Buoudui z g 4 Setting method Set the function in the network parameters of a programming tool
20. communication failure 1 2 If parameter settings have been configured using dedicated instructions the data is held If parameter settings have been configured using a programming tool the data is cleared when Y is set to the refresh device of the remote output RY The data is held or cleared according to the parameter settings when the device other than Y is set When Y is set to the refresh device of the remote output RY in the local station that has stopped only the receive area from the stopped local station is cleared The data is held or cleared according to the parameter settings when the device other than Y is set The operations continue for the receive areas from other stations 123 10113 ue je uoneig eAe s e pue uonelg Jeise A e ues Meg eoueJeyiig SNIS 7 2 Status of a remote device station intelligent device station local station and standby master station when operating as a local station Remote device station intelligent device Local station standby master station operating station as a local station Data link status Remote Remote Remote Remote Remote TER Remote Remote n n T fi emote T A input output register register input register register output RY RX RY RWw RWr RX RWw RWr When the programmable controller CPU of the master station is set to STOP at Continue 1 Continue Continue Cl
21. Return to the original P Next Display All Connecting Station Information Selected Station Information Selected Station Error Information m Connecting Station Master station 0 Data Link Status Data linking Master ST Operation Status Normal Master Station Switch Master station m Used Line CH 0 CH 0 Side Line Status Normal CH 1 Side Line Status Line Type Twist Single Bus Link Scan Time Max 2ms Min 2ms Current 2ms Related Functions 7 V B Loop Test Status Logging Create Check Stop Data Link Sheet 3 CC Link Ver 2 compatible module Since the master local module is a CC Link Ver 2 compatible module the number of points per system can be increased up to 8192 for RX RY and the number of words is up to 2048 for RWr RWw On a station basis the number of points can be increased up to 896 for RX RY and the number of words is 128 for RWr RWw A CC Link Ver 2 compatible system can be larger than a CC Link Ver 1 compatible system Sse npojN jeoo7 selseW ZL Ex Maximum number of points of the remote input RX and remote output RY CC Link Ver 2 8192 points CC Link Ver 1 2048 points 19 4 Prevention of a system failure a Continuation of communications upon module error Since a bus topology is employed communications among normal modules continue even if a module goes down due to power off or other causes
22. 237 uoneunByuoo wayskS L Z OL uOoHelS eol e 9jouie e pue uonels Jejse y e ueeweg suorjeorunuiuo Jo ejdurex3 z OL The assignment by each data of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN are shown below AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Station No 1 Station No 4 No of occupied No of occupied CPUmodue amp Master station stations 3 Station3 _ i Buffer memory FG i i Device Remote register RWr Remote register RWr wd wo i 2E0H 736 P Rw I 1 2 I M 1 1 E roy 1 W3 pod 2E34 739 i RWr3 1 he ia l 0 anas Rn i W4 Station Ky Station 2E4H 740 i Station 1 ro 1 wil Eco BE VG l ws hos 2E8H 744 RWr8 1 A o i 1 5 I 1 s b d E 1 1 H Kos 1 i WB i 2EBH 747 RWIB Remote register RWr i i I 1 I WC Lo 2ECH 748 i i RWrO b ir I 1 tg 1 1 1 1 1 WF E 2EFH 751 i RWr3 c se cs e Ee 1 i 1 1 I W101 Station lt Station a Station TN No 4 iq No 4 1 T T No 4 gt W13 Dog 2F3H 755 og D RWr7 Ts ila 1 ems asl 1 ean EE W14 i 2F4H 756 l rod RWr8 i i bod d i 1 i Y d EET E 2F7W 759 E RWB DNE cocer ERE Eee censis K Gan cipe he ee eR SEE CPU module Remote station Remote regi
23. Project window c Parameter 2 gt Network Parameter z CC Link a Settings for a master station Configure the settings in Type and Standby Master Station No of the network parameter as follows For other settings refer to Page 98 Section 7 3 2 1 Setthe station number to 0 using the station number setting switch on the master local module QJ61BT11N RUN LRUN MST SMST sD RD ERR LERR STATION e No 18 JES 2 Open the Network Parameter window to configure the setting in Type as follows Project window Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link O Enabled x Disabled Function Operation When the master station goes down the standby master station operates as a master station to continue data link When a failed master station becomes normal again it returns as a standby master station When only a standby master station is started up it starts data link as a master station Setting in Type Master station switching function O Master Station Master station duplex function O Master Station Duplex Function Data link start function using a standby master station O Master Station Duplex Function 3 Set Standby Master Station No from 1 to 64 Ex When Master Station Duplex Function is selected in Type 142 1 Start I O No 0000 Operation Set
24. started and the cables are not disconnected 292 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code m Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station Please consult your local B305 System error MN j O x Mitsubishi representative A station number other than the start station number has been Specified station NU B306 specified in the temporary error Specify the start station number O x number setting error invalid request or temporary error invalid canceling request When one of the following requests is issued a data link Make sure that the data link Data link error in all B307 st tions error has occurred in all stations returns to normal then issue the O O i Data link restart SB0000 request again Data link stop SB0002 Station number setting A slave station number is outside 2 B308 error installation Set the number within 1 to 64 O x of 1 to 64 status The station number of the connected module is already in B309 Station number use including the station Check the station number of the O already in use error numbers of occupied stations corresponding modules and excluding the start station number The station type differs between the mounted modules and parameter settings Connected Parameter Correct the paramet
25. 13 Internal current consumption 5VDC 25 Interrupt Settings 0005 101 112 lk ERR LED isse eoa 22 ERUN BED 2t se RP id aa a andaa iA 21 linel st oie achat reae ah ole dhe aen i 87 Link refresh time annann naana 385 Link scan ime diei nanes ea eiaa a aai 362 Link Scan Time Approx onanan aana 104 Link special register SW 336 348 Link special relay SB 335 340 List of buffer memory areas 38 List of dedicated instructions 172 List of functions llli 34 List of I O signals 0000000000 37 l ist OF MOdES yh snare han Sed EET BEA 43 Lists of problems llle 275 l ocal stationzis 5 vU fa gue wad oes a beaks Oe 14 Manual page organization 000 12 Master station llle 13 Master Station Data Link Type 99 Master station duplex function 136 Master station duplication error canceling 171 Master station switching function 136 Master local module luu 13 17 Maximum number of connected modules 27 Maximum number of connected modules master station Jade qnibus deceat e cdd Pato A n Sa coa art Rot 24 Maximum number of link points per system 24 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link Ver 1 00 SHEER DECEDERE EE 30 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link Ver 1 10 apud guy Ear Pee Pe arenes eT Rd 29 MELSEC
26. 56 57 58 59 60 61 jeeus Bunjes g xipueddy 62 63 64 jeeus Bunjes uoneuuojur uonels eg xipueddy 407 Appendix O Checking the Function Version and Serial Number The serial number and function version of a master local module can be checked on the rating plate the front of the module and the system monitor of a programming tool 1 Checking the function version and serial number of a master local module a On the rating plate The rating plate is located on the side of a master local module CC1inkWA MELSEC Q MITSUBISHI Serial No first 5 digits MODEL Function version SERIAL 13012000000000KB_ Relevant regulation standards MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN b On the front of a module The serial number and function version on the rating plate are printed on the front at the bottom of the module QJ61BT11N RUN MST SMST SD RD ERR LERR STATION NO x10 x1 MODE A Function version 408 APPENDICES c On the system monitor Product Information List In System Monitor of Diagnostics on a programming took click the _Product Information List button Product Information List Sol MEN 130120000000000 Intelli Display of a produc
27. PL c Es X lt v Transmission delay time I Delay time due to response delay of the remote I O station ll Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station III Delay time between the master station receiving data and the data being stored into the buffer memory IV Delay time until information of the master station is refreshed in the CPU module 163 b Data flow in the synchronous mode Sequence scan 2 link scan CPU module Sequence scan Master station buffer memory p i A p d gt Remote input RX Link scan Response time of the first station Response time of the corresponding station Response time of the final station Responses from remote H H I O stations l E 4 Input 1 Input 2 A C A i gt lIt l IV I 1 4 Transmission delay time I Delay time due to response delay of the remote I O station II Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station Ill Delay time between the master station receiving data and the data being stored into the buffer memory IV Delay time until information of the master station is refreshed in the CPU module 164 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Sequence scan lt Link scan CPU module H H H H H Sequence scan Master station buffer memory Remote input RX n TAE EE s
28. e CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible a terminating resistor of 1109 used Transmission speed Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable uil 2 distance 156kbps 1200m 625kbps 30cm or longer 600m 2 5Mbps 200m Between 30cm and 59cm 110m 5Mbps 2m or longer 60cm or longer 150m Between 30cm and 59cm 50m 10Mbps Between 60cm and 99cm 80m 1m or longer 100m e CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible a terminating resistor of 130 used Transmission speed Station to stati on cable length Maximum overall cable 1 2 156kbps 625kbps 30cm or longer 2 5Mbps Between 30cm and 59cm 2m or longer 5Mbps 60cm or longer Between 70cm and 99cm 10Mbps 1m or longer distance 1200m 600m 200m 110m 150m 50m 80m 1 This is a station to station cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations 2 This is a station to station cable length between a master station and a station one before after the master station a local station and a station one before after the local station or an intelligent device station and a station one before after the intelligent device station 3 When this range is applied for one section the maximum overall cable distance is the shortest station to station cable length 32 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIO
29. rr Terminating resistor AJ65BTB2 16T output module AJ65BTB1 16DT combined module Remote I O station Remote I O station output 16 points input 8 points output 8 points Station No 1 Station No 2 Terminating resistor 58 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION 2 Plan the device assignment Point The status of a device assignment can be checked on GX Works2 by setting information of a slave station on the CC Link configuration window on GX Works2 7 Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 a View 2 Docking Window gt CC Link Device Reference Window CSV File Output Master Local Start lO No r Slave Station List Link Device List I Display Detailed Configuration Informati Display Option Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Target STA Host STA Target STA Host STA Target STA Target STA Link a Refresh Link 3 Refresh Link 7 Link 3 BTAH Au Explanation ji eS es Explanation Be cc Gevte Explanation Dee Explanation wo pwo o RWw1 wi 1 Rw lt RWr2 RWr3 Rwro 2 RWri RWwr2 RWr3 Remote input RX Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 402 Appendix 8 1 1 CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer m
30. 1 The same error code as that for Completion status of the control data is stored in the error code storage device 187 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RIRCV instruction Master station Target station CPU module HT Master station Intelligent device station G P RIRCV Buffer memory Device Receive buffer 5 Reading of data from the buffer memory specified by S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified by S1 1 is commanded The master station monitors the remote input RX specified by S2 1 When the remote input RX specified by S2 1 turns on the master station reads data from the buffer memory of the target station The read data is stored in the receive buffer of the master station The master station turns on the remote output RY specified by S2 0 When the remote input RX specified by S2 1 turns off the remote output RY specified by S2 0 is turned off The data read from the target station are stored in the device specified by D1 and subsequent devices and the device specified by D2 turns on b Simultaneous execution of the G P RIRCV instruction 188 The G P RIRCV instruction can be simultaneo
31. 2 Precautions a Sequence scan time when the synchronous mode is used Do not exceed the following time If the time exceeds the one listed below a timeout error occurs in each station Transmission speed Sequence scan time 10Mbps 50ms 5Mbps 50ms 2 5Mbps 100ms 625kbps 400ms 156kbps 800ms b When an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 is connected as a local station in the synchronous mode Pay attention to the following notes when an A 19 J61BT11 A 19 J61QBT 11 is connected as a local station in a system with a QJ61BT11N as a master station When an A 19 J61BT11 A 19 J61QBT 11 is connected as a local station adjust the sequence scan time of the local station side so that the sequence scan time of the CPU module in the local station becomes longer than ST For ST refer to Page 362 Appendix 4 1 When an A 1S J61BT11 is connected as a local station use XnC as an interlock of the FROM TO instructions on the local station side Point When an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 is connected as a local station in a system with a QJ61BT11N as a master station using the asynchronous mode is recommended To use the synchronous mode pay attention to the notes described above 162 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Setting method Select the asynchronous mode or synchronous mode in Scan Mode Setting of the network parameter 5 Page 97 Section 7 3 1 4 Data flows in the asynchronous mode and synchronous mode Data flows in the
32. O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Slave station The parameter setting status of the slave station refresh compulsory A SB007C clear setting status in refresh compulsory clear setting in case of programmable BE7 b12 case of controller CPU STOP is stored O O x OFF Refreshed programmable ON Forcibly cleared controller CPU STOP Whether communications are being normally performed with a remote station local station intelligent device station and standby master station is stored OFF Error in all stations SB0080 Other station data link ON A faulty station exists The faulty station number is 5E7 b11 status stored in SW0080 to SWO0083 O O i It takes maximum of six seconds for Other station data link status SB0080 to turn on after a slave station connected to the master station or local station becomes faulty Whether a watchdog timer error has occurred in other stations is stored OFF No error SB0081 Other station ON Error 5E8 b1 watchdog timer error l l u O O x status Depending on the link refresh timing SB0081 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Other station watchdog timer error occurrence status SW0084 to SW0087 Whether a fuse blown error has occurred in other stations is stored SW0088 to SW008B OFF No error SB0082 Other station fuse ON Eror 5E8 62 blown status ae 9 d Depending on the l
33. Remote station A generic term for a remote I O station and a remote device station Link scan link scan time Time required for all stations in a system to transmit data The link scan time depends on data volume and the number of transient transmission requests Local station A station that performs cyclic transmission and transient transmission with the master station and other local stations The station is controlled by programs in the CPU module or other equivalent modules on the station Disconnection Processing that stops data link if a data link error occurs Slave station A generic term for a remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Dedicated instruction An instruction that simplifies programming for using functions of intelligent function modules Standby master station A station that serves as a master station to continue communications if the master station fails Redundant CPU A generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU Return Processing that restarts data link when a station recovers from an error 14 PACKING LIST The following items are included in the package of this product Before use check that all the items are included QJ61BT11N D QJ61BT11N Before Using the Product Terminating resistor 110 1 2W
34. SUOHE S 1eujo uonejs JSOY OU BuuoyuoW Lg LL ZSM XO Bursp sonsouBeiq xurT29 v LL 310 Displays the explanation of icons on the diagnostics window Point Update of the number of errors warnings in Diagnostics Result Only the number of errors warnings that occur in the system of the module selected in the module list diagnostics target selection area is updated during monitoring To view the latest number of errors warnings of other modules click the button to update the module list CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 2 Executing the line test obtaining the transmission speed setting For how to execute the line test and obtain the transmission speed setting refer to the following e Line test gt Page 87 Section 6 5 1 e Obtaining the transmission speed setting gt Page 91 Section 6 5 2 ZSM XO Butsp sonsouBeiq xurT29 t LL Dunes peeds UOISSIUISUEJ y Buiure1q0 1s81 eui y Bunnoex3 CYLL 311 11 312 4 3 Status logging Data link status of all stations is logged If multiple stations repeatedly fail and recover or stations following a specific station do so the location of the error cause such as poor cable connection and noise can be easily identified With RAM Flash ROM selected the first 45 logs after logging start are stored on the flash ROM Logs stored on the flash ROM can be checked even after the system is powered off and on or the CPU module is reset
35. 3 Item Description Displays error logs of modules Sopo2 Joug ELL For an error dEx Station number setting error that has occurred during the initial process in the CPU module the date and time of the error will be displayed as 0000 00 00 00 00 00 therefore error logs are not displayed in reverse chronological order Error History List Error and Solution Displays the details and the corrective action of an error selected under Error History List Displays the status of a master local module when an error selected under Error History List Sepoo JOS YOSYO O MOH L LL Intelligent Module Information 4 has occurred Create CSV File button Outputs module error logs in a CSV file 1 If an error that occurs simultaneously with a CC Link system error is selected the status immediately before the error occurrence may be displayed under Intelligent Module Information For a master local module the following information is displayed Item Description Host station operation status Displays the operating status of the host station Host data link status Displays the data link status of the host station Displays data link status of each station Other station data link status SWO0080 to 0 Normal SERES 1 Data link error Line status SW0090 Displays line status Master station information SB0070 Displays data link status Standby master station informa
36. Ifthe Clear Log button is clicked with RAM Flash ROM selected the logs stored on the flash ROM will also be deleted While the logs on the flash ROM are being deleted do not power off the master local module 2 Precautions a Starting logging Logging will not start in the following cases Logs stored on the flash ROM have not yet been fully deleted error code B323 RAM Flash ROM has been selected and 45 logs have already been stored on the flash ROM error code B324 The cumulative number of times that logs are stored on the flash ROM has exceeded 100 000 times error code B325 b Log storage areas and the number of storable logs The following log storage areas are available RAM area equipped in the module Up to 95 logs Flash ROM area equipped in the module Up to 45 logs Hard disk on GX Works2 personal computer Up to 5000 logs To store 96 or more logs maximum 5000 logs keep GX Works2 connected even after logging is started If the number of logs stored in the RAM area has exceeded 95 with GX Works disconnected the stored log will be overwritten from the oldest one 314 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 4 Creating a check sheet A check sheet which is useful for performing troubleshooting is created through a wizard and with reference to the Open Field Network CC Link Troubleshooting Guide 1 Operating procedure 1 Open the CC Link Diagnostics window XW Diagnostics
37. Local Station e Standby Master Station Master Station Duplex Function Default Master Station Master Station Data Link Type The setting is not required when a master local module is used as a local station or standby master station 116 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Item Description Setting range Seh dai Neel edu P is Seci Remote Net Ver 1 Mode et the mode fora master ocal module 7 gt Page 43 Section Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Mode 3 0 2 l0 Page 50 Sonam 3 8 5 Remote Net Additional Mode Set the same mode as a master station to use a master local module Offline AS a Slane M MAStEr Stalon Default Remote Net Ver 1 Mode The setting is not required when a master local module is used as a Total Module i local station or standby master station Except when Master Connected Station Duplex Function is selected for Type Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Set the start device where RX RY RWr and RWw are transferred By setting these items RX RY RWr and RWw can be automatically transferred to a device in a CPU module without using a program 1 Number of refresh points All points for the station number 1 to last station number are automatically assigned 7 gt Page 45 Section 3 6 3 to Page 54 Section 3 6 6 To use a different refresh device for each station transfer the device individually using a
38. The equipped two piece terminal block is removable enabling module change during data link Note that if a cable is disconnected data link fails among all stations 1 Power off the module to be replaced before removal Check that settings of the module that replaces the currently mounted module are the same as those of the mounted module Master station 1 PA e Terminating Terminating resistor resistor 1 hod ATEM A E E en ee ee od E E ee ete E s Data link is continued Data link is continued b Automatic return when a disconnected station recovers When the station disconnected from a network due to a data link error recovers it automatically restarts data link The time between an error and a return can be shortened Master station Terminating O Terminating resistor resistor Recovering from the error Master station Terminating Terminating resistor resistor Point The master local module can prevent a system failure by using the following functions as well 7 5 Page 129 Section 8 2 to Page 153 Section 8 3 Even if a master station fails cyclic transmission can be continued by having the standby master station served as a master station When a module is replaced error detection can be temporarily disabled 20 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES This chapter describes the part names of the master local modules 1 3
39. 1 Operating procedure a Starting the status logging 1 Open the CC Link Diagnostics window Diagnostics 2 CC Link Diagnostics 2 Double click Status Logging on the bottom of the window If Status Logging is not displayed on the bottom of the window click the Related Functions button on the bottom left corner of the window pure rype DaS 2n rue DUS Link Scan Time Max Oms Min Oms Current Oms Related Functions Legend Close b k S p Loop Test Create Check Start Data Link Sheet Double click the icon 3 The Status Logging window appears Log display part Time of Logging Acquisition 1 to 65535 seconds 18 hours 12 minutes and 15 seconds or 0 seconds No specification 1 Hour 0 Minute Second Clear Log Log Storage Area in CC Link Module RAM RAM Flash ROM Logging Progress 0 The first 45 logged data after starting logging when checking RAM Flash ROM will be stored in RAM and flash ROM and will be stored only in RAM after it Please check logged data stored in the flash ROM after turning the power OFF gt ON or resetting programmable controller CPU When executing Clear Log selecting RAM Flash ROM in logged data stored area please execute Clear Log after stopping data link And please restart data link after completing clear log m e LogList The list will display up to 5 000 logs Selectin
40. 1 5 20 x 1 x 1 1 5 20 3x 1 1 5 20 x 1 x 1 1 5 24 5ms 21 5ms 24 5ms 21 5ms 20 x 1 3x2 1 5 20 x 1 x 2 1 5 20 3 x 2 1 5 20 x 1 x 2 1 5 Max value 27 5ms 41 5ms 27 5ms 41 5ms 369 ew Aejap uoissiuisueJ zp xipueddy aul Buisssoo g yur ejeq p xipueddy b Master station RY remote device station RY RWr This is the time between the device of a CPU module turning on off and the output of a remote device station turning on off or between data set in the device of a CPU module and the data in a remote device station Calculation value changed Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up Rd Remote device station processing time With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 1 Rd SM x n LS x 1 Rd SM LS x 1 Rd SM x n LS x 1 Rd Max value Calculation value Normal value SM x n LS x 2 Rd SM x n LS x 2 Rd SM LS x 2 Rd SM x n LS x 2 Rd Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and remote device station processing time is 1 5ms
41. 4 al sl ol s 812 aj S S a amp Ea a Y S se ols 3 a 2 aj o al gt wn Sie a D 3 a 6 Parameter 1Count None Stop Continue None Written in the system configuration GX WORKS2 Dedicated Instruction FROM TO Instruction Startup by Buffer Memory Y6 Startup by E2PROM Y8 Only QnA A FX Series Auto Refresh Dedicated Instruction FROM TO Instruction 10M 5M 2 5M 625k 156kbps 1Count 7 Parameter Setting 8 Link Start Method 9 Link Data Access Transmission Speed 2 Linked Station Connected Count The details have been described Station Type Remote I O Station 0Count Remote Device Station 0Count Intelligent Device Station 1Count rz m Number of Occupied S Number of occupied stations of each station Please check it when you confirm it CC Link Version Ver 1 Ver2 Expanded Cyclic Setting tTimes 2Times 4Times 8Times Transmission Speed 10M 5M 2 5M 625k 156kbps 3 Transmission Cable Cable Type ra i Qo tj 5 o lt o a o amp 3 o rz M Transmission Distance Total Extension Distance Inter Station Distance Distance between Shortest 4 Terminal Resistor Resistance Value 1100hm 130ohm Not Exist MEE Connected Terminal Connection between DA DB of terminal resistor Please check it when you confirm it 5 Grounding FG Terminal Grounding of FG terminal of
42. Delay Time Setting Lu Station Information Setting CC Link Configuration Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Interrupt Settinas Inter inas i i Module List Si Eee re Seb Cink Find Movie My Favorites Node ane 7 r ager Bu Veson ot sta oped SIR dr ien 00 Hos station aft QDMIETIIN Veri 1Station Occupied Snde S2Ponts No Setting E B lodule E CC Link Module Mitsubishi Electric Cr E Master Local Module 4 mm acercar Master Local Mode ME L2ECFU BT Naster Local Station Fu WI L2eCEU P Master Local Station Fur E LIG1BT11 Masier Local Modde E Input Module Screw Terminal Biod E Input Module Serew 2 piece Term Input Module Sorew 2 piece Term E Input Module Spring Clamp Termir 8 Input Module Sensor Connector T E Input Module One touch Connecti E Input Module 40 pin Connector Ty 8 Input Module Waterproof Connec 1B Input Module Embedded 1 0 Adap GJEIBTTIN F mtm Module Srrew Terminal Ale Host Staion STARO Master Vert All Connect Coun Total START amp 3 Click the End button to terminate the setting Write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the A system Data link is started D Online lt gt Write to PLC uu RESET D or power off gt on 258 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 10 3 3 Settings for a local station 1 Settings for a
43. Displays the status of the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of programmable controller CPU STOP configured by the parameter Dedicated instruction where an error has occurred Station number where an error has occurred Displays a dedicated instruction where an error has occurred Displays a station number where transient transmission is to be performed When the error is not a transient transmission error No Information is displayed Point Before opening the Error History window check the versions of the master local module and programming tool C3 Page 395 Appendix 6 2 If errors frequently occur in the master local module HST LOSS may be displayed instead of an error code under Error Code No Error Code HST LOSS 00102 oc21 Date and Time 2011 08 19 13 56 20 QJ61BT11N 0000 2011 08 19 11 23 35 Model Name Start I O Q20UDEHCPU In such case increase the number of collected module errors per scan in the PLC RAS tab of the PLC parameter window For the setting refer to the following User s manual for the CPU module used function explanation program fundamentals If errors with the same error code consecutively occur only the information on the first error is displayed in the Error History window 11 3 2 Error code list The following table lists error codes When a standby master station is used refer to the respecti
44. Setting of the data link status upon an error in the programmable controller CPU of the master station Whether to stop or continue data link when a stop error occurs in the CPU module of a master station can be selected Page 131 Section 8 2 2 Setting of the status of the input data from a data link faulty station Whether to clear or hold data input from a data link faulty station can be selected How data should be handled can be selected according to the system used Page 132 Section 8 2 3 Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of programmable controller CPU STOP Standby master function Whether to refresh or compulsorily clear remote output RY when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP can be selected How data should be handled can be selected according to the system used If the master station goes down due to an error in a CPU module power supply or others switching the control to the standby master station a backup station for the master station continues data link This function is used not to stop the entire system even if the master station goes down Page 134 Section 8 2 4 Page 136 Section 8 2 5 Master station duplication error canceling function 4 Diagnostics function Even if a master station duplication error has been detected the error can be cleared without resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system Page 171 Section 8 3 10 F
45. The standby master station in the normal state returns to the system operation The standby master station is on standby in case of the master station failure Standby master station Station number 1 The number of occupied stations 1 Standby status Cyclic traynission Cyclic transmission Intelligent device station Station number 4 The number of occupied stations 1 Master station Controlling Remote device station Station number 2 The number of occupied stations 2 o 8 0 589 lS panononoma i We ica um O o 3 e 0000 OO0000000 OOO 000000000 la Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission 12 When the master station returns as a standby master station the station number of the master station becomes the number set in Standby Master Station No of the network parameter 137 uonouny Jejseui qpueis G z 8 Ayqey ueisAs y Buoudui z g 3 Overview of data transmission of when the standby master function is used The following is an overview of data transmission of when the standby master function is used a When data link is controlled by the master station Output from the master station Standby master station standby status
46. With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode 20 x 1 3x 1 1 5 Synchronous mode 20 x 1 3x 1 1 5 Asynchronous mode 20 3x 1 1 5 Synchronous mode 20 x 1 3x 1 1 5 24 5ms 24 5ms 24 5ms 24 5ms 20 x 1 3x 2 1 5 20x 1 3x2 1 5 20 3x2 1 5 20x 1 3x2 1 5 Max value 27 5ms 27 5ms 27 5ms 27 5ms 370 APPENDICES 3 Master station lt gt remote device station Ver 2 compatible slave station a Master station RX remote device station RX RWr This is the time between a signal input to a remote device station and the device of a CPU module turning on off or the time until the data in the device of a CPU module is changed Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up t LS x m SM The decimal point is rounded up Rd Remote device station processing time m Constant according to the extended cyclic setting Expanded Cyclic Setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple m 1 3 7 15 Calculation value Normal value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode SM x n LS x 1 x m Rd Synchronous mode SM x t x 1 Rd Asynchronous mode
47. manuals ceo shows useful information 1 The mouse operation example is provided below Menu bar XZ Online 27 Write to PLC Select Online on the menu bar and then select Write to PLC Pee oe FS F6 sF6 F7 F6 F9 s A window selected in the view selection area is displayed W Project window 5 gt Parameter C PLC Parameter Select Project from the view selection area to open the Project window In the Project window expand Parameter and select PLC Parameter Parameter Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment Program Setting 8 POU D Proeram ai MAIN E53 Local Device Comment Device Memory Device Initial Value View selection area Unlabeled TERM Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term Description ACPU A generic term for the following CPU modules AOJ2HCPU A1SCPU A1SHCPU A1SJCPU S3 ATSJHCPU A2SCPU A2SHCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1NCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A3NCPU A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 A3ACPU A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU and A4UCPU AJ65BT R2 N A generic term for the CC Link system RS 232 interface modules AJ65BT R2 and AJ65BT R2N AnUCPU A generic term for the A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 ASUCPU and A4UCPU CC Link dedicated cable A generic term for a Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link
48. 01 02 Applicable device Link direct i Setting Internal device intelligent File device function module Index Constant data System user 3 Others register JOO device register ZO Bit Word Bit Word UO GO K H S S O D1 O CELINE D2 O M G 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written LIRE Un D 0 to FE 16 bit binary with three digits M Within the range of the S Start number of the device in which control data is stored ue specified device Device name Within the range of the D1 Start number of the device to which read data is stored 2 specified device D2 Device that turns on for one scan upon completion of reading Within the range of the Bit i D2 1 also turns on at an abnormal end specified device 1 The local device and the file register of each program cannot be used as a device for setting data 174 a Control data CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS i Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range Stores the status when the instruction is complete S 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Value other than 0 Error code Specify the station numbers of the master station local station S 1 Station number j 0 to 64 User and intelligent device station Specify the type of the dev
49. 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps SM Master station sequence scan time Apply 0 when buffer memory data in CC Link is read WT Monitoring time set in SW0009 7 Page 348 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SWOOOB gt Page 348 Appendix 3 2 x When the CPU module is a QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of read points is 20 words buffer memory in CC Link monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of read points 16 72 x 1 13 SM WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 72 x 1 13 0 10 x O x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 1 x 1 13 0 66 15 66 2ms 24 The decimal point is rounded up 2 Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried awl Buisssoo g yur ejeq p xipueddy SUOIONISU pejeoipep jo ow BursseooJg y xipueddy 379 380 Transmission G P RIWT instruction OT LS x BC number of write points 16 16 x 1 067 SM WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU Q02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and Q02CPUJ 0 5ms LS Link scan time 5 Page 362 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 1 2 SM Master station sequence scan time Apply 0 when data is written to buffer memory in CC Link WT Monitoring time set in
50. 183 182 181 180 19F 19E 19D 19C 19B 19A 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 1AF 1AE 1AD 1AC 1AB 1AA 1A9 1A8 1A7 1A6 1A5 1A4 1A3 1A2 1A1 1A0 1BF 1BE 1BD 1BC 1BB 1BA 1B9 1B8 1B7 1B6 1B5 1B4 1B3 1B2 1B1 1BO 1CF 1CE 1CD 1CC 1CB 1CA 1C9 1C8 1C7 1C6 1C5 1C4 1C3 1C2 1C1 1CO 1DF 1DE 1DD 1DC 1DB 1DA 1D9 1D8 1D7 1D6 1D5 1D4 1D3 1D2 1D1 1DO 1EF 1EE 1ED 1EC 1EB 1EA 1E9 1E8 1E7 166 1E5 164 163 1bE2 1E1 1EO 1FF 1FE 1FD 1FC 1FB 1FA 1F9 1F8 1F7 1F6 1F5 1F4 1F3 1F2 1F1 1FO 335 seeJy Aioway Jeyng z xipueddy 6 Link special register SW This area stores word data indicating the data link status Buffer memory addresses 6004 to 7FF correspond to link special registers SW0000 to SWO1FF s Page 348 Appendix 3 2 7 Random access buffer This area stores data to be sent to other stations The data are read and written by transient transmission 8 Communication buffer This area stores sending receiving data when transient transmission communications using a communication buffer is performed with a local station standby master station and intelligent device station The communication buffer sizes of these stations are set using the network parameter 7 5 Page 103 S
51. 352 and 353 378 and 379 404 and 405 430 and 431 456 and 457 1624 and 1634 17Cy and 17D 1964 and 1974 1B0 and 1B1 1CAy and 1CB 2 15 H H 28 41 54 n H 354 and 355 380 and 381 406 and 407 432 and 433 458 and 459 1644 and 1654 17E and 17F 1984 and 1994 1B2 and 1B3 1CCy and 1CD 3 16 29 42 n 55 a i 356 and 357 382 and 383 408 and 409 434 and 435 460 and 461 1664 and 1674 180 and 1814 19A and 19B 1B4 and 1B5 1CEy and 1CFy 4 17 30 43 56 358 and 359 384 and 385 410 and 411 436 and 437 462 and 463 1684 and 169 182 and 183 19C and 19D 1B6 and 1B7 1D0 and 1D1 5 18 H 31 44 H 57 H H 360 and 361 386 and 387 412 and 413 438 and 439 464 and 465 16A and 16B 1844 and 185 19E and 19F 1B8 and 1B9 1D2 and 1D3 6 H 19 H H 32 H H 45 H 58 d H 362 and 363 388 and 389 414 and 415 440 and 441 466 and 467 16C and 16D 1864 and 187 1A04 and 1A1 1BA and 1BBy 1D4 and 1D5 7 20 1 33 46 59 d h 364 and 365 390 and 391 416 and 417 442 and 443 468 and 469 16E and 16Fy 188 and 189 1A2 and 143 1BCy and 1BDy 1D6 and 1D7 8 21 34 47 60 366 and 367 392 and 393 418 and 419 444 and 445 470 and 471 170 and 1714 18A and 18B 1A4 and 1A5 1BE and 1BF 1D8 and 1D9 9 22 H H 35 48 H 61 3 H 368 and 369 394 and 395 420 and 421 446 and 447 472 and 473 18 172 and 1734 18Cy and 18D a 1A6 and 1A7 m 1COj and 1C1 E 1DAy and 1DBy 370 and 371 396
52. A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 with a QJ61BT11N 1 Functions The following table lists the differences between an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 and QJ61BT11N Item A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 QJ61BT11N Starting up method Yn6 Yn8 anda dedicated instruction are Yn6 Yn8 and the parameters of the CPU module of a master The parameters of the CPU module of a master station Yn6 and Yn8 cannot be used and a used station are used dedicated instruction are used Module reset function using a program Yes Yes No Parameter settings using the FROM TO instructions Yes Yes No Parameter settings using dedicated instructions Yes No Yes Parameter settings using a programming tool No Yes Yes Standby master function A failed master station A failed master station A failed master station cannot return cannot return can return Parameter checking test Yes Yes No No E2PROM Yes Yes Parameters of a CPU module 391 NLLLELOPO uim LLLEOLOP SL W LLLELor SL v ue Burejdei usym suonneoejg s xipueddy Se npouu EUuonipeJ wo eoueJejllq G xipueddy 2 Dedicated instructions a A 1S J61BT11 The following dedicated instructions of an A 1S J61BT11 cannot be used in a master local module Instruction Description RLPA Set the network parameter RRPA Set the auto refresh parameter b A 1S J61QBT11 The following dedicated instructions of an
53. Link system is decreased because one module occupies the station numbers for multiple modules The station numbers occupied by one module are not changed and only the number of points is increased Unlike Number of Occupied Stations the number of slave stations connected to a CC Link system is not decreased Note however that the transmission delay time is extended compared to that of when the number of points is increased in Number of Occupied Stations s poy pue 1ueuiuDBissy 9 Expanded Cyclic Setting CC Link Ver 2 only epouj jeuonppe jeu ejoules FIE 51 2 Data transfer between RX RY RWr and RWw and a device in a CPU module In the remote net additional mode data of a Ver 1 compatible slave station are stored into a Ver 1 compatible area and data of a Ver 2 compatible slave station are stored into a Ver 2 compatible area a Automatic transfer by parameter settings using a programming tool Setting a refresh device using the network parameter can automatically transfer data between RX RY RWr and RWw in a master local module and a device in a CPU module lt gt Page 98 Section 7 3 2 Page 116 Section 7 4 2 u Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules h Boards Blank No Setting IV Set 1 2 Start I O No oo00 Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter
54. Q00JCPU 0 91 QOOCPU 0 83 Q01CPU 0 79 QO02CPU 0 48 0 32 0 5 QO2HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 9 43 Ms n xs Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 43 0 14 0 2 QOOUJCPU QOO0UCPU Q01UCPU 0 39 0 2 QO02UCPU 0 39 0 05 0 2 QO3UDCPU Q04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QOSUDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU 0 23 0 03 0 2 Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU QS50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU 386 APPENDICES When a master local module is mounted on an extension base unit Constant KM3 x 10 File registers File registers KM2 x 10 R ZR on a R ZR on a KM4 CPU type memory card memory card are used are not used Q00JCPU 1 62 QOOCPU 1 57 Q01CPU 1 55 Q02CPU 1 02 0 08 0 5 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU 0 98 0 06 E 02 QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 98 0 06 0 2 QOOUJCPU QO00UCPU Q01UCPU 1 02 0 2 QO02UCPU 1 02 0 05 0 2 QO3UDCPU Q04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO03UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU 0 90 0 03 0 2 Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Ex A calculation example under the following conditions is described Item Condition CPU module QO6HCPU Master local module The module is mounted on
55. RT Number of retries set in SWOOOB 7 Page 348 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of read points is 20 words buffer memory in CC Link monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of read points 16 16 x 1 067 SL WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 16Y x 1 067 O 10 x 0 x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 3 x 1 067 0 76 505 76 5ms The decimal point is rounded up Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried 381 SUOIONISU pejeoipep Jo ow BursseooJg y xipueddy aul BuisseooJg yur ejeq p xipueddy 382 Transmission G P RIWT instruction OT LS x BC number of write points 16 16 x 1 067 SL WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU Q02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and Q02CPUJ 0 5ms LS Link scan time 5 Page 362 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 1 2 SL Target station sequence scan time Apply 0 when data is written to buffer memory in CC Link WT Monitoring time set in SWO0009 gt Page 348 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SWOOO0B 7 5 Page 348 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is the QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of
56. SM LS x 1 x m Rd Synchronous mode SM x t x 1 Rd SM x n LS x 2 x m Max value j SM x t x 2 Rd SM LS x 2 x m Rd SM x t x 2 Rd Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and the expanded cyclic setting is Double Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20x 1 3 x 1x3 1 5 20 x 1 x 1 1 5 20 38x1x3 41 5 20 x 1 x 1 1 5 30 5ms 21 5ms 30 5ms 21 5ms 20x1 3x2x3 1 5 20x1 x2 1 5 20 3 x 2 x 3 1 5 20 x 1 x 2 1 5 Max value 39 5ms 41 5ms 39 5ms 41 5ms 371 ew Aejap uolssiwsues zp xipueddy aul Buissso0 g yur ejeq p xipueddy b Master station RY remote device station RY RWr This is the time between the device of a CPU module turning on off and the output of a remote device station turning on off or between data set in the device of a CPU module and the data in a remote device station changed Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up t LS x m SM The decimal point is rounded up Rd Remote device station processing time m Constant according to the exten
57. This is the time between the device of the CPU module in a local station turning on off and the device of the CPU module in a master station turning on off This is also the time between data set in the device of the CPU module in a local station and the data stored into the device of the CPU module in a master station Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM LS Link scan time SL Master station sequence scan time Local station sequence scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up k LS SL The decimal point is rounded up Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 2 SL x k 1 SM x n x 2 LS SL x k 1 SM LS x 2 SL SM xn x2 LS SL SM x n LS x 3 SM x n x 3 LS Max value SM LS x 3 SL SM xn x3 LS SL SL x k 1 SL x k 1 Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and local station sequence scan time is 10ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20 x 1 3 x 2 20 x 1 x 2 3 20 3 x
58. a8 b8 c8 d8 Total number of Ver 1 compati ble slave stations occupying one station and Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying one station with the expanded cyclic setting of Single Total number of Ver 1 compati ble slave stations occupying two stations and Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying two stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Single Total number of Ver 1 compati stations and Ver 2 compatible ble slave stations occupying three slave stations occupying three stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Single Total number of Ver 1 compatible slave stations occupying four stations and Ver 2 compatible slave stations occupying four stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Single Number of Ver 2 compatible s the expanded cyclic setting of Number of Ver 2 compatible s the expanded cyclic setting of Number of Ver 2 compatible s ave stations occupying one station with Double ave stations occupying two stations with Double ave stations occupying three stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Double Number of Ver 2 compatible s the expanded cyclic setting of Number of Ver 2 compatible s the expanded cyclic setting of Number of Ver 2 compatible s the expanded cyclic setting of Number of Ver 2 compatible s ave stations occupying four stations with Double ave stations occupying one station with Quadruple ave stations occupying two s
59. including a reserved station If Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window is checked the setting is automatically input by configuring Station Information Setting Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Remote Net Additional Mode Remote I O Net Mode Offline Default Remote Net Ver 1 Mode 1 to 64 Default 64 99 sjieyep Dunes Z 7 uonejs 19 SE e 10 sBumes JejeureJegd EZ Item Description Setting range Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Set the start device where RX RY RWr and RWw are transferred By setting these items RX RY RWr and RWw can be automatically transferred to a device in a CPU module without using a program 1 Number of refresh points All points for the station number 1 to last station number are automatically assigned 7 gt Page 45 Section 3 6 3 to Page 54 Section 3 6 6 To use a different refresh device for each station transfer the device individually using a program Un GO or FROM TO instructions The points for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 3 Page 332 Appendix 2 4 2 Buffer memory areas of the refresh sources 3 Page 46 Section 3 6 3 2 Page 49 Section 3 6 4 3 Page 55 Section 3 6 6 3 When Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Remote Net Additional Mode or Remote
60. specification 0 Normal completion O x x cancel result Values other than 0 Error code _ Page 291 Section 11 3 2 The result of a line test is stored Swo04D 64D Line test result 0 Normal Oo x x Values other than 0 Error code 5 Page 291 Section 11 3 2 349 SMS suajsibeu jeroeds yur ze xipueddy SMS susjsiBey jeroeds Ju pue sgs s ejew jeroeds yu e xipueddy Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station The result of a parameter setting test is stored SWOO4F Parameter p g 64Fy setting test 0 Normal O x x H result Values other than 0 Error code 5 Page 291 Section 11 3 2 The result of system configuration check when a station has been added SWODSS Automatic CC to a system and the system has started using the automatic CC Link 652 Link startup startup is stored o x execution result 0 Normal Values other than 0 Error code 5 Page 291 Section 11 3 2 Whether a master station duplication error canceling request has been SW0057 Master Sranan normally completed is stored 6574 duplication error 9 Normal completion O x canceling result Values other than 0 Error code _ gt Page 291 Section 11 3 2 The details of the LED display status are stored 0 OFF 1 ON b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO o ojo o Ly LINE ERROR A cable is disconnec
61. 1S MST E ON SD RD D Flashing ERR L ERR OFF 6 After the line test 2 is completed the L RUN LED or When the test is completed MST LED on the master station turns on When the test is completed E 7 L RUN LED ON RUN LRUN MST E SMST E oN MST LED Flashing SDE NRD D Flashing When the test is not completed ERR LILERR OFF MST LED ON ERR LED Flashing The error code is stored into Line test result SWOOBS When the test is not completed error on all the stations 2 L gt Page 291 Section 11 3 2 QJ61BT11N RUN B MST E E ON SD Il Flashing ERR O OFF 90 6 5 2 Transmission speed test CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Whether the transmission speed setting of a slave station is the same as that of the master station can be checked The station number of the slave station having a different transmission speed setting can be also checked therefore corrective action upon a transmission error can be easily taken Point Before using this function check the versions of the master local module and programming tool 5 Page 395 Appendix 6 2 1 Using a programming tool GX Works2 only CC Link Diagnostics CCiink Wi PE Master ST Intell ST Return to the original 1 amp Display all Connecting Station Information Sele
62. 4 Master station Station number 1 0 Remote Remote input RX output RY Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 3 eee tT gL 4 L Occupies 1 station Kons ata aebe noes eek ee ose Inputs RX RWr of the master station are stored in outputs RY RWw of the standby master station By transferring the outputs RY RWw of the standby master station to the inputs RX RWr inputs from the slave stations are continued shaded areas in the figure above lt _ Page 147 Section 8 2 5 7 139 uonounij Jejseui qpueis G z 8g Ayqey ueisAs eu Bulroidu z g c Operation between the master station returning and the standby master station controlling data link Output from the standby master station Master station standby status Standby master station Station number 0 gt 1 controlling Occupies 1 station Station number 0 Remote Remote Remote Remote input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote I O station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station RX00 to RXOF RY00 to RYOF Remote I O station Station number 3 ese M Pis magia ee Occupies 1 station RX10 to RX1F RX20 to RX2F RX30 to RX3E RYSOteRY2E penespeune Soe PONE css RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F JIRY40toRY4FI 70 Y00 to YOF E Leto YA gt Eee tors P to rdi Sue Md BEL Bua PNE RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F Y10 to Y1F i ii
63. 4100 When the data that cannot be used for the instruction is contained When the number of data used for the instruction is set beyond the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range 225 9 9 1 Program example For program examples refer to the manual for the remote device station that supports the message transmission function 226 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING This chapter describes precautions for programming communication examples and sample programs when data are communicated at master local modules The examples of communications shown in this chapter are the one between a master station and a remote device station or the one between a master station and a local station For the other communication examples refer to the following Communications between a master station and a remote O station lt gt Page 58 Section 4 1 Communications between a master station and an intelligent device station Manual for the intelligent device station used Transient transmission example s Page 179 Section 9 2 1 to Page 212 Section 9 8 1 10 1 Precautions for Programming This section describes precautions when creating a program for a master local module 1 Interlock program When creating a program to perform cyclic transmission create the program that can detect data link status in a slave
64. B905 length was greater than the O O error e greater than the transient data communication buffer size of the length corresponding station B981 and B982 x B983 O T Sae eror Please consult your local o 5 Mitsubishi representative x B985 to B987 O B9FF A hardware error has been Please consult your local BA01 Error hardware test HAN O O detected Mitsubishi representative BA02 Please consult your local System error 2 O O BA05 Mitsubishi representative A hardware error has been Please consult your local BAO6 to BA13 Error hardware test e O O detected Mitsubishi representative Check if the terminating resistor provided with the master local module is connected between the DA and DB terminals and A hardware communication execute the hardware test BA14 Error hardware test i O O circuit error has been detected again f the same error persists after taking the above action please consult your local Mitsubishi representative A hardware error has been Please consult your local BA15 Error hardware test S O O detected Mitsubishi representative Check if the terminating resistor provided with the master local module is connected between the DA and DB terminals and A hardware communication execute the hardware test BA16 and BA17 Error hardware test aa O O circuit error has been detected again If the same error persists after taking the above action please consult your local M
65. CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Write the PLC parameters and program to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system uiu RESET p or power off on Set the switch on the CPU module in the master station to RUN to execute the program The G P RLPASET instruction is executed by executing the program and the network parameters are reflected to the master local module The network parameters are changed by turning on M500 The error invalid station with station number 2 and the reserved station with station number 3 are canceled mui 217 lasvdTM d O 8 6 ejduiexe Bunjes 1ejeuuejed ajdwexe wes6olq 96 1 Precautions when setting parameters using the G P RLPASET instruction a The differences from the parameter settings using a programming tool The items that can be set are different between the parameter settings using the dedicated instruction and the ones using a programming tool Item Parameter settings using a programming tool Parameter settings using the dedicated instruction G P RLPASET instruction Program for parameter settings Not necessary Necessary Data Link Faulty Station Setting Can be set Cannot be set Operation Setting Case of CPU STOP Setting Can be set Can be set Block Data Assurance per Station Can be set Cannot be set Master Station Can be set Can be set
66. Doing so may cause a failure in the module Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Solderless terminals with insulation sleeves cannot be used for the terminal block It is recommended to cover the connecting sections of the solderless terminals with a marking tube or insulation tube Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction To mount the module on the base unit fully insert the module fixing latch into the fixing hole in the base unit and press the module using the hole as a fulcrum Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module Tighten screws such as module fixing screws and terminal screws within the torque ranges listed below Screw type Tightening torque range Module fixing screw M3 screw 0 36 to 0 48 N m Terminal block screw M3 screw 0 42 to 0 58 Nem Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 screw 0 66 to 0 89 Nem 1 The module can be easily fixed on the base unit using the hook at the top of the module Note however that
67. M200 SB46 SET SBOC Forced Forced Forced master master master switching switching switching request executable status MCR NO Program i Control program when the standby master station is operating as a local station Control start relay when the standby master station is operating SB5D J soc Forced Forced master master switching switching request complete uonounij Jejseui Aqpuels Z8 Ayqey ueisAs y Bulrcidu z g 149 8 2 6 Cyclic data assurance This function prevents read write data from being separated between new and old data Point Before using this function check the versions of the master local module and programming tool 5 Page 395 Appendix 6 2 1 Block data assurance per station Cyclic data may be separated between new and old data depending on the timing of the automatic refresh This function prevents read write data per slave station from being separated between new and old data Because the setting is configured only on a programming tool a program to prevent data separation is not required a Data to be assured This function is applicable to data automatically transferred to a CPU module automatic refresh by setting the refresh device of the network parameter Data in RX RY RWr and RWw are assured per slave station b Operation of a data assurance Identity of data per slave station is assured as follows Ex To assure da
68. QJ61BT11N master station WO to W3 Remote register RWrO to RWr3 L gt Page 255 Section 10 3 1 2 W100 to W103 Remote register RWw0 to RWw3 262 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 2 Program example 1 Create the following program on a programming tool Program for the master station Confirmation of the data link status xo XOF Xi SW80 0 ee A 1 H 1 H WF MC NO Mio0 Data link is normal SW80 0 Y3F Data link error NO M100 Control program X1001 Control program using data 8 received from a local station ve Y1000 Program of creating data sent to a local station LMCR NO END Program for the local station Confirmation of the data link status XQ XOF xi Jj m 0 fF E MC NO M100 The host station is performing data link NO M100 Control program A X1000 Control program using data EN 5 Y30 received from the master o station wo 7 a Y1001 Program of creating data sent e to the master station 3 M Ka 9 MCR NO D 3 19 END x amp 3 o 2 Write the program to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Write the program created for the master station to the CPU module in the master station Write the program created for the local station to the CPU module in the local station XO Online gt Write to PLC uu D or power off on 3 Setthe switches on the CP
69. Stop When an error occurs in the CPU module of a master station data link stops Scan Mode Setting Asynchronous Delay Time Setting 0 Station Information Setting a Operation Setting 158 Refer to Page 159 Section 8 3 3 1 c Item Setting details Data Link Faulty Station Setting Clear the input data Case of CPU STOP Setting Refresh Block Data Assurance per Station Disable the setting CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b Refresh device setting QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU CPU module side Direction Master station local station side X1000 to X17FF c RXO to RX7FF Y1000 to Y17FF gt RYO to RY7FF W1E00 to W1EFF c RWr0 to RWrFF W1F00 to W1FFF gt RWw0 to RWwFF SB0600 to SBO7FF e SB0000 to SBO1FF SW0600 to SWO7FF e SW0000 to SWO1FF Basic model QCPU Basic model QCPU side Direction Master station local station side X400 to X7FF c RXO to RX3FF Y400 to Y7FF gt RYO to RY3FF W600 to W67F c RWr0 to RWr7F W70 to W77F gt RWw0 to RWw7F SB0200 to SBO3FF o SB0000 to SBO1FF SW0200 to SWO3FF o SW0000 to SWO1FF c Specification of a buffer memory size for an intelligent device station in the station information setting Item Setting details Send buffer 64 words Receive buffer 64 words Automatic update buffer 128 words 2 Default parameter settings when CC Link is automatically started up with a mas
70. Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB SBO Special Register SW wo Retry Count 3 Automatic Reconnection Station Count 1 Standby Master Station No 1 PLC Down Select Stop m Scan Mode Setting Asynchronous Delay Time Setting T Station Information Setting s onfiguration Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Interrupt Settinas Mode Setting ver 1 Mode v T Speed 156kbps Link Scan Time Approx 7 74 ms 7 aS iF expanded Remote Reserved Err Intelligent Buffer Size word station specific Select CCLink Find Module My Favorites Cyclic Setting Station Points Invalid STA Send Receive Auto mode setting TEE EE E AJ SSBTB2N 8S 8 points Tr Ex AJOSSBTB1 16T 16 points 1 Ex AJ SSBTBi 16T1 16 points 1 Ex AJ6SSBTB1 16TE i6 points Ez AJ6SSBTB1B 16TE 16 points 1 ES 38 16 points 1 Ex AJOSSBTB2 16T1 16 points 1 Ex AJOSSBTB2N 16R 16 points F Station Type Version of STA Occupied Host Station Master Station AJ65BTB2 16T Remote I O Station Yer 1 1 Station Occupied Single 32 Points No Setting AJ65BTB1 16DT Remote 1 0 Station Ver 1 _ 1 Station Occupied Single STAT STAH2 Host Station Transistor output 16 points sink 0 5A 2 wire STAHO Master otection function Overload Vert otection overheat All Connect Count otection overvoltage protection 2 Manufacturer Name Total STAH 2 itsubishi Electric AJ65BTB2 AJESBTBI 1 Station Type
71. When a master local module is in test mode or offline mode The interrupt to the CPU module can be performed when a master local module is in online mode The interrupt cannot be performed when a master local module is in test mode or offline mode Executing an interrupt program at rise or fall of the specified device Do not execute an interrupt program by using the rise using the PLS instruction or fall using the PLF instruction of the specified device because the device change may not be recognized Ex A request for the interrupt is issued by turning on RX10 UOY Since change of RX10 may not be read H PLS G225 0 this cannot be specified as interrupt condition When the interrupt cannot be performed If the changing time of the device used for the interrupt condition is shorter than the transmission delay time the device change cannot be detected When using data for an interrupt program When an interrupt program is being executed RX RY RWr RWw are not auto refreshed to the device of a CPU module Therefore directly access to the buffer memory of a master local module by using Intelligent function module device Un GD When data link is faulty a request for the interrupt to a CPU module is not issued CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS 7 4 Parameter Settings for a Local Station and Standby Master Station This section describes the parameter settings when a master local module is used as a local station or standby mas
72. When accessing the remote register RWr RWw using a program access them with an even number of Lwos wow shee Roe woes l wo devices CPU modue DOT Masterstetion CPU module ay ation Device P ERO Remote register n ww Remote register instruction W000 _ instruction RWr00 i WOO00 DFRO woot f I RWOT W001 instruction W002 RWr02 W002 1 x i I CPU module Master station Device 1 FROM Remote register 1 instruction k mm 152 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 Useful Applications of the Functions This section describes the useful functions of a master local module 8 3 1 Remote device station initialization procedure registration function The initial setting of a remote device station which is performed on a program can be registered in advance using a programmable tool and can be saved by turning on the link special relay SB A program for the initial setting is not required For example in an AJ65BT 64AD settings such as A D conversion enable prohibit specification and Averaging process specification can be easily configured For a setting example using a programming tool refer to Page 231 Section 10 2 1 Number of initial settings registered a Number of remote device stations The initial settings of up to 16 remote device stations can be registered in one master local module Use a program to register the initial settings of s
73. b Master station RY local station RX master station RWw local station RWr This is the time between the device of the CPU module in a master station turning on off and the device of the CPU module in a local station turning on off This is also the time between data set in the device of the CPU module in a master station and the data stored into the device of the CPU module in a local station Formula The letters in the table mean as follows Link scan time Master station sequence scan time Local station sequence scan time LS SM The decimal point is rounded up LS x m SM The decimal point is rounded up LS SL The decimal point is rounded up Constant according to the extended cyclic setting Expanded Cyclic Setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple m 1 3 7 15 Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 1 x m 15 SL x k 1 SM x t x 1 SL x k 1 SM LS x 1 x m 1 SL SM x t x 1 SL SM x n LS x 2 x m 1 SM x t x 2 SLx SM LS x 2 x m 1 Max value SM x t x 2 SL SL x k 1 k 1 SL When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms
74. cables Check cables connected to the faulty station When faulty stations occur sequentially to one end on A4 1 rs Correct the wiring parts Do a transmission distance the transmission path check station to station distance cables connected to faulty transmission cable and FG stations close to the master terminal grounding meet the station specifications Is the power on and is the y mH Power supply for oes Check power supplied to the Apply the voltage within the A4 2 UM applied voltage within the 7 E communications uz faulty station specified range specified range Check if the transmission UE f Keep the transmission cable cable is away from the away from the power cable power cable Check if the FG terminal is zu grounded separately from Ground the terminals Is the transmission cable A4 3 Noise the GND terminal of the separately free from noise power system Reduce the transmission Take noise reduction speed and check if the measures frequency of occurrence of Reduce the transmission noise is reduced speed Check if the faulty station Start the faulty station in the Has the faulty station started f A4 4 Startup normally starts in a different procedure described in the in the correct procedure f procedure manual for the station Replace modules on the Failure of a slave Do slave stations normally Repair or replace the A4 5 faulty station and check for
75. receiving disabled Transient data B111 un A line error has occurred Modify the line Oo Oo receiving order error Transient data length i B112 enam A line error has occurred Modify the line O O A line error has occurred or a Modify the line or check the B113 Lich momentary power failure has ower supply module and powe O O w ilu wer su u wer identification error y P i P Ppy P occurred in the sending station supplied to the sending station B115 Link error A line error has occurred Modify the line O O B116 Packet error A line error has occurred Modify the line O O With the remote device station Forced termination of initialization procedure p Complete all the procedures then the remote device registration function the remote MC Wr turn off the remote device station B120 station initialization device station initialization IN ADR O x f HP initialization procedure procedure registration procedure registration instruction j Js i registration instruction function was turned off before all procedures are completed B122 Please consult your local O System error MERE O B123 Mitsubishi representative x 291 ISl 9poo JOU Z LL S9po2 JOU Error code Delectability i Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station Setting error of the f The remote device station station whe
76. the expanded cyclic setting is Double and local station sequence scan time is 10ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value Max value 20x 1 3 x 1 x 3 1j 10 x 1 1 52ms 20 x 1 3 x 2 x 3 1 10 x 1 1 61ms 20 x 1 x 1 10 x 1 1 40ms 20 x 1 x 2 10 x 1 1 60ms 20 3 x 1 x 3 1 10 42ms 20 3 x 2 x 3 1 10 51ms 20 x 1 x 1 10 30ms 20 x 1 x 2 10 50ms 6 Master station lt gt intelligent device station Transmission delay time between a master station and an intelligent device station varies depending on the intelligent device station Refer to the user s manual for the intelligent device module used 376 APPENDICES Appendix 4 3 Processing time of dedicated instructions This section describes the processing time of dedicated instructions time between an instruction issued and a response received 1 Master station lt local station a Master station local station The time between the master station issuing an instruction and it receiving a response from a local station is calculated as follows Formula lt Maximum value gt G P RIRD instruction OT LS x BC number of read points 16 16 x 1
77. to 4 3 2 1 SW0085 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 SW0085 Other station 6854 watchdog timer error O O x SWO0086 occurrence Swo0086 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 6864 status SWO0087 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Sw0087 Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on 6874 Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Whether a fuse blown error has occurred is stored SW0088 0 Normal 6884 1 Error SWO089 b15 b14 b13 b12 to o n eps u e ea e T 209 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SWOOBB The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations 68By Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Whether the setting of switches of other stations during data link has been changed is stored SWO008C 0 No change 68Cy 1 Changed SW008D b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0 68Du Other station SWO008C 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 switch change SWO008D 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 O O 7 SWOOSE status SWOOSE 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 68Ex SWO008F 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SWO008F 68F Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on R
78. 067 SL WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU Q02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and Q02CPUJ 0 5ms LS Link scan time s Page 362 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 SL Local station sequence scan time Apply 0 when buffer memory data in CC Link is read WT Monitoring time set in SW0009 Page 348 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SWOOOB 7 Page 348 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of read points is 20 words buffer memory in CC Link monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of read points 16 16 x 1 067 SL WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 16 x 1 067 O 10 x 0 x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 3 x 1 067 0 76 505 76 5ms awl Buisssoo g yur ejeq p xipueddy suononyisur pejeoipep Jo aul BursseooJg y xipueddy 1 The decimal point is rounded up 32 Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried 377 378 Transmission G P RIWT instruction OT LS x BC number of write points 16 72 x 1 13 SL WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU Q02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and Q02CPUJ 0 5ms LS Link
79. 136 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Continued from the previous page The master station in the normal state returns to the system operation The master station is on standby in case of the standby master station failure Master station 2 Station number 0 1 The number of occupied stations 1 Standby status Standby master station Station number 0 Controlling Intelligent device station Remote device station Station number 4 Station number 2 The number of occupied stations 1 The number of occupied stations 2 T OOOO OO0000000 OOO O00000000 o oons0g000 i 3 i ooo O o Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission An error has occurred in the standby master station Data link is controlled by the master station Master station Station number 1 0 Controlling Intelligent device station Remote device station Station number 4 Station number2 _ The number of occupied stations 1 The number of occupied stations 2 T steers oo g 2 000 ID 0000000000 f i i x goo O OOOO ES OOO OOOCOOOOO lol Cyclic transmission
80. 1EEy 494 RWw2 W10F 1EF 495 RWw3 W110 1FO 496 RWw4 W111 1F1y 497 RWw5 5 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W112 1F2 498 RWw6 W113 1F3y 499 RWw7 W114 1F4 500 RWw8 W115 1F5y 501 RWw9 6 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W116 1F6j 502 RWwA W117 1F7y 503 RWwB 239 uoneunByuoo wayskS L Z OL uOoHelS eol e 9jouie e pue uonels Jejse y e ueeweg suorjeorunuiuo Jo ejdurex3 z OL The assignment by each data of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN are shown below AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Station No 1 Station No 4 No of occupied No of occupied CPU module Master station stations 3 stations 3 Buffer memory 1 i Device Remote register RWw Remote register RWW w00 1EOH 480 i w103 VLA n MI 1E34 483 I iiu Station Station es Station wi RR No 1 IR NE pe w108 1E8H 488 F E i W10B 1EBH 491 RWWwB Remote register RW Woe 1ECh 492 ERAN t wor tEFH 495 o E Rw Wao Station Station oos 95 Station Rwa W113 No 4 4 No 1F3H 499 New E RWWT W14 144 500 RW w117 1F74 503 RWWB CPU module Remote station Device Module name Romo CUL Data name RWw W100 RWwO A D conversion enable prohibit specification W101 RWw1 CH 1 to 4 input range setting W102 RWw2 CH 5 to 8 input
81. 2 input from slave stations Page 338 4000y to 41FF 10384 t0 compatible Read onl Appendix 2 o H H 46895 remote input Local station ead only ppendix 9 Stores the status of the data 10 RX O input from the master station 39 seaiy Aioweyy yng Jo 1S S E Address Availability Name Description Read write Master Local Reference Hexadecimal Decimal station station Master station Stores the status of the data Write only O output to slave stations Ver 2 4200 to 43rr 10896 to compatible Local station jas s o H H 47407 remote output Stores the status of the data ppendix RYy output to the master station Read 10 Data received from other write slave stations are also stored Ver 2 Master station compatible Stores the send data to Write only O remote register slave stations RWw Page 339 4400 to 17408 to Master Local station er ion ix 4BFF 19455 station For Stores the send data to the pp data sending master station and other Read 11 Local station salve stations Data write For data received from other slave sending stations are also stored receiving Ver 2 Master station compatible Stores the data received O remote register from slave stations RWr 2 4C00 to 19456 to Master jen r station For ead only ppenaix 53FFy 21503 Local station data 11 x Stores the data rece
82. 2 10 20 x 1 x 2 3 10 10 x 1 1 46ms 10 x 1 1 63ms 36ms 58ms Max value 20 0 3 20 x 1 x 3 3 20 3 x 3 10 20 x 1 x 3 3 10 X Valu 10 x 1 1 49ms 10 x 1 1 83ms 39ms 73ms 373 ew Aejap uoissiusueJ zp xipueddy aul Buissso0 g yur ejeq p xipueddy b Master station RY local station RX master station RWw local station RWr This is the time between the device of the CPU module in a master station turning on off and the device of the CPU module in a local station turning on off This is also the time between data set in the device of the CPU module in a master station and the data stored into the device of the CPU module in a local station Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time SL Local station sequence scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up k LS SL The decimal point is rounded up Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 2 SL x k 1 SM x n LS x 2 SL x k 1 SM LS x 2 SL SM x n LS x 2 SL SM x n LS x 3 SM x n LS x 2 Max value SM LS x 3
83. 7 Page 97 Section 7 3 1 Createa project on a programming tool Select QCPU Q mode under PLC Series Select Q20UDH under PLC Type X Project gt New New Project Project Type simple Project I Use Label PLC Series ocru Q mode PLC Type azoubH uoneis Jajsew e Jo sPumes ZEO UOI E S E207 pue uonels Jejse y e ueewjeg suoneoiunuiulo2 Jo ejduiex3 eor Language Ladder s 257 2 Open the Network Parameter window to configure the setting as follows Project window 2 gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link Number of Modules 1 _ Boards Blank No Setting M set Operation Setting Module 1 1 2 Start I O No 0000 Parameter Name Operation Setting ation Setti Type Poo Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected 1 Data Link Faulty Station Setting Remote Input RX X1000 Remote Oupot RY 71000 Hold Input Data Remote Register RWr wo Remote Register RWw w100 Case of CPU STOP Setting Ver 2 Remote Input RX Clears Compulsorily Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB SBD Special Register SW SWO Retry Count 3 Automatic Reconnection Station Count 1 Standby Master Station No 1 PLC Down Select Stop x Scan Mode Setting Asynchronous
84. 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Word Channel Device Device Device No Interrupt Detection Method Interrupt Condition R 2 P Code No Setting Connection SI No Value No RX 0 to 1FFFy Edge Detect ON Interrupt at rise SB 0 to O1FFy Edge Detect OFF Interrupt at fall Level Detect ON Interrupt at ON RY 0 to 1FFFj Level Detect OFF Interrupt at OFF RWr 0 to O7FFy Edge Detect Equal Interrupt when the value is matched first time only 0 to 65535 _ 0 to 15 Edge Detect Unequal Interrupt when the value is not matched first time only Op to H SW 0 to O1FFy Level Detect Equal Interrupt when the value is matched Level Detect Unequal Interrupt when the value is not matched FFFFu Scan Completed 3 When completing the interrupt settings open the Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting window of the PLC parameter Relate Interrupt SI No of a master local module set in the Interrupt Settings window to the interrupt pointer of a CPU module Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System tab lt gt _ Interrupt Pointer Setting button 4 Input settings to the Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting window 5 Click the End button and close the setting window Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting PLC
85. Auto Start Mode Remote Net Additional Mode X Total Module Connected 1 0 Remote Input RX xi000 Remote Output RY 1000 Remote Register RWr wo Remote Register RWw w100 Ver 2 Remote Input RX x1500 Ver 2 Remote Output RY Y1500 Ver 2 Remote Register RWr w200 Ver 2 Remote Register RWw w10o00 Special Relay SB Spo Special Register SW Sw LE a b Transfer using a program Using an intelligent function module device Un GO and FROM TO instructions transfers data between the buffer memory areas in a master local module and a device in a CPU module Use this function to use a different refresh device for each station or for other purposes Ver 1 compatible area Address Item Reference Hexadecimal Decimal EO to 15Fy 224 to 351 Remote input RX Page 328 Appendix 2 2 1604 to 1DF 352 to 479 Remote output RY 1E0 to 2DFy 480 to 735 Remote register RWw Page 330 Appendix 2 3 2E0 to 3DFy 736 to 991 Remote register RWr Ver 2 compatible area Address Hexadecimal Decimal Item Reference 4000 to 41F Fy 4200 to 43FFy 16384 to 16895 16896 to 17407 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX Ver 2 compatible remote output RY Page 338 Appendix 2 10 4400 to 4BFFy 17408 to 19455 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWw 4C00 to 53FFy 19456 to 21503 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWr Page 339 Appendix 2 11 CHA
86. BT EDT r Jij 12 write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Data link is started Online lt gt Write to PLC uui or power off on 65 ejduex3 uonejedo p 13 Check that the LEDs are in the following status If the LEDs are not in the following status follow the steps 1 to 11 again Master station AJ65BTB2 16T AJ65BTB1 16DT QJ61BT11N MITSUBISHI MELSEC RUN BMLRUN MST E SMST E oN CVSS BO e ON sD E MRD I Flashing 9999999099009999 Flashing ERR L ERR OFF o OFF 1 The LED may look dimly lit or off depending on the communication status Point P f the LEDs on the CPU module are in the following states refer to the manual for the CPU module used and follow the troubleshooting instructions User s manual for the CPU module used hardware design maintenance and inspection The MODE LED is off The ERR LED is on or flashing 14 Check the connection status of each module on the CC Link diagnostics 7 gt Page 308 Section 11 4 When the window is as follows the connection status is normal Diagnostics lt gt CC Link Diagnostics CC Link Diagnostics CCunk Mi CULTE 1 2 vost iost Return to the original E M Display All Connecting Station Information Selected Station Informa
87. Brown Brown Brown x 2 for Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables or CC Link dedicated cables Ver 1 00 compatible Terminating resistor 130 Q 1 2W Brown Orange Brown x 2 for CC Link dedicated high performance cables Ver 1 00 compatible 15 CHAPTER 1 FEATURES 1 1 16 CC Link CC Link is a system where distributed modules such as I O modules and intelligent function modules are connected using dedicated cables enabling a CPU module to control the modules 1 2 3 4 Ethernet Plant level information management CC Link IE Controller Network Among production lines Production control CC Link IE Field Network Within a line Equipment control CC Link Between a control panel and equipment High speed communications On off information of I O signals and values can be smoothly exchanged at high speed This feature allows the configuration of a variety of systems System with reduced wiring Because modules can be distributed in large equipment such as conveyor lines and machines a system with reduced wiring can be achieved Flexible system design Various CC Link devices manufactured by partner vendors are available Therefore a system can be flexibly designed according to application Configuration of a distributed system By connecting multiple programmable controllers to a CC Link system a simple distributed system
88. CC Link dedicated cables in T branch 1 T branch system configuration The following is a system configuration in T branch T branch terminal block connector Local station Remote O station Intelligent device Remote device station station Main line Master station Branch line Remote O station Remote device station Remote O station Remote device station Local station Remote 1 0 station Remote device station Terminating resistor between DA and DB Branch line t Branch Branch Terminating resistor line line between DA and DB Remote I O station Remote device station Intelligent device station N Remote O station Remote device station Remote 1 0 station Local station Remote 1 0 station Intelligent device Remote device station A maximum of six stations station can be connected a SO ET A maximum of six stations can be connected The number of branch lines is determined by the branch line length per branch line and the overall branch line length a Precautions When the following master stations are used in a T branch system configuration change the procedure of connecting terminating resistors When master stations other than those described below are used connect k Y Remote device station the terminating resistors included with the module AJ61BT11 Hardware versi
89. Can be executed station only Whether the temporary error invalid instruction has been Temporary error SB0048 ET accepted is stored m 2 5E4 b8 P OFF Not executed 9 status ON Accepted Whether the temporary error invalid instruction has been SB0049 d ipn WE is e 1 x x BE4 b9 invalid complete Not execute O status ON A temporary error invalid station determined specified station number invalid Temporary error Whether the temporary error invalid cancel instruction has SB004A invalid canceling been accepted is stored z 5E44 b10 acknowledgement OFF Not executed O status ON Accepted Whether the temporary error invalid canceling instruction Temporary error SB004B VC MRNA has been completed is stored 7 invali i 5E4 b11 g OFF Not executed e complete status ON Temporary error invalid station setting canceled Whether a line test request has been accepted is stored SB004C Line test acceptance OFF Not died a ees xecu 5E4 b12 status 2 ON Accepted SBOO4D inedest eonplsts Mis line 1m been completed is stored Not execute x x 5E4 b13 status d ON Completed Parameter Whether a parameter information read request has been SBO04E information read accepted is stored 7 x 5E44 b14 acknowledgement OFF Not executed O status ON Accepted SB004F Parameter Whether parameter information has been read is stored BE4 b15 information read OFF Not read O x x completion status ON
90. Continue GOTIR RICATSR Data Link Faulty communication receive area Not affected Not affected i Station Setting of fail from the by the by the failure such as allure XN NS ower olt ocaurs a programming Continue Continue remote device communication communication P tool for master Holds the receive stationhavinga status of the status of the in a remote i area from the icati i i device stalion station setting communication remote device remote device Hold remote device failure station station station having a communication failure 122 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Master station standby master station operating as a master station Remote I O station Data link status i Remote Remote Remote Remote input i RX output register register Input Output RY RWw RWr Clears the receive area from the local station ciar having a Holds the Continue Continue When a Data Link Fault watt d x y communication receive area Not affected Not affected communication Station Setting of fail allure from the local by the by the fallure such as a programming i continue Continue station havinga communication communication power off occurs tool for master Holds the receive 3 A area from the communication status of the status of the in a local station station setting f local station failure local station local station Hold having a
91. Default 1 Blank or 1 to 64 Standby Master Station No Blank no standby master station specified Default Blank Stop Continue Default Stop PLC Down Select Stop Continue Asynchronous Synchronous Scan Mode Setting l Asynchronous Synchronous Default Asynchronous A Delay Time Setting Enter 0 jeeus Bunjes g xipueddy jeeus Bumes 1ejeueJed WOMEN z g xipueddy 405 Appendix 8 3 Station information setting sheet Station No Station Type Expanded Cyclic Setting Number of Occupied Stations Remote Station Points Reserve Invalid Station Select Intelligent Buffer Select Word Send Receive Automatic OO CO NN oO om AJ wo N o N wo sk oa oaj gt A o N o N o N N N N wo N A N a N N N O N N o wo eo wo wo N w AJ wo oa 406 APPENDICES Reserve Intelligent Buffer Select Word Expanded Number of Remote Station Station f X Invalid Cyclic Occupied Station r No Type Station Send Receive Automatic Setting Stations Points P 36 37 38 39 40 41 A 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
92. Description Setting range Interrupt Pointer Siam No Set the start number IOO of the interrupt pointer 50 to 255 Default Blank PLC Side Interrupt Pointer Set the number of the interrupt conditions set in the Interrupt 1 to 16 Default Blank Count Settings window of Network Parameter Within the range of I O points of Intelligent Start I O No Set the start I O number of the master local module the CPU module Module Default Blank Side Set the start number of the SI No set to Interrupt SI No in the Start SI No 0 to 15 Default Blank Interrupt Settings window of Network Parameter 113 114 a Precautions When interrupt conditions are always established with Level Detect being set to Detection Method Because the interrupt process is performed for each link scan if the sequence scan time is much longer than the link scan time a watchdog timer error may occur in the CPU module due to the prolonged sequence scan To avoid this check the conditions using program and do not use the interrupt settings Before executing an interrupt program Execute the El instruction in the main routine program and enable the interrupt User s manual for the CPU module used function explanation program fundamentals Enable interrupt Main routine program lt IO interrupt program Interrupt pointer When multiple interrupts occur simultaneously The operation may delay
93. Functio I LJ618T11 Master Local Module E Input Module Screw Terminal Block Type B Input Module Screw 2 piece Terminal Bloch STAM STARS STABST STAB S Input Module Screw 2 piece Terminal Bloch Bi Input Module Spring Clamp Terminal Block B Input Module Sensor Connector Type e CO ost Station Bi Input Module One touch Connector Type y Device map Tato Mater fet 1 area All Connect Count 4 Total STAKE AJGSVBTCF AJESVBTCU AJESVBTCU QJEIBTTIN T32DT 88DAVN 68ADVN Item Description Setting range e Ver 1 Mode Ver 2 Mode Mode Setting Select the inde of a master station 7 gt Page 43 Section 3 6 2 to Addition Mode Page 54 Section 3 6 6 Remote l Ci Mode Default Ver 1 Mode Select the transmission speed of a master station 136kbps Note that this setting is used only to display Link Scan Time acon TX Speed Approx For the transmission speed of a master local module set it PPN S with a transmission speed mode setting switch on the module 7 gt bs Bde ei CHAPTER 2 Default 156kbps 103 sjreyep Buijes ZEL uonejs 19 Se e 10 sBumes vejoweseg EZ Item Description Setting range Link Scan Time The estimate value of link scan time is displayed Approx For a master station 0 0 is displayed Sistion No For a slave station D D The order of the slave station is displayed before the slash The start station number of the s
94. I O Device Station number Module name Hexadecimal Decimal RX RY X1000 to X100F E0 224 RYO to RYF 1 QJ61BT11N X1010 to X101D E1u 225 RY10 to RY1D CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address Remote I O Device Station number Module name Hexadecimal Decimal RX RY Y1000 to Y100F 160 352 RXO0 to RXF 1 QJ61BT11N Y1010 to Y101D 1614 353 RX10 to RX1D 255 uoneunByuoo wayskS L OL UOI E S E207 pue uonels Jejse y e ueewjeg suoneoiunuiulo2 Jo ejduiex3 eor Point CPU module Master station Device 1 Buffer memory Remote input RX 21009 Station Station iu i REC MD us i X101D 1 Li I i Remote outp I i n e Station Station 3 MESS No 1 101D T rog Local station Buffer memory Remote input RX EOH Station No 1 Station No 1 CPU module Device Station No 1 X101D Station Y1000 No 1 Y101D The last two bits in RX and RY cannot be used for communications between a master station and a local station b Remote register RWr RWw Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 403 Appendix 8 1 2 256 CPU module Master station Sla
95. Interrupt Condition j Code No Setting Connection SI No Value No RX 0 to 1FFFj Edge Detect ON Interrupt at rise SB 0 to O1FF Edge Detect OFF Interrupt at fall B Level Detect ON Interrupt at ON RY 0 to 1FFFH Level Detect OFF Interrupt at OFF RWr 0 to 07FF Edge Detect Equal Interrupt when the value is matched first time only l 0 to 65535 0to 15 Edge Detect Unequal Interrupt when the value is not matched 0 to A H SW 0 to O1FFy first time only FFFF Level Detect Equal Interrupt when the value is matched j Level Detect Unequal Interrupt when the value is not matched Scan Completed 3 When completing the interrupt settings open the Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting window of the PLC parameter Relate Interrupt SI No of a master local module set in the Interrupt Settings window to the interrupt pointer of a CPU module DO Project window z Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System tab gt _ Interrupt Pointer Setting button 4 Input settings to the Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting window NN s i End i i E eee 5 Click the n button and close the setting window M e ns Oo o Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting E 3 PLC Side Intelligent Module Side r3 o Interrupt Pointer Interrupt Pointer D 07 Start No Count Start I O No Start SI No v D 50 3 0000 0 o 2 a n Sg i o i dp a 2 Cancel Item
96. Keep the transmission cable Data link Check if the transmission away from the power cable cannot be cable is away from the Keep a distance of 100mm performed in power cable f or more is recommended the entire Check if the FG terminal is system Is the transmission cable grounded separately from Ground the terminals occasionally A3 4 Noise free from noise the GND terminal of the Separately power system Reduce the transmission Take noise reduction speed and check if the measures frequency of occurrence of Reduce the transmission noise is reduced speed F Replace the modules and Repair or replace the Failure of the Do modules on the master j A3 5 check if the station normally module on the master master station station normally operate operates station Do not turn on Data link stop SB0002 Is Data link stop instruction Check if Data link stop Do not write data to the A3 6 Link stop correctly executed SB0002 is off refresh source device of Data link stop SB0002 from multiple locations To the next page 279 UONEIS SARIS e JO uonoeuuoosip 0 ENP SWA GOlg L Z LL Suie qoJd 40 S SI Z LL Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Data link cannot be performed in the entire system occasionally Cable or other Are there no disconnection short circuit incorrect wiring poor connection and coexistence of different
97. Master station column When a standby master station is operating as a standby master station Local station column Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Select whether to specify multiple temporary error invalid stations Multiple 00 Multiple stations set in SW0004 to SW0007 specified SW0003 temporary error 01 to 64 6034 invalid station A single station specified from 1 to 64 O specification The number represents the station number to be set as a temporary error invalid station Specify a temporary error invalid station SW0004 0 Temporary error invalid station not specified 604p 1 Temporary error invalid station specified SWO0005 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b bO 6054 Temporary error invalid station 310009 O x x SWO006 specification SW0006 6064 SW0007 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SWO0007 The stations need not be set by the number of occupied stations 6071 Error invalid stations reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Set a station number where the line test is executed SWO0008 Line test station 0 Entire system executed to all stations A 6084 setting 01 to 64 Target station number o Default 0 Set monitoring time when dedicated instructions are used Default 10 seconds Range 0 to 360 second If a value outsi
98. Multiple master stations exist on Or when the data link starts by Multiple master the same line BBC5 turning on Master station O x stations error Or noise has been detected on Bt i duplication error canceling ine ling at poweron request SB0007 check the line status Please consult your local BBC7 and BBC8 System error mn O O Mitsubishi representative Reduce the number of standby BBCA Multiple standby Multiple standby master stations master stations on the same line m o master stations error exist on the same line to one Or check the line status Please consult your local BBD1 System error OM O O Mitsubishi representative 2 The master local module with the serial number first five digits of 09112 or later supports this function When using the master local module with the serial number first five digits of 09111 or earlier reset the CPU module 303 IS 9poo JON Z LL s po9 JOU SL Delectability Error code EN Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal i station station All stations data link A data link error occurred on all After the data link status is BC01 error Message stations during a message recovered perform the message O x transmission function transmission transmission again The target station specified for the message transmission function is in any of the following status No ne
99. Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station SB0000 Restart the data link that has been stopped by SB0002 BEO b0 Data link restart OFF Not instructed O O x ON Instructed Refresh cyclic data after data link control is transferred to Refresh instruction at SB0001 akaby masier the standby master station x BEO b1 ped OFF Not instructed 2 Switching ON Instructed Stop the data link of the host station SB0002 Note that if this relay is instructed to the master station BEO b2 Data link stop the entire system will stop O O x OFF Not instructed ON Instructed Refresh instruction Refresh cyclic data after parameter setting is changed by SB0003 when changing the G P RLPASET instruction x 5E0 b3 parameters by the OFF Not instructed refresh stopped O O dedicated instruction ON Instructed refresh started continued Determine the stations specified by SW0003 to SW0007 SB0004 Temporary error as a temporary error invalid station 5E0p b4 invalid request OFF Not requested O ON Requested Cancel the temporary error invalid station setting SB0005 Temporary error configured for the stations specified by SW0003 to BEO b5 invalid canceling SW0007 O x x request OFF Not requested ON Requested 340 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station SB0007 Master station
100. O 1 In a standby master station data link can be performed only when the mode is the same as that of the master station 2 Although a local station in the remote net Ver 1 mode cannot perform data link with a Ver 2 compatible slave station the status of the Ver 2 compatible slave station is stored in Other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 for the local station as well as that for the master station When the master station is normally performing data link with the Ver 2 compatible slave station Other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 for the local station indicates 0 Normal Note that cyclic data in the Ver 2 compatible slave station will become 0 in the local station in the remote net Ver 1 mode Transient transmission cannot be performed due to an error such as a timeout error Ver 2 compatible Ver 2 compatible 1 remote output RY remote input RX Remote device station Remote device station Local station Ver 2 mode Local station Ver 1 mode Ver 2 compatible Ver 1 compatible Master station Station No 1 the number Station No 2 the number Station No 3 the number Station No 4 the number Ver 2 mode of occupied stations 1 of occupied stations 1 of occupied stations 1 of occupied stations 1 b b 1 Ver 1 compatible d k N i i 1 1 1 remote input RX 1 1 3 Station No 1 i 1 4 i i All O i 1 1 I 1 Station No 3 4 d 1 4 Remote output RY L I l Li L
101. O O O registration function Event issuance for the interrupt program O o x Automatic CC Link startup o O O Remote net mode O O O Remote I O net mode o O x Reserved station function O O O Error invalid station setting function O O O Synchronous mode O O x d Scan synchronization Useful applications Asynchronous mode Oo O O Temporary error invalid station setting function O O O Data link stop restart O O O Station number overlap checking function O O O Supporting a multiple CPU system o o x Remote I O station points setting O O O Remote net Ver 2 mode O O O Remote net additional mode o O x Master station duplication error canceling function O O O Performing transient a Transient transmission O O O transmission 1 A module after a Basic model QCPU with the function Ver B supports this function 12 A Redundant CPU does not support this function 3 This function cannot be used when a module is mounted on the main base unit of a Redundant CPU 4 A Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU do not support a multiple CPU system 394 APPENDICES 2 Availability of added functions of a CPU module master local module and programming tool depending on the version Added function Remote net Ver 2 mode First 5 digits of the serial No of a master local module x Not supported Not subject to the version Applicable programming tool version GX Works2 GX Developer Remote net additional mode 1 8 03D or lat
102. PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or
103. RIRD Reads data from the buffer memory areas of the target station or the Page 174 Master station i device in the CPU module of the target station Section 9 2 local station G P RIWT Writes data to the buffer memory areas of the target station or the Page 180 device in the CPU module of the target station Section 9 3 Page 174 G P RIRD Reads data from the buffer memory areas of the target station Section 9 2 Page 180 G P RIWT Writes data to the buffer memory areas of the target station Section 9 3 Automatically performs handshaking with the target station and G P RIRCV reads data from the buffer memory areas of the target station Page 186 The instruction is available for modules that have interlock signals Section 9 4 for the handshake e g AJ65BT R2 N Intelligent device Automatically performs handshaking with the target station and station G P RISEND writes data to the buffer memory areas of the target station Page 191 i The instruction is available for modules that have interlock signals Section 9 5 for the handshake e g AJ65BT R2 N Reads data from the automatic update buffer of the target station Page 196 G P RIFR The instruction is available for modules that have the automatic a ae i update buffer e g AJ65BT R2 N Writes data to the automatic update buffer of the target station Paae 200 G P RITO The instruction is available for modules that have the automatic code aa i t update buffer e g AJ65B
104. RX RY RWr and RWw and a device in a CPU module a Automatic transfer by parameter settings using a programming tool Setting a refresh device using the network parameter can automatically transfer data between RX RY RWr and RWw in a master local module and a device in a CPU module 7 gt Page 98 Section 7 3 2 Page 116 Section 7 4 2 u Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules ox Boards Blank No Setting Iv Set 1 2 Start I O No 0000 Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station v Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start Mode Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Total Module Connected 1 0 Remote Input RX x1000 Remote Output RY Y1000 Remote Register RWr wo Remote Register RWw w100 Ver 2 Remote Input RX Yer 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB Spo Special Register SW swo T x H b Transfer using a program Using an intelligent function module device UnXGLI and FROM TO instructions transfers data between the buffer memory areas in a master local module and a device in a CPU module Use this function to use a different refresh device for each station or for other purposes Address Item Reference Hexadecimal Decimal 4000 to 41FFy 16384 to 16895 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX Page 338 Appendix 2 4200 to 43FFy 16896 to 17407 Ver
105. Register RWr 3 3 Remote Register RWw v r Ver 2 Remote Input RX D Ver 2 Remote Output RY g Une 5 Mamaka Tin EAVITUJSN c d Precautions when using the block data assurance per station function Refresh device setting When using this function set the refresh devices in the network parameter If the refresh devices are not set the remote input RX remote output RY and remote register RWr RWw of the buffer memory may not be refreshed Assurance of 32 bit data Integrity of 32 bit data in remote register RWr RWw is assured even if Block Data Assurance per Station is not set 7 s Page 152 Section 8 2 6 2 Transmission delay time and link refresh time When this function is used transmission delay time and link refresh time become longer than those of when this function is not used When designing a system based on an existing system check the transmission delay time and link refresh time at startup of the system s Page 367 Appendix 4 2 Page 385 Appendix 4 4 151 2 32 bit data integrity assurance This function prevents read write data in 32 bit increments from being separated between new and old data a Data to be assured The data in the remote register RWr RWw between a CPU module master station and local station are assured b Method of a data assurance The following two conditions are required for assurance The first address of the remote register RWr RWw has an even number
106. SL SM x n LS x 2 SL SL x k 1 SL x k 1 Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and local station sequence scan time is 10ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value Max value 20 x 1 3 x 2 10 x 1 1 46ms 20 x 1 3 x 3 10 x 1 1 49ms 20 x 1 3 x 2 10 x 1 1 46ms 20 x 1 3 x 2 10 x 1 1 46ms 20 3 x 2 10 36ms 20 3 x 3 10 39ms 20 x 1 3 x 2 10 36ms 20 x 1 3x 2 10 36ms 374 APPENDICES 5 Master station lt gt local station Ver 2 compatible slave station a Master station RX lt local station RY master station RWr local station RWw This is the time between the device of the CPU module in a local station turning on off and the device of the CPU module in a master station turning on off This is also the time between data set in the device of the CPU module in a local station and the data stored into the device of the CPU module in a master station Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time SL Local station sequence scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up t LS x m SM The decimal
107. Select whether to stop or continue data link in PLC Down Select of the network parameter 7 gt Page 98 Section 7 3 2 131 uonejs Jejseui 94 Jo Add Jej ojuoo ejqeuiuieJBoJd y ui 10119 ue uodn smeis yul ejep eui jo Bumes z z g Ayyiqerey ueisAs y Buroudui z g 8 2 3 Setting of the status of the input data from a data link faulty station Whether to clear or hold data input from a data link faulty station can be selected How the input data should be handled can be selected according to the system used 7 gt Page 122 Section 7 5 1 Applicable input receiving data Bit input data from other stations are cleared or held according to the setting Remote input RX of the master station Remote input RX of local stations Remote output RY of local stations Word input data from other stations are held regardless of setting Remote register RWr of the master station Remote register RWr of local stations Remote register RWw of local stations Master station Remote I O station station number 1 Remote device station station number 2 Local station station number 3 Remote input RX Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote input RX Output Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station
108. Side Intelligent Module Side Interrupt Pointer Interrupt Pointer Start No Count Start I O No Start SI No RUA 50 3 0000 Iu NS U ns g ae o 9 p mo ai a n S o o v dp a S Item Description Setting range Interrupt Pointer a Start No Set the start number IOO of the interrupt pointer 50 to 255 Default Blank S PLC Side l amp Interrupt Pointer Set the number of the interrupt conditions set in the Interrupt lt 1 to 16 Default Blank Count Settings window of Network Parameter D Within the range of I O points of the S Intelligent Start I O No Set the start I O number of the master local module CPU module e Module Default Blank 9 Side Set the start number of the SI No set to Interrupt SI No in Start SI No i 0 to 15 Default Blank the Interrupt Settings window of Network Parameter a Precautions The precautions are same as those for the parameter settings for a master station gt Page 114 Section 7 3 2 4 a 121 7 9 Status Difference Between a Master Station and a Slave Station at an Error The station status at an error varies depending on the combination of PLC Down Select of Network Parameter Data Link Faulty Station Setting and Case of CPU STOP Setting in the Operation Setting window When configuring the settings consider the station status at errors listed below 1 Status of a master station standby master station when operating as
109. Special Register SW Swo Retry Count Automatic Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No 1 PLC Down Select Scan Mode Setting Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Interrupt Settinas Interrupt Settinas CC Link Configuration Setting 143 uonounj Jeysew Aqpuels G z 8 Ayqey ueisAs eu Bulrciduy z g 144 5 Precautions a The number of standby master stations One standby master station can be connected in one system b Right of controlling data link of a standby master station c When a master station goes down the right of controlling data link is automatically transferred to a standby master station Note that an instruction to refresh cyclic data is not issued Use a link special relay SB and link special register SW to issue a refresh instruction 7 7 Page 145 Section 8 2 5 6 After the instruction is issued information before a master station error is detected is output to each station Change in the parameter settings of the master station While data link is performed by a standby master station the parameter settings of the master station cannot be changed d Station number setting for a standby master station e f If the station number setting of the station number setting switch on a standby mater station differs from that set in Standby Master Station No of the
110. Type Master Station Duplex Function Local Station Can be set Cannot be set Standby Master Station Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Remote Net Ver 2 Mode Can be set Can be set Mode Remote Net Additional Mode Network Remote I O Net Mode Can be set Cannot be set parameter Refresh device auto refresh Can be set Cannot be set settings Retry Count Can be set Can be set Automatic Reconnection Station Count Can be set Can be set Standby Master Station No Can be set Cannot be set PLC Down Select Can be set Can be set Scan Mode Setting Can be set Can be set Delay Time Setting Can be set Can be set Station Information Remote Station Points Can be set Cannot be set Setting Other than the above Can be set Can be set Remote Device Station Initial Setting Can be set Cannot be set Interrupt Settings Can be set Cannot be set Number of modules that can be set Up to 8 modules Up to 64 modules Parameter change while a CPU module is set to RUN Cannot be changed Can be changed 218 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS b Network parameter of a programming tool Do not use a programming tool to set network parameters for the modules where settings are configured using the G P RLPASET instructions Also do not use the G P RLPASET instructions to configure settings for the modules where network parameters have been set using a programming tool Doing so causes abnormal end of the instruction and the settings are not reflected
111. XU mee 1jl AJ6SYBTCU 68ADYN Remote Device Station ES Zj4 AJ6SVBTCU GBDAVN Remote Device Station STAHT 3 STARS Host Station STAHO Master Vert All Connect Count 2 Total STA 6 AJESVBTCU AJB5SVBTCU 5BADVN 68DAVN ii Verl 3 Stations Occupied Single Verl 3 Stations Occupied Single 15 98 ms 96 Points 96 Points No Setting No Setting Operation Setting Module 1 p Parameter Name Number of Occupied Stations Occupied Station 1 _v Data Link Faulty Station Setting Hold Input Data Expanded etting single E r Case of CPU STOP Setting Clears Compulsorily Block Data Assurance per Station I Enable Setting B 1 0 Combined Module 40 pin Connector Type FCN Con amp 1 0 Combined Module Waterproof Connector Type E I O Combined Module Embedded 1 0 Adapter E Analog Input Module Voltage Input ef AJESVBTCU 68ADVN 8 channels Ver 2 Compatible alog Input Module Current Input Analog Input Module Voltage Current Input E Analog Input Module Temperature Input m Analog Output Module Voltage Output E Analog Output Module Current Output El Analog Output Module Voltage Current Output El High Speed Counter Module Positioning Module El Inverter FR A720 Inverter FR A740 El GOT1000 Series m Rnhnt SD Series Vertical f axis tyne CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 3 Open the Remote Device Station Initial Setting window to configure
112. Y such as M and L is selected remote output RY is refreshed or compulsorily cleared according to the setting Number of Modules 1 gt Boards Blank No Setting IV Set 1 A Start 1 0 No 0000 Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station X Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected 1 g Remote Input RX mem 9 When Y is selected remote output RY is i Remote Regster RWw compulsorily cleared regardless of parameter Ver 2 Remote Input RX v settin g i Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver Z Remote Register RWr _ Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay 5B 580 Special Register SW SWO 3 Setting method Select whether to refresh or clear output sending data to a slave station in Case of CPU STOP Setting under Operation Setting of the network parameter gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 1 Page 119 Section 7 4 2 1 dOLS 9 398 SI NdD Jej 041uo5 e qeuuueJ6oJd e UO U2IIASS y UBYM UOHQE S SAIS e Buueep juosinduuoo ButuseJjes vca8 Ayiqerey weysks eu Buroudui z g 135 8 2 5 Standby master function If the master station goes down due to an error in a CPU module power supply or others switching the control to the standby master station a backup station for the master station continues data link This function is used not to stop the entire
113. Z S Connectable CPU module Number of connectable modules CPU type Programmable controller CPU Redundant CPU Universal model QCPU Model name Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QOOUJCPU When the parameters are set on a programming tool Up to 8 modules 2 4 Up to 2 modules When the parameters are set using dedicated instructions Not connectable 9 Up to 8 modules QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Up to 2 modules Up to 24 modules QO2UCPU Up to 4 modules Up to 36 modules QOSUDCPU QO04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Up to 8 modules Up to 64 modules C Controller module QO6CCPU V QO6CCPU V B Q12DCCPU V Up to 8 modules Not connectable S 1 The number of connectable modules can be set only within the range of the number of I O points of the CPU module 2 When connecting five or more master local modules check the versions of the CPU module and programming tool lt Page 395 Appendix 6 2 3 To use the modules in a redundant system check the versions of the master local module and programming tool LF Page 395 Appendix 6 2 4 The number of the master local modules on one system is counted Example When one master local module is connected
114. a main base unit and used as a master station Data RX 2048 points RY 2048 points RWw 256 points RWr 256 points SB 512 points Number of refresh points SW 512 points are refreshed to areas other than a file register Block guarantee of cyclic euin useJjeJ qur t y xipueddy 2 D a X AR i Not set S data per station function amp r D o KM1 KM2x Sk ese RWw RWr SW x E Number of CC Link modules 1 xKM4 S 2048 2048 512 0 2240 00043x i 256 256 512 0 1 1 x 0 2 J D 0 78416 0 79 ms 387 b Remote net additional mode Formula RX RX2 RY RY2 SB KM1 KM2 x 1 a E Number of CC Link modules 1 x KM4 ms RWw RWw2 RWr RWr2 SW aE KM3 x RATRACHRYERYVEFSE Wwe RWw2 RWreRWI2 SW RX Number of remote input RX points refreshed in the master station local station RX2 Number of Ver 2 remote input RX points refreshed in the master station local station RY Number of remote output RY points refreshed in the master station local station RY2 Number of Ver 2 remote output RY points refreshed in the master station local station RWw Number of remote register RWw points refreshed in the master station local station RWw2 Number of Ver 2 remote register RWw points refreshed in the master station local station RWr Number of remote register RWr points refreshed in the master station local station RWr2 Number of Ver 2 remote register RWr points refreshe
115. a master station and remote I O station Master station standby master station operating as a master station Remote I O station i emote emote emote Data link status R t Ri t R t Remote input n f RX output register register Input Output RY RWw RWr When the programmable controller CPU of the master station is set to STOP at an error data link Continue A Continue Hold Continue 1 continued When the programmable controller CPU of the local station is set to STOP at an error data link 2 Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue continued Data Link Fault Clear Clear When data link ie for the entire Station etting of By external system is a programming Indefinite Indefinite Hold RN All points off y tool for master Hold Hold 9 stopped station setting Clears the receive area from the Clear remote I O station When a having a Continues Data Link Fault TT Continues communication y communication operation of j Station Setting of fail operation of failure such as allure areas other By external wero occurs a programming Continue han ihe areas other signals All points off s remote IO tool for master Holds the receive remote iO than the remote 9 station setting area from the I O station station ng remote I O station station having a communication failure Clears the receive area from the Clear remote device f f When a l station having a Holds the Continue
116. are stored in the remote input RX and remote output RY Page 46 Section 3 6 3 2 In the remote net additional mode data are stored in the remote input RX and remote output RY in the Ver 1 compatible slave station s Page 53 Section 3 6 5 3 a Remote input RX Buffer 1 Buffer x Buffer Buffer Buffer Station Station Station Station Station number M M number ibd number bdo number mena number dines address address address address address j EO and E14 ia FA and FBy 1144 and 1154 12E and 12F Es 1484 and 149 224 and 225 250 and 251 276 and 277 302 and 303 828 and 329 j E24 and E34 i5 FCy and FDy 5 116 and 1174 130 and 131 14A and 14By 226 and 227 252 and 253 278 and 279 304 and 305 330 and 331 3 E44 and E54 46 FE and FF 29 1184 and 119 42 1324 and 1334 55 14C and 14DH 228 and 229 254 and 255 280 and 281 306 and 307 332 and 333 E6 and E7 100 and 101 i 11Ay and 11B4 d 1344 and 135 14E and 14F 230 and 231 256 and 257 282 and 283 308 and 309 334 and 335 5 E8 and E9 y 102 and 103 11Cy and 11D m 136 and 137 1504 and 1514 232 and 233 258 and 259 284 and 285 310 and 311 336 and 337 6 EA and EB 19 1044 and 1054 30 11Ey and 11Fy 45 1384 and 1394 58 1524 and 1534 234 and 235 260 and 261 286 and 287 312 and 313 338 and 339 ECy and ED m 106 and 1074 1204 a
117. asynchronous mode and synchronous mode are explained below using examples of communications between a master station and remote I O station Point Even if latched device listed in CPU side device in the table below data are cleared to 0 using a program at reset of the CPU module or at power off and on the latched data may be output depending on the timing of a link scan and link refresh For how to prevent output of latched device data perform actions listed in How to disable the setting in the table below CPU side device How to disable the setting Latch relay L Clear the value of the device to 0 using the initial device File register R ZR value Extended data register D Universal model QCPU only Extended link register W Universal model QCPU only Delete all latch range settings Device in the latch range 4 For how to set an initial device value refer to the manual for the CPU module used function explanation program fundamentals a Data flow in the asynchronous mode aoe aak H H w Master station buffer memory Remote input RX pa p pow E P Link scan HIRE EE Response time of the first station J Response time of the corresponding station n Response time of the final statio uoneoiioeds uoneziuoiyouAs ueosS ggg suonoun J y Jo suoneorjddy jnjes e g Responses from remote H H I O stations Input 1 Input 3
118. by D turns on b Simultaneous execution of the G P RLPASET instruction Two or more G P RLPASET instructions cannot be executed simultaneously c Check of the completion status There are two types of interlock signals for the G P RLPASET instruction Completion device D and Status display device at completion D 1 Completion device Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RLPASET instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P RLPASET instruction Normal completion Remains off and does not change Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RLPASET instruction is Abnormal end completed and turns off in the next END process 209 lasvdTM d O 8 6 d Process after the completion of the G P RLPASET instruction After the completion of the G P RLPASET instruction turn on Refresh instruction when changing parameters by the dedicated instruction SB0003 and refresh cyclic data When all the stations are normal End process End process End process Program Refresh stop Data link stop Host data link status X01 Refresh instruction when changing parameters by the dedicated instruction End process End process End process End process gt lt Refresh start D Data link start G P RLPASE instruction comp
119. c 6 a RWr13 4C13H to to to to 4BFCH RWw 7FC RWr 7FC 53FCH 4BFD4 RWw7FD RWr7FD 53FDw 4BFEH RWw7FE RWr7FE 53FEH 4BFFH RWw 7FF RWr 7FF 53FFH 339 Appendix 3 Link Special Relays SBs and Link Special Registers SWs Data link status is indicated by bit data link special relays SBs and word data link special registers SWs The link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs represent information stored in the buffer memory areas of a master local module for smooth operation They are read to devices set as refresh devices in the network parameter for use Link special relays SBs Buffer memory addresses 5E0 to SFFy Link special registers SWs Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFy Link special relays SBs Appendix 3 1 SB0000 to SBOOTF are turned on off using a program whereas SB0020 to SBO1FF are automatically turned on off Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses 7 gt Page 335 Appendix 2 5 When a standby master station is used refer to the respective columns under Availability in the table as explained below When a standby master station is operating as a master station Master station column When a standby master station is operating as a standby master station Local station column Availability O Yes x No Number
120. can be configured The multiple programmable controllers can perform data link with remote stations and intelligent device stations and can control distributed devices in a CC Link system CHAPTER 1 FEATURES 1 P Master Local Modules By using master local modules MELSEC Q series programmable controllers can be connected to a CC Link system Remotely located devices in a CC Link system can be controlled as if they were on the same base unit as the master local module The module works as a master station or a local station in CC Link 1 Data communications a Periodic communications cyclic transmission Master local modules can periodically exchange data with other stations in a CC Link system 7 5 Page 126 Section 8 1 1 For example I O signals of remotely located stations in a CC Link system can be used in the same way as those of the master station Terminating resistor Terminating resistor Remote device Master station Remote station intelligent Local station I O station d device station di Dim ToDATAm V m mmm E ernie Nr F ZEE Tam am mimm s Un 2 393 5 3 UN 33 1 p 1 CPU module Master Remote Remote Local station CPU module i station I O station i device station 1 i i a 1 n i 1
121. condition Command G RIRCV G RIRCV un 5 01 S82 02 L Command GP RIRCV GPRIRCV Un S1 S2 2 Applicable device Link direct i Setting Internal device Inte Ulgent File device function module Index Constant data System user Others register JO O device register ZO UO GO Bit Word Bit Word K H S S1 O END D1 O lt S S2 O D2 O 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written with three digits Un 0 to FEH 16 bit binary Within the range of the specified device Within the range of the D1 Start number of the device to which read data is stored o Device name specified device Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored S2 Start number of the device in which an interlock signal is stored 2 specified device D2 Device that turns on for one scan upon completion of reading Within the range of the Bit i D2 1 also turns on at an abnormal end specified device 1 The local device and the file register of each program cannot be used as a device for setting data 186 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS a Control data Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range Stores the status when the instruction is complete 8
122. error SW007D o o T SWOOT7E invalid status SWO07E 67Ey SW007F 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Ses SWOO7F The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations E E 67F Error invalid stations reserved stations station with the last station a 2 number and stations later than that are excepted an eh Data link status of each station is stored x 5 0 Normal a 9 1 Data link error 3 8 Q SW0080 b15 b14 b13 b12 to 38 680 epea eea 2T zs Eso 2 29 s e or 5g HL pie a eae a SEC RES 2 Other station SWO0083 64 swoo082 data link status 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers 6824 The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations 3 It takes maximum of six seconds for this register to turn on after a D SW0083 Slave station connected to the master station or local station becomes E 6834 faulty The time until this register turns on differs depending on the a system configuration and error status a Temporary error invalid stations error invalid stations reserved T stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted 353 Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether a watchdog timer error has occurred is stored SW0084 0 No watchdog timer error 6844 1 Watchdog timer error b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 bO SW0084 16 15 14 13
123. f station operate module on the faulty station operation Check if the standby master Isn t the standby master station is not set as a station Reboot the system so that Standby master A4 6 station controlling the data controlling the data link by the master station will station link the CC Link diagnostics of the master station control the data link 280 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station when the CC Link system has already operated Problem Data link cannot be performed in the entire system Check item Description Check method Corrective action Remove the error T User s manual for the Check the error code of the CPU module used CPU module hardware design maintenance and inspection Does the CPU module on Take corrective action so B1 1 CPU module the master station have no that the CPU module may error identify the master local module Check if the module has q been identifed User s manual for the CPU module used hardware design maintenance and inspection Check power supplied to the T Power supply for Apply the voltage within the B1 2 AP Isn t a voltage low master station and all slave Ka communications specified range stations Check if cables between the Are there no disconnection Cable or other rd master station and slave B1 3 short circuit and poor Correct the wirin
124. for a MELSECNET H remote I O station Device No Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range Device M L B D W R or ZR M B D and W fora MELSECNET H remote I O station Device No Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range Device M L B T C ST D W R or ZR M B D and W fora MELSECNET H remote I O station Device No Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank 117 sjieyep Dunes Z v7 uonels 1ejse y Aqpueis pue uonels e90 10 sPunes Jejeuelegd p Item Description Setting range Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw When Remote Net Additional Mode is set to Mode set the start device where RX RY RWr and RWw Ver 2 compatible area of a master local module are transferred 1 Number of refresh points All points for the start station number to last station number of a Ver 2 compatible slave station are automatically assigned Page 50 Section 3 6 5 To use a different refresh device for each station transfer the device individually using a program Un GO or FROM TO instructions The points for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size informat
125. has been set as a reserved station can be set to zero points Stations that will be connected in the future Local station N the number of occupied stations 4 Remote station Remote station Remote station Reserved station Remote station the number of Master station the number of the number of Station number 4 the number of occupied occupied occupied occupied stations 1 stations 2 stations 1 stations 2 Reserved station Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 8 Station number 10 m nmn 5 PA GUTER IEEE mr 5 aru FAAA EVER n ree ss oooo 000000000 OOOO0 o000000000 O000 O000000000 1 oooo OO00000000 IDooodq ooooooooo OOOC 000000000 oooy 000000000 i IDoood S00000000 l T Point Data link cannot be performed with a station set as a reserved station 1 How to set the number of points of a reserved station to zero points When a master station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode the number of points of a reserved station can be set to zero points Use a programming tool to configure the setting The setting cannot be configured using a dedicated instruction However the setting can be configured by not reading or writing data from to a reserved station when cyclic data is refreshed using an intelligent
126. i issi 5E9 b5 OFF Normal O status ON Error The result of the line test 1 or line test 2 is stored SB00B4 Standby master OFF NOrmal 5EBu b4 station test result f B e ON Error The result of the transmission speed test to the standby m master station is stored Transmission speed x SB0184 OFF Normal same transmission speed as the master test result for standby O x x 5F8p b4 station or no response from the module master station ME ON Error different transmission speed from the master station Whether Transmission speed test request SBOOOB has SB0185 Transmission speed been accepted is stored 5F8 b5 test accept status OFF Not accepted O ON Accepted Whether a transmission speed test has been completed is SB0186 Transmission speed stored 7 5F8 b6 test completion status OFF Not completed O ON Completed 347 sgs seju jeroeds xur1 e xipueddy SMS susjsiBey jeroeds Yul pue sgs s ejew jeroeds yu e xipueddy Appendix 3 2 Link special registers SWs Data are stored in SW0000 to SWO001F using a program whereas data are automatically stored in SW0020 to SWO1FF Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses When a standby master station is used refer to the respective columns under Availability in the table as explained below When a standby master station is operating as a master station
127. it is recommended to secure the module with module fixing screws under vibration Before installing or removing the terminal block power off the applicable station If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power normal data transmission is not guaranteed Before removing the terminating resistors to change the CC Link system power off the system If the terminating resistors are removed or mounted without turning off the power normal data transmission is not guaranteed 76 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 2 Wiring This section describes how to connect a CC Link dedicated cable to the master local module 6 2 1 Preparation before wiring Before wiring check the cables and terminating resistors to be used 1 Cables that can be used The following cables can be used Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible These cables cannot be used together If used normal data transmission is not guaranteed 2 The order of connecting the cables The cables do not have to be connected in the order of station number 3 Terminating resistors to be used Connect the terminating resistors included with the modules at both ends of the modules in the CC Link system The terminating resistors to be used vary depending on the cable Cable type Terminating resistor to be used Ver 1
128. master local modules Point To change the settings for a master station or a slave station stop data link at the master station Page 317 Section 11 4 5 When change the settings for a slave station change the settings for the master station accordingly 97 poyu buos peZ uonejs 19 Se e 10 sBumes J J9WLJed E 7 3 2 Setting details Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration E aster Staton z aS s Mee A Number of Modules Set the station information in the CC Link Select the number of master local modules number of modules to be mounted on one base unit that are set using a programming tool Do not include the number of master local modules that are set using the dedicated instruction G P RLPASET Select it when graphically configuring Station Information Setting by referring to the network map display area for GX Varies depending on a CPU module gt Page 69 Section 5 2 1 Default Blank The station information is not set in the CC Link configuration window not checked The station information is set in the CC Link configuration window checked configuration Works2 only gt Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 a Default The station information is not set in window the CC Link configuration window not checked Within the range of I O points of the CPU Set the start I O number of a master local module in
129. module with a screw Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions NWARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before installation and wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to the product After wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock Wiring Precautions NCAUTION Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range If any spade solderless terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Tighten the terminal screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit fire or malfunction Overtighteni
130. network parameter for the master station an error error code B39A occurs in the standby master station If an error has occurred reset the CPU module of the standby master station after changing the parameter settings of the master station or changing the station number set using the station number setting switch of the standby master station If the terminal block of a master station is removed while the master station is controlling data link If the terminal block of a master station is removed without powering off the master station and reconnected both of the master station and standby master station operate as a master station because the right of controlling data link is transferred to the standby master station therefore communications cannot be normally performed The status of an LED when the right of controlling data link is transferred to a standby master station When the master station goes down and the standby master station starts to take in control of data link the ERR LED on the standby master station flashes The station number of the standby master station is changed from the one set in the parameters to the station number 0 and the standby master station is regarded that it is not connected Data link is normally performed To prevent this situation set the standby master station as an error invalid station g Number of points and range of devices to back up data using a program The number of points and range
131. not used Q00JCPU 1 62 QOO0CPU 1 57 Q01CPU 1 55 Q02CPU 1 02 0 08 0 5 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU 0 98 0 06 u 02 QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 98 0 06 0 2 QOOUJCPU QOO0UCPU Q01UCPU 0 95 0 2 QO02UCPU 0 95 0 05 0 2 QO3UDCPU Q04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO03UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU 0 90 0 03 0 2 Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Ex A calculation example under the following conditions is described Item Condition CPU module QO6HCPU Master local module The module is mounted on a main base unit and used as a master station Data RX 1024 points RX2 896 points RY 1024 points RY2 896 points RWw 128 Number of refresh points points RWw2 128 points RWr 128 points RWr2 128 points SB 512 points SW 512 points are refreshed to areas other than a file register Block guarantee of cyclic data per station function Not set RX RX2 RY RY2 SB 16 a E Number of CC Link modules 1 x KM4 ms KM1 KM2 x RWw RWw2 RWr RWr2 SWw 1024 896 1024 896 512 0 28 0 00043 x 16 128 128 128 128 512 0 1 1 x 0 2 0 83728 0 84 ms 390 APPENDICES Appendix D Difference from traditional modules This appendix lists differences from traditional master local modules Appendix 5 1 Precautions when replacing an
132. number 1 Remote register RWw Remote output RY Remote register RWr Local station station number 4 Remote input RX Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 j Station number 4 Remote output RY Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register Station number 1 Remote register RWw Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote output RY IM Station number 1 IM Station number 2 E Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Station number 4 Target areas for clear hold Areas held regardless of the setting Point If a data link error occurs in a station set as an error invalid station input data remote input RX from that station is held regardless of the setting 132 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 2 Setting method Select whether to clear or hold input data in Data Link Faulty Station Setting under Operation Setting of the network parameter L gt Page 102 Section 7 3 2 1 Page 119 Section 7 4 2 1 Ayqey ueisAs eu Bujoudui z g uoneis Ajnej yul ejep e uoJj ejep Ndu eu jo snjejs eu jo DUOS E Z 8 133 8 2 4 134 Refreshing compulsorily clearing a slave station when the switch on a
133. of occupied stations in a module is two or more set the start station number Ex Station number setting in modules when the number of occupied stations is two or more Slave station Slave station Master station Number of occupied stations 3 Number of occupied stations 2 Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Station No 4 Station No 5 D Station numbers set for the modules ni on a S Ex Setting the station numbers 1 to 3 number of occupied stations 3 as reserved stations 2 c 3 o Reserved station 2 Slave station Slave station 5 Master station Number of occupied stations 3 Number of occupied stations 2 E E a Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Btation No 3 Station No 4 Station No 5 Station numbers set for the modules Point P f an empty station number is set without setting a reserved station the station is detected as a faulty station in Other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 The station numbers need to be consecutive but wiring does not need to be performed in the order of station number 83 2 How to set the station number in the master local module 1 Set the station number using the station number setting switches on the master local module L gt Page 21 CHAPTER 2 QU618T11N RUN LRUN MST SMST Set the tenth digit of the station No using thi
134. on the master Station IS Off I himan ses wale Dake ae ke Hoes EG 268 TX Speed xiu a ee Ey oe ee ey 103 Type vade Ue een vem dls deel oe Ald AA 99 Types of the standby master function 136 415 U Universal model QCPU 0 000000 0s 14 Upgrading the functions 393 Upon a momentary power failure of a remote station DX D PDC cdl aad ee PER 73 V Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable 77 Ver 1 compatible slave station 13 Ver 2 Remote Input RX 0 100 Ver 2 Remote Output RY 05 100 Ver 2 Remote Register RWr 100 Ver 2 Remote Register RWw 100 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX 338 Ver 2 compatible remote output RY 338 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWr 339 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWw 339 Ver 2 compatible slave station 13 VENSION s ots ecd esci oe Leal os en rti hus 104 395 Ww Weights 2o od els oes S eas 25 Wiring feo ig ret edt ie ques 77 Wiring diagram 20000 00 cee 78 Wiring procedure 000 00 ce eee 78 416 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date May 2003 SH NA 080394E A First edition May 2004 SH NA 080394E B Addition Appendix 6 Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 3 Section 2 2 4 Chapter 4 Sec
135. or the following range Device M L B T C ST D W R or ZR M B D and W fora MELSECNET H remote I O station Device number Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote 1 O station Default Blank Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw When Remote Net Additional Mode is set to Mode set the start device where RX RY RWr and RWw Ver 2 compatible area of a master local module are transferred 1 Number of refresh points All points for the start station number to last station number of a Ver 2 compatible slave station are automatically assigned gt Page 53 Section 3 6 5 3 To use a different refresh device for each station transfer the device individually using a program Un GO or FROM TO instructions The points for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 7 Page 332 Appendix 2 4 The other contents are same as those for Remote Input RX described the above Same as Remote Input RX Same as Remote Output RY Same as Remote Register RWr Same as Remote Register RWw 100 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Item Description Setting range Special Relay SB Set the start device where SB and SW are transferred SB and SW can be automatically transferred to a device in a CPU module without using a
136. other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 419 Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SH NA 080394E M 420 MELSEC Q CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual MODEL QJ61BT11N U SY E MODEL 13JR64 SH NA 080394E M 1205 MEE s MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 a NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPA When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
137. parameter for example a 69Cy mismatch error will not occur 0 Normal SWOO9D 1 shay m xample of a mismatch error 69D Loading param eter consistency meme P i O x x SWOO9E status nstallation arameter 69E Remote device station Remote I O station Remote I O station Intelligent device station SWO009F Remote device station 69F b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b bO SW009C SWO009D SWO009E SWO009F 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on This item is checked and the result is stored only upon data link start and the update of a parameter SWOOBA The result of the line test 1 is stored 6B4y 0 Normal 1 Error SWO00B5 6B5 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b bO d Line test 1 SWO00B4 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 O x O result SWOOBG u SWO00B5 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 6B6 SWO00B6 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 SWO00B7 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 SWO00B7 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers 6B7 The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations The result of the line test 1 or line test 2 is stored VINDUBE Line test it 0 Normal x x 6B8 ine test resu O Values other than 0 Error code gt Page 291 Section 11 3 2 356 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Numb
138. peripherals to station access not accessing the remote the remote device station device station Check the application of the request source An error has been detected in the Check if multiple peripherals Request procedure i request procedure in access from are not accessing the remote BF39 error remote device O O the peripherals to the remote device station station access device station Check if a value is not written in the system area in the buffer memory Please consult your local BFFA System error O x 306 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code SA 3 c Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station Too many transient requests i Transient request Wait for a while and send the BFFB were sent from the programming O O overload error request again tool or GOT BFFE CPU monitoring timer The CPU monitoring timer timed Check operations of the target o o timeout out station Error detected in a Ethernet interface module C000 to CFFF LL Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual D000 to DFFF T QnUCPU User s Manual Communication via Built in Ethernet Port Error detected in a CC Link IE Field Network LL CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual E000 to EFFF Error detected in a CC Link IE Controller Network LL CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Man
139. program Blank or the following range Device M L B D W R SB or ZR M B D W and SB for a MELSECNET H remote I O station Device number Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range Device M L B D W R SW or ZR M B D W and SW for a MELSECNET H Special remote I O station Register SW Device number Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Retry Count Set the number of retries when a communication failure occurs 1 to 7 Default 3 Set the number of slave stations that return to the system Automatic operation by a single link scan after the stations are disconnected Reconnection due to a communication failure 1 to 10 Default 1 Station Count Setting a larger number extends link scan time of when the station returns Standby Master Station No Set the station number for the standby master station Set the number of the station that controls a CC Link system instead of the master station if a master station goes down Page 136 Section 8 2 5 Blank 1to 64 Default Blank PLC Down Select Scan Mode Setting Delay Time Setting Select whether to stop or continue data link if a stop error occurs in a CPU module gt Page 131 Section 8 2 2 Whether to synchronize the link scan with the sequence scan of a CPU module or
140. programmable controller CPU is set to STOP Whether to refresh or compulsorily clear remote output RY when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP can be selected How the remote output RY should be handled can be selected according to the system used gt Page 122 Section 7 5 1 Applicable output sending data The following figure shows applicable data Local station station number 4 Local station station number 3 Remote I O station Remote device station Master station station number 1 station number 2 Remote input RX Remote input RX Remote input RX Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 Remote input RX Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 3 gt Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 gt Station number 4 Remote output RY N Remote output RY Remote output RY Station number 1 Output Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 Remote output RY Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote register Remote register Remote register RWr RWr RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 Remote register i RWr IK Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWw Stat
141. prohibit 1 1 tt MovP H3 vigo specification RWw0 i I MOVP H30 W101 CH 1 to 4 input range setting 1 i RWw1 MOVP H200 W103 Averaging process specification 1 RWw3 1 1 r CH 2 average time number of MOVP K16 W105 1 7 times setting RWw5 1 1 Turn on Initial data setting 1 SET Y1019 request flag RY 19 X1019 a fanis Turn off Initial data setting 7 request flag RY19 2 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Digital output value reading X101B X1000 M MOV wo D500 pea digital output value X1001 r Read CH 2 digital output value MOV wi D501 elg p RWr1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Process at error occurrence X101A MOVP W8 D508 Read Error code RWr8 ds SET Y101A Turn on Error reset request flag RY1A we ayaa RST Y101A Turn off Error reset request flag RY1A To the next page 248 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING m s F AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Initial setting change 1 I 1 a reve Hore Wia Analog output enable disable 1 setting RWw8 1 r CH 1 to 4 output range setting MOVP H30 W115 T RWw9 i Turn on Initial data setting 1 LSET A079 request flag RY19 I ae RST 1079 Turn off Initial data setting so request flag RY19 mu AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Digital value setting X22 X107B iai i MOVP K500 wioc J Re digital value setting MOVP K1000 W10D pow digital value setting AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable disable setting X23 adi is viogo Turn on C
142. request for the interrupt to a CPU module is issued when the conditions that have been set using a programming tool are satisfied and the interrupt program can be executed This function is used to stop the control and execute an interrupt program upon an error or for other purposes Page 157 Section 8 3 2 Automatic CC Link startup Data link can be performed by powering on the master local module This function is used to check the operation of when a system is configured Page 158 Section 8 3 3 Reserved station function Slave stations that are not actually connected but will be connected in future are not detected as Data Link Faulty Station in the master station and local station By setting slave stations that will be connected in future as reserved stations slave stations can be added without a program change because the RX RY RWr RWw assignment is not changed In addition the number of points of a slave station that has been set as a reserved station can be set as zero points Page 161 Section 8 3 4 Error invalid station setting function Temporary error invalid station setting function Even if a data link error occurs in a slave station the station is not detected as a faulty station in the master station and local station This function is used when a slave station is powered off as a matter of the system configuration or for other purposes Even if a data link error occurs in a slave station t
143. saved in Excel 5 Perform troubleshooting with reference to the Open Field Network CC Link Troubleshooting Guide Point Precautions when a transmission speed is checked Do not obtain check the transmission speed setting using GX Works 2 and a program or other peripherals at the same time Doing so may fail the acquisition of the transmission speed setting Check sheet When Microsoft Excel 2000 or later has been installed on the personal computer the system configuration figure is output 315 2 Example of a check sheet The following is an example of a check sheet when it is created on the personal computer where Microsoft Excel 2000 or later has been installed Confirmation Item Contents 1 Master Station 1 Master Type 2 Master Version 120820000000000B 100320000000000B 3 Module Mount Status 4 Other Network Module Je1BT11 5 Mode Remote Net Mode Ver 1 Additional Ver 2 Remote I O Net Mode Synchronous Asynchronous Mode I O mode Jintelligent mode SW8 A Series Only Checking the parameter matching status between the specification and PLC 20UDEHCPU m X o a 2 ow E 3 t c oOo o o a o cy x I a a oj ni x o a E m e S Fe re e e I o x o a c o a o opm Do 5 S 3 2 S S E 8 S 8 9 S 3 8 Bl 3 ol 2 Fa S s lt 5 2 2 S 3 S 2 5 5 3 o amp S 2 wl 2 Ss S S gs sg gl 3 ol Sl
144. set to STOP etdiki a a bou Mek ed ee nies 134 Remote device station 2 14 Remote device station initial setting 101 108 Remote device station initialization procedure registration function llle 153 Remote I O net mode 14 43 54 Remote I O station 0 00 cece eee 14 Remote I O station points setting 169 Remote input RX 0 100 328 Remote net additional mode 14 43 50 Remote net mode 1 cee ees 14 Remote net Ver 1 mode 14 43 45 Remote net Ver 2 mode 14 43 47 Remote output RY 100 329 Remote register RWr 100 330 Remote register RWw 100 331 Remote station 20000 eee eee 14 Remote Station Points 104 107 Replacing a QJ61BT11 with aQJ61BT11N 392 Replacing an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 with a QUGIBT TAN 4 Ihe XE 391 Reserve Invalid Station Select 107 Reserved station 0 0 cee ee 161 Reserved Err Invalid STA 2 0 2 000 ceca 104 Retry Count pao Iis dA ARSSEA 101 Return 5 epa be dyerbi tre ee b EMO 14 RUN LED 2 aie a e RI PERS 21 RWE solida itta eeu epe A det Ns A IRE d ue 13 RWW eee eer HIE Ea ad esa 13 RX ata nea 4 ttem U par uy darius EU ce star NET RD 13 IY ocu tct te tudin see A D qe ETE 13 S S MST LED usate bs 21 Safety precautions 2000000 0 eee 1 SB red dep
145. station Received stored in S1 4 Response PT LOL specified in S1 3 BEENNEm If the receivable data size S1 3 is smaller than the receive data size S1 4 data sent from a remote device station cannot be received The G P RDMSG instruction will fail error code B418 The following explains the operations when the receivable data size S1 3 is not equal to the receive data size S1 4 Receivable data size S1 3 gt Receive data size S1 4 Programmable controller CPU Master station Remote device station Device Received Response ee ERR Data are not updated CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS When the receivable data size S1 3 is an odd number of bytes Programmable controller CPU Master station Remote device station In the high byte of the last data Device Received 0 is stored Response When the receive data size S1 4 is an odd number of bytes when data received from a remote device station is an odd number of bytes in length Programmable controller CPU Master station Remote device station In the high byte of the last data Device Received 0 is stored Response EHEHERHENHUEE SHEER RE SSINGqH d o 6 6 223 3 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RDMSG instruction Master station Target station
146. station 10 to 134 16 to 19 nee Default 0 Not set specification f Range The bit corresponding to the station number turns on Error invalid station specification status is stored Error invalid station 144 to 17 20 to 23 POMA Default 0 Not set specification Range The bit corresponding to the station number turns on 325 seeJy fuouie N Jeyng Z xipueddy Address Item Description Hexadecimal Decimal 18 to 1Fy 24 to 31 oe prohibited The setting status of the station type the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting of the connected slave stations is stored Default 01014 Ver 1 compatible remote I O station one station occupied and station number 1 to 0140 Ver 1 compatible remote I O station one station occupied and station number 64 Range Refer to the following b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to bO Number of 20 First station 32 First station Station type occupied stations Station No Station t 11064 to information on H to 40H i i i SFy 64th station 95 64th station 1H Number of occupied stations 1 2H Number of occupied stations 2 3H Number of occupied stations 3 4H Number of occupied stations 4 OH Ver 1 compatible remote I O station 1H Ver 1 compatible remote device station 2H Ver 1 compatible intelligent device station 5H Ver 2 compatible remote device station single 6H Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station
147. station and interlock with the station Use Other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 to detect data link status in a slave station 7 5 Page 348 Appendix 3 2 Also create an error handing program Ex Interlock method Assume that the start I O number of the master local module is 0000 and a refresh device is set as follows Number of Modules 1 vwj Boards Blank No Setting Iv Set 1 Start I O No 0000 Operation Setting Operation Setting BurwwesboJd JO suonne eJd pOL Type Master Station X Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode 2 Total Module Connected 1 Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB d 580 Special Register 5W Refresh device 221 Devices used for the program example Device Description Device Description Other station data link status station X0 Module error SW0080 0 number 1 Other station data link status station X1 Host data link status SW0080 1 number 2 XF Module ready e MC NO Mo XO XOF xi SW80 1 MC Ni M1 F 2 Refresh devices to be set Set the refresh devices without overlaps with the following Refresh parameters of modules on the network I O number
148. system even if the master station goes down 1 Types of the standby master function The standby master function can be categorized into three types as listed below O Enabled x Disabled Function When the master station goes down the standby master station operates as a master When a failed master station becomes normal again it return as a standby master When only a standby master station is started up it starts data link as a master station station to continue data link station Master station switching function O x x1 Master station duplex function O O x Data link start function using a O O O standby master station 2 1 A standby master station does not start data link until the master station starts up 2 Configure the same system for the master station and standby master station same modules connected parameters and program 3 Before using this function check the version of the master local module 7 gt Page 395 Appendix 6 2 2 Operation of the standby master function The following are the operations of the master station and standby master station of when the master station goes down The following figure shows the operation until a failed master station goes back to normal after the standby master station starts to operate as a master station and data link is continued Controlling Controlling the data link of the CC Link system Standby status Standing by in c
149. the same time The line test may not be normally executed 4 Transmission speed test A transmission speed test cannot be executed on the CC Link diagnostics of GX Developer Execute a test using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs 7 3 Page 92 Section 6 5 2 2 5 Status logging The status logging cannot be performed on the CC Link diagnostics of GX Developer Use GX Works2 to perform it 399 sonsouBbelp yurq 22 7 xipueddy Jedoje eq x9 Buisn uey z xipueddy 6 Data link stop restart How to stop and restart data link of a master local module is described below During a debugging session the master local module does not receive data from other stations and does not send data of the host station 1 Open the CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics window XW Diagnostics 2 CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics 2 In Module Setting select CC Link Then select a master local module to be monitored in Module No or I O Address 3 Click the Start Monitoring button 4 Click the Stop Data Link button or Start Data Link button CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics Line Monitor Host station r Module Setting Link Sean Time fccimk Host Station Master StationlVer 2 mode criin z Max 2 Data Link Status Start Data linking me Module No 1 s Minimum f2 ms 5 Action Status Normal D C V0 Address Switching Status Master Station Current 2 ms Iz UsingLoop CH
150. the setting as follows D Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Initial Setting button Remote Device Station Initial Setting Target Station Number Setting Module 1 Initial setting for the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Target Station No No of Registered Procedures Target Station No No of Registered Procedures 1 D Regist Procedure 9 Regist Procedure 4 O Regist Procedure Regist Procedure Initial setting for the AJ6E5VBTCU 68DAVN Regist Procedure Regist Procedure Regist Procedure Regist Procedure Regist Procedure Regist Procedure Regist Procedure Regist Procedure Cancel 4 Click the Merere button to open the Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration window 5 Select HEX in Input Format and enter information in other columns Initial setting for an AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN station number 1 Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration Module 1 Target S x Select H EX Input Format HEX x Execute Operational Condition Executional Condition Details of Execution Flag Condition Execute Write Device No Condition Devie No X RWw Rww Execute Set New Execute Same as Prev Set Same as Prev Set Same as Prev Set Same as Prev Set J 4 Same as Prev Set Set New Set New
151. to RX 110 bd i i i i RY MF to RY 110 4211H i i RY 11F to RY 110 42114 i 40124 RX12F to RX 120 50d RY 12F to RY 120 4212H RY 12F to RY 120 4212 Station NE i i i Station i Station No 7 to to i i i i to to No7 o to to No7 400DH RX 1DF to RX 1D0 i i 1 i 4 RY 1DF to RY 1D0 421DH RY 1DF to RY 1D0 421D 400EH RX 1EF to RX 1E0 a RY 1EF to RY 1E0 421EH RY 1EF to RY 1EO 421E to to to to to to 41FCH RX1FCF to RX1FCO 41FDH RX1FDF to RX1FDO 41FEH RX1FEF to RX1FEO 41FFH RX1FFF to RX1FFO RY1FCF to RY1FCO 43FCH RY1FDF to RY1FDO 43FDH RY1FEF to RY1FEO 43FEH RY1FFF to RY1FFO 43FFH RY1FCF to RY1FCO 43FCH RY1FDF to RY1FDO 43FDu RY1FEF to RY1FEO 43FEH RY1FFF to RY1FFO 43FFH 338 APPENDICES 11 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWw and Ver 2 compatible remote register RWr These areas are used when the remote net Ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected In the remote net Ver 2 mode data are stored in the remote register RWr RWw of all slave stations including a Ver 1 compatible slave station 7 5 Page 49 Section 3 6 4 3 In the remote net additional mode data are stored in the remote register RWr RWw in a Ver 2 compatible slave station gt Page 53 Section 3 6 5 3 a Storage location for each station The storage locations change depending on the number of occupied stations an
152. total buffer size of Automatic intelligent device station using automatic update buffer Automatic for all slave stations must Set the size required for each intelligent device station be 4096 or less Default 128 107 sjieyep Dunes Z 7 uonejs 19 Se e 10 sBumes sejoweseg Z 3 Remote Device Station Initial Setting Register the initial settings using a programming tool and reflect them to a remote device station using Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD D Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Initial Setting button To Target Station No set the station number of the remote device station where the initial Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration Module 1 Target S Operational Condition Executional Condition Details of Execution Device Execute Same as Prev Set settings are configured Set the start station number instead if the number of occupied stations is two or more 2 Click the Meseros button 3 Register the procedure for the initial settings in the Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration window 4 Clickthe 5 button and close the setting window Input Format pc x Execute Flag Execute Set New Set New ote D Set New Set New
153. was replaced due to failure the initial process used to be performed in all the stations Now the initial process can be performed only in a specified remote device station that has been replaced Remote device stations other than a specified station continue to operate This applies to a master local module with a serial number f irst five digits of 08032 or later Ex To specify the remote device station station number 3 Initial procedure registered station numbers 1 3 5 7 Programming 154 tool Pas Master station Station number 3 Initial process using Specification of remote device station to be initialized 0000 OO00000000Q OO0 90000000 2 Remote device station station number 1 Replace coco ecooccocod OOO OOOO 0000 oooocoocod OO0 90000000 Replace the failed remote device station station number 3 Remote device station station number 3 Remote device station station number 5 Remote device station station number 7 2 Use Specification of remote device station to be initialized SW0014 to SW0017 to specify the station number 3 Turn on the applicable bit only the bit of the start station number in SW0014 to SW0017 SW0014 SW0015 SW0016 SW0017 Point b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b2 b1 b0 16 15 14
154. with the serial number listed below CPU module First 5 digits of the serial No Basic model QCPU 06112 or later High Performance model QCPU 05032 or later Process CPU excluding a QO2PHCPU and Q06PHCPU 07032 or later 2 Use a CPU module with the serial number listed below CPU module First 5 digits of the serial No High Performance model QCPU Process CPU 08032 or later Redundant CPU 09102 or later 3 Use a CPU module with a serial number first five digits of 08032 or later 4 A Process CPU with Version 8 24A or later supports this function 5 A Redundant CPU with Version 8 58L or later supports this function 6 Use a Universal model QCPU with a serial number first five digits of 11043 or later 395 a Npoyy E20 1 1e se N e jo SuOnOUNY eu BulpesBdA 9 xipueddy Appendix T When using GX Developer This appendix describes the operations of GX Developer which are different from those of GX Works2 When GX Developer is used read this appendix before operation The operations that are not described in this appendix are the same as those of GX Works2 Appendix 7 1 Parameter settings GX Developer does not have the station information setting on the CC Link configuration window Set the station information on the CC Link Station Information window s Page 106 Section 7 3 2 2 b CC Link Station Information Module 1 Expanded Cyclic Occupied Re
155. write points is 20 words buffer memory in CC Link monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of write points 16 16 1 x 1 067 SL WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 16 x 1 067 0 10 x 0 x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 3 x 1 067 0 76 505 76 5ms The decimal point is rounded up Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried APPENDICES 3 Master station lt gt intelligent device station a Master station intelligent device station The time between the master station issuing an instruction and it receiving a response from an intelligent device station is calculated as follows Formula lt Maximum value gt G P RIRD instruction OT LS x BC number of read points 16 16 x 1 067 WT x RT x 1000 ms A OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU Q02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and Q02CPUJ 0 5ms LS Link scan time 5 Page 362 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 WT Monitoring time set in SW0009 7 7 Page 348 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SWOOOB 5 Page 348 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a Q06HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of read points is 20 words monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number o
156. 0 PROGRAMMING 10 2 3 Settings for a remote device station Set the station number transmission speed and mode using the switches on the remote device station 1 Switch setting on an AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Station number setting Switch transmission speed setting switch e 40 OFF o 3 ad 20 OFF am eo Qef OFF z Station nr o 8 OFF number 1 E g 4 OFF iv Lo fo 2 OFF 1 ON eo N o 6 Mode selection switch Ce 0 Normal mode 2 Switch setting on an AJ6E5VBTCU 68DAVN Station number setting Switch transmission speed setting switch uoneijs 9914p 90W91 e 10 sBumes z oL ules sdlAeq 9jouie e pue uonels Jejse y e ueeweg suoreoiunuiuo Jo ejdurex3 z OL e 1 Li 4 14 o 14 I 1 co hi Station ELSE AJGSVBTCU 68DAVN y No 4 6 co J ug ba LO lt eo SN 156kbps o MITSUBISHI CCrinx EA Mode selection switch A 6 p x c 0 Normal mode 245 10 2 4 Checking the status of data link 246 Power on the remote station then master station to start data link When the LEDs are in the following states data link is being performed normally 1 LEDs on the master station QJ61BT11N RUN M BMLRUN MST BN S MST SD I MRD ERR L ERR B ON Fl
157. 0 x 1 3 x 2 1 5 20 3 2 1 5 20 x 1 3x2 4 1 5 Max value 27 5ms 27 5ms 27 5ms 27 5ms 368 APPENDICES 2 Master station lt gt remote device station Ver 1 compatible slave station a Master station RX remote device station RX RWr This is the time between a signal input to a remote device station and the device of a CPU module turning on off or the time until the data in the device of a CPU module is changed Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM LS Link scan time Master station sequence scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up Rd Remote device station processing time Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 1 Rd SM x n x 1 Rd SM LS x 1 Rd SM x n x 1 Rd Max value SM xn LS x 2 Rd SM x n x 2 Rd SM LS x 2 Rd SM x n x 2 Rd Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and remote device station processing time is 1 5ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20x 1 3x 1
158. 000 2 2 1 1 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible a terminating resistor of 110 2 used OT Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Transmission speed 1 2 distance 156kbps 1200m 625kbps 30cm or longer 600m 2 5Mbps 200m Between 30cm and 59cm 110m 5Mbps 1m or longer 60cm or longer 150m Between 30cm and 59cm 50m 10Mbps Between 60cm and 99cm 80m 1m or longer 100m e CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible a terminating resistor of 130 used Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Transmission speed 1 2 distance 156kbps 1200m 625kbps 900m 2 5Mbps 400m 5Mbps 30cm or longer 160m Number of connected stations 100m 1 to 32 1m or longer Number of Between 30cm and 39cm 80m 10Mbps i OL 40cm or longer 100m Number of Between 30cm and 39cm 20m connected stations Between 40cm and 69cm 30m 49 to 64 70cm or longer 100m 1 This is a station to station cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations 12 This is a station to station cable length between a master station and a station one before after the master station 3 When this range is applied for one section the maximum overall cable distance is the shortest station to station cable length CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Ex Whe
159. 05 J CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turn on Initial data processing completion flag RY18 ra n m 4 lt 2 E ii Turn on Initial data setting o SET yioig request flag RY19 e remp gL pein Er xi A pe EC LEE PE ant Be PR gO ENN are Bre Ome Ia que gee ne as eo gee ao Ee C 5a AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Initial setting change n 1 ee t A D conversion enable prohibit 1 i m MOVES Mg WI00 J specification RWwO 1 r CH 1 to 4 input range setting I l LMOVP H30 w101 RWw1 I M PON 1 r 4 Averaging process specification LMOVP H200 W103 4 RWw3 i I 1 LMOUE X iis Wios CH 2 average time number of 1 i times setting RWw5 i LI ul F Turn on Initial data setting I SET moi ve request flag RY19 E s AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Process of completing the initial setting X1018 r 4 Turn off Initial data processin RST Yi018 P 9 T completion flag RY18 X1019 iti i RST Yo Turn off Initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Initial setting X1078 Analog output enable disable MOVP HOFC W114 7 setting RWw8 MOVP H31 W115 q CH 1 to 4 output range setting RWw9 MOVP HO W117 HOLD CLEAR setting RWwB wes6oJd e uo Ajuo peunBuyuoo s Bunjes jenu ay ueuw ejduexe uej6o4d 9Z 0L uoHels solAeq 9jouie e pue uonels Jejse y e ueeweg suorjeoiunuiuo Jo ejdurex3 z
160. 07p 318 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 7 Hardware information The operating status and setting status of the master local module are displayed 1 Operating procedure 1 Open the System Monitor window XX Diagnostics lt gt System Monitor 2 Select a master local module in the System Monitor window 3 Click the Hw Information button H W Information Monitor Status p Module Model Name QJ61BT11N Product p 100320000000000 8 r Display Format C DEC HIW SW Information Stop Monitor 2 Display contents a Product Information The function version and serial number of the module are displayed as shown below uoneuuoJul SeMPIeH ZY LL ZSM X9 Burst sonsouBeiq xur 29 t LL 100320000000000 B Function version B Serial No First 5 digits 319 b H W LED Information The following table lists data link status displayed under H W LED Information Item Description RUN 1 Operating normally 0 A hardware failure or a watchdog timer error has occurred ERR 1 A communication failure has occurred in all stations Changes between 0 and 1 A communication failure has occurred in a station MST 1 The master local module is operating as a master station LOCAL 1 The master local module is operating as a local station SW ERR 1 Switch setting error M S ERR 1 A master station has already existed in the same line PRM E
161. 1 CPU module Master station output 16 points input 8 points output 8 points Station No 1 Station No 2 pain eem eig Bufermemoy Aa EN i _ Device Remote register RWr i 2 WO ti 12E0H 736 pod i Station No 1 i i Station No 1 i i i i i w3 777 a 7 12E3H 737 L4 l 1 Ww i ol TOTT 2E4H 738 rg i j 1 1 ot 1 T i i i I l Device actually used by the remote I O stations CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION Remote register RWw Because an AJ65BTB2 16T and AJ65BTB1 16DT are remote I O stations the remote register RWw is not used Note however that four points equivalent to the points for one station are occupied in the master local module because the system is in the remote net Ver 1 mode AJ65BTB2 16T output module AJ65BTB1 16DT combined module Remote I O station Remote I O station CPU module Master station output 16 points input 8 points output 8 points Station No 1 Station No 2 Luc wl Buffer memory fe gerer ee Device _ Remote register RWw W100 tt _ 1E0H 480 gt Station No 1 Station No 1 1 I tation No 2 1 1 1 1 Ap j 1 i I 1 I I 1 i l 1 I Sie 1 W103 5 0 l TE3H481 W104 ME4H 482 0 l j 1 i I i i _ _ 4E7H 483 1 Device actually used by the remote I O stations Point Using the remote net Ver 2 mode can reduce the number
162. 1 p Station No 2 RX RWr Range of the CTTTI FP station No 2 sending data el Station No 2 ee ee ee ee ee ee Buffer memory RX RWr Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Y RWw Station No 1 Station No 2 Range of the station No 3 sending data other stations RWr and RWw are not used for a remote I O station Note however that buffer memory areas are occupied depending on the mode of the master local module gt Page 45 Section 3 6 3 Page 54 Section 3 6 6 www ew ew we ew ew ee ee ew ew ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee rt CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 2 How to start communications Power on the slave station then master station to start data link When the parameter settings are reflected the master local module starts data link automatically When the settings are configured using a programming tool resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system reflects the settings When the settings are configured using dedicated instructions executing the dedicated instructions reflects the settings Note that the master station sends data only to a station where data link has been started The master station does not send data to a station where data link is not being performed suolouny y Jo suoneoriddy oiseg 1 g uoissiusueJ DDAD suoneoiunuuuoo Ipod L8 127 8 1 2 Non periodic co
163. 1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Value other than 0 Error code 8S1 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station 0 to 64 User S1 2 Actes code Set 00044 00044 User Attribute code S1 3 Buffer memory address Specify the start address of the buffer memory 1 User 1 4 Number of read points Specify the number of read data in word units 1 to 480 2 User 4 For details refer to the manual for the intelligent device station from which data are read 2 The value indicates the maximum number of read data Specify the value within the buffer memory capacity of the intelligent device station or within the receive buffer area setting range set by a parameter b Interlock signal storage device 2 Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range RY Request device 0 to 127 User S2 0 b15 to b8 b7 to bO 0 RY Set 0 to the upper eight bits 0 User RX Completion device 0 to 127 User 82 1 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Rwr Error code storage device eT RWr RX If the error code storage device does not exist set FF User S H A FFy T 0 The host station completes the process by checking z b15 to bO the contents of one device RXn 9 82 2 Completion mode 1 The host station completes the process by checking 0 1 User the contents of two devices RXn and RXn 1 RXn 1 turns on at an abnormal end
164. 1 Intelligent 1 1 1 1 i device station I d i 4 q 1 Lt Rx E LRX iJ LRX H i RY i r i j 1 I i q D i RY RY N RY A RX i A i o RWw oe RWw AD RWr I Ww ut Poo td Ww 3 o RWr gt ft RWr ys 01 RWw i 9 i 91 _ P n 1 x A E Le E b j z o le c D o b Non periodic communications transient transmission Data can be communicated when a request is issued unlike cyclic transmission Direct access to buffer memory areas and devices in other stations can be performed in transient transmission LC Page 172 CHAPTER 9 CPU module Master station Local station CPU module Command hH Hinstucton Device Write Device request je 1234H Terminating Terminating resistor resistor 17 2 Parameter settings and diagnostics using a programming tool a Parameter settings using a programming tool Parameters of master local modules can be set using a programming tool Therefore parameter setting programs need not to be created resulting in reduction in the program amount gt Page 94 CHAPTER 7 Paramete odule Configuratio im Number of Modules 1 wj Boards Blank No Setting Iz i onfiguration Mo 00 Start IJO No 0000 3 CC Link Configuration Edt wiew Operation Setting ration Mo
165. 1 ot Station pod 1 am Station 1 1 station sending data to No 2 1 1 No 2 1 1 the station No 2 1 1 d pod 1 1 9 1 1 1 pO 1 1 i RWr d RWr 1 1 pod 1 i RWr 1 1 1 Range of rot 1 I Station viae raa d the station TED TITPTETET TT TIT 1 1 Station l 1 No 1 b No 1 j i i e 1 No 1 I ding dat d i Station Ti sening data 1 aM 2 1 Station 1 1 Z2 pod pod 1 H No 2 1 1 F No 2 d ot pod 12464 0 1 1 RW 4 1 RW rot 1 1 E RW 1 1 Ww 1 Ww ot po e w 1 I Ie L Range of the master 1 p 1 1 i i 3 station sending data to Station L q 1 Station 1 i the station No 1 No 1 i i 1 1 No 1 j 1 1 1 pod Station 1 i 1 I 1 i 1 Station No 2 i 1 i No 2 1 q 1 L i 1 1 1 1 Ver 2 compatible RX I 1 I 1 1 RX Ver 2 compatible 1 1 area S pod Range of 1 1 area Station A a E the station Station i No 3 1 1 l 1 No 3 1 1 No 3 1 I 1 i sending data 1 1 1 1 SEND E fee Buses Bess EA I Station i 2 No 4 1 MN N A we m Ne4 9 i 1 1 1 147 1 1 RY l pod RY to ka RY j 1 R 5 1 1 1 to 1 1 De o Eod pog 1 Station Station 1 i on No 1 I pod No 3 ko No 3 1 Range of the maste 4 I rot 1 1 1 Range of the LI ation sending data to 1 1 station No 4 1 i 2 MERATE 1 1 i 1 1 ly sending data ui RWr tf Rw to RWr i 1 Range of 1 Station eee oe eee 5 2 B CE ae Station 1 No 3 1 1 ot 1 ot Naa A i No 3 1 7 se
166. 1 station station number 2 Third Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 3 Reserved station specification station number 3 Error invalid station specification station number 2 First station number 1 local station Send buffer 100 word First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 100 word First station number 1 local station Automatic update buffer 0 word To the next page CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Parameter registration data link startup M300 Dedicated instruction iv LGP RLPASET U10 DO D10 D50 D60 D70 M301 J G P RLPASET Process at completion of the G P RLPASET instruction M301 Turn the parameter setting LRST M300 J instruction off M302 Instruct to refresh at normal Jt sET SB3 completion of the G P RLPASET instruction P Instruct to start the control LSET M310 J program at normal completion of the G P RLPASET instruction M302 1 Perform abnormal completion process Parameter setting change Parameter change instruction occupies 1 station station number 3 1 Set the station number in hexadecimal Example Set 14x for station No 20 To the next page M500 SB6E E n t AF LSET SB2 J Instruct to stop data link SB45 RST SB2 Turn the data link stop instruction off RST SB3 Instruct to stop refreshing S
167. 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable 1100 1 2W Brown Brown Brown CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible BUI 29 130 1 2W Brown Orange Brown When the A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 is used as a master station in a T branch system configuration the terminating resistors included with the master local module cannot be used s Page 80 Section 6 2 3 1 Bum eJojeq uonesedeig 1 79 Tf 6 2 2 Wiring procedure Connect a CC Link dedicated cable to the terminal block of the master local module 1 Wiring procedure a Wiring diagram Blue Blue Blue Blue i DA TT TT DA T TT DA Terminating NI TM ae TUN Terminating resistor pp Wee l White DB White White DB resistor DG Yellow i i i Yelow DG Yellow 1 Yelow DG SLD CC Link dedicated cabl amp sLD CC Link dedicated cable J SLD FG FG FG b Actual wiring diagram Terminating resistor Point Connect the terminating resistors between the DA and DB terminals Connect the shielded cables of a CC Link dedicated cable to the SLD terminal through the FG terminal Then ground the cables at both ends with a ground resistance of 100Q or less The SLD and FG terminals are connected inside No restrictions apply to the connection order
168. 1000 1 1 BMOV wo D100 K4 SET Y1000 X1000 LAS RST Y1000 Send CPU Master Local CPU request module station station module X1000 LE AL a uy itm e das Receive data QW h nume snm VIR Receive data W iR SS X1000 pn RX0 S LR X1000 e Jews H pe 000 RWwO RWwO W1000 un gum 4 Q dui Cyclic transmission e Auto refresh Send data W JlsET Y1000 Turn on Send request MO in the master station Turn on Receive request MO in the local station Information in DO to D3 is transferred to W100 to W103 RWwO to RWw3 3 After the information is stored in W100 to W103 turn on Y1000 for a handshake in the master station Q Data in RWw is sent before data in RY is sent by cyclic transmission Then X1000 in the local station turns on Information in WO to W3 is stored into D100 to D103 o After the information is stored in D100 to D103 turn on Y1000 for a handshake in the local station Turning on Y1000 in the local station turns off Y1000 in the master station Q Turning off Y1000 in the master station turns off Y1000 in the local station 1 If a handshake is performed in one bit of the remote I O RX RY in a station with the number of occupied stations of two or more the integrity of cyclic data is assured per slave station An interlock for the number of occupied stations in units of four words is not required UOI E S E207 pue uomejs Jejse J
169. 13 12 11 3 2 1 32 31 30 29 28 27 19 18 17 48 47 46 45 44 43 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 60 59 51 50 49 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers When all bits are off an initial process is performed in all the stations set in the remote device station initial setting of the network parameter 3 Configure the initial setting by turning on Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB000D During the initial process in the station number 3 other stations station numbers 1 5 and 7 continue the control CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 5 Precautions a Processing time Because one step is executed per link scan more setting items extend the processing time further than that of when a program is used b While Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB000D is on Data in the remote I O RX RY and remote register RWr RWw stops to be refreshed c Handling of signals that are required to be always on such as CH O Conversion enable flag of an AJ65BT 64RD3 4 Turning off Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD after the initial process is completed turns off all the RY signals that have turned on while the initial procedure registration is performed To prevent this use a program to turn on signals that are required to
170. 16x A 54 x B 88x C lt oo 2304 Station information A The number of remote I O Set parameters meeting the B397 setting error 2 O x stations condition described to the left parameter B The number of remote device stations C The number of intelligent device stations including local stations A value other than 1 to 4 is set as Number of occupied j f the number of occupied stations un B398 stations setting error AEN Set the value within 1 to 4 O x in the station information parameter parameter Number of connected A value other than 1 to 64 is set B399 modules setting error in the number of connected Set the value within 1 to 64 O x parameter modules parameter The station number set using the station number setting switches Change the parameter setting of of the standby master station the master station or change the differs from that set in Standby station number using the station Standby master station Won Master Station No of the number setting switches of the B39A specification error x Oo network parameter for the master local station or standby master installation status station or the station set in station then reset the CPU Standby Master Station No of module on the local station or the network parameter for the standby master station master station is a local station B39B Reserved station All stations are set as a reserved Correct the reserved station o
171. 19 11 5 Hardware Test 0 0 0 0 lee rrr 321 APPENDICES 323 Appendix 1 Description of I O Signals lisssssssssse see 323 Appendix 2 Buffer Memory Areas 2 00000 a 325 Appendix 3 Link Special Relays SBs and Link Special Registers SWs 340 Appendix 3 1 Link special relays SBs llle 340 Appendix 3 2 Link special registers SWs llle 348 Appendix 4 Data Link Processing Time 0000 c eee cette eens 362 Appendix 4 1 Link scantime 2 00 00 tee 362 Appendix 4 2 Transmission delay time 22s 367 Appendix 4 3 Processing time of dedicated instructions 00000000 ee eee 377 Appendix 4 4 Link refresh time 000 000 385 Appendix 5 Difference from traditional modules 2 0 000 0c cece eee 391 Appendix 5 1 Precautions when replacing an A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 with a QJ61BT11N vi eet teg eg teens e quen he tuts een ce Lund tue tutes ae set fe ne rile 391 Appendix 5 2 Precautions when replacing a QJ61BT11 with aQJ61BT11N 392 Appendix 6 Upgrading the Functions of a Master Local Module 2 0 0 000 393 Appendix 7 When using GX Developer lisse 396 Appendix 7 1 Parametersettings llle 396 Appendix 7 2 Device test 2 2 2 2 00 rre 396 Appendix 7 3 CG Link diagnOsti strsagisuts zoom sup UPS a Eae phot CUERO RS Dn PR eat 397 Appendix 8 Setting sheet 0 0 0 hh 402 Appendix 8 1 Assignme
172. 1UCPU 0 91 0 85 Q02UCPU 0 73 0 60 QO3UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU 0 47 0 35 Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU QS50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU 1 A Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU cannot be set as a local station KM2 KM3 KM4 Constant The value is the same regardless of execution of the block guarantee of cyclic data per station When a master local module is mounted on a main base unit Constant KM3 x 103 File registers File registers KM2 x 10 R ZR ona R ZR ona KM4 z g CPU type memory card memory card 22 are used are not used ren Q00JCPU 0 91 S QO0CPU 0 83 os Q01CPU 0 79 d 3 Q02CPU 0 48 0 32 0 5 p Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU ds E m z a Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU e Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 43 0 14 0 2 3 Q00UJCPU QO0UCPU Q01UCPU 0 33 E 0 2 Q02UCPU 0 33 0 05 0 2 Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU 0 23 0 03 Z 0 2 Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU 389 When a master local module is mounted on an extension base unit Constant KM3 1079 File registers File registers KM2 x10 R ZR on a R ZR on a KM4 CPU type memory card memory card are used are
173. 2 This appendix describes how to operate the CC Link diagnostics on GX Developer 1 Host station monitoring 1 How to monitor the status of a host station is described below Open the CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics window Diagnostics z CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics Line Monitor Host station 2 In Module Setting select CC Link Then select a master local module to be monitored in Module No or I O Address 3 Click the Stat Monitoring button 4 Follow the subsequent instructions for monitoring CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics Line Monitor Host station Module Setting Link Sean Ti focimk z Host Station Master Station Ver 2 mode o suc En M 2 Data Link Status StatDatalnking ms ModuleNo v 1 Action Status Noma Minimum P ns C 0 Address po Switching Status Master Station Curent 2 ms Using Loop CH 0 CH 0 Line status Normal CH 1 Line status looptest Keok tea Loop Type Twist Single Bus Monitoring other station Eos Close Item Description Displays the station type and mode of the host station Host Station Note that the mode is not displayed when the master local module is in the remote net Ver 1 mode Data Link Status Displays the data link status of the host station Action Status Displays the operating status of the host station Switching Status Displays whether the master station or standby m
174. 2 21 20 3F 3E 3D 3C 3B 3A 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 4F 4E 4D 4C 4B 4A 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 5F 5E 5D 5C 5B 5A 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 6F 6E 6D 6C 6B 6A 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 7F 7E 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 8F 8E 8D 8C 8B 8A 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 9F 9E 9D 9C 9B 9A 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 AF AE AD AC AB AA A9 A8 AT A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 AO BF BE BD BC BB BA B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO CF CE CD CC CB CA C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 CO DF DE DD DC DB DA D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO EF EE ED EC EB EA E9 E8 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 FF FE FD FC FB FA F9 F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO 10F 10E 10D 10C 10B 10A 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 nF ME MD nc 1B na 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 12F 12E 12D 12C 12B 12A 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 13F 13E 13D 13C 13B 13A 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 14F 14E 14D 14C 14B 14A 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 15F 145E 15D 15C 15B 15A 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 16F 16E 16D 16C 16B 16A 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 17F 17E 17D 17C 17B 17A 179 178 177 176 175 174 178 172 171 170 18F 18E 18D 18C 18B 18A 189 188 187 186 185 184
175. 2 Access code error Sed Use the correct access code Oo O used B803 Number of data points The number of data points is Set the number of data points o o error outside the range within 1 to 960 bytes or AOE P Change the definition Attribute definition The attribute definition is invalid HM Change the target station number error Or transient transmission was eatin ing B804 Transient transmission performed although the target g O O Or check the function version of unsupported station station did not support transient OUR E the target local station and specification error transmission software version S Set a value within 1 to 100 for Number of data points The number of data points is M peal B805 writing or within 1 to 160 for O O error outside the range reading The start device number is Set the start device number within outside the range Or the address the range Or set the address in B807 Device number error O O was not multiples of 16 when the multiples of 16 when the bit bit device was accessed device is accessed Please consult your local B80A System error mE f O O Mitsubishi representative The set combination of the Set the number of points to be address and the number of points DE B80D Setting range error processed within the device O O has exceeded the processable range range Please consult your local B80F to B812 System error M O O Mitsubishi repre
176. 2 When S2 to S5 are not to be set specify a dummy device CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS a Control data Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range Stores the status when the instruction is complete 81 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Value other than 0 Error code Specify whether the individual setting data for S2 to S5 is valid or invalid 0 Invalid 1 Valid b15b14b13 b4 b3 b2 b bO Slave station setting data S2 8S1 1 Setting flag Reserved station specification data S3 Error invalid station specification data S4 Communication and automatic update buffer assignment data S5 Mode 00 Remote Net Ver 1 Mode 01 Remote Net Additional Mode 10 Remote Net Ver 2 Mode 11 Cannot be used Total module 81 2 Set the number of connected slave stations 1 to 64 User connected 81 3 Retry count Set the number of retries to a faulty station 1to7 Automatic S1 4 reconnection station Set the number of slave stations that can return per one link scan 1 to 10 count Specify the data link status when a master station programmable controller Operation ZA CPU error occurs 81 5 specification when 0 1 0 Stop CPU is down 1 Continue Select whether to synchronize the link scan with the sequence scan or not Selecting Asynchronous shortens input transmission delay time Selecting 81 6 Scan mode setting Syn
177. 2 compatible remote output RY 10 4400 to 4BFFy 17408 to 19455 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWw Page 339 Appendix 2 4C00 to 53FFy 19456 to 21503 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWr 11 48 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 Storage locations of RX RY RWr and RWw The storage locations change depending on the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting in slave stations The storage locations for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 7 s Page 332 Appendix 2 4 Point Local station Data stored in RX RY RWr and RWw in the local station side are stored in a remote net Ver 1 mode area when the master station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode and the local station is in the remote net Ver 1 mode gt Page 46 Section 3 6 3 2 Four points are occupied per station for RWr and RWr in a remote I O station Buffer memory areas do not move over 4 Precautions a When changed from the remote net Ver 1 mode In the remote net Ver 2 mode zero points are assigned to RWr and RWw in a remote I O station Buffer memory areas move over The assignment of the station numbers for stations after the remote I O station changes therefore change the program if required pow gA jeu BJOWSY p 9 Sepo N pue jusWUBissy 9 49 3 6 5 Remote net additional mode This mode is selected when a Ver 2 compatible slave station i
178. 27 5ms 41 5ms 367 euin ejep uoissiusueJ zp xipueddy aul Buisseooug yur ejeq p xipueddy b Master station RY remote I O station output This is the time between the device of a CPU module turning on off and the output of a remote I O station turning on off Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM Master station sequence scan time LS Link scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up Rio Remote I O response time Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 1 Rio SM x n LS x 1 Rio SM LS x 1 Rio SM x n LS x 1 Rio Max value SM x n LS x 2 Rio SM x n LS x 2 Rio SM LS x 2 Rio SM x n LS x 2 Rio Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and remote I O response time is 1 5ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20x 1 3x 1 1 5 20x 1 3 x 1 1 5 20 3x1 1 5 20 x 1 3x 1 1 5 24 5ms 24 5ms 24 5ms 24 5ms 20 x 1 3x2 4 1 5 2
179. 2CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU Buffer memory The memory of an intelligent function module used to store data such as setting values and monitored values for communication with a CPU module Buffer memory address An address that indicates the storage location of data assigned to the buffer memory in an intelligent function module Programming tool A generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer Process CPU A generic term for the QO2PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Basic model QCPU A generic term for the Q00JCPU QOOCPU and Q01CPU Master local module The abbreviation for the QJ61BT11N CC Link system master local module Master station A station that controls the entire system This station can perform cyclic transmission and transient transmission with all stations Only one master station can be used in a system 13 Term Description Universal model QCPU Remote I O net mode Remote O station A generic term for the following CPU modules QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU QO2UCPU Q03UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU A mode used to perform high speed communications in a system consisting of a master station and remote I O station s only A station such as the AJ65BTB1 16D and AJ65SBTB1 16D that exchanges l O si
180. 380 to 3834 3B4 to 3B7 740 to 743 792 to 795 844 to 847 896 to 899 948 to 951 2E8 to 2EB i 31C to 31F4 35 3504 to 3534 ab 384 to 3874 55 3B8 to 3BB4 744 to 747 796 to 799 848 to 851 900 to 903 952 to 955 j 2ECy to 2EFy 47 320 to 3234 m 354 to 3574 45 388 to 38By 3BC to 3BFy 748 to 751 800 to 803 852 to 855 904 to 907 956 to 959 2F0p to 2F3y 324 to 3274 T 358 to 35By d 38Cy to 38Fj 83 3C0j to 3C3y 752 to 755 804 to 807 856 to 859 908 to 911 960 to 963 A 2F4 to 2F74 M 328 to 32By 35Cy to 35Fy m 390 to 3934 T 3C4 to 3C74 756 to 759 808 to 811 860 to 863 912 to 915 964 to 967 7 2F8 to 2FBy 25 32C to 32F 5s 360 to 3634 d 394 to 3974 56 3C8 to 3CBy 760 to 763 812 to 815 864 to 867 916 to 919 968 to 971 2FCy to 2FFy ji 330 to 3334 ay 364 to 3674 398 to 39By amp 3CCy to 3CFy 764 to 767 816 to 819 868 to 871 920 to 923 972 to 975 5 300 to 3034 J 334 to 3374 3684 to 36By 39Cy to 39Fy 3D0j to 3D34 768 to 771 820 to 823 872 to 875 924 to 927 976 to 979 i 304 to 3074 38 338 to 33By 5 36Cy to 36F 3A0 to 3A34 a 3D4 to 3D74 772 to 775 824 to 827 876 to 879 928 to 931 980 to 983 ji 3084 to 30B4 Si 33C to 33F4 5 370 to 373 T 3A4y to 3A7 6 3D8 to 3DB 776 to 779 828 to 831 880 to 883 932 to 935 984 to 987 4 30C to 30Fy 25 340 to 3434 ag 3744 to 3774 5i 3A8 to 3ABy A 3DC to
181. 3DFy 780 to 783 832 to 835 884 to 887 936 to 939 988 to 991 i3 310 to 3134 56 3444 to 3474 5 378 to 37By 3ACy to 3AFY u o 784 to 787 836 to 839 888 to 891 940 to 943 330 b Remote register RWw APPENDICES A Buffer Buffer A Buffer A Buffer Buffer Station IRI Station ne Station meine Station A Station eid number 2 number H number y number y number R address address address address address 1E0 to 1E3 T 2144 to 2174 oF 248 to 24By i 27Cy to 27Fy i 2B0 to 2B34 480 to 483 532 to 535 584 to 587 636 to 639 688 to 691 5 1E4 to 1E74 218 to 21By 58 24C to 24F4 d 280 to 2834 2B4 to 2B7 484 to 487 536 to 539 588 to 591 640 to 643 692 to 695 3 1E8 to 1EB4 21Cy to 21Fy 36 2504 to 253 iS 2844 to 2874 ee 2B8 to 2BBy 488 to 491 540 to 543 592 to 595 644 to 647 696 to 699 1EC to 1EFy z 220 to 2234 5i 2544 to 2574 T 2884 to 28By E 2BCy to 2BFy 492 to 495 544 to 547 596 to 599 648 to 651 700 to 703 1FO to 1F34 i 2244 to 2274 i 258 to 25By 2 28C to 28Fy ee 2C0 to 203 496 to 499 548 to 551 600 to 603 652 to 655 704 to 707 1F4 to 1F74 i5 228 to 22By T 25Cy to 25Fy jE 290 to 2934 2C4y to 2C7y 500 to 503 552 to 555 604 to 607 656 to 659 708 to 711 7 1F8 to 1FBy m 22Cy to 22Fy ae 260 to 263 ae 2
182. 5 Page 134 Section 8 2 4 Refresh not checked Clear compulsorily checked Default Refresh not checked Number of Occupied Stations Expanded Cyclic Setting Select the number of occupied stations for a master local module Select it only when Local Station or Standby Master Station is set to Type Select the expanded cyclic setting for a master local module Select the setting only for the following cases When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Remote Net Additional Mode is set to Mode When Local Station or Standby Master Station is set to Type Occupied Station 1 Occupied Station 2 Occupied Station 3 Occupied Station 4 Default Occupied Station 1 Single Double Quadruple Octuple Default Single Block Data Assurance per Station Select whether to assure the integrity of cyclic data for each slave station gt Page 150 Section 8 2 6 1 Disable setting not checked Enable setting checked Default Disable setting not checked 119 siejep Dunes Z v7 uonels 1ejse y Aqpueis pue uonejs e90 e 10 sPunes Jejeuelegd p 2 Interrupt Settings 1 button 2 Click the End button and close the setting window Interrupt Settings Module 1 Input Format DEC bd Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Interrupt Settings In Interrupt Settings window set the conditions on which a mas
183. 58 580 Special Register SW Sswo Retry Count Automatic Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No PLC Down Select Scan Mode Setting Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Interrupt Settinas Interrupt Settinas Operation Setting Module 1 Parameter Name m Data Link Faulty Station Setting Hold Input Data Case of CPU STOP Setting Clears Compulsorily 3 Click the End button to terminate the setting Number of Occupied Stations Occupied Station 1 v Block Data Assurance per Station 4 Write the parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Data link is started D Online lt gt Write to PLC uu or power off gt on 260 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 10 3 4 Checking the status of data link Power on the local station then master station to start data link When the LEDs are in the following states data link is being performed normally 1 LEDs on the master station QJ61BT11N RUN BMLRUN MST E S MST ON SD E ORD I Flashing 1 ERR LERR OEE 1 The LEDs may look dimly lit or off depending on the communication status 2 LEDs on the local station QJ61BT11N RUN M BLRUN MST S MST B ON sD Hf RD I Flashing ERR DILERR P
184. 634 355 to 1 In the AJ65BTB1 16DT the first eight points are used for input and the last eight points are used for output RY8 to RYF are used for output in the AJ65BTB1 16DT In a CPU module Y1028 to Y102F are actually used AJ65BTB2 16T output module Remote I O station AJ65BTB1 16DT combined module Remote I O station CPU module Master station output 16 points input 8 points output 8 points Station No 1 Station No 2 ee rie cc dcr S CSKA dp rica be cic kr a dE 1 Lo yes ee e ce stes eeeeseuE eio PSS SS SoS 1 Buffer memory 1 1 Device Remote output RY Remote output RY i i Y1000 z 160H 352 1 RYO A i s 1 Y100F E RYE p 1614 353 z E Y101F Fg 4 E 4 Y1020 162H 354 i i Remote output RY 1 1 1 1 Y1028 N NE HE RY8 1 Station No 2 1 D 4 gt P n 1634 355 EE iE I I I i at N NE Device actually used by Y103F 1 4 A 1 the remote I O stations 1 MS 1 i I Remote register RWr Because an AJ65BTB2 16T and AJ65BTB1 16DT are remote I O stations the remote register RWr is not used Note however that four points equivalent to the points for one station are occupied in the master local module because the system is in the remote net Ver 1 mode 60 AJ65BTB2 16T output module Remote I O station AJ65BTB1 16DT combined module Remote 1 0 station l Station No 2
185. 7 Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 a View z Docking Window gt CC Link Device Reference Window Master Local Start WO No i ifij1 X l C Slave Station List Link Device List l F Display Detailed Configuration Informati Display Option CSV File Output Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Host STA Target STA Target STA Host STA Target STA Host STA Target STA Refresh Link a Link Refresh Link Refresh Link un pe gm Explanation DS Explanation eu Be ges Explanation MISSE Explanation RYO RXO E RWW RWO x1001 RY1 RX1 1 Rww1 w101 1 Rwrt x1002 RY2 RX2 w2 lt RWw2 fwio2 gt Rwr2 x1003 RY3 RX3 RWW3 RWr3 RX4 RX5 RX6 RX When a master local module is in the remote net Ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode In the system configuration of the program example the assignment is the same as that in the remote net Ver 1 mode except for buffer memory addresses of data storage locations 7 7 Page 47 Section 3 6 4 Page 50 Section 3 6 5 41004 RY4 X1005 RYS X1006 RY6 41007 RY a Remote I O RX RY Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 402 Appendix 8 1 1 CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address Remote
186. 7Fy For SB 0 to FF Default Blank Execute Condition Select whether to execute the initial settings with ON of the condition device or with OFF of the condition device ON OFF Default Blank 109 siejep Dunes Z 7 uonejs 19 Se e 10 sBumes JejeureJed E Item Description Setting range Details of Execution Set the device where the initial setting details are written and the data RY Write Device Select the device where the initial settings are written RWw Default Blank Set the device number of the device set to Write Device Set 0 to the first device number for each station Ex For instance 0 to 1F can be set to the device number for the station number 4 as shown below Remote device station Remote device station For RY 0 to 37FH Station No 1 no Station No 4 no of Device No Master station sop stations 3 coiled stations 1 For RWw 0 to TF4 PA O a A EA a E Default Blank RYO ht i Station No 1 RYSF RY60 Station No 4 RY7F Set the data for the initial setti the data to b itten to the devi er ON O SFF Write Data e e data tor the initial se ings e data to be written to the device For RWw 0 to 65535 0 to FFFF set to Write Device and Device No Default Blank 5 When completing the initial settings write the settings to the CPU module using a programming tool
187. 84 Start buffer memory address of RX in the station number 3 The lower eight bits of the area buffer memory address 4018 are the Station No 3 RX size 1 14 corresponding size of RX in the station number 3 however 1 is stored because a value less than one word is rounded up Station No 4 RX offset 40184 Start buffer memory address of RX in the station number 4 The upper eight bits of the area buffer memory address 40184 are the Station No 4 RX size 1 1H corresponding size of RX in the station number 4 however 1 is stored because a value less than one word is rounded up Station No 1 RY offset 42004 Start buffer memory address of RY in the station number 1 Station No 1 RY size 24 181 384 number of points of RY 16 24 words Station No 2 RY offset 42004 Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 2 RY size 0 Default Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 3 RY offset 42184 Start buffer memory address of RY in the station number 3 The lower eight bits of the area buffer memory address 4018 are the seeJy uouie N Jeyng z xipueddy Station No 3 RY size 1 1H corresponding size of RY in the station number 3 however 1 is stored because a value less than one word is rounded up Station No 4 RY offset 42184 Start buffer memory address of RY in the station number 4 The upper ei
188. 944 to 2974 un 2C8y to 2CBy 504 to 507 556 to 559 608 to 611 660 to 663 712 to 715 i 1FCy to 1FFy yi 230 to 2334 5i 264 to 267 p 298 to 29By db 2CCy to 2CFy 508 to 511 560 to 563 612 to 615 664 to 667 716 to 719 200 to 203 3 234 to 237 58 268 to 26By dd 29C to 29F m 2D0 to 2D3 512 to 515 564 to 567 616 to 619 668 to 671 720 to 723 204 to 207 238 to 23B 26C to 26F 2A0y to 2A3 2D4 to 2D7 10 H H 23 1 H 36 H H 49 n h 62 j H 516 to 519 568 to 571 620 to 623 672 to 675 724 to 727 m 208 to 20By Ji 23Cy to 23Fy m 2704 to 2734 25 2A44 to 2A7 2D8y to 2DBy 520 to 523 572 to 575 624 to 627 676 to 679 728 to 731 m 20C to 20F 25 240 to 2434 3d 274 to 277 Es 2A8 to 2ABY E 2DCy to 2DFy 524 to 527 576 to 579 628 to 631 680 to 683 732 to 735 210 to 213 244 to 247 278 to 27B 2AC to 2AF 13 H H 26 H H 39 H H 52 H H M 528 to 531 580 to 583 632 to 635 684 to 687 331 seeJy fuouie N Jeyng z xipueddy 332 4 Slave station offset size information In the remote net Ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode the assignment of RX RY RWw RWr for each station differs depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the remote I O station points setting a Offset This area stores the start buffer memory addresses of RX RY RWw RWr assigned for each station When two or more stations are occupied a value is stored only in the start buffer
189. 98 7 4 Parameter Settings for a Local Station and Standby Master Station 115 CAA Setting method 5d ola eae nel bee ERU eee eb ur Rs 115 HAD Setting details e ota o ta C E th OE D eo EA des 116 7 5 Status Difference Between a Master Station and a Slave Station at an Error 122 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 126 8 1 Basic Applications of the Functions sssaaa 00 cece cette eens 126 8 1 1 Periodic communications cyclic transmission 0 0 000s 126 8 1 2 Non periodic communications transient transmission liiis 128 8 2 Improving the System Reliability 00 RR 129 8 2 1 Slave station cut off and automatic return 0 0 cee eee 129 8 2 2 Setting of the data link status upon an error in the programmable controller CPU of the master station 28 Lou cane CI REMPLI AR oe anole wa EE 131 8 23 Setting of the status of the input data from a data link faulty station 132 8 2 4 Refreshing compulsorily clearing a slave station when the switch on a programmable controller CPU is set to STOP 2 2 0 e 134 8 2 5 Standby master function 0000 136 8 2 6 Gyclic data ass rance sisri anene o RD DEAS EET ee de AERA RA xus 150 Useful Applications of the Functions llli 153 8 8 1 Remote device station initialization procedure registration function 153 8 8 2 Event issuance for the interrupt program 2 2 2 0 157 83 3 Automat
190. A 1S J61QBT11 cannot be used in a master local module Instruction Description CCL CCLEND Register a mail box for dedicated instructions for an intelligent device and remote device SPCCLR Issue an interrupt instruction to the dedicated instructions for an intelligent device SPCBUSY Read the status of a remote station SEND Send data a message to a specified station QnACPU RECV Read data a message sent using the SEND instruction READ SREAD Read word device data of a target station QnACPU into the host station WRITE SWRITE Write data from the host station to word device data of a target station QnACPU REQ Send a transient request such as remote RUN STOP to other stations for execution 3 Condition setting switch A master local module does not have a condition setting switch Configure settings that used to be set using a condition setting switch in the network parameter of a programming tool Appendix 5 2 Precautions when replacing a QJ61BT11 with a QJ61BT11N A QJ61BT11 can be replaced by a QJ61BT11N as is For the mode names refer to the following table Mode of a QJ61BT11 Mode of a QJ61BT11N Remote net mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote I O net mode Remote I O net mode 392 APPENDICES Appendix 6 Upgrading the Functions of a Master Local Module Before using the functions of a master local module check if the master local module CPU module and programming tool sup
191. AK S e JO uonoeuuoosip 0 ENP SWA GOlg L Z LL Suie qoJd 40 S SI Z LL Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Are there no disconnection Check if the SD LED and RD short circuit incorrect wiring LED on the faulty station are Correct the wiring poor connection and flashing coexistence of different f Cable or other cables When faulty stations occur A2 5 OS sequentially to one end on parts Do a transmission distance the transmission path check M station to station distance e EDAM Correct the wiring transmission cable and FG Mata e dd d stations close to the master terminal grounding meet the ERU station specifications Are modules on the faulty Is the power on and is the Power on the module Power supply for station on A2 6 AM applied voltage within the communications specified range Is the applied voltage within Apply the voltage within the the specified range specified range M Keep the transmission cable Check if the transmission 1 away from the power cable A station capis m away manne Keep a distance of 100mm i cannot perform power cable P dista dinie or more is recommended ata link Check if the FG terminal is A27 Noise Is the transmission cable grounded separately from Ground the terminals i free from noise the GND terminal of the separately power system Reduce the transmission Take noise reduction speed and check if the measure
192. Already Set Setting Item Details Print Window Print Window ais Acknowledge XY Assignment Gear Item Description Setting range Number of Modules Select the number of master local modules number of modules to be mounted on one base unit Do not include the number of master local modules that are set using the dedicated instruction G P RLPASET 1 to 8 Default Blank Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window Checking this item is not necessary for a local station or standby master station Start I O No Set the start I O number of a master local module in units of 16 points Within the range of I O points of the CPU module Default Blank Operation Setting Set the operations to be performed at an error or when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP Page 119 Section 7 4 2 1 Type Select Local Station to use a master local module as a local station Select any of the following to use a master local module as a standby master station lt _ gt Page 136 Section 8 2 5 Operation Setting When only iis standby master station is Master Station Duplex started up it starts data link as a master 1 station Function Other than the above Standby Master Station 1 When select Master Station Duplex Function set the same settings as the master station for other items Page 98 Section 7 3 2
193. B0049 5E4 b9 Temporary error invalid station Temporary error invalid station setting information SB0076 5E74 b6 specification Multiple temporary error invalid station specification SW0003 6034 Temporary error invalid station specification SW0004 to SW0007 604 to 607 Temporary error invalid station specification result SW0049 6494 Temporary error invalid status SW007C to SW007F 67Cy to 67F4 Temporary error invalid canceling request SB0005 5E0 b5 Temporary error invalid canceling acknowledgement status SB004A 5E4 b10 Temporary error invalid canceling complete status SB004B 5E4 b11 Temporary error invalid station Temporary error invalid station setting information SB0076 5E74 b6 specification canceling Multiple temporary error invalid station specification SW0003 6034 Temporary error invalid station specification SW0004 to SW0007 604 to 607p Temporary error invalid station specification cancel result SW004B 64B Temporary error invalid status SW007C to SW007F 67C to 67F suonoun J y Jo suoneorjddy jnjes e g uonounj Bumes uorneis pienui soe Avesodwe amp 8 167 8 3 8 Data link stop restart 168 Data link of the host station can be stopped or restarted using a programming tool or SB SW This function is used to temporarily stop data link for maintenance or other purposes If data link of a master station is stopped data link
194. B45 z 3 m SET M303 Instruct to change parameters G P RLPASET instruction Control data M303 E H LMOV KO D100 Clear completion status Slave station setting data M K D101 1 communication and automatic ANO Y update buffer assignment data Valid MOV K3 D102 H Total module connected 3 M wOv 3 D103 Retry count 3 times MOV K1 D104 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Operation specification when oo LMOV Ko D105 CPU is down Stop N Q MOV KO D106 1 Scan mode setting Us 7 Asynchronous Q ae a v f 1 LMOV KO D107 Delay time setting 0 5 v 9 D amp m Slave station setting data 3 4 M303 E alll reae O NI MOV H2101 D110 First Local station occupies o 1 station station T number 1 D MOV H102 D111 Second Remote I O station o occupies 1 station 3 J station number 2 S LMOV H103 D112 J Third Remote I O station o 0 z Ko D X 3 c e 215 Communication and automatic update buffer assignment data M303 4 First station number 1 local station E Send buffer 100 word MOV K100 D170 MOV K100 D171 y First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 100 word Mov KO D172 First station number 1 local station Automatic update buffer 0 word Parameter registration data link startup M303 Dedicated instruction CP RLPASET u10 D100 D110 D150 D160 D170 M304 E G P RL
195. Clear a master station duplication error BEO b7 duplication error OFF Not instructed O x x canceling request ON Instructed SB0008 Execute a line test to the station specified by SW0008 BEO b8 Line test request OFF Not requested O x x ON Requested Read the parameter setting information of the actual SB0009 Parameter system configuration Ver 1 compatible remote station BEO b9 information read only x x request OFF Not requested ON Requested Execute a transmission speed test SB000B Transmission speed aa E t i 4 p o x x Not requeste 5E0 611 test request 1 ON Requested Forcibly transfer data link control from the standby master O station during data link control to the master station that SB000C Forced master Standby NAE stands by for system down of the standby master station x x 5E0p b12 switching master OFF Not requested ON Requested station only Perform an initial process using the information registered by the initialization procedure registration using a Remote device station miami i SPOD initialization Hes aoe is on the remote I O and remote registers O x x i i j regi 5E0p b13 procedure registration d are stopped to be refreshed gt gt instruction o o6 OFF Not instructed EA ON Instructed a a The operating status of the module is stored dbi SB0020 or Module status OFF Normal The module is normally operating O O O cs 5E2 bO 5 ON Error A module error has
196. D diiit S m 71D regis ra jon p execution S amp individual TA ao information 6 5 target 14 z 3 Remote device T 23 station x o initialization 9 9 SW011E E 71Ey regis ta ion 3 execution a individual S information T target 15 359 Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Remote device station initialization The execution progress of the initialization procedure registration is tored swo11r Procedure PAR 71E registration Upper bit Next execution procedure number Upon completion FFy is O x x execution stored individual Lower bit Target station number information target 16 A slave station that supports the CC Link Ver 2 mode is stored SWO0140 0 Ver 1 compatible slave station 7404 1 Ver 2 compatible slave station SWO0141 UM E b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b bO 7414 Compatible CC Link ver SW0141 32 O x E SW0142 information SW0142 48 7424 SW0143 64 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SW0143 The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations 7434 Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Whether a CC Link version matches between the parameter settings and the modules on slave stations is stored 0 Normal 1 Mismatch error Example of a mismatch error SW0144 pug Ver 2 com
197. Description The number of points is increased by increasing the station numbers occupied per module Number of Occupied Stations Note that the number of slave stations that can be connected to a CC Link system is decreased because one module occupies the station numbers for multiple modules 2 Data transfer between RX RY RWr and RWw and a device in a CPU module a Automatic transfer by parameter settings using a programming tool Setting a refresh device using the network parameter can automatically transfer data between RX RY RWr and RWw in a master local module and a device in a CPU module 7 gt Page 98 Section 7 3 2 Page 116 Section 7 4 2 Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules 1 vj Boards Blank No Setting IV Set l i 2 Start IJO No 0000 Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected 1 n Remote Input RX X1000 Remote Output RY Y1000 Remote Register RWr bu Remote Register RMw w100 Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB 5B Special Register SW SWO SS ae i gt b Transfer using a program Using an intelligent function module device Un GO and FROM TO instructions transfers data betwee
198. End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q series programmable controllers This manual describes the operating procedure system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the QJ61BT11N CC Link system master local module hereafter abbreviated as master local module Before using this product please read this manual carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC Q series programmable controller to handle the product cor
199. FF timing of link special relays SBs related to the standby master function Master station information SB0070 Host master standby master operation status SB007B Master switching request acknowledgement SB005A Master switching request complete SB005B Refresh instruction at standby master switching Program operation SB0001 Refresh instruction acknowledgement status at standby master switching SB0042 Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching SB0043 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 4 When turning on Master switching request complete SB005B back up data stored in RX to RY and data stored in RWr to RWw using a program In addition turn on Refresh instruction at standby master switching SB0001 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 7 Example of communications when the master station duplex function is used The following system configuration is used to explain an example of communications a System configuration intei Standby master station ntelligent device station Station number 1 Remote device station Master station Station number 4 The number of occupied stations 1 Station number 2 The number of occupied stations 1 The number of occupied stations 2 P D E 0000 oooooooood OOOOOOO0O0 b Parameter settings for a master s
200. For an example of using the assignment sheet refer to Page 58 Section 4 1 or Page 227 CHAPTER 10 Master station local CPU module Slave station station Remote register Device Buffer memory address Station No Module name RWr RWw jeeus Bunjes g xipueddy jeeus Juswubissy g xipueddy 403 Appendix 8 2 Network parameter setting sheet Item Setting range Setting value Start I O No 0000 to OFEO Data Link Faulty Station Hold or clear the input data Hold Clear Setting Default Clear input data Refresh or clear compulsorily Case of CPU STOP Setting Refresh Clear compulsorily Default Refresh Operation Block Data Assurance per Disable or enable the setting p Disable Enable Setting Station Default Disable the setting Number of Occupied 1 to 4 stations occupied Stations Default Occupied Station 1 Single Double Quadruple Octuple Expanded Cyclic Setting Default Single Master Station i Master Station Master Station Duplex Function N Master Station Duplex Function Type Local Station Local Station Standby Master Station Standby Master Station Default Master Station Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Remote Net Ver 2 Mode 2 Remo
201. Fy procedure 0 Normal completion O x registration instruction Values other than 0 Error code gt Page 291 Section 11 3 2 result Mode setting status is stored 0 Online remote net mode 1 Online remote I O net mode SWO0060 Mode setting a i 6604 status l O O O 3 Line test 1 4 Line test 2 6 Hardware test The current host station number is stored SAQUBIS Hoststation 0 Master station i 6614 number a 7 1 to 64 Local station The operation setting configured using the parameter is stored b15 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 0jto 0 0 0 0 Station type 0 Master station local station 1 Standby master station Valid only when b1 is 0 Master station duplex function 0 Master station duplex function disabled 1 Master station duplex function enabled Status of input data from a data link faulty station 0 Clear 1 Hold Number of occupied stations 00 Number of occupied stations 1 SW0062 Module 10 Number of occupied stations 2 Oo Oo Oo 6621 operating status 11 Number of occupied stations 3 01 Number of occupied stations 4 Master station local station start by dedicated instruction 0 Start by CPU parameter 1 Start by dedicated instruction M Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of programmable controller CPU STOP 0 Refresh 1 Clears compulsorily Expanded cyclic setting 00 Single 01 Double 10 Quadruple 11 Octuple
202. H 1 analog output i i enable disable flag RYOO yi0e1 Y Turn on CH 2 analog output enable disable flag RYO1 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Process at error occurrence X107A he r Read CH 1 check code RWr0 n LEMOVP WOS DaO id and CH 2 check code RWr1 MOVP w14 D518 J Read Error code RWr8 X26 z Turn on Error reset request f LSET Y107A 4 flag RY1A Y107A X107A i VE RST Yio Hee reset request TT TTT MCR NO J M 4IEND J When creating the program refer to the manual for the remote device station used and change the program as needed The program is needed only for the initial setting change ejduiexe wesibold GS Z OL uoHels sdlAeq 9jouie e pue uonels Jejse y e uee weg suoreoiunuiuo Jo ejdurex3 ZOL 2 Write the program to the CPU module in the master station Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Online gt Write to PLC uiu p or power off on 249 250 3 A Set the switch on the CPU module in the master station to RUN to execute the program Executing the program turns on Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD Then the initial setting is executed mui RUN O When the initial setting is completed the input value of the AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADVN is converted into a digital value CH 1 digital output value is stored into D500 and CH 2 digital output value is stored into D501 If an error occ
203. HCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU oes 9 22 Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 22 QOOUJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU 0 32 0 31 QO02UCPU 0 32 0 31 QO3UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU 0 25 0 13 Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU QS50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU 385 Local station 1 The block guarantee of cyclic data per station function is not supported Constant KM1 With block guarantee of Without block guarantee of CPU type cyclic data per station cyclic data per station Q00JCPU 1 05 QOOCPU 0 86 Q01CPU 0 79 Q02CPU 0 81 0 74 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU 0 31 0 29 QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU QOOUJCPU QOO0UCPU Q01UCPU 0 70 0 60 QO02UCPU 0 70 0 60 QO3UDCPU Q04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QOSUDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU 0 43 0 30 Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU QS50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU 1 A Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU cannot be set as a local station KM2 KM3 KM4 Constant The value is the same regardless of execution of the block guarantee of cyclic data per station When a master local module is mounted on a main base unit Constant KM3 x 107 File registers KM2 x 10 R ZR ona memory card File registers R ZR ona KM4 CPU type memory card are used are not used
204. I O Net Mode is set to Mode Data in Ver 1 compatible area are transferred to a CPU module When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode is set to Mode Data in Ver 2 compatible area are transferred to a CPU module 3 Overlaps with other devices Set the devices without overlaps with the following Refresh parameters of modules on the network I O numbers used for I O modules and an intelligent function module Auto refresh settings of an intelligent function module Auto refresh using a multiple CPU shared memory 4 To set X or Y to a refresh device Set a number later than the I O numbers used for I O modules and an intelligent function module 5 Refresh timing Data are refreshed in the END process of a CPU module Blank or the following range Device X M L B D W R or ZR M B D and W for a MELSECNET H remote I O station Device number Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range Device Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR M B D and W for a MELSECNET H remote I O station Device number Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote 1 O station Default Blank Blank or the following range Device M L B D W R or ZR M B D and W fora MELSECNET H remote l O station Device number Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank
205. MITSUBISHI Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEG Ee serie MELSEC Q CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual QJ61BT11N MODEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N WARNING and N CAUTION WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions NCAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under N CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING For the operating status of each station after a communication failure in the data link refer to Page 122 Section 7 5 in this manual Failure to do so may result in an
206. NET H remote I O station 71 75 Mode uc 2 a Ro 43 99 Mode Setting 2 0000 eee eee 103 414 ModelName 00000 eee ne 104 Module error logs llli sees 289 Module error XKnQ llli less 323 Module List 2 03 45 regum RS E 105 Module ready XnF liliis enn 324 Monitoring the host station other stations 308 MST EED Lui ipei eR EA eds 21 Multiple CPU system llle 71 Network parameter setting sheet 404 No of Registered Procedures 108 Non periodic communications transient transmission Lo ec 17 Number of connectable modules 69 Number of initial settings registered 153 Number of Modules llle les 98 Number of occupied I O points 25 Number of Occupied stations 102 Number of occupied stations local station 24 Occupied Co nt cuui sume d ete pp 106 Operation example llle 58 Operation of the standby master function 136 Operation Setting llli 98 102 Operational Condition 109 Other station data link status Xn3 323 Packing lists sasea pRLICGPSSULO PETI ES 15 Parameter information area 325 Parameter Name llle 102 Parameter setting list 95 Parameter setting method 94 Parameter settings 00000000050 94 Parameter setting
207. NS 3 2 4 CC Link dedicated cables In a CC Link system use CC Link dedicated cables If cables other than CC Link dedicated cables are used the performance of the CC Link system is not guaranteed For the specifications of CC Link dedicated cables and contact information refer to the following Website of CC Link Partner Association http www cc link org Refer to the CC Link Cable Wiring Manual published by CC Link Partner Association sajqeo pejeoipep YUIT DD VCE suoneoiuioeds SOUBWOLIOg ZE 33 3 3 1 Cyclic transmission List of Functions Function Description Reference Communications with other stations Communications can be performed with other stations using remote I O RX RY and remote registers RWr RWw Access to remote slave stations can be performed in the same way as access to a module mounted on the same base unit is performed Page 41 Section 3 6 1 Page 126 Section 8 1 1 Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode Remote I O net mode The mode can be selected according to the CC Link system configuration There is a mode such as the one to add a Ver 2 compatible slave station to a system with a Ver 1 compatible slave station Page 45 Section 3 6 3 Page 47 Section 3 6 4 Page 50 Section 3 6 5 Page 54 Section 3 6 6 Auto refresh Data can be automatically transferred between RX RY RWr RWw SB and S
208. Name m Data Link Faulty Station Setting Hold Input Data Case of CPU STOP Setting Block Data Assurance per Station Clears Compulsorily Enable Setting Item Description Setting range Parameter Name Set the name of the setting if needed This item is displayed when the setting details of the network parameters are printed using a programming tool Eight characters Data Link Faulty Station Setting Select whether to clear or hold data input from a data link faulty station gt Page 122 Section 7 5 Page 132 Section 8 2 3 Clear input data not checked Hold input data checked Default Clear input data not checked Case of CPU STOP Setting Select whether to refresh or clear compulsorily output sending data to a slave station when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP 3 Page 122 Section 7 5 Page 134 Section 8 2 4 Refresh not checked Clear compulsorily checked Default Refresh not checked Number of Occupied stations Expanded Cyclic Setting The settings are not required when a master local module is used as a master station Block Data Assurance per Station Select whether to assure the integrity of cyclic data for each slave station 5 Page 150 Section 8 2 6 1 Disable setting not checked Enable setting checked Default Disable setting not checked 102 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 Station Infor
209. O x parameter information parameter 295 IS 9poo JON Z LL S9po2 JOU Error code Delectability i Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station f More than 26 intelligent device Intelligent device stations including local stations B38C station setting error E Set the value to 26 or less O x are set in the station information parameter parameter In the invalid station specification parameter a station number other than the start station number of the module or a station number not set in the parameter is set Set the start station number of the Invalid station en Example of when a station module B38D specification error O x number other than the start Do not set a station number not parameter station number is set set in the parameter For a module that occupies 4 stations station numbers 5 to 8 a bit corresponding to a station number other than the station number 5 is on ex The total size of the Communication buffer nM communication buffer set in the SEN B38E assignment error P Set the total size within 4k words O x station information parameter parameter has exceeded 4k words i The total size of the automatic Automatic update i update buffer set in the station es B38F buffer assignment Set the total size within 4k words O x
210. OL Turn on Initial data processing E LSET 1078 3 complete flag RY18 4 Turn on Initial data setting SEE MOR i request flag RY19 To the next page 251 AJ6E5VBTCU 68DAVN Initial setting change 1 1 X21 E 1 it MOVP HOFC W114 L i i MOVP H30 w115 L SET Y1079 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Process of completing the initial setting X1078 f RST Y1078 X1079 LRST Y1079 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Digital output value reading X101B X1000 LMOV WO D500 X1001 LMOV wi D501 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Process at error occurrence Xipj MOVP W8 D508 X25 f SET Y101A Y101A X101A V RST Y101A AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Digital value setting X22 X107B E MOVP K500 W10C MOVP K1000 W10D AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable disable setting x23 X107B Y1060 Y1061 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Process at error occurrence X107A BMOVP WOG D510 K2 MOVP w14 D518 SET Y107A ME RST Y107A MCR NO END The program is needed only for the initial setting change Analog output enable disable setting RWw8 CH 1 to 4 output range setting RWw9 Turn on Initial data setting request flag RY19 P ween eee eee Turn off Initial data processing complete flag RY 18 Turn off Initial data setting request flag RY19 Read CH 1 digital output value RWr0 Read CH 2
211. ON Present The setting status of the scan mode is stored mile Scan mode sening OFF sata s mode x x u 5E7y b2 information d M ON Synchronous mode The parameter setting status of the operation specification Operation SB0073 snesffibad omen when CPU is down is stored x ification w 5E7 b3 SPEC OFF Stopped 9 8 CPU is down status ON Continued 344 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local station station Offline SB0074 5E7y b4 Reserved station specified status Whether a reserved station has been specified by the parameter is stored OFF Not specified ON Specified The set station number is stored in SW0074 to SW0077 Depending on the link refresh timing SB0074 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Reserved station specified status SW0074 to SWO0077 SB0075 5E7 b5 Error invalid station specified status Whether an error invalid station has been specified using the parameter is stored OFF Not specified ON Specified The set station number is stored in SW0078 to SW007B Depending on the link refresh timing SB0075 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Error invalid station specified status SW0078 to SW007B SB0076 BE7 b6 Temporary error invalid station setting information Whet
212. OTING Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Is the station number k Check the station number A2 1 Station number correctly set for the faulty eatin Correct the setting ing station 9 m Is the transmission speed ne Transmission Check the transmission Set the value same as that A2 2 value correctly set for the speed f speed set for other stations faulty station Online status Is the CC Link interface of A2 3 Check the faulty station Set it online slave station the faulty station online Check the network SAT US network parameters of the CPU parameters for CC Link A station module on the master such as the number of station using the cannot perform stations and station i Correct the network programming tool data link information correctly set parameter Does the master station Check SWV0068 SW0069 Format the CPU module SW0070 SW0071 have no error memory then write the Parameter SW0072 SW0074 to A2 4 Are the network network parameters setting SW0077 SW0098 to parameters for a network other than CC Link correctly set SW009B SWOOSC to SWOOSF and SW0144 to SWO0147 Are the settings correct Automatic CC Link startup Check if values are not set in the intelligent function module switch setting Disable the intelligent function module switch setting of the programming tool To the next page 277 UONEIS S
213. Online lt gt Write to PLC 6 The settings are reflected by resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system T Start the initial settings by turning on Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB000D While the initial settings are being executed Execution status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5E is on Also the execution procedure number and the target station number for the procedure registration are stored in Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information SW0110 to SWO11F 8 When the initial settings are completed for all the set stations Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SB005F is turned on Also the execution results are stored in Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction result SWOO5F The data stored in Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information SW0110 to SWO11F become FF indicates the target station number for the initial settings 9 Turn off Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB000D 110 Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction result SWO05F and Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information SW0110 to SWO11F are cleared CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS The following fig
214. P 13 Data Link Faulty Station Setting 102 0to9 Data link processing time 362 Data link start function using a standby master station 32 bit data integrity assurance 152 Set ered Re hedge a emi goce aude ag gah aue Se agg 136 Data link stop restart 200005 168 Dedicated instruction 14 172 A Delay Time Setting 000005 101 Porat Gast ss 3 42 243 A58 AURA Description of I O signals 0 323 pei tuncens Sie EELS 1a DL RS Pos Detecting overlapped station numbers 85 AJ65BT R2 N dae aaa lem sot pa uota 13 Dd Cane ee d pd Auc ueber eu 13 eene between the ebymdhrongusenasimarenue Ronen Ne pee eaten ate 8 Spare ye nein pM 2 Difference from traditional modules 391 Asurchronols mode pace aeons Ta oo M 162 Disconnection ca certe 0 00 cee eee ees 14 Automatic CC Link startup 000 158 Automatic Reconnection Station Count 101 E Automatic return 222i 129 E EU EM Automatic update buffer n o naana nana 337 EMC and Low Voltage Directives 6 Available functions of CPU modules 393 ERR LED csse n n 22 Error code list 3 RETE IR 291 Error HistOry 2v ebd be pe Sane ee vv es 289 B Error invalid station setting 166 EUNDI ER Example 2 55 Saket aie sene o ers sales eem S 58 Basie model er s nes Sic rre ros NS 102 1 e Example of co
215. PASET 2 Process at completion of the G P RLPASET instruction M304 4 Turn the parameter setting TT LRST M303 instruction off M305 Instruct to refresh at normal AF SET SB3 completion of the G P RLPASET instruction n Instruct to start the control program LSET M310 J at normal completion of the G P RLPASET instruction M305 1 H Perform abnormal end process Start of the control program M310 X100 Xi XJOF 1 4r 1 LMC NO M320 NO M320 Z Refresh of RX SB6E Jt FROM H10 HOEO KAX1000 K6 1 Data in RX00 to RX5F are read to X1000 to X105F Refresh of RWr SB6E 4 Data in RWr0 to RWr3 are read to Jt FROM H10 H2E0 D1000 K4 4 D1000 to D1003 Station number 1 control program SW80 0 Station number 1 control program Station number 2 control program SW80 1 Station number 2 control program Station number 3 control program SW80 2 At Station number 3 control program Refresh of RWw SB6E TO uio HIEO D2000 KA 4 Data in RWwO to RWw3 are written S into D2000 to D2003 Refresh of RY Spa TO H10 H160 K4Y1000 K6 Data in RYOO to RY5F are written j into Y1000 to Y105F MCR NO Refresh of SB SW SM400 Data in SB0000 to SB001F are L To H10 H5E0 K4SBO K2 J refreshed To H10 H600 swo K32 y Data in SW0000 to SW001F are refreshed END J 2 D150 and D160 are dummy devices 216
216. PTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 Storage locations of RX RY RWr and RWw The storage locations change depending on the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting in slave stations The storage locations for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 7 s Page 332 Appendix 2 4 4 Precautions a To use the remote net additional mode for a local station Set the master station to the remote net additional mode s poy pue jusWUBissy 9 epouj JEUONIPpe jeu ejoules FIE 53 3 6 6 Remote I O net mode This mode is selected when slave stations are remote I O stations only Compared to other modes transmission delay time of cyclic transmission can be shortened In addition the master local module can operate with less setting Master station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O net mode Ver 1 compatible Ver 1 compatible Station No 0 Ver 1 compatible area RX Range of Station suma as aa dau u ada the station No 1 i Nov Eurip Range of Station the station No 2 No 2 sending data 1 I I I 1 RY Range of the master station sending data to y the station No 1 o Range of the master A station sending data to Station the station No 2 No 2 gt Data sent from the master station mJ 2 EUM ISisentto ndi Data sent from slave stations The table below lists the differences of link scan
217. RE a TEA aT ine eR ar ae We hae eS eerste ee CPU module Remote station Device Module name Remote input RX Signal name X1000 RX00 CH 1 A D conversion completion flag X1001 RX01 CH 2 A D conversion completion flag X1002 RX02 CH 3 A D conversion completion flag X1003 RX03 CH 4 A D conversion completion flag X1004 RX04 CH 5 A D conversion completion flag ERE oo X1005 RX05 CH 6 A D conversion completion flag NN X1006 RX06 CH 7 A D conversion completion flag on lt X1007 RX07 CH 8 A D conversion completion flag a 3 X1008 RX08 zc 9 to to Reserved 5 9 ae e3 X100B RXOB oS AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN oc X100C RXOC EPROM write error flag S5 0 X100D RXOD S 2 to to Reserved a X1017 RX17 2 o X1018 RX18 Initial data processing request flag 9 X1019 RX19 Initial data setting completion flag X101A RX1A Error status flag D o X101B RX1B Remote READY wo X101C RX1C to to Reserved Ei 2 X105F RX5F n p3 ol 3 9 o iw o lt o o n a 23 233 234 CPU module Remote station Device Module name Remote input RX Signal name X1060 RX00 to to Reserved X106B RXOB X106C RXOC E2PROM write error flag X106D RXOD to to Reserved ET AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN pan X1078 RX18 Initial data processing request flag X1079 RX19 Initial data setting complete flag X107A RX1A Error status flag X107B RX1B Remote READY X107C RX1C to to Reserved X10BF RX5F b Remote output R
218. RR 1 Parameter data error TIME ERR 1 The data link monitoring timer has timed out LINE ERR 1 A cable is disconnected or the transmission path has been affected by noise 156K 1 The transmission speed is 156kbps 625K 1 The transmission speed is 625kbps 2 5M 1 The transmission speed is 2 5Mbps 5M 1 The transmission speed is 5Mbps 10M 1 The transmission speed is 10Mbps TEST 1 The offline test is being executed S0 Not used S1 Not used S2 Not used 3 H W SW Information The following table lists information displayed under H W SW Information Item Description STNo x 10 The value set using the station number setting switch x 10 STNo x 1 The value set using the station number setting switch x 1 MODE The value set using the transmission speed mode setting switch STNo The station number of the module S STNo The standby master station number set in the parameter 0 no standby master station vs specified B RATE Transmission speed setting MODE Mode setting status CONFIG Module operating status SW0062 320 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 5 Hardware Test A master local module is individually tested to check whether it normally operates 1 Performing the hardware test 1 Connect the terminating resistor provided with the master local module between the DA and DB NC Q terminals on the terminal block of the master local amp
219. RWr of other slave stations are stored into RY and RWw and data in RY and RWw of other stations are stored into RX and RWr Areas where data is input and output are reversed 41 42 1 Input and output of the master station Data can be input to and output from all slave stations Areas are assigned in the order of station number a Data input to the master station Data in RX and RWr of all slave stations are stored into RX and RWr of the master station In a local station however data in RY and RWw of a local station are stored into RX and RWr of the master station b Data output from the master station Data stored in RY and RWw of the master station are output to RY and RWw of all slave stations In a local station however data are stored into RX and RWr 2 Input and output of a local station Data can be input from all slave stations Data can be output from a local station only to the master station Areas are assigned in the order of station number a Data input to a local station Data in RY and RWw of other stations are stored into RX and RWr of a local station Data in RX and RWr of other slave stations are stored into RY and RWw of local stations b Data output from a local station Data stored in RY and RWw the area in the host station for data sending are stored into RX and RWr of the master station 3 6 2 Modes This section describes the modes of a master local module 1 List of modes Se
220. Random access buffer specification FFy 16 bit binary The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent device n2 station specified by the master station or the offset value of the random access buffer Between 0 and parameter setting value Within the range of the D Start number of the device to which read data is stored P Device specified device n3 Number of read points 0 to 4096 2 16 bit binary 1 The value that was set in the station information setting of the network parameter of a programming tool 2 No process is performed when 0 is set 196 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RIFR instruction Master station Target station i 3 3 ooo O mn O CPU module Master station Intelligent device station Command Communication Buffer memory starts when conditions are met Automatic update buffer memory Automatic Device update buffer W di d o 9 6 1 Theautomatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2 of the master station specified by Un is accessed 2 The data read after the device specified by D is stored b Timing of
221. Re 13 PAGICIIN GIES ieee e set ere oo et ae nae er RE RR EC UR T UC EE EE 15 CHAPTER 1 FEATURES 16 1 1 pODB CJ I I II 16 1 2 Master Local Modules siot e we etc C C f te CRI TU at 17 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES 21 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 24 3 4 General Specifications lliielelseeeeeeleeee 24 3 2 Performance Specifications liliis en 24 3 2 1 Maximum number of connected modules leleeee eee 27 3 2 2 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link Ver 1 10 00 0 cece eee eee eens 29 3 2 3 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link Ver 1 00 0 00 eee ee 30 3 24 CC Link dedicated cables sss csere amni nera i a Di E e eens 33 3 3 Jbist of F nctioris isy vane ba AS ov T ues i E RE See ov AS ee E uei 34 3 4 Pist ot O signals iius tpe ad hal Yana candy Sex Peu xx eee oo 37 3 5 Listof Buffer Memory Areas iis hmm 38 3 6 Assignment and Modes 0 6 seer eg ad ee E YR Mas RW PEE U d 41 3 6 4 Assignment a uiai RE erc ero Note MAP ac Me s boa WAS a tale Ad acea da 41 3 5 2 Modesta suec PR beue a PR uda d E RR UR RA Id REDE 43 3 5 3 RemotenetiVer 1 mode iain bo bor iut d Ad cA AA need oe deed bbs 45 3 6 4 Remote net Ver2 mode esses s tes do e aa qe eae eh OS eee ered acts 47 3 6 5 Remote net additional mode 0 0 eee e 50 3 6 6 Remotel O netimode cioe Rb et a ER SER DR edel doc Sain ees 54 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION 56 44 OperatiomExample e
222. Read SB0050 ee To aat i is being executed is stored x x 5E5y bO ine test status Not execute O ON In process Master station Whether a master station duplication error canceling SB0057 duplication error request has been accepted is stored 5E5 b7 canceling OFF Not accepted O acknowledgement ON Accepted Whether a master station duplication error canceling Master station j SB0058 am request has been completed is stored duplication error x x 5E5p b8 OFF Not completed canceling complete ON Completed 342 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether the standby master station has detected the Kasten suci system down of the master station and has accepted a O witchi SB005A 9 request of switching from standby master operation to Standby request a x master 5E5p b10 master operation is stored acknowledgement station OFF Not accepted ON Accepted only Whether the standby master station has been switched as O SB005B Master switching a master station is stored Standby x 5E5p b11 request complete OFF Not completed master ON Completed Sanon only Whether a forced master switching request has been O Forced master SB005C pn accepted is stored Standby Switching request x x 5E5p b12 OFF Not accepted master acknowledgement ON Accepted station only Whether a
223. S2 D1 D2 Command GP RDMSG GP RDMSG Un S1 S2 D1 D2 i H J Applicable device Link direct Intelligent Setting Internal device f File device function module Index Constant data System user Others register JO O device register ZO oco Bit Word Bit Word TE K H S S1 O S2 O D1 O D2 O EN 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written T Un i aa 0 to FEy 16 bit binary with three digits Within the range of the 1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored n specified device Within the range of the S2 2 Start number of the device that stores data to be sent n 3 Device name specified device Within the range of the D1 Start number of the device that stores received data specified device D2 Device that turns on for one scan upon completion of reading Within the range of the Bit i D2 1 also turns on at an abnormal end specified device 1 The local device and the file register of each program cannot be used as a device for setting data 2 For details of the send data and receive data refer to the manual for the remote device station that supports the message transmission function 220 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Co
224. SW0075 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b bO 6754 Reserved ae SW0075 station specified O O x SW0076 status Sw0076 6764 SW0077 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SW0077 Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on 6774 The station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted 352 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether a station has been set as an error invalid station is stored SW0078 0 A station other than an error invalid station 6784 1 Error invalid station SWO0079 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b b SW0078 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 6794 Error invalid A station specified SW0079 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 O o SWO07A status SW007A 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 67A SWO007B 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SWO007B Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on 67By Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Whether a station is in the temporary error invalid status is stored SWO007C 0 Normal 67Cy 1 Temporary error invalid status SWO07D b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b bO 67D SW007C Temporary
225. SWO0009 gt Page 348 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SWOOO0B 7 5 Page 348 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of write points is 20 words buffer memory in CC Link monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of write points 16 16 x 1 067 SM WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 16 x 1 067 0 10 x 0 x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 3 x 1 067 0 76 505 76 5ms The decimal point is rounded up Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried APPENDICES 2 Local station lt gt local station a Local station local station The time between a local station issuing an instruction and it receiving a response from another local station is calculated as follows Formula lt Maximum value gt G P RIRD instruction OT LS x BC number of read points 16 16y x 1 067 SL WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU Q02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and Q02CPUJ 0 5ms LS Link scan time 5 Page 362 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant 4 2 Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 SL Target station sequence scan time Apply 0 when buffer memory data in CC Link is read WT Monitoring time set in SW0009 7 Page 348 Appendix 3 2
226. Section 8 4 2 Section 9 1 2 Section 10 1 2 Section 10 1 3 Section 10 2 2 Section 10 2 3 Section 10 3 2 Section 10 3 3 Section 11 2 2 Section 11 2 3 Section 11 3 2 Section 11 3 3 Section 11 4 2 Section 11 4 3 Section 13 1 Section 13 3 Appendix 2 Appendix 2 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 2 4 Appendix 2 5 Appendix 6 Appendix 7 Oct 2006 SH NA 080394E G Partial correction Section 2 2 2 Section 4 2 6 Section 4 4 1 Section 4 5 1 Section 5 3 1 Section 5 3 2 Section 5 3 3 Section 6 2 Section 7 5 1 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Section 10 3 2 Section 11 2 3 Section 11 3 2 Section 11 3 3 Section 11 4 2 Section 11 4 3 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 7 Appendix 8 1 417 Dec 2005 SH NA 080394E E Addition Section 4 3 7 Appendix 7 Section 1 3 Section 2 2 3 Section 4 1 Section 5 1 Section 7 8 Section 13 1 Print date Manual number Revision Nov 2007 SH NA 080394E H Partial correction Section 1 3 Section 2 2 1 Section 4 1 Section 4 2 3 Section 4 2 6 Section 4 4 1 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 2 Section 6 3 4 Section 6 4 2 Section 6 4 4 Section 6 5 2 Section 6 5 4 Section 6 6 2 Section 6 7 Section 7 3 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Section 9 1 1 Section 10 1 1 Section 10 2 1 Section 10 3 1 Section 11 2 1 Section 11 3 1 Section 11 4 1 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 2 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 2 4 Appendix 2 5 Appendix 2 6 Appendix 2 7 Appendix 2 8 Apr 2008 SH NA 080394E I Change
227. Startup and Maintenance Precautions NWARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Startup and Maintenance Precautions NCAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions NCAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE
228. Station No 0 h i 1 i Devi 1 Buffer Devi 1 evice memory 4 memory evice 1 I I I RX RWr RX RWr RX RWr i L pe p 1 Station 1 BRI Station 1 LI 1 station No 1 p 1 I No 1 1 sending data No 1 i Wo o oD 1 Station i 1 Rangeiofine Station i PETRUS cecaeeauesacederesap gece station No 2 gt j No 2 1 sending data i No 2 1 75 i 1 1 De 1 5 Station 1 i Station 1 e35 No 3 puossssuuduunudunusssusunuuuruxasslsrusuinnuzaranuass No 3 1 32 1 d oz EL L i RY RWw 1 2 I Range of the 1 i i 1 mesten Son Station 2 Station 1 2 sending data to the station No 1 t RY RWw 1 s No 1 1 7 3 p I I Range of the E i master station Station is Station I sending data to 1s I the station No 2 No 2 i s No 2 j i Range of the 1 1 mu station I ey Range of the sending data to 1 station No 3 3 I the station No 3 i sending data V V gt Data sent from the master station Area where data is sent to other stations n gt Data sent from slave stations 1 RWr and RWw are not used for a remote I O station Note however that buffer memory areas are occupied depending on the mode of the master local module gt Page 45 Section 3 6 3 to Page 54 Section 3 6 6 Point Buffer memory RX RY RWr and RWw addresses differ depending on the mode of the master local module Page 45 Section 3 6 3 to Page 54 Section 3 6 6 Ina local station data in RX and
229. Station number 1 Station number 2 Occupies 1 station r 7 Master station controlling Occupies 1 station Remote Remote Remote Remote input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote 1 O station RX00 to RXOF RYO0O to RYOF RX10 to RX1F RY410 to RY1F RX10toRX1F RY10 to RY1F Remote I O station Station number 3 i l i i RX00 to RXOF RYOO to RYOF i i 1 i i Y00 to YOF i RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20to RX2F RY20to RY2F AMNION i J YODTO Fir Occupies 1 station RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RY30 to RY3F YOto Yi i pee eU TOS Se ya SS Sa RX40 tO RX4F RvaotoRY4F J RXAOToRX4F RY40 to RYAF Ft X00 tO XOF Jf YOO to YOF RX50to RX5F RY50 to RY5F J RX50toRX5F RY50 to RY5F Y10toY1F D I 1 I D d D 6 ol a t sr m mm moo meommceoe eomem m MEME IU b ds edis ee i 1 l I l IJ i 1 lu Outputs RY RWw from the master station are stored in inputs RX RWr of the standby master station shaded areas in the figure above Input of the master station Standby master station standby status Station number 1 Master station controlling The number of occupied stations 1 Remote Remote Remote Remote input RX output RY input RX output RY RX00 to RXOF Remote I O station St
230. T SB000C was executed to a Execute Forced master switching B314 Switching target error x O station other than the master SB000C to the master station station While the master station was being switched to the standby Forced master station Correct the Forced master B315 AU master station Forced master BS O x switching error E switching SBOOOC setting switching SBOO0C was executed again Please consult your local B316 System error NN O x Mitsubishi representative The G P RLPASET instruction was executed to a module where Clear network parameter settings parameters had been set using a for the target module using a programming tool Network startup setting i programming tool then set the B317 The parameter setting was O x mode error network parameters using the Rida i iih off G P RLPASET instruction and on the programmable controller system or resetting the 57 Page 212 Section 9 8 1 CPU module The master station duplication error canceling instruction was Do not execute the instruction B31A Data link in progress i O x executed while data link had during data link already been started um zo Turn on Data link stop SB0002 Transmission speed The transmission speed test was re B31B then Transmission speed test O x test execution error executed during data link request SB000B 294 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
231. T R2 N Sets the network parameters to the master station and starts up the Page 204 Master station G P RLPASET data link Section 9 8 Performs a message transmission to a remote device station Remote device Page 220 f G P RDMSG Available for remote device stations that support the message station NA Section 9 9 transmission function Point Execute the dedicated instructions while the data link is being performed If any of the dedicated instructions is executed offline no error will occur but the execution of the dedicated instruction will not be completed 172 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Applicable devices The following devices are available for the dedicated instructions Internal device Internal device Bit Word Bit Word X Y M L F V B T ST C D W R ZR 1 Bit specification of word device can be performed as bit data Bit specification of word device can be performed by specifying Word device Bit No Bit No must be specified in hexadecimal For example bit 10 of DO is specified as DO A Note that the bit specification cannot be performed for timers T retentive timers ST and counters C 3 Precautions a Use of Monitoring time setting SW0009 and Dedicated instruction retry count setting SWO000B If dedicated instructions are abnormally ended due to noise increase the monitoring time and retry count to avoid it Conf
232. Target Station No No of Registered Procedures mm ms ms m ms Target Station No No of Registered Procedures N Set New 1 1 Regist Procedure Res Set New P4 E PEB N a 3 Regist Procedure cedure Set New 4 Regist Procedure 12 gist Procedure Set New s Saeed Samet Set New 7 Regist Procedure 15 Regist Procedure Execute 5et New 8 Regist Procedure 16 Regist Procedure Set New Set Mew dex Check End Cancel Execute Execute Set New Set New Set New Default Remote Device Station Initial Setting Target Station Number Setting window Item Description Setting range Target Station No configured Set the station number of the station where the initial settings are 1 to 64 Default Blank No of Registered The number of the procedures registered using the _ Resist Procedure Procedures button is displayed Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration is Regit Procedure displayed by clicking it Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration window Item Description Setting range Input Format Select the input format of Write Data DEC HEX Default DEC 108 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Item Description Setting range Execute Flag Select whether to actually execute the registered procedure or not Click it to change the setting Set Only Set to use the setting on
233. U modules in the master station and local station to RUN to execute the programs 4 Turning on X20 in the master station turns on X1000 in the local station When X1000 in the local station turns on Y30 in the local station turns on UOI JE S e007 pue uolels Jejse y e uee jeg suoneoiunuuuo Jo ejduex3 0L 5 Turning on X24 in the local station turns on X1001 in the master station When X1001 in the master station turns on Y31 in the master station turns on 263 10 3 6 Program example to assure the integrity of cyclic data in each slave station One of the following actions assures the integrity of cyclic data in each slave station Note that data integrity is not assured across slave stations 1 Using a programming tool On the Operation Setting window check the checkbox in Block Data Assurance per Station W Project window lt gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Operation Setting button Operation Setting Module 1 Parameter Name Data Link Faulty Station Setting Hold Input Data Case of CPLI STOP Setting Block Data Assurance per Station Clears Compulsorily v Ens Check the checkbox 264 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 2 Using a program Set an interlock in the remote I O RX RY Master station MO Y1000 X10900 AF AF BMOV DO w100 K4 SET Y1000 X1000 RST Y1000 Local station Station No 1 Mo X
234. W in a master local module and a device in a CPU module Accessing a device in a CPU module on a program enables access to RX RY RWr RWw SB and SW Page 98 Section 7 3 2 Page 116 Section 7 4 2 Scan synchronization Whether to synchronize the link scan with the sequence scan of a CPU module or not can be selected Selecting the asynchronous setting shortens input transmission delay time Selecting the synchronous setting shortens output transmission delay time Page 162 Section 8 3 5 Cyclic data assurance This function prevents read write data from being separated between new and old data Block data assurance per station 32 bit data integrity assurance This function prevents read write data per station from being separated between new and old data depending on the auto refresh timing Because the setting is configured only on a programming tool a program to prevent data separation is not required This function prevents read write data in 32 bit increments from being separated between new and old data Page 150 Section 8 2 6 1 Page 152 Section 8 2 6 2 Data link stop restart Data link of the host station can be stopped or restarted using a programming tool or SB SW This function is used when data link should be temporarily stopped for maintenance or other reasons Page 168 Section 8 3 8 Page 317 Section 11 4 5 Remote I O station points setting When the master station
235. When set Number of Modules of the network parameter of a programming tool do not include the number of modules that are set using the G P RLPASET instruction c Network parameter change during data link Network parameters cannot be changed during data link Therefore stop the data link using Data link stop SB0002 and execute the G P RLPASET instruction d Setting of a status input from a data link faulty station The setting of a status input from a data link faulty station is not allowed The input from a data link faulty station is cleared e Standby master function The standby master station cannot be connected To connect the standby master station configure settings using a programming tool f Output when a CPU module is switched from RUN to STOP The outputs from the remote output RY in the master station to a remote station local station intelligent device station and standby master station are held For the master local module with a serial number first five digits of 09111 or earlier 219 lasvdTM d O 8 6 ejduiexe Bunjes 1ejeuuejed ejduexe uej604d 96 9 9 G P RDMSG With this instruction a message is sent to a remote device station The first five digits of serial No must be 10032 or later This instruction is available for remote device stations that support the message transmission function Instruction Execution symbol condition Command 3 n G RDMSG G RDMSG U S1
236. Wr offset 00004 5614 1377 Station No 1 RWr size 00004 to to to SDEy 1502 Station No 64 RWr offset 0000 SDFy 1503 Station No 64 RWr size 0000 APPENDICES When connecting the local station with the expanded cyclic setting and remote I O stations with the remote I O station points setting Local station station No 1 the number of occupied stations 2 expanded cyclic Master station setting octuple Remote 1 0 station station No 4 the number of occupied stations 1 remote I O station points setting 8 points Remote I O station station No 3 the number of occupied stations 1 remote I O station points setting 8 points an 0000000000 oeooo000 o O O 2000000000009000 M 9 S OOOO OOOOOOOOCO OOOC 000000000 a a a B5 8 S8 a a Buffer memory area Value Description Station No 1 RX offset 40004 Start buffer memory address of RX in the station number 1 Station No 1 RX size 24 181 384 number of points of RX 16 24 words Station No 2 RX offset 40004 Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 2 RX size 0 Default Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 3 RX offset 401
237. X n 1 5 Y n 1 5 xine Y n 1 6 XnM4y Y n 1 7 Use prohibited X n 1 8 Y n 1 8 X n 1 9 Y n 1 9 XHA Y nt1 A X n B Y n 1 B X n 1 D Y n 1 D X n 1 D Y n 1 D XmHME Y n 1 E XnmHMF Y n 1 F Point Do not turn on the Use prohibited signals of the I O signals for the CPU module Doing so may cause a malfunction in the programmable controller system 37 3 5 Buffer memory is memory to transmit data between a master local module and a CPU module List of Buffer Memory Areas Data can be read from or written to buffer memory areas by setting the parameters of a programming tool or using dedicated instructions Resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system returns data in buffer memory areas to default When a standby master station is used refer to the respective columns under Availability in the table as explained below When a standby master station is operating as a master station Master station column When a standby master station is operating as a standby master station Local station column O Can be used Cannot be used Address Availability Name Description Read write Master Local Reference Hexadecimal Decimal f station station O Not available Parameter when a Page 325 0 to DFy 0to223 information Stores parameter settings Read only standby master Appendix 2 area station is 1 controlling the Syst
238. X23 outputs the analog value from the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN If an error occurs in the AJOSVBTCU 68DAVN an error code is stored into D518 After the cause of the error is removed and X26 is turned on the error is reset 253 wes6oJd e uo Ajuo peunBuyuoo s Bunjes jenu ay ueuw ejduexe uej6o4d 9Z 0L uoHels 99149 9jouie e pue uonels Jejse y e ueeweg suoreoiunuiuo Jo ejdurex3 z OL 10 3 Example of Communications Between a Master Station and a Local Station This section provides an example of data link between a master station and a local station 10 3 1 System configuration 1 System configuration The following system is used for explanation purpose The same system is used for the master station and local station Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Module name Q20UDHCPU QJ61BT11N QX10 QY10 Start I O number E X YOO to X Y1F X20 to X2F Y30 to Y3F Local station station No 1 Remote net Ver 1 mode n ae a ee eee ee ee rae SE Terminating resistor I Terminating resistor me number of occupied stations 1 254 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 2 Assignment of the remote I O RX RY and remote register RWr RWw In the program example the following assignment is used to perform data link Point The status of a device assignment can be checked on GX Works2 by setting information of a slave station on the CC Link configuration window on GX Works2
239. X30 to RX3F X10A0 to X10AF EA 234 RX40 to RX4F 6 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN X10B0 to X10BF EBu 235 RX50 to RX5F 232 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING The assignment by each signal of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN are shown below AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Station No 1 Station No 4 No of occupied No of occupied CPU module Master station stations 3 stations 3 Buffer memory 1 1 1 1 ji l 1 1 Device i Remote input RX Remote input RX i l X1000 i E0H 224 RX00 i l iu 1 1 1 W H 1 1 log f X101F OC E1H 225 i RX1F i frome xe ij 1 me UE 1 p aie 1 I l i RX20 i X1020 Station Station P m Station i X103F J B E34 227 Noi Rx3F i X1040 E4n 228 i RX40 1 P lir uS 1 Fog 1 i E B i Vy 1 X105F pog E5 229 i RX5F Remoteinput RX i lix I 1 Lo X1060 e E6H 230 1 ih 3 RXOO 1 H i i a i 1 oq E I 1 H 1 1 1 1 X107F E7H 231 i i RX1F ae i z Eta i 5 5 i 3 pog i i l yol RX20 1080 Station 3 Station F9 C22 j Station x109F No 4 DAN i No 4 GF E gt NEN 0 c BEN X10A0 pog EAH 234 t d RX40 n i i i E Fog X10BF EBH 235 i E RXSF
240. Y Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 402 Appendix 8 1 1 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address Device Station number Module name Remote I O RX RY Hexadecimal Decimal Y1000 to Y100F 160 352 RYO to RYF 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Y1010 to Y101F 1614 353 RY10 to RY1F Y1020 to Y102F 1624 354 RY20 to RY2F 2 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Y1030 to Y103F 1634 355 RY30 to RY3F Y1040 to Y104F 1644 356 RY40 to RY4F 3 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Y1050 to Y105F 1654 357 RY50 to RY5F Y1060 to Y106F 1664 358 RYO to RYF 4 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Y1070 to Y107F 1674 359 RY10 to RY1F Y1080 to Y108F 1684 360 RY20 to RY2F 5 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Y1090 to Y109F 1694 361 RY30 to RY3F Y10A0 to Y10AF 16A 362 RY40 to RY4F 6 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Y10B0 to Y10BF 16By 363 RY50 to RY5F The assignment by each signal of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN are shown below AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Station No 1 No of occupied Station No 4 No of occupied CPU module Master station _ stations 3 ___ Stations 3 Buffer memory MERC ins i l Device Remote output RY i Remote output RY l Y1000 160H 352 l RYOO B I t li 1 1 1 boa 1 Y101F 1614 353 RY1F i 1 pe ze p i 1 r aS
241. Y1063 RY03 CH 4 analog output enable disable flag Y1064 RY04 CH 5 analog output enable disable flag Y1065 RY05 CH 6 analog output enable disable flag Y1066 RY06 CH 7 analog output enable disable flag Y1067 RY07 CH 8 analog output enable disable flag Y1068 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN RY08 to to Reserved Y1077 RY17 Y1078 RY18 Initial data processing complete flag Y1079 RY19 Initial data setting request flag Y107A RY1A Error reset request flag Y107B RY1B to to Reserved Y10BF RY5F c Remote register RWr CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 403 Appendix 8 1 2 CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address Remote register Device Station number Module name 3 Hexadecimal Decimal RWr RWw wo 2E0 736 RWrO W1 2E1y 737 RWr1 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN w2 2E2y 738 RWr2 w3 2E3y 739 RWr3 WA 2E4y 740 RWr4 W5 2E5y 741 RWr5 2 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN W6 2E6y 742 RWr6 W7 2E7y 743 RWr7 ws 2E8 744 RWr8 w9 2E94 745 RWr9 3 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN WA 2EA 746 RWrA WB 2EBy 747 RWrB WC 2ECy 748 RWrO WD 2ED 749 RWr1 4 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN WE 2EE 750 RWr2 WF 2EFy 751 RWr3 W10 2F04 752 RWr4 w11 2F14 753 RWr5 5 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W12 2F24 754 RWr6 W13 2F3y 755 RWr7 W14 2F4y 756 RWr8 W15 2F5y 757 RWr9 6 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W16 2F6y 758 RWrA W17 2F7 759 RWrB
242. a master local module related error was not detected troubleshoot the CPU module with reference to the following Manual for the CPU module used hardware design maintenance and inspection sq31 Buisn Bunoousejqnod Lb LL Sueuowo J Buroouse qnoJ LLL 269 11 1 2 Troubleshooting using a programming tool 1 Troubleshooting by the CC Link diagnostics Connect a programming tool to the master station and execute the CC Link diagnostics Troubleshoot the problem with reference to Troubleshooting when the RUN LED on the master station is off Page 268 Section 11 1 1 1 diagnostics window has been started without When a CC Link systems When the CC Link system newly configured or the existing has operated CC Link system is changed A station other than the master station The connected station is Master station Host station data link status A1 2 A1 4 A1 7 A1 9 A3 5 A2 10 Initial process During data link R Data link stop H gt A3 6 B1 6 Line test in execution Parameter test in execution i A1 3 Automatic return in rocess i O Disconnected Host station data link status Transmission path error detection gt Parameter error detection 1 CRC error detection A1 5 A1 8 A3 1 i A3 3 A3 4 A1 5 A1 8 A1 9 A3 1 A3 2 A3 4 A3 5 B1 2 B1 3 B1 4 Y Ti
243. accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction When connecting a peripheral with the CPU module or connecting an external device such as a personal computer with an intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure Do not write any data to the system area of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited signal as an output signal from the CPU module to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system Design Precautions NWARNING To set a refresh device in the network parameter select the device Y for the remote output RY refresh device Remote Output RY If a device other than Y such as M and L i
244. action with reference to the corresponding item The numbers listed to the left correspond to those listed in the Check item column in Section 11 2 3 Problems due to transient data error Take corrective action with reference to the corresponding item The numbers listed to the left correspond to those listed in the Check item column in Section 11 2 4 Problems due to operation error in the master station Take corrective action with reference to the corresponding item 273 joo BuruueJBoud e Buisn Bunooysejqnol Z VLL Sueuowo J Buroouse qnoJ LLL 274 2 Troubleshooting by the status logging No Register v the logs to the flash ROM Delete the flash ROM data and No execute logging Is the system No in data link Yes v Stop data link v v Select RAM Flash ROM y Select RAM Flash ROM v Clear the logs v Restart data link Clear the logs 4 v Select RAM Select RAM Flash ROM gt v Start the logging v Stop the logging No There is a faulty station Check the cables and noise around the faulty station lt gt Check items B2 2 and B2 3 in Page 281 Section 11 2 1 2 11 2 11 2 1 Lists of Problems CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Problems due to disconnecti
245. and 397 422 and 423 448 and 449 474 and 475 a 1744 and 175 gi 18E and 18F4 m 1A8 and 149 FA 1C2j and 1C34 E 1DC and 1DDj 372 and 373 398 and 399 424 and 425 450 and 451 476 and 477 4 176 and 177 25 190 and 1914 E 1AAy and 1ABy B 1C4 and 1C5 E 1DE and 1DF 374 and 375 400 and 401 426 and 427 452 and 453 478 and 479 i 1784 and 1794 36 1924 and 193 i 1AC and 1AD 2 1C6 and 1C7 376 and 377 402 and 403 428 and 429 454 and 455 329 seeJy fuouie N Jeyng Z xipueddy 3 Remote register RWw and remote register RWr This area is used when the remote net Ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected In the remote net Ver 1 mode data are stored in the remote register RWr RWw lt Page 46 Section 3 6 3 2 In the remote net additional mode data are stored in the remote register RWr RWw in a Ver 1 compatible slave station 7 gt Page 53 Section 3 6 5 3 a Remote register RWr E Buffer 3 Buffer p Buffer E Buffer Buffer Station memo Station mene Station emo Station TENE Station RUE number D number ny number D number t number p address address address address address 2E0 to 2E34 T 3144 to 3174 a 348 to 34By m 37CH to 37Fy 3B0 to 3B3y 736 to 739 788 to 791 840 to 843 892 to 895 944 to 947 5 2E44 to 2E74 i 318 to 31By m 34Cy to 34Fj a4
246. as been stopped the data link will restart Point When stopping or restarting data link do not write data to the buffer memory area buffer memory address 5E0 317 xui eyep BunjejsaJ pue Buiddois S prr ZSM XO Butsp sonsouBeiq xur29 t LL 11 4 6 Setting and canceling a temporary error invalid station Even if a data link error occurs in a slave station the station is not detected as a faulty station in the master station and local station This setting can be configured even during data link unlike the error invalid station setting function This function is used to exchange slave stations during data link for maintenance or for other purposes 1 Open the CC Link Diagnostics window Diagnostics gt CC Link Diagnostics 2 Right click the target slave station icon of the temporary error invalid station setting and select Set Cancel Temporary Error Invalid Station The selected station will be a temporary error invalid station CC Link Diagnostics Monitoring 7570 70 Stop Monitor 0 Master ST 3 Set Cancel Temporary Error Invalid Station x 3 When the step 2 is performed while the selected station has been set as a temporary error invalid station the temporary error invalid station setting is canceled Point When configuring the temporary error invalid station setting do not write data to the buffer memory areas buffer memory addresses 5E0 and 603 to 6
247. ase the station controlling the data link of the CC Link system becomes faulty Data link control by the master station Master station Controlling Cyclic transmission Remote device station Station number 2 The number of occupied stations 2 37 iu Intelligent device station Station number 4 The number of occupied stations 1 tej s 3 OOO OOOOOCOOOCC OOO OOOOOCOOOO Cyclic transmission Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Master station Cyclic trdy mission Remote device station Station number 2 The number of occupied stations 2 teh mmi sg 9 Goonnnoco00 a Intelligent device station Station number 4 The number of occupied stations 1 te OOOO PENES OOO OOCCOOOOO Cyclic transmission To the next page Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission Standby master station Station number 1 The number of occupied stations 1 Standby status Standby master station Station number 1 0 Controlling 1 When the master station goes down and the standby master station starts to take in control of data link the station number of the standby master station becomes 0
248. ashing OFF 1 The LEDs may look dimly lit or off depending on the communication status 2 LEDs on the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN 3 POWER e RUN L RUN LERR o TEST O ON O OFF CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 10 2 5 Program example This section provides a program example Write a program to the CPU module in a master station 1 Devices to be used The following table lists the devices to be used in the program example Device Description Module X0 Module error X1 Host data link status XF Module ready Remote device station initialization procedure registration SB000D instruction QJ61BT11N Completion status of remote device station initialization SBOO5F procedure SW0080 0 Other station data link status station number 1 SW0080 3 Other station data link status station number 4 X20 Initial setting change of the AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADVN X21 Initial setting change of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN X22 Digital value setting of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN aun X23 Analog output enable of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN X25 Error reset of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN X26 Error reset of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Y30 Data link error flag station number 1 QY10 Y31 Data link error flag station number 4 aes M100 Communication condition established flag m m oa X1000 to X105F Remote input RXO
249. aster station is controlling data link Using Loop Displays the line of the master local module used CH 0 Line status CH 1 Line status Displays the line status Loop Type Displays the line type of CC Link Link Scan Time Displays the maximum minimum and current value of the links can time Loop Test button Executes a line test gt Page 399 Appendix 7 3 Monitoring other station button Monitors other stations gt Page 398 Appendix 7 2 Module Setting Specifies the master local module to be monitored on the CC Link diagnostics In Module Setting select CC Link Then select the module number what number module or I O Address start I O number of the module to be monitored Network Test Stops and restarts data link gt Page 400 Appendix 7 6 397 sonsoubelp yurq 22 7 xipueddy Jedoje eq x9 Buisn ueuM z xipueddy 398 2 Other stations monitoring How to monitor the status of a slave station is described below 1 A Ww Open the CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics window XV Diagnostics gt CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics In Module Setting select CC Link Then select a master local module to be monitored in Module No or I O Address Click the dor button Click the button to monitor the status of the slave station CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics Other station x __ Jststion Beser
250. at STOP 88 RESET RUN CO STOP QU61BT11N RUN LRUN MST SMST SD RD ERR LERR LRUN MST SMST RD ERR LERR STOP RUN CD RESET L CLR CD If the switch on the CPU module is not set at RESET f all the stations are connected with CC Link dedicated cables 2 Set the station number setting switches on the master station to 0 3 Set the transmission speed mode setting switch on the master station from 5 to 9 When setting the switch from 5 to 9 set the same transmission speed as that of during system operation Ls Page 21 CHAPTER 2 4 Resetthe CPU module or power off and on the system CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 5 The line test 1 is started During the test the MST QJ61BT11N LED on the master station flashes RUN Bi L RUN MST ID S MST B ON SD RD D Flashing ERR LERR OFF 6 After the line test 1 is completed the L RUN LED or MST LED on the master station turns on When the test is completed QJ61BT11N RUN M NL RUN L RUN LED ON MST Ri S MST B oN MST LED Flashing sD RD D Flashing The station number where data link was performed with ERRO LIL ERR OFF the slave station is stored in Line test 1 result SWO0B4 to SWOOB For a standby master station use Standby master When the test is not completed error on all the stations nen the testis not completed error on al he stations stat
251. atically performs handshaking with the intelligent device station and writes data to the buffer memory areas of the specified intelligent device station The instruction is available for modules that have a handshake signal e g AJ65BT R2 N Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RISEND ersen un st 82 3 Command GP RISEND f M cemsew Un 60 6 8 Applicable device Link direct Intelli Setting Internal device ae wert File device function module Index Constant data System user Others register JO O device register ZO UO GO Bit Word Bit Word KH S S1 O S2 O S3 O L D O o 1 Setting data e Q T Device Description Setting range Data type 2 Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written M n Un e 0 to FEy 16 bit binary o with three digits mE Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored specified device Within the range of the S2 Start number of the device to which data to be written is stored a Device name specified device Within the range of the S3 Start number of the device in which an interlock signal is stored 2 specified device D Device that turns ON for one scan upon completion of writing Within th
252. ation Remote l O station Station No 1 no of Station No 2 no of occupied stations 1 occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Master station Station No 2 Station No 1 Empty Station No Yo to YOO ori Yo 8 point output module 8 Points Reserved 8 point output module 8 Points 8 point output module Station No 3 no of occupied stations 1 0 Points Reserved Station 8 Points 8 Points 8 Points Reserved 16 Points 32 Points Default Varies depending on the Number of Occupied Stations Reserve Invalid Station Select Select whether to set the slave station as a reserved station or an error invalid station 7 5 Page 161 Section 8 3 4 Page 166 Section 8 3 6 No Setting Reserved Station Invalid Station Default No Setting Intelligent Buffer Set the size of buffer memory used to perform transient transmission with dedicated instructions This setting can be configured only for an Select Word 1 intelligent device station S na Set the size of send buffer to send data using the G P RIWT 0 64 to 4096 instruction Note that the total buffer size of Send and Receive for all slave stations must Receive Set the size of receive buffer to receive data using the G P RIRD be 4096 or less instruction Default 64 0 128 to 4096 Set the size of automatic update buffer to communicate with an Note that the
253. ation number 2 ccce brc secet The number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 RX10 to RX1F RX20 to RX2F Inputs RX RWr from slave stations to the master station are stored in outputs RY RWw of the standby master station shaded areas in the figure above 138 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b Operation between the master station going down and the standby master station controlling data link If the master station goes down the standby master station takes over the control of data link Output from the standby master station Standby master station controlling Station number 2 Occupies 1 station HUM ius ES Station number T 0 __ Remote Remote Remote output Ry input RX output RY Remote l O station Remote I O station Station number 3 M semet Occupies 1 station ARRS ee ee EL e X00 to XOF PS PSDs dcm E NOR F eas a seis enh ae ae Outputs RY RWw of the master station are stored in inputs RX RWr of the standby master station By transferring the inputs RX RWr of the standby master station to the outputs RY RWw outputs to the slave stations are continued shaded areas in the figure above gt Page 147 Section 8 2 5 7 Input of the standby master station Standby master station controlling Station number 2 Occupies 1 station p
254. b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b bO awise swo184 16 15 4 3 te 4 3 2 1 i SW0186 result for each O 7864 station SW0185 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 SW0186 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 SWO0187 SW0187 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 7874 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on The timing of when data in link special registers SWs are updated differs depending on the link special register number The following table lists the update timing Link special e Link special er Data update timing Data update timing register register swo041 SWO0071 Updated regardless of the SB status ss Updated regardless of the SB status Updated after each station becomes gs SW0045 SW0072 2 2 stable x x w w SW0060 When the SB0060 status is changed SW0074 to SW0077 When the SB0074 status is changed mr ra SW0061 When the SB0061 status is changed SW0078 to SW007B When the SB0075 status is changed z F o SWO0062 SW0080 to SW0083 When the SB0080 status is changed 3 D Q D SW0067 SW0088 to SW008B Updated regardless of the SB status 9 y O oo SW0068 SW0090 When the SB0090 status is changed E og SW0069 SW0098 to SWO09B E B wW SWO006A Updated regardless of the SB status SWO009C to SWOO9F HL Updated regardles
255. be always on d Turning on Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SB005F When Specification of remote device station to be initialized SW0014 to SW0017 is selected Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SB005F does not turn on until the procedure registration is normally completed in all the stations If a faulty station exists turn off Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB000D depending on the completion status of other stations e Initialization procedure registration for a standby master station The initial setting cannot be configured in a standby master station When replacing a remote device station while a standby master station is operating as a master station configure the initial setting on a program f When the instruction is not required The initialization procedure registration instruction may not be required under some situations such as when the remote input RX is set as a condition device suoloun y Jo suoneaddy injesn e g uonounj uoneJsibeJ eanpeooud uonezijeniur uonejs 809p ajowsay Eg 155 6 Link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs related to the remote device station initialization procedure registration a Link special relays SBs Link special relays SBs related to the remote device station initialization procedure registration are listed below Values in parentheses ar
256. ble Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables manufactured by different companies can be used together CC Link dedicated cables Ver 1 00 compatible manufactured by different companies cannot be used together CC Link dedicated high performance cables Ver 1 00 compatible cannot be used T branch terminal block connector Terminal block A commercially available terminal block Connector An FA connector conforming to NECA4202 and IEC947 5 2 or equivalent product is recommended NECA Nippon Electric Control Equipment Industries Association Do not remove the jacket of the cables on the branch line if possible 81 uonoeuuoo uo9ueJd z9 Bum 29 Item Specifications Remark Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible terminating resistors of 1100 used Cable length Cable length between a master local station TS MAE Distance between remote and the station one before after the Hans mission length of between I O stations or master local station or an intelligent device Maximum length of the main speed pan T branches remote gevice station and the station beroresaner the lins distance between T stations intelligent device station branches and station to SEUROUS 100m No 30cm or longer 1m or longer 2m or longer station cable length 156kbps 500m pune 1 This applies to a system configured with a remo
257. both on the system A and the system B the number of modules is one 5 The parameters cannot be set using dedicated instructions Point Some restrictions apply to the version of a CPU module depending on the functions of the master local module used Check the version of the CPU module in the appendix of this manual lt _ gt Page 393 Appendix 6 Insufficient power capacity may be caused depending on other connected modules and the number of connected modules Before connecting modules check the power capacity If the power capacity is insufficient change the combination of modules connected When using a C Controller module refer to the user s manual for the C Controller module 70 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 Connecting a master local module in a MELSECNET H remote I O station A master local module can be mounted on any slot of a main base unit or extension base unit The following table lists connectable modules and the number of connectable modules Number of connectable modules Connectable module When the parameters are set on a When the parameters are set using programming tool dedicated instructions QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G Up to 4 modules Not connectable QJ72LP25GE QJ72BR15 1 The number of connectable modules can be set only within the range of the number of I O points of the module Point Some restrictions apply to the version of a MELSECNET H rem
258. ces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and
259. ch 22 Station Type o ae i eaaa paaa sess 104 106 Station specific mode setting 105 Status difference between a master station and a slave station at an eror llle 122 Status logging iscsi lee ee a 312 Stopping and restarting data link 317 SW ties olan aye trad Se a wats tnd DO Gok Wa 13 348 Synchronous mode 0 00e0 eee 162 System configuration 005 68 T branch connection 00000000e 80 T branch system configuration 80 Temporary error invalid station setting 167 Terminal blockii is doas 23 79 Terminating resistors 0 00 cece eee 77 Test after wiring llli 87 The order of connecting the cables 77 Tightening torque llli 79 Total Module Connected 99 Transient transmission 13 128 Transmission delay time 367 Transmission speed 2 0 0 0 ce ee eee 24 Transmission speed setting 86 Transmission speed test 0055 91 Transmission speed mode setting switch 23 Troubleshooting by the CC Link diagnostics 270 Troubleshooting by the status logging 274 Troubleshooting common to modules 269 Troubleshooting flowcharts 267 Troubleshooting using a programming tool 270 Troubleshooting using LEDs 267 Troubleshooting when the RUN LED
260. chronous shortens output transmission delay time 0 1 0 Asynchronous lasvdTM d O 8 6 1 Synchronous 81 7 Delay time setting Set 0 0 1 For the setting data specified as Invalid default value will be applied gt Page 206 Section 9 8 1 b to Page 208 Section 9 8 1 e 2 Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal end 205 b Slave station setting data Device Item Setting data Seung Set by range Set the station type number of occupied stations and station number as follows b15 to b12b11 to b8 amp b7 to bO a TX TX 2 L Station number gt Number of occupied stations Station type The default values are 01014 to 0140 station number 1 to 64 number of occupied stations 1 station type Ver 1 compatible remote I O station uc D 2 Number of occupied stations setting Number of occupied stations Setting 1 1H 2 24 1 to 44 S2 0 Setting for 1 3 34 to to 64 4 44 User S2 63 stations 3 Station type setting Station type Setting Ver 1 compatible remote l O station Ou Ver 1 compatible remote device station 1H Ver 1 compatible intelligent device station 2H Ver 2 compatible remote device station single 5H Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station single 6y 0 to Fy Ver 2 compatible remote device station double 84 Ver 2 compatible intelligent device
261. ck the area in the station number 1 Station No 3 RWr offset 4C40 y Start buffer memory address of RWr in the station number 3 Station No 3 RWr size 0 Default Buffer memory area size of RWr in the station number 3 Station No 4 RWr offset 4C40y Start buffer memory address of RWr in the station number 4 Station No 4 RWr size 0 Default Buffer memory area size of RWr in the station number 4 334 5 Link special relay SB This area stores bit on off data indicating the data link status Buffer memory addresses 5E0 to 5FF correspond to link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF gt Page 340 Appendix 3 1 The following table lists the relationship between buffer memory addresses 5EO0 to SFFy and link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF Address 5EOy 1504 5E14 1505 5E2 1506 5E3y 1507 5E4 1508 5E5y 1509 5E6 1510 5E7H 1511 5E8y 1512 5E9 1513 5EA 1514 5EBy 1515 5ECy 1516 5EDH 1517 5EE 1518 5EF 1519 5F0 1520 5F1 1521 5F2 1522 5F3 1523 5F44 1524 5F5H 1525 5F6H 1526 5F7H 1527 5F8H 1528 5F9H 1529 5FAH 1530 5FBy 1531 5FCy 1532 5FDy 1533 5FE 1534 5FFy 1535 APPENDICES b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1F 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 2F 2E 2D 2C 2B 2A 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 2
262. cknowledgement SB0057 5E5y b7 e Master station duplication error canceling complete 8B0058 5E5 b8 Master station duplication error canceling result SW0057 6574 3 Timing chart of the link special relays SBs and link special register SW y Executed by the master local module vete eene n ene Executed on the program Master station duplication error canceling request SB0007 Master station duplication error canceling acknowledgement SB0057 suonoun J y Jo suoneoriddy jnjes e g Line check Master station duplication error canceling complete SB0058 uonouny Buijeoueo 10119 uoneordnp uoreis JaIseW OL 8 Master station duplication error Result canceling result SW0057 171 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Dedicated instructions facilitate programming for using intelligent function modules A master local module can perform the following operations by using dedicated instructions Transient transmission to a master station local station and intelligent device station Network parameter settings for a master station Message transmission to remote device stations 9 1 Precautions 1 List of dedicated instructions The dedicated instructions that can be used for a master local module are listed below List of Dedicated Instructions Applicable Devices and Target station Instruction Description Reference G P
263. completion D2 1 Completion device Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RDMSG instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P RDMSG instruction Normal completion Remains off and does not change Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RDMSG instruction is Abnormal end j completed and turns off in the next END process End End End End process process process process Sequence program _ __ Execution completion of ON the G P RDMSG instruction Se G P RDMSG instruction CFF J ON Completion device ORR cred Abnormal end Status display device OFF at completion Normal completion g 1 scan d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RDMSG instruction is ten 4 Operation error 7 For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO E S Error code Condition that an operation error occurs 242 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When attempting to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruction is specified
264. cted Station Information Selected Station Error Information T io m m Zms Current 2ms n Tine E lt lt J Legend Close ta ki T bior B 12 S Loop Test a Status Logging cr eae Check Stop Data Link T Double click the icon The transmission speed for each station is indicated Test Execution o jfi Test Type c ud Test Target r MELSOFT Application JL Transmission speed setting obtaining completed LE Result of Loop Test inot executed filiera error Obtained Transmission Speed Settinglbps iNotexecuted 156K 625k 25m Om uw Open the CC Link diagnostics window on GX Works2 Diagnostics lt gt CC Link Diagnostics Double click Loop Test on the bottom left corner of the window If Loop Test is not displayed click the _R letedEunctions gt gt button on the bottom left corner of the window Select Obtain transmission speed setting under Test Type Clicking the button executes the transmission speed test Do not write data to the buffer memory areas buffer memory addresses 5E0y 5E4y 5F8y 6414 645 and 783 to 787 Do not obtain the transmission speed setting using GX Works 2 and a program or other peripherals at the same time The transmission speed setting may not be obtained normally In additi
265. cumulative number of times Start logging with RAM selected B325 Status logging flash that logs are stored on the flash To execute logging with RAM ROM error ROM has exceeded 100 000 Flash ROM selected replace the O O times module In the station information T z parameter a number other than B384 b MA 14 to 40 is set for the station Set the number within 14 to 404 O x error parameter number including the station numbers of occupied stations The total number of occupied Total number of f i stations set in the station B385 stations error Set the value to 64 or less O x information parameter has parameter exceeded 64 Number of occupied In the station information B386 stations setting error parameter all the number of Set the values within 1 to 4 O x parameter occupied stations are set to 0 The delay time setting in the Delay time setting B387 network parameter of the master Set 0 for the delay time O x error parameter E station is outside the range A value set for the station type in B388 Station type setting the station information parameter Set a value within 0 to 2 in the T error parameter is outside the range in the remote remote net Ver 1 mode O net Ver 1 mode Please consult your local B38A System error MUR O Mitsubishi representative Remote device station More than 42 remote device B38B setting error stations are set in the station Set the value to 42 or less
266. current cursor station Stop Monitoring Point Ifthe setting Cancel button cannot be clicked check that the master station has been selected in Module Setting sonsouDeip yurq 22 7 xipueddy Jedoje eq x9 Buisn uey z xipueddy While configuring the setting do not write data to the buffer memory areas buffer memory addresses 5EO0 5E4y and 603 to 607 Do not configure or cancel the temporary error invalid station setting using a program and other peripherals at the same time The temporary error invalid station setting may not be normally configured or cancelled 401 Appendix 8 Setting sheet Appendix 8 1 This appendix provides sheets to be used when the parameters of CC Link are set Copy the sheets for use Assignment sheet 1 Remote I O RX RY assignment sheet For an example of using the assignment sheet refer to Page 58 Section 4 1 or Page 227 CHAPTER 10 CPU module Master station local station Slave station Device Buffer memory address Station No Module name Remote I O RX RY to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to 402 to to APPENDICES 2 Remote register RWr RWw assignment sheet
267. d a Ver 2 compatible slave station including a local station in the remote net additional mode to a station number after a Ver 1 compatible slave station When there is a possibility to add a Ver 1 compatible slave station in future set a reserved station at the end of the Ver 1 compatible slave station To add a station number of a Ver 2 compatible slave station between station numbers of a Ver 1 compatible slave station use the remote net Ver 2 mode In a system where a standby master station is used changing the mode to the remote net Ver 2 mode is recommended In the remote net additional mode the storage locations of RX RY RWr and RWw differ between a Ver 1 compatible slave station and a Ver 2 compatible slave station therefore changing a program for a standby master station is required 1 Points per module and per system For the points refer to the table of the performance specifications gt Page 24 Section 3 2 In CC Link increasing the number of occupied stations and setting the greater value in the expanded cyclic setting can increase the number of points Set the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting for each slave station 7 5 Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 Page 119 Section 7 4 2 1 Item Description The number of points is increased by increasing the station numbers occupied per module Number of Occupied Stations Note that the number of slave stations that can be connected to a CC
268. d buffer to send data using the G P RIWT 0 64 to 4096 instruction Note that the total buffer size of Send and Receive for all slave stations must eus Set the size of receive buffer to receive data using the G P RIRD be 4096 or less instruction Default 64 0 128 to 4096 Set the size of automatic update buffer to communicate with an Note that the total buffer size of Auto Auto intelligent device station using automatic update buffer for all slave stations must be 4096 or Set the size required for each intelligent device station less Default 128 Station specific mode setting Set the station specific mode for the slave station This setting can be configured only when the slave station supports the station specific mode Varies depending on the module that was set Module List The list of slave stations is displayed Information about slave stations can be set to the master station by drag and drop of the items from Module List to List of stations Select CC Link The list of CC Link modules is displayed Select modules from General CC Link Module if they are not in the list Find Module Search modules by the station type or model name The modules displayed in Find Result can be moved to List of stations by drag and drop My Favorites The modules registered in My Favorites are displayed To register modules in My Favorites perform any of the following Right click on th
269. d expanded cyclic setting in slave stations The storage locations for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to UnG1503 L gt Page 332 Appendix 2 4 ex Remote device station Local station A Station No 1 the number of occupied stations 1 expanded cyclic setting single Station No 2 the number of occupied stations 1 expanded Master station cyclic setting quadruple Address Remote register RWw Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Address a4oon i Rwwo Nii RWwo Nii 1 RW O 4COOH For station J4401H RWw 1 RWw 1 RWr 1 4CO1H For station No 1 p ae RWw2 If 1 RWw2 If 1 RW 2 4CO2u No 1 4403H RWw3 ill RWw3 ct RW 3 4CO3H 44044 RWw4 Pt E 24 RWr4 4C04H 4405H RW 5 a o sd RW 5 4C05H gt 4400H RWw6 j i 0 E a RWr6 4C06H E 4407H RWw 7 RWr 7 4CO7H a 44084 l RWw8 J 5 E 24 RW 8 4C08H at 44090H RWw9 J i JS E RW 9 4C09H w 440AH RWwA J J i1 01 0 5 E I RWrA 4COAH Ei For station 440BH RWw B RWr B 4COBH For station z No 2 440CH RWwC f OO 1 RW C 4cocHl No2 9 440DH RWD 5 E I RW D 4CODH 3 440EH RWE J 9 2 2 s9oc po4 RW E 4COEH gt 440FH RWw F RWr F 4COFH S 4410n RWw10 E RWr10 4C10H 4411H RWw 11 RWr 11 4C11H 4412H RWw12 8 3 RWr12 4C12H 4413H RWw13 ff 0
270. d in the master station local station SB Number of link special relay SB points refreshed in the master station local station SW Number of link special register SW points refreshed in the master station local station oE Time that file register R ZR data on a memory card is transferred only when used KM1 Constant Master station The block guarantee of cyclic data per station function is not supported Constant KM1 With block guarantee of Without block guarantee of CPU type cyclic data per station cyclic data per station Q00JCPU 1 05 QOOCPU 0 86 Q01CPU 0 80 Q02CPU 0 75 0 68 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU 0 30 0 28 QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 28 QOOUJCPU QO0OUCPU Q01UCPU 0 88 0 85 QO02UCPU 0 55 0 43 QO3UDCPU Q04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU 0 29 047 QO04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU 388 APPENDICES Local station 1 The block guarantee of cyclic data per station function is not supported Constant KM1 With block guarantee of Without block guarantee of CPU type cyclic data per station cyclic data per station Q00JCPU 1 27 QOOCPU 1 04 Q01CPU 0 93 Q02CPU 0 94 0 87 02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Bie cou MER OU Mine i a 0 3 A QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q0
271. de Setting Ver i Mode TX Speed isekbps v Link Scan Time Approx 15 74 ms i Module List x Type Master Station E fi T EGET Select CC Link Find Module My Favorites 7 sosa Remote Station Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start 5 aj station No Model Name Station Type call ea hee 1 pe Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Host Station Master Station X 4 le Total Moule Cs i 3 Y AJ6558TB3 80 Remote 1 0 Station Veni 1 Station Occur Single 32 Points arredati pu AJESSBTBZN 8S Remote 1 0 Station Ver 1 Station Occu Single 32 Points E CC Link Module Mitsubishi Electric Corpor Remote Input RX AJ6SVETCU 68DAVN Remote Device Station Verl 3 Stations Occu Single 96 Points Easter ENDE Remote Output RY Y1000 WB QJ 18T11N Master Local Module WI L26CPUBT Master Local Station Remote Register wo Rege WI L26CPU PBT Master Local Station Remote Register RWw W100 618711 Master Local Module Ver 2 Remote Input RX Input Module Screw Terminal Block Typ Ver 2 Remote Output RY B Input Module Screw 2 piece Terminal E 5 Input Module Screw 2 piece Terminal E m a E Input Module Spring Clamp Terminal Bl eee Input Module Sensor Connector Type e Special Relay 58 580 SA SIAR STARS 8 Input Module One touch Connector Ty Special Reaister SW SWO Input Module 40 pin Connector Type F Retry Count 3 Host Station amp Input Module Waterproof Connector T Automatic Reconnection Station Count t amp Input M
272. de the range is set the monitoring time will be 360 SW0009 Monitoring time sands 4 6094 setting i O O When SWOOOB is set the time until a dedicated instruction fails is as follows Number or retries 1 x monitoring time Set monitoring time between a dedicated instruction executed to the CPU module and the CPU module responding to it SW000A CPU monitoring Default 90 seconds x 60A4 time setting Range 0 to 3600 second o O If a value outside the range is set the monitoring time will be 3600 seconds 348 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Set the number of retries of when dedicated instructions are used swooop Dedicated Default 0 No retry 6oBp instruction rety Range 0 to 7 time x 9 i count setting If a value outside the range is set the number of times will be 7 Specify a station where an initial process is performed using the information registered by the initialization procedure registration using a SWO0014 programming tool 6144 0 Initial process not performed 1 Initial process performed SW0015 615 Specification of b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi bO remote device SW0014 SWO016 station to be SW0015 616 initialized SW0016 SW0017 SW0017 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers 6171 The stations n
273. ded cyclic setting Expanded Cyclic Setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple m 1 3 15 Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 1 x m 15 Rd SM x t LS x m Rd SM LS x 1 x m 1 Rd SM x t LS x m Rd SM x n LS x 2 x m 15 SM LS x 2 x m 1 Max value SM x t LS x m Rd SM x t LS x m Rd Rd Rd When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and the expanded cyclic setting is Double Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode 20 x 1 3 x 1 x 3 1 Normal value 20 x 1 3 x 3 1 5 20 8 x 1 x 3 1 20 x 1 3 x 3 1 5 33 5ms 30 5ms 1 5 33 5ms 1 5 30 5ms Maval 20 x 1 3 x 2 x 3 1 20 x 1 3 x 3 20 3 x 2 x 3 1 20 x 1 3 x 3 x valu 1 5 42 5ms 1 5 30 5ms 1 5 42 5ms 1 5 30 5ms 372 APPENDICES 4 Master station gt local station Ver 1 compatible slave station a Master station RX local station RY master station RWr lt local station RWw
274. dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible and CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible C Controller module A generic term for the QO6CCPU V H01 QO6CCPU V Q06CCPU V B and Q12DCCPU V Built in Ethernet port QCPU A generic term for the QO3UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU A generic term for the Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Sere Universal model QCPU QnACPU A generic term for the following CPU modules Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU RAS The abbreviation for Reliability Availability and Serviceability This term refers to usability of automated equipment Remote input RX Bit data input from a slave station to the master station For some areas in a local station data are input in the opposite direction Remote output RY Bit data output from the master station to a slave station For some areas in a local station data are output in the opposite direction Remote register RWr Word data input from a slave station to the master station For some areas in a local station data are input in the opposite direction Remote register RWw Word data output from the master station to a slave station For some areas in a local station data are output in the opposite direction Link sp
275. design maintenance and inspection Does the CPU module on Take corrective action so the master station have no that the CPU module may error identify the master local Check if the module h ana eck if the module has beenidemifcd User s manual for the A1 7 CPU module CPU module used hardware design Data link Manaw ign maintenance and cannot be inspection performed in the entire Check if the sequence scan system time is within the allowable range Isn t the sequence scan time Set the asynchronous mode 10Mbps 50ms ud long in the synchronous or reduce the transmission 5Mbps 50ms mode speed 2 5Mbps 100ms 625kbps 400ms 156kbps 800ms 2 Keep the transmission cable Check if the transmission away from the power cable cable is away from the Keep a distance of 100mm power cable or more is recommended Check if the FG terminal is A1 8 Noise Is the transmission cable grounded separately from Ground the terminals i free from noise the GND terminal of the separately power system Reduce the transmission Take noise reduction speed and check if the measures frequency of occurrence of Reduce the transmission noise is reduced speed E Replace the modules and Repair or replace the Failure of the Do modules on the master A1 9 check if the station normally module on the master master station station normally operate operates station 276 To the next page CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHO
276. digital output value RWr1 Read Error code RWr8 Turn on Error reset request flag RY1A Turn off Error reset request flag RY1A Set CH 1 digital value setting RWwO Set CH 2 digital value setting RWw1 Turn on CH 1 analog output enable disable flag RYOO Turn on CH 2 analog output enable disable flag RYO1 Read CH 1 check code RWr0 and CH 2 check code RWr1 Read Error code RWr8 Turn on Error reset request flag RY1A Turn off Error reset request flag RY1A 2 Write the program to the CPU module in the master station Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system XX Online gt Write to PLC uiu or power off on 252 3 A CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING Set the switch on the CPU module in the master station to RUN to execute the program Executing the program turns on Initial data processing request flag RX18 of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Then the initial setting is executed mui When the initial setting is completed the input value of the AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADVN is converted into a digital value CH 1 digital output value is stored into D500 and CH 2 digital output value is stored into D501 If an error occurs in the AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADVN an error code is stored into D508 After the cause of the error is removed and X25 is turned on the error is reset Turning on X22 sets the digital value of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Turning on
277. e number of occupied Remote I O station Station No 4 the number of occupied 1 CPU module Master station stations 1 stations 1 Stations 1 stations 1 Station __ vo7 to voo MEE number 4 i ovo The remote I O station points setting is not configured Remote I O station Station No 1 the number of occupied Remote I O station Station No 2 the number of occupied Remote I O station Station No 3 the number of occupied 32 point output module Remote I O station Station No 4 the number of occupied CPU module Master station stations 1 stations 1 stations 1 stations 1 Remote output RY a ME TE l N wrexe P TE i EE i 1 i i i 1 i i 4 S gt Yortovoo Fo y m E MM rr toro i i saion _ r gt i bog number 4 i i i i i i i i i L i L 8 point output module 8 point output module 16 point output module 32 point output module suoloun y Jo suoneoiddy jnjes e g Kjuo pow z 48A 1eu ejoujaJ Bumes szuiod uonejs 0 ejouies 6 g 169 1 Setting method Set the number of points of a remote I O station in Remote Station Points under Station Information Setting of the network parameter 7 gt Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 Point P When setting eight point remote I O stations set an even number of stations consecutively When setting an odd
278. e 291 Section 11 3 2 Error details are stored in SW0098 to SWOO09B and SWOOSC to SWOOSF This item is checked and the result is stored only upon link start Whether the switch has been correctly set is stored SWO006A Switch setting 0 Correct Oo Oo Oo 66A4 status Values other than 0 Error code 5 Page 291 Section 11 3 2 SWOO6D Max link scan Th link time is stored unit 1ms e maximum link scan time is stored unit 1ms x 66D time O O A e u The current link scan time is stored unit 1ms x u i ime i unit i 66Ey scan time 2 SWOO6F Min link scan The mini link time is stored unit 1ms i e minimum link scan time is stored unit 1ms 66Fy time O O SW0070 Total number of The last station number set using the parameter is stored 6704 stations 1 to 64 station O The maximum station number during data link station number set using Max Swo0071 UEM the station number switches is stored communication i O x x 6714 1 to 64 station station number Reserved stations are excepted Number of SW0072 The number of modules performing data link is stored connected O x x 6724 Reserved stations are excepted modules SW0073 Standby master The standby master station number is stored 6734 station number 1 to 64 station o O Whether a station has been set as a reserved station is stored SW0074 0 A station other than a reserved station 6744 1 Reserved station
279. e 52 E me No Link scan I HdHHHHH HHH Response time of the first station Ll Response time of the corresponding station Response time of the final station Responses from remote I O stations Input 1 Input2 gt 4 Ii t IV 4 Transmission delay time gt I Delay time due to response delay of the remote I O station ll Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station III Delay time between the master station receiving data and the data being stored into the buffer memory IV Delay time until information of the master station is refreshed in the CPU module uoneoiioeds uoneziuoiyouAs ueosS gg suoloun y Jo suoneoiddy jnjes g g 165 8 3 6 Error invalid station setting function Even if a data link error occurs in a slave station the station is not detected as a faulty station in the master station and local station This function is used when a slave station is powered off as a matter of the system configuration or for other purposes Note however that an error is not detected in an error invalid station Because the error invalid station setting is configured in the network parameter the setting cannot be changed during data link To change the setting during data link use the temporary error invalid station setting function 7 5 Page 167 Section 8 3 7 Stations set as error invalid stations
280. e buffer 1 The device after the device specified by D of the master station specified by Un is accessed 2 Dataare written to the automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2 b Timing of writing data The G P RITO instruction writes data while it is being executed But the concurrent execution of the instruction from two or more locations is not allowed for the same intelligent device station c The number of allowable write points The maximum number of points that can be written by the G P RITO instruction is 4096 d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RITO instruction is nine e Assignment of the automatic update buffer The assignment of the automatic update buffer is performed in Station Information Setting of the network parameter of a programming tool 7 5 Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 201 OLlM d o 46 202 3 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs Zu When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When attempt to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruc
281. e buffer memory addresses and bit numbers Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD 5E0 b13 e Execution status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5E 5E5y b14 Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOOSF 5E5 b15 b Link special registers SWs Link special registers SWs related to the remote device station initialization procedure registration are listed below Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses e Specification of remote device station to be initialized SW0014 to SW0017 6144 to 617p Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction result SWO05F 65F Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 1 SW0110 710 4 to Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 16 SW011F 71F 7 Replacement of a master local module in failure When replacing a master local module in failure with a new master local module do not use a module with a serial number first five digits of 08031 or earlier If a module with a serial number first five digits of 08031 or earlier is used by mistake and the specification of remote device station to be initialized is performed each station operates as listed below Master station remote device E Operation station The setting of Specifica
282. e device station a remote I O station station access The specified device RX RY Device number error s RWw or RWr number is outside Check the parameters and the BC74 remote device station O x atone the device range for the device range of the target station connected target station A data link error has occurred in Data link error in all all stations during access from Start the data link then issue the BC75 stations remote O x the peripherals to the remote request device station access device station Time check over has occurred Increase the time check time in Time check over HN during access from the the application of the request BC76 remote device station f O x NA peripherals to the remote device source or check operations of the station target slave station BC81 Please consult your local System error NE O O BD83 and BD84 Mitsubishi representative BD85 Hardware error A hardware error has been Please consult your local o o detection detected Mitsubishi representative BD86 and BD87 BF11 to BF1C Please consult your local System error a O O BF20 Mitsubishi representative BF30 to BF37 Check the application of the An error has been detected in Execution result read i request source reading the execution result in BF38 error remote device Check if another peripheral is O O access from the
283. e for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible for
284. e integrity of cyclic data in each slave station 264 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 266 11 1 Troubleshooting Flowcharts saasa eaae a anaana teen m 267 11 1 1 Troubleshooting using LEDs 1 0 2 0 00000 c cece ete eee eens 267 11 1 2 Troubleshooting using a programming tool saanane erae 270 11 2 Lists of Problems 5 tem ESO TB ee e eB Ree 275 11 2 1 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station illii liiis lesu 275 11 2 2 Problems due to cyclic data error 2 6 teen ees 283 11 2 3 Problems due to transient data error 0 6 sese 286 11 2 4 Problems due to operation error in the master station llli eese 287 11235 o aea E ots oh ln cR Rr es EE E Ea eal he bela 288 11 3 1 How to check error codes 0 20 ccc cette ns 288 11 3 2 Error COdE ISS zone teet Sen n e CH he AES REED 291 11 4 CC Link Diagnostics Using GX Works2 issssssssssse eee 308 11 4 1 Monitoring the host station other stations s 0000 00 cee eee eee 308 11 4 2 Executing the line test obtaining the transmission speed setting 311 11 4 3 Status logging seit ses pe RERO CDS ele e dr an a ER 312 11 4 4 Greating a check sheet gisis rnui Oh tha te RR EE Eder AL asus 315 11 4 5 Stopping and restarting data link 22i 317 11 4 6 Setting and canceling a temporary error invalid station 2l lllissssne 318 11 4 7 Hardware information sss s 3
285. e module listed in Select CC Link Right click on the module displayed in Find Result of Find Module Output Error details are displayed if settings are not configured properly 105 siejep Dumes Z 7 uonels 19 Se e 10 sBumes vejoweseg b When the checkbox next to Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window is not checked 1 Set Mode and Total Module Connected in the Network Parameter window and open CC Link Station Information window Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Station Information button 2 Input setting values 3 When completing the setting close the CC Link Station Information window X End button CC Link Station Information Module 1 Intelligent Buffer Select Word LETT Station 1 v SzPoints No setting B Occupied Station 1 v No Setting v nr EE s Count Points Station Select Send Receive Automatic aay ae Sole focuied taton 1 gt sant to Sting single Ss Occupied Stations z wv 64Points v No Setting X X Intelligent Device Station of Station Type includes local station and standby master station Default Check End Cancel Item Station No Description The order of the slave station is displayed before the slash The start station number of the slave station is displayed after the slash Setting range Statio
286. e range of the Bit i D 1 also turns ON at an abnormal end specified device 1 The local device and the file register of each program cannot be used as a device for setting data 191 a Control data i Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range Stores the status when the instruction is complete 81 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Value other than 0 Error code S1 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station 0 to 64 User S1 2 A0COSS COJ Set 00044 00044 User Attribute code S1 3 Buffer memory address Specify the start address of the buffer memory 4 User 1 4 Number of write points Specify the number of write data in word units 1 to 480 2 User 1 For details refer to the manual for the intelligent device station to which data are written 2 The value indicates the maximum number of write data Specify the value within the buffer memory capacity of the intelligent device station or within the receive buffer area setting range set by a parameter b Interlock signal storage device r Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range RY Request device 0 to 127 User S3 0 b15 to b8 b7 to bO 0 RY Set 0 to the upper eight bits 0 User RX Completion device 0 to 127 User b15 to 8 b7 to bO Rw Error code storage device S3 1 RWr 1 RX 0 to 15 If the error code
287. e same as those of Ver 1 10 Point In a system where a Ver 1 00 compatible module is included the maximum overall cable distance and station to station cable length need to meet the specifications of Ver 1 00 For the maximum overall cable distance and station to station cable length of Ver 1 00 refer to Page 30 Section 3 2 3 How to check the version On a Ver 1 10 compatible module the rating plate has a logo CC Link On a Ver 2 compatible module the rating plate has a logo V2 CC1inkW MELSEC Q MITSUBISHI MODEL SERIAL 130120000000000 B o eimi SSS St St Sia emi ames eis ses 1 I Relevant regulation standards l A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC _ MADE IN JAPAN APPENDICES Appendix 11 External Dimension Diagram nn xis i QJ61BT11N RUN MST S MST SD RD ERR L ERR STATION NO 18 3 e x10 ol E P N MODE 98 NC NC DA SLD DB Fe AY 2 DG 90 NC 2 DA B DB Fo AA DG 2 Unit mm 411 weJbeig uoisueuiq jeusa xg L xipueddy Memo 412 INDEX Symbols D of STA Occupied 20000000 00 104 Datalink 244 424 2000 poadareedowes E
288. e the icon by drag and drop 5 Intell ST 7 Intell ST x 14 6 Intell ST Va ST Connecting Station Information Displays the station number of the connected station host station Selected Station Information Displays the information such as a station number of the station selected in the station list area another station Connecting Station Information Selected Station Information Selected Station Error Information Station No Number of Occupied Stations 2 Station Type Local Station or Intelligent Device Station Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Connecting Module pic Comment 1 2 Intell ST Selected Station Error Information Displays error information of the station selected in the station list area Connecting Station Information Selected Station Information By double clicking each error shown below the details and corrective actions can be displayed Related Functions gt gt Displays or hides the related function icons For details on the related functions refer to the following Loop Test 7 Page 87 Section 6 5 1 1 Page 91 Section 6 5 2 1 e Status Logging gt Page 312 Section 11 4 3 e Create Check Sheet 7 gt Page 315 Section 11 4 4 e Start Data Link Stop Data Link 7 5 Page 317 Section 11 4 5 309
289. e uee jeg suoneoiunuJuo Jo ejduex3 0L uonejs e e s uoee ui ejep oio Jo AjuBejul ay eunsse oj ejduiexe ureiBoJg 9 0L 265 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes details on errors that might occur when the master local module is used and the troubleshooting 266 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1 Troubleshooting Flowcharts 11 1 1 Troubleshooting using LEDs Master station RUN on Master station L RUN on Master station ERR on Master station ERR flashing All slave stations L RUN on on the master station is off lt z Page 268 Section 11 1 1 1 Master station SD on RD on Troubleshoot the problem with reference to Troubleshooting when the RUN LED When a CC Link system is newly configured or the existing CC Link system is changed When the CC Link system has operated Master station L ERR flashing B1 3 B1 4 A1 2 A1 3 A1 4 1 A1 7 1 A1 9 A3 2 1 B1 1 1 B1 2 B1 5 Slave station RD flashing Slave station L ERR on Slave station L ERR flashing Slave station SD flashing No A3 3 A3 5 A3 6 A2 5 A2 6 A2 10 A4 1_A4 2 B2 1 B2 2 B2 4 A2 1 A2 2 Ll A2 5 A2 7 A4 3 B2 2 B2 3 A2 3 A2 9 A2 10 A4 4 A4 5 2 programming tool 4 Troubleshoot using a lt gt Page 270 Secti
290. e until data is transmitted 1 Master station lt gt remote I O station a Master station RX remote I O station input APPENDICES This is the time between a signal input to a remote I O station and the device of a CPU module turning on off Formula The letters in the table mean as follows SM LS Link scan time Master station sequence scan time n LS SM The decimal point is rounded up Rio Remote I O response time Calculation value With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value SM x n LS x 1 Rio SM x n x 1 Rio SM LS x 1 Rio SM x n x 1 Rio Max value SMxn LSx2 Rio SMxn x2 Rio SM LS x 2 Rio SM x n x 2 Rio Ex When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms and remote I O response time is 1 5ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Normal value 20x 1 3x 1 1 5 20 x 1 x 1 1 5 20 3x 1 1 5 20 x 1 x 1 1 5 24 5ms 21 5ms 24 5ms 21 5ms 20 x 1 3x2 1 5 20 x 1 x 2 1 5 20 3 x 2 1 5 20 x 1 x 2 1 5 Max value 27 5ms 41 5ms
291. each station Please check it when you confirm it LEER Describe the installation status to 6 System Configuration when it is not set up in each station 6 System Configuration Station No Station Type Number of Occupied Stations Length of Cable 316 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 5 Stopping and restarting data link How to stop and restart data link of a master local module is described below During a debugging session the master local module does not receive data from other stations and does not send data of the host station 1 Open the CC Link Diagnostics window Diagnostics gt CC Link Diagnostics 2 Select a master local module where data link is to be stopped and restarted on the top of the window CC Link Diagnostics CCLink Mi Board No 2 1 0 0020H QJG1BT11N Select the applicable module 3 Double click Stop Data Link on the bottom of the window The data link of the master local module stops If Stop Data Link is not displayed on the bottom of the window click the Related Eunctions gt gt button on the bottom left corner of the window Link Scan Time Max 3ms Min 2ms Current 3ms Related Functions lt lt Legend Close Fa z Loop Test Status Logging Create Check Stop Data Link Sheet Double click the icon 4 When the step 3 is performed while the data link of the selected module h
292. ear Continue Continue Continue an error data link continued When the programmable controller CPU of the local station is set to STOP at an Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue 2 Continue Continue error data link continued Data Link Clears the receive areas Faulty Clear Clear When data link Station from other Holds the for the enti Setting of All point stations i Mi a AU M DU Indefinite ponis Indefinite Indefinite Ieee raas Hold system is programming off Holds the from other stopped tool for local Ho Hed receive areas stations station from other setting stations Clears the receive area from the Data Link Clear remote I O When a mee Faulty station having a communication Station communication failure such as Setting of a failure i power off Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue f programming Holds the occurs in a remote I O tool for local receive area station station f from the setting Hold remote I O station having a communication failure Clears the receive area from the Data Link Clear remote device When a m Faulty station havinga Holds the communication Si tion communication receive area failure such as fail from the Setting of a EN t Ln ailure power off r oraramin Indefinite Indefinite Indefinite Indefinite Continue remote device Continue occurs in a Sater Ht Holds the station having a remote device i qon receive arga communication station i fro
293. ease consult your local B202 and B203 System error P O O Mitsubishi representative Too many transient requests Transient request Wait for a while and send the B204 were sent to the corresponding O O overload error request again station A transient request was issued to Transient target station B205 OR a station other than an intelligent Change the target station O O device station Process request error A line test request was issued Execute a line test while data link B301 PAN S i O O during link stop during link stop is being performed The destination station number of the temporary error invalid E Specify a station number smaller Specified station request or temporary error invalid B302 than or equal to the maximum O x number setting error canceling request has exceeded station number the maximum station number that can communicate Although the temporary error invalid request or temporary error No station number j Set the station number B303 invalid canceling request was O x setting error SW0003 SW0004 to SW0007 issued the target station number has not been set When a line test was executed Check if the remote station an error has been detected in a intelligent device station and Line test faulty station B304 remote station intelligent device standby master station have been O x detected station or standby master station
294. ecial relay SB Bit data that indicates the operating status and data link status of modules on the master and local stations Link special register SW Word data that indicates the operating status and data link status of modules on the master and local stations Ver 1 compatible slave station A slave station that supports the remote net Ver 1 mode Ver 2 compatible slave station A slave station that supports the remote net Ver 2 mode Intelligent device station A station such as the AJ65BT R2 N that exchanges I O signals bit data and I O data word data with another station by cyclic transmission This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station and also issues a transient transmission request to another station A MELSEC QIL series module that has functions other than input and output such as an A D converter module and Intelligent function module D A converter module Cyclic transmission Data link A function by which data are periodically exchanged among stations on the same system using link devices RX RY RWw and RWr A generic term for cyclic transmission and transient transmission Device A device X Y M D or others in a CPU module Transient transmission A function of communication with another station which is used when requested by a dedicated instruction or a programming tool High Performance model QCPU A generic term for the QO
295. ect on a programming tool Select QCPU Q mode under PLC Series Select Q20UDH under PLC Type Project gt New New Project Simple Project 9 Open the Network Parameter window and check the checkbox next to Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window On GX Works2 only Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter lt gt CC Link Check the checkbox 10 Select 1 for Number of Modules Set the field to 1 Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration eere eem 64 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION 11 Configure the settings as follows When using GX Developer refer to the section When the checkbox next to Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window is not checked 7 gt Page 106 Section 7 3 2 2 b Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules 1 _ Boards Blank No Setting Set H 2 Start I O No 0000 Operation Setting Operation Setti Type Master Station E Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start X Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected 1 9 Remote Input RX 1000 Remote Output RY Y1000 Remote Register RWr wo Remote Register RWw w100 Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr
296. ection 7 8 2 2 Ex Communications using the communication buffer Master station Local station first station CPU module G P RIRD Receive buffer for the first station CPU module Buffer memory 1 The buffer memory in the local station or the device in the CPU module is accessed 2 The data specified in the control data is stored in the receive buffer for the first station Master station CPU module Local station first station CPU module Buffer memory Send buffer for the first station S P RIWT 3 The data to be written to the buffer memory in the local station or to the device in the CPU module is stored in the send buffer for the first station 4 The buffer memory in the local station or the device in the CPU module is accessed 336 APPENDICES 9 Automatic update buffer This area stores data automatically updated when transient transmission communications using the automatic update buffer is performed with an AJ65BT R2 N The automatic update buffer size of the AJ65BT R2 N is set using the network parameter 5 Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 Ex Communications using the automatic update buffer Master station AJ65BT R2 N first station CPU module Buffer memory r 1 Automatic T Automatic GtP RiFR update buffer Automatic update update 2 for the first buf
297. ed as a y IN setting station specified status reserved station SW0074 to SW0077 AEEA Is Refresh instruction when Check if Refresh instruction Turn on Refresh instruction butput fiam C24 Refresh changing parameters by the when changing parameters when changing parameters utpu p instruction dedicated instruction by the dedicated instruction by the dedicated instruction RY SB0003 on SB0003 is on SB0003 283 10119 ejep oijo o 0 enp suiejqoud ZZL Suie qoJd 40 S SI Z LL 2 Problems due to cyclic data error in a remote device station Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Set the devices so that they Has the auto refresh been Check if no device overlaps do not overlap with ones correctly set RX RY RWw with ones used in programs i used in programs and in RWr SB and SW or in other networks other networks D1 1 Refresh data Access the correct buffer area Is the accessed buffer memory area in the Check if no device overlaps Cyclic data memory area correct RX corresponding station with ones used in programs 7 cannot be RY RWw RWr SB and Set the devices so that they or in other networks read written SW do not overlap with ones used in programs F Check if the bit Isn t a station to which A corresponding to the faulty k Parameter reading writing cannot be Ms Cancel the re
298. ed by resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system When the reflection is completed data link is automatically started at master local modules Point When change the settings for a local station or standby master station change the settings for the master station accordingly 115 poyu bues LY uoneis 1ejse y Aqpueis pue uoges e907 e 10 sPunes JejeueJeg PZ 7 4 2 Setting details Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules 1 Boards Blank No Setting J Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window il 2 3 Start I O No Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Local Station Master Station Data Link Type Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Wer 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Reaister RWw Special Relay SB See Ee 0 Automatic Reconnection Station Count Retry Count Standby Master Station No PLC Down Select Scan Made Setting Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Interrupt Settinas Interrunt Settinas Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting
299. eed not be set by the number of occupied stations Error invalid stations reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Whether communications are being normally performed with a CPU SW0020 Kodie cius module is stored O oO O 6201 0 Normal Values other than 0 Error code of the CPU module Whether the data link restart instruction using SB0000 has been normally SW0041 Data link restart completed is stored 64114 result 0 Normal completion O O x Values other than 0 Error code lt _3 Page 291 Section 11 3 2 Refresh Whether the refresh instruction at standby master switching has been SW0043 instruction at normally completed is stored 6434 standby master 0 Normal completion O il x switching result Values other than 0 Error code gt Page 291 Section 11 3 2 Whether the data link stop instruction using SB0002 has been normally SWO0045 Data link stop completed is stored 645p result 0 Normal completion O O i Values other than 0 Error code _ gt Page 291 Section 11 3 2 Temporary error Whether the temporary error invalid station specification has been SW0049 invalid station normally completed is stored 6494 specification 0 Normal completion O m x result Values other than 0 Error code Page 291 Section 11 3 2 Temporary error Whether the temporary error invalid station setting has been normally SWO004B invalid station canceled is stored 64By
300. em No error To the next page speyomoj4 Buroouse qnoJ L LL 100 BuiuueJBoud e Buisn Bunooysejqnol ZL LL 271 No When a CC Link system is newly configured or the existing CC Link system is changed Yes y L ERR flashing gt A1 5 A1 8 A3 1 A3 4 Slave station No A1 7 A1 9 A3 2 A3 5 A2 5 A2 6 A2 9 RD flashing Slave station Yes A4 1 A4 2 A4 5 L ERR on Slave station Yes v A2 1 A2 2 A2 5 A2 T L ERR flashing Slave station Yes v A4 1 A4 3 A2 3 A2 8 A2 9 RD on SD flashing v A2 10 A4 4 A4 6 272 I I T A1 7 I I I I I I r RE RERI RD I I EERE I I I I I I I I I I I CEE I I I I I I gt I I I I I CE t I I I I I I ENERO I I l I I When the CC Link system has operated B1 3 B1 4 B1 1 B1 5 B2 1 B2 2 B2 4 B2 2 B2 3 fo tt The numbers above correspond to those listed in the Check item column in Section 11 2 1 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station Take corrective action with reference to the corresponding item To the next page ultiple stations repeatedly fail and recover v Troubleshoot the problem with reference to Troubleshooting by the status logging lt gt Page 274 Section 11 1 2 End Faulty station
301. em Master station Stores the status of the data O input from slave stations Page 328 224 to Remote input EO to 15Fy mo Local station Read only Appendix 2 RX Stores the status of the data 2 O input from the master station Master station Stores the status of the data Write only O output to slave stations Local station 352 to Remote output Stores the status of the data Page 329 1604 to 1DF 479 RY output to the master station Appendix 2 Stores the status of the data Read 2 O output to slave stations write Data received from other slave stations are also stored Remote register Master station RWw Stores the send data to Write only O e Master slave stations re station For Local station Page 330 1E0 to 2DF 735 data sending Stores the send data to the Appendix 2 Local station master station and other Read O 3 For data salve stations Data write sending received from other slave receiving stations are also stored 38 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Availability X Name Description Read write Master Local Reference Hexadecimal Decimal station station Remote register Master station Rwr Stores the data received O Master from slave stations station For Page 330 736 to 2E0 to 3DFy data Read only Appendix 2 991 M Local station receiving 3 Stores the data recei
302. eme I T o 2 facet inteligent oxeertiN 3 20 2 inteligent queteTiin n 5 fa inteligent oxeieTiiN 6 5 5 inteligent oseiETiN pape intelgei fomun J oee meligent Josen G ooo ooo o Switch Description o 3 Switch1 Blank Q p Switch2 Blank E y Set the mode for a master local module Mode setting X m Remote net Ver 1 mode 0000 Ej Switch Remote net Ver 2 mode 02004 2 Remote net additional mode 01004 S 3 Set whether to refresh or clear compulsorily output sending data to a slave station when s the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP Case of CPU STOP Setting g switehg Refresh 01004 s Ko e Clear compulsorily 03004 9 Switch5 Blank E o 1 It can be set for the master local module with a serial number first five digits of 09112 or later Point P Set the switch 3 and switch 4 within the range listed in the above table If a value outside the range is set or no value is set the G P RLPASET instruction ends abnormally Note that CC Link is automatically started up for the master local module with the smallest start I O number instead 7 7 Page 158 Section 8 3 3 Keep the switches 1 2 and 5 blank If any values are set the normal operation is not guaranteed 4 Click the End button to terminate the setting 213 5 Create the following program Refresh of SB SW
303. emory address Device Station number Module name Remote I O RX RY Hexadecimal Decimal X1000 to X100F EO 224 to 1 AJ65BTB2 16T X1010 to X101F Ety 225 to X1020 to X102F E24 226 RX0 to RXF 2 AJ65BTB1 16DT X103 to X103F E34 227 to 1 In the AJ65BTB1 16DT the first eight points are used for input and the last eight points are used for output RXO to RX7 are used for input in the AJ65BTB1 16DT In a CPU module X1020 to X1027 are actually used CPU module Master station output 16 points input 8 points output 8 points Station No 1 Station No 2 Buffer memory 4 Z 75 1 Device Remote input RX x1000 E0H 224 7 Siation y UN Nod A ES 1 I l7 Station V rs Not LU E225 I AJ65BTB2 16T output module Remote I O station AJ65BTB1 16DT combined module Remote I O station X101F i X1020 RXO X1027 RX7 X1028 X103F Device actually used by the remote I O station 99 ejduex3 uonejedo p Remote output RY Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 402 Appendix 8 1 1 CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address Device Station No Module name Remote I O RX RY Hexadecimal Decimal Y1000 to Y100F 1604 352 RYO to RYF 1 AJ65BTB2 16T Y1010 to Y101F 161 353 to Y1020 to Y102F 162 354 RYO to RYF 2 AJ65BTB1 16DT Y1030 to Y103F 1
304. emote Tstation register 4 points 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points i i i i i i occupied g p p p RWw Number of Remote link points register 4 points 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points by the RWr number of Eisen 64 points 64 points 96 points 192 points 384 points occupied RX RY 62 points for a 62 points for a 94 points for a 190 points fora 382 points for a stations i local station local station local station local station local station 2 Remote stations register 8 points 8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points occupied RWw Remote register 8 points 8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points RWr 25 suoneoiuioeds eoueuuoLegd ZE CC Link Ver 2 Item CC Link Ver 1 Expanded Cyclic Setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple 96 points 96 points 160 points 320 points 640 points Remote I O j RX RY 94 points for a 94 points for a 158 points fora 318 points fora 638 points for a i local station local station local station local station local station 3 Remote stations register 12 points 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points occupied RWw Number of Remote link points register 12 points 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points by the RWr number of ERE 128 points 128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points occupied RX RY 126 points fora 126 points fora 222 points fora 446 points fora 894 points fora stations local s
305. er Refreshing compulsorily clearing a slave station when the switch on a programmable controller CPU is set to STOP 1 15R or later 8 03D or later Remote I O station points setting 8 03D or later Number of connectable modules 5 to 8 2 8 32J or later Redundant CPU 06052 or later x 8 18U or later Mounting a module on the extension base unit of a Redundant CPU 06052 or later x 8 45X or later Standby master station data link start function using a standby master station 07112 or later Block data assurance per station 08032 or later 1 15R or later 8 32J or later Specification of remote device station to be initialized Retry count setting when dedicated instructions are used 08032 or later 08102 or later Master station duplication error canceling function 09112 or later Transmission speed test programming tool used 10032 or later 1 15R or later x Transmission speed test link special relays SBs f 10032 or later and link special registers SWs used Message transmission function G P RDMSG i 10032 or later instruction Status logging 10112 or later 1 15R or later x Status logging flash ROM storage 12032 or later 1 15R or later x Module error history display 11042 or later 9 1 15R or later x Station information setting on the CC Link 1 73B or later x configuration window 1 Use a CPU module
306. er module setting Mismatch between the Remote Remote I O connected module device B30A Remote I O O status and parameter Intelligent Remote setting device device The mode setting is invalid in the master station local station or Set the parameter of the master standby master station station local station or standby The mode of the master station master station again and reset differs from that of the standby the CPU module master station Mismatch between the The network parameter setting connected module B30B does not match with the Match them O x status and parameter connected module status setting The master station switching was Standby master station Set the standby master station B30C HR instructed to a station other than O O specification error number the standby master station A request such as the temporary error invalid station specification j Start the data link then issue the B30D Initial status line test request or data link t O Oo request stop restart request was issued a before data link is started 293 8I 9poo JOM Z LL S9po2 JOU Ee Delectability Error code Aes A A i Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station A function that is started using B30E Unsupported service SB SW and executable on the Perform the function from the
307. er Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution SWO0110 7104 individual information target 1 Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution SWO0111 7114 individual information target 2 Remote device station initialization The execution progress of the initialization procedure registration is procedure stored registration Upper bit Next execution procedure number Upon completion FFy is O x x SW0112 712 7124 execution stored individual Lower bit Target station number information target 3 Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution SWO0113 7134 individual information target 4 SMS suajsibeu jeroeds yur ze xipueddy SMS susjsiBey jeroeds Ju pue sgs s ejew jeroeds yu e xipueddy Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution SWO0114 7144 individual information target 5 357 Number SW0115 7154 SW0116 7164 Name Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 6 Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 7 Description Availability O Yes x No Online Master Local station station Offli
308. error details and corrective action X Diagnostics lt gt System Monitor gt Detailed Information button Module s Detailed Information Module Model Name QJ61BT11N I O Address 0000 Mount Position Main Base 0 Slot A Product Information 100320000000000 B Production Number Monitoring Module Information Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply Fuse Blown Status eee c Displays the latest error code I O Clear Hold Setting H Noise Filter Setting Displays error history Error and Solution Latest Error Code 2 Contents Master station overlapping error Multiple master stations exist BBCS on the same line Alternatively line noise was detected at power on Error Clear Error Code Display Format ES Displays the description of the error code HEX Reduce the number of master stations on the same line to one selected under Error History and the Alternatively check the line status pec corrective action for the error The error history is m an old error The latest error is displayed at the bottom line Stop Monitor 288 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Checking in the Error History window This window lists errors including those that have occurred in other modules and the error logs can be output in a CSV file Even after the CPU module is reset or the system is powered off and on error codes and date and time of errors can be displayed X Diagnos
309. es link refresh time extended time of the END process in the CPU module 1 Master station local station The link refresh time of a master station and local station are calculated as follows a In the remote net Ver 1 mode and remote net Ver 2 mode Formula KM1 KM2 x PARYTSE RWw RWr SW x E Number of CC Link modules 1 xKM4 ms aE KM3 x RCRYESE sRww RWrSW RX Total number of remote input RX points refreshed in the master station local station RY Total number of remote output RY points refreshed in the master station local station RWw Total number of remote register RWw points refreshed in the master station local station RWr Total number of remote register RWr points refreshed in the master station local station SB Total number of link special relay SB points refreshed in the master station local station SW Total number of link special register SW points refreshed in the master station local station oE Time that file register R ZR data on a memory card is transferred only when used KM1 Constant Master station 8 8 The block guarantee of cyclic data per station function is not supported S 5 Constant KM1 AA A With block guarantee of Without block guarantee of r S 2 v CPU type cyclic data per station cyclic data per station A E 6 Q00JCPU 0 83 d Ox 2 0 QOOCPU 0 68 a 8 3o Q01CPU 0 66 o 9 Q Q02CPU 0 58 0 51 3 D Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02P
310. eserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted SWO0090 l Line status is stored 6904 Line status 0 Normal x O x 1 Data link disabled disconnected 354 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether a transient transmission error has occurred in other stations is stored 0 No transient transmission error SW0094 AM 1 Transient transmission error 694 b15 b14 b13 b12 to smoes ton epe a e e i s eT A EL reps pm pe pm pe pup Me oem Cepepe jepw s sus o o MOOR at C e e2 61 io 62 s1502 i 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers SW0097 Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on 697 Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted Even when the transient transmission is retried using a dedicated instruction the error will be detected Whether station numbers are unique when the start station numbers of modules are different is stored 0 Normal 1 Station number in use start station number only SW0098 b15 b14 b13 b12 to 698 epe pape e e eT a2 er eo 29 oo 20 38 59 7 sitos re far fas se wp wo 699 SWOO09B 64 Station number 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers O x SWO09A overlap status Reserved stat
311. et by the F1 2 setting match with the status of the or remote device station is parameter with that of the i Transient error connected modules not connected connected module Response status Error code B404 response timeout Check if a response is received from the request destination station within the monitoring time Increase the monitoring time value If the error persists check the modules and cables at the destination Is the transient transmission dedicated instruction correctly performed Check the error code stored in Completion status when the dedicated instruction was executed Take corrective action according to the error code Do the master station and the intelligent device station have no error Check the error code of the CPU module Check the error code of the master station Check the operating status of the master station and the target intelligent device station Take corrective action according to the error code 286 11 2 4 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Problems due to operation error in the master station Problems due to operation error in the master station Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Check the program Correctly set the link special Is Data link stop SBO002 Check the refresh devices relay SB on set in the network Turn on Data link stop pet Date
312. etwork Parameter gt CC Link O Enabled x Disabled Operation When the master station goes down the standby master station operates as a master station to continue data link When a failed master station becomes normal again it returns as a standby master station When only a standby master station is started up it starts data link as a master station Function Setting in Type Master station switching Standby Master x x function O Station Master station duplex Standby Master O 5 function Station Data link start function using o o Master Station a standby master station Duplex Function 3 Set the same mode as that of the master station in Mode 4 When Master Station Duplex Function has been selected in Type set the same settings as those of the master station in items other than Type and Mode Ex When Standby Master Station is selected in Type 1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Operation Setting Type Operation Setting Standby Master Station Master Station Data Link Type Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode _ Total Module Connected 1 Remote Input RX X1000 Remote Output RY Y1000 Remote Register R Wr wO Remote Register RWw w100 Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB SBO
313. evice Link direct Intelligent Setting Internal device i i 2 device function module Index Constant data System user A Others register JO O device register ZO z UO GO Bit Word Bit Word K H S S1 O S2 Oo S3 O S4 O Z S5 O D O 1 Master station setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written mn Un E 0 to FE 16 bit binary with three digits E Within the range of the 1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored po specified device poe F Within the range of the S2 2 Start number of the device in which slave station setting data is stored x l specified device Start number of the device in which reserved station specification data Within the range of the S3 af Device name is stored specified device 2 Start number of the device in which error invalid station specification Within the range of the 84 l data is stored specified device S5 Start number of the device in which communication and automatic Within the range of the S5 update buffer assignment data is stored specified device D Device that turns on for one scan upon completion of setting Within the range of the Bit i D 1 also turns on at an abnormal end specified device 204 The local device and the file register of each program cannot be used as a device for setting data
314. f read points 16 16 x 1 067 WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 16 x 1 067 10 x 0 x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 3 x 1 067 0 76 505 76 5ms 1 The decimal point is rounded up 2 Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried awl Buissso0 g yur ejeq p xipueddy SUOIONISU pejeoipep Jo aul BursseooJd y xipueddy 383 384 G P RIWT instruction OT LS x BC number of write points 16 72 x 1 13 WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU Q02CPU 1ms QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and Q02CPUJ 0 5ms LS Link scan time 7 5 Page 362 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 WT Monitoring time set in SWO0009 7 7 Page 348 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SWOOOB Page 348 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of write points is 20 words monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of write points 16 72 x 1 13 WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 7271 x 1 13 10 x O x 1000 0 5 5x 12 1 x 1 13 0 66 15 66 2ms 1 The decimal point is rounded up 2 Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried APPENDICES Appendix 4 4 Link refresh time This section describ
315. fer D station memory 1 Theautomatic update buffer for the first station is accessed 2 The data specified in the control data is stored in the device of the CPU module 1 For timing of the automatic update refer to the manual for the AJ65BT R2 N LLL CC Link System RS 232 Interface Module User s Manual Nonprocedural Protocol Mode 337 seeJy Aioway Jeyng z xipueddy 10 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX and Ver 2 compatible remote output RY These areas are used when the remote net Ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected In the remote net Ver 2 mode data are stored in the remote input RX and remote output RY in all slave stations including Ver 1 compatible slave stations 7 5 Page 49 Section 3 6 4 3 In the remote net additional mode data are stored in the remote input RX and remote output RY in the Ver 2 compatible slave station gt Page 53 Section 3 6 5 3 a Storage location for each station The storage locations change depending on the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting in slave stations The storage locations for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 L gt Page 332 Appendix 2 4 I The last two bits of RX RY cannot be used for communications between the master station and a local station In the example below RYEE and RYEF cannot be used
316. forced master switching request has been O O Forced master Standby SB005D icharda completed is stored Standby 2 witching requ SES b13 dii OFF Not completed master master complete station ON Completed station only only Execution status of Whether the initialization procedure is being performed is SBO05E remote device station stored x 5E5p 614 initialization OFF Not performed O procedure ON In process Completion status of Whether the initialization procedure has been completed SB005F remote device station is stored 5E5y b15 initialization OFF Not completed O procedure ON Completed The setting status of the transmission speed mode setting SB0060 Homais switch on the host station is stored 5E6p bO OFF Online O 9 9 ON Mode other than online SB0061 The station type of the host station is stored 5E6 b1 Host type OFF Master station station number 0 O O x zi ON Local station station number 1 to 64 Whether the host station has been set as a standby Host standby master RN SB0062 HAMA master station is stored i i 5E6y b2 eting OFF Not set 9 9 9 information ON Set The status of the data link faulty station setting configured Input data status of oe SB0065 Fasretodite aul for the host station is stored i u BE6 b5 i Y OFF Clear 9 9 station ON Hold 343 sgs sAeja jeroeds xur1 e xipueddy SMS susjsiBey jeroeds xur7 pue sgs s ejew jeroeds yu e x
317. ft eat edo d uos ai aus die e ues Of c es 200 9 71 Program exambple 5 5s Anti abeo b e dele a doe ende Ga d ee debate 203 gg AG B RIPASET ve ecard inca tp TUR suru va DEC o rae Or ce 204 9 8 1 Program example parameter setting example 000 cece eee eee eee 212 gU CGRVPDNIBOEa eere nea D ON bu tiep ET 220 9 9 1 Program example erre tien ee beard SM e PLA e epe PME Ras 226 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 227 10 1 Precautions for Programming sss an 227 10 2 Example of Communications Between a Master Station and a Remote Device Station 231 10 2 1 System configuration 2 0 eee he 231 10 2 2 Settings for a master station 0 2 0 241 10 2 3 Settings for a remote device station 2 2 2 0 0 2c cece sss 245 10 2 4 Checking the status of data link 2 0 0 0 ccc cee ee 246 10 2 5 Program examiple 1 oo ARES teer t e CORR edt elicit ARE e 247 10 2 6 Program example when the initial setting is configured only on a program 251 10 3 Example of Communications Between a Master Station and a Local Station 254 10 3 4 System config ration x ex ccc ed een pire edu bove e pet bed qe 254 10 3 2 Settings for a master station 0 6 0 257 10 3 3 Settings for a local station 2 0 ccc eee teens 259 10 3 4 Checking the status of data link n snanu 0c ccc cette e 261 10 3 5 Program example 20a res ecg eed ew p a ea dine hee ade Fee ats 262 10 3 6 Program example to assure th
318. function module device Un GO or FROM TO instructions uonounj uonejs panesay teg suonoun J y Jo suoneorjddy jnjes e g 2 Setting method Set a reserved station in Station Information Setting of the network parameter gt Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 161 8 3 5 Scan synchronization specification Whether to synchronize the link scan with the sequence scan of a CPU module or not can be selected Selecting the asynchronous mode shortens input transmission delay time Selecting the synchronous mode shortens output transmission delay time 1 Difference between the asynchronous and synchronous modes Item Description A link scan is performed asynchronously with the sequence scan of a CPU module Select this Asynchronous mode mode to shorten input transmission delay time when a sequence scan takes much longer than a link scan Note however that the output transmission delay time is shortened Data link is performed with a scan synchronizing a program The sequence scan and link scan start simultaneously Select this mode to shorten output transmission delay time Note however that the input Synchronous mode transmission delay time becomes longer if a sequence scan takes much longer than a link scan Because a link scan synchronizes a sequence scan extended sequence scan time increases link scan time Point When a module is operated in the synchronous mode the L RUN LED may turn on dimly
319. g parts stations are not connection disconnected de Keep the transmission cable Check if the transmission away from the power cable cable is away from the Keep a distance of 100mm power cable or more is recommended Check if the FG terminal is B1 4 Noise Is the transmission cable grounded separately from Ground the terminals i free from noise the GND terminal of the separately power system Reduce the transmission Take noise reduction speed and check if the measures frequency of occurrence of Reduce the transmission noise is reduced speed Replace the modules and Repair or replace the Failure of the Do modules on the master i B1 5 check if the station normally module on the master master station station normally operate operates station Do not turn on Data link stop SB0002 f Is Data link stop instruction Check if Data link stop Do not write data to the B1 6 Link stop correctly executed SB0002 is off refresh source device of Data link stop SB0002 from multiple locations To the next page 281 UONE S SAK S e JO uonoeuuoosip 0 ENP SWIJJOId L Z LL Suie qoJg 40 S SI Z LL Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Power supply for Check power supplied to the Apply the voltage within the B2 1 APP y Isn t a voltage low P PR PP y 3 communications faulty station specified range Check cables connected to t
320. g Device Item Setting data Set by range Specify error invalid stations 0 Not specified 1 Specified S4 0 Specification of b15 b14 b13 b12 to to 11064 soo se is e o Te T e 8 T2 5 _ Te 84 3 stations i5 M EIEAEIEIEREJEIEIES S4 3 64 lasvdTM d O 8 6 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Default value is 0 Not specified for all stations 1 Configure settings for station numbers up to the largest one set for the slave station setting data 2 Set only the start station number of the module for a slave station that occupies two or more stations If both an error invalid station and a reserved station are specified for the same station the reserved station is preferentially specified 207 e Communication and automatic update buffer assignment data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by Specify assignments of buffer memory size at transient transmission to local stations and intelligent device stations Communication buffers 2 S5 0 Send buffer size i Op no settin S5 1 Receive buffer size PN ihe H ing S5 2 Automatic update 404 to 10004 n buffer size 0 word no setting S5 0 Specification 64 to 4096 words to of 1 to 26 User S5 77 stations 1 2 3 208 S5 75 Send buffer size S5 76 Receive buffer size Automatic update S5 77 buffer size Settings for the 26th s
321. g an item displays the status of selected date and time in the right window Date of Log Acquisition Error Error Details 2011 10 06 12 30 43 Returned normally 2011 10 06 12 30 37 9 Data Link Error Station No 1 2011 10 06 12 30 28 Normally operated Legend n m He Reserved Temporary error Error invalid Error station invalid station station save Read Close 4 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Set Time of Logging Acquisition Enter the period during which logging is executed When 0 seconds is set logging will be continued until the Stop Logging button is clicked or the number of logs reaches to 5000 Select either RAM or RAM Flash ROM in Log Storage Area in CC Link Module When GX Works is not connected at all times Select RAM Flash ROM To check the logs stored on the flash ROM maximum 45 logs connect GX Works2 When GX Works2 is always connected Up to 5000 logs can be stored regardless of the selected option RAM or RAM Flash ROM Click the Start Logging button Logging will be executed for the specified period However if the Stop Logging button is clicked or the number of logs reaches to 5000 the logging will stop When an item is selected under Log List the status of the selected item is displayed in the log display part Displays the status of the selected item Status Logging Logging Time of Logging Acquis
322. g line test Do not execute a line test using a program or other peripherals at the same time The line test may not be normally executed After the line test is completed the result is displayed on the right side of the window 87 js91 SUI p g 9 BuulM Joy Ise 9 2 Using the transmission speed mode setting switch on the master local module There are two types of line tests line test 1 and line test 2 First a line test 1 is executed If the line test 1 is abnormally ended a line test 2 is executed Item Description Line test 1 Line test 2 To check the status of communications with all the modules connected If the test is abnormally ended the faulty station is identified in a line test 2 To check the status of communications with a specific slave station Point A line test can be executed when a CC Link dedicated cable is connected and the station number and transmission speed are set in a slave station No parameter setting is required in the master local module However to execute a line test 2 for a standby master station the parameter setting is required in the standby master station When the data link start function is used execute a line test using a programming tool 7 Page 87 Section 6 5 1 1 a Line test 1 Before the line test 1 check the following 1 Universal model High Performance model QCPU QCPU f the switch on the CPU module is set
323. g range DEC Input Format Select the input format of Word Device Setting Value HEX Default DEC Device Code Set the device for the interrupt condition Device No Detection Method Select the timing of the interrupt detection for the device set to Device Interrupt Condition Code and Device No Word Device Setting Set the word device value for the interrupt condition if RWr or SW is Value set to Device Code Channel The setting is not required for a master local module i No Connection No ing qui u Refer to the following table Set the interrupt SI No used for the interrupt pointer setting of the PLC parameter Interrupt SI No The interrupt SI No is the control number on the master local module side to issue a request for the interrupt from a master local module to a CPU module This is not the device used for an actual program Point Only one interrupt condition can be set for one interrupt program 112 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Setting range If the interrupt condition is established upon the completion of a link scan the interrupt is issued If Scan Completed is set to Device Code the interrupt is issued without condition upon the completion of a link scan Word Channel Device Device Tw Device No Interrupt Detection Method
324. ght bits of the area buffer memory address 40184 are the Station No 4 RY size 1 184 corresponding size of RY in the station number 4 however 1 is stored because a value less than one word is rounded up Station No 1 RWw offset 44004 Start buffer memory address of RWw in the station number 1 Station No 1 RWw size 64 401 2 number of occupied stations x 32 expanded cyclic setting 64 Station No 2 RWw offset 44004 Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 2 RWw size 0 Default Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 3 RWw offset 4440H Start buffer memory address of RWw in the station number 3 Station No 3 RWw size 0 Default Buffer memory area size of RWw in the station number 3 Station No 4 RWw offset 44404 Start buffer memory address of RWw in the station number 4 Station No 4 RWw size 0 Default Buffer memory area size of RWw in the station number 4 Station No 1 RWr offset 4C00y Start buffer memory address of RWr in the station number 1 333 Buffer memory area Value Description Station No 1 RWr size 64 401 2 number of occupied stations x 32 expanded cyclic setting 64 Station No 2 RWr offset 4C00y Because the station occupies two stations check the area in the station number 1 Station No 2 RWr size 0 Default Because the station occupies two stations che
325. gnals bit data with another station by cyclic transmission This station cannot perform transient transmission Remote device station A station such as the AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BT 64DAV and AJ65BT 64DAI that exchanges l O signals bit data and I O data word data with another station by cyclic transmission This station cannot perform transient transmission Remote net Ver 1 mode A mode used to configure a CC Link system consisting of a master station and Ver 1 compatible slave station s only Remote net Ver 2 mode A mode used to configure a CC Link system containing a Ver 2 compatible slave station Compared to the remote net Ver 1 mode the number of cyclic points per station is increased from 128 to 896 for RX RY and from 16 to 128 for RWr RWw Remote net mode A mode used to communicate data with all stations remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station in a CC Link system There are three modes remote net Ver 1 mode remote net Ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode Remote net additional mode A mode used to increase the number of cyclic points by adding a Ver 2 compatible slave station to an existing system consisting of Ver 1 compatible slave stations only Programs in the remote net Ver 1 mode can be used without change because RX RY RWr RWw data of a Ver 1 compatible slave station are stored in the Ver 1 compatible buffer memory areas
326. gt CC Link Diagnostics 2 Double click Create Check Sheet on the bottom of the window If Create Check Sheet is not displayed on the bottom of the window click the Related Functions button on the bottom left corner of the window Link Scan Time Max Oms Min Oms Current Oms Related Functions Legend Close Lmc ypo peuar 1yopuu gt t gt V uU Loop Test Status Logging C eck Start Data Link Double click the icon 3 The Check Sheet Creation Wizard window appears Check Sheet Creation Wizard Check Sheet Creation Wizard Using this wizard enables you to create a check sheet of system configuration and settings which users must grasp before CC Link trouble shooting This wizard consists of the Following procedures 1 Wizard Format selection 2 Master station information check Master type check Master version check Module mount status check Mode check Parameter setting check Link data access method and transmission speed check 3 Linked station information check Connected linked station count check Occupied station count check CC Link version and transmission speed check 4 Transmission cable check 5 Terminal resistor check 6 Grounding method check 7 Check sheet creation jeeus yoouo e Buneaid Py LL ZSM X9 Husn sonsouBeiq xur 29 t LL Cancel 4 Configure settings with answering a series of questions displayed on the windows The created check sheet is
327. he MST LED on the master local module turns off or on When the test is completed MST LED on the master local module OFF ERR LED on the CPU module Flashing for operation check of the watchdog timer function When the test is not completed MST LED on the master local module ON ERR LED on the master local module Flashing If the test fails check if the terminating resistor provided with the master local module is connected between the DA and DB terminals If the terminating resistor is connected the possible cause is a hardware failure Replace the master local module Perform a hardware test to a master local module alone with cables disconnected Failure to do so may result in a failure of the test b CPU module switch Before performing a hardware test check that the CPU module is set to STOP For operation check of the watchdog timer function when the hardware test is performed an error SP UNIT DOWN occurs and the CPU module stops 322 APPENDICES APPENDICES Appendix 1 Description of I O Signals This appendix describes on off timing and conditions of I O signals 1 2 3 Module error XnO This signal indicates whether the module is normal or faulty OFF Module normal ON Module error Module error Xn0 Module ready XnF Host data link status Xn1 This signal indicates the data link status of the host station Host station operation status SBOOGE has the sa
328. he faulty station eines Are cables and connectors when faulty Stations occur B2 2 securely connected and do seduentially toroneend on Correct the wiring parts RM the transmission path check they meet specifications cables connected to faulty stations close to the master station Data link TEF m Keep the transmission cable cannot be Check if the transmission 3 away from the power cable performed in cable is away from the Keep a distance of 100mm the entire power cable or more is recommended system occasionally Check if the FG terminal is B2 3 N i se Is the transmission cable grounded separately from Ground the terminals i free from noise the GND terminal of the separately power system Reduce the transmission Take noise reduction speed and check if the measures frequency of occurrence of Reduce the transmission noise is reduced speed Replace modules on the Failure of a slave Do slave stations normally Repair or replace the B2 4 faulty station and check for station operate operation module on the faulty station 282 To the next page 11 2 2 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Problems due to cyclic data error 1 Problems due to cyclic data error in a remote I O station Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Check if the devices have S Correct the device setting been set within the range Check if no device overlap
329. he remote I O stations set them to even numbers of the stations consecutively When setting eight points to odd numbers of the remote I O stations set 8 Points 8 Points Reserved to the last of consecutive remote I O stations Remote l O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Station No 1 no of Station No 2 no of Station No 3 no of Master station occupied stations 1 occupied stations 1 occupied stations 1 Baton o Y07 to YOO E at 7 8 Points 8 Points L1 m gt Yor to voc Reserved i bod bd i i 8 pointoutput 8 pointoutput 8 pointoutput i module 1 L module g module Select whether to set the slave station as a reserved station or an error invalid station gt Page 161 Section 8 3 4 Page 166 Section 8 3 6 0 Point Reserved Station 8 Points 8 Points 8 Points Reserved 16 Points 32 Points Default Varies depending on the number of occupied stations No Setting Reserved Station Error Invalid Station Default No Setting 104 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Item Description Setting range Intelligent Buffer Set the size of buffer memory used to perform transient transmission with dedicated instructions This setting can be configured only for a Size word PT et local station intelligent device station and standby master station ond Set the size of sen
330. he same error persists the Message transmission BC54 and BC55 f function abnormal data were master module or remote device O x handshake failure received station may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Multiple peripherals tried to access the same message Perform the processes one by BC57 Multiple requests error ba O x transmission or remote device one station at the same time Execute the message transmission function again S With the message transmission If the same error persists the Message transmission BC58 and BC59 function abnormal data were master module or remote device O x handshake failure received station may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative With the message transmission f Abnormal response Check the operation of the target BC5B function an abnormal response O x received remote device station was received Execute the message transmission function again I With the message transmission If the same error persists the Message transmission BC5C to BC5F function abnormal data were master module or remote device O x handshake failure i received station may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Invalid number of The message transmission BC60 simultaneously function was executed Simultaneously execute the o executed message simultaneously for 5 or more function for 4 stations or less transmission
331. he station is not detected as a faulty station in the master station and local station This setting can be configured even during data link unlike the error invalid station setting function This function is used to exchange slave stations during data link for maintenance or for other purposes Page 166 Section 8 3 6 Page 167 Section 8 3 7 36 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 List of O signals This section lists the I O signals for a CPU module The device X is an input signal from a master local module to a CPU module The device Y is an output signal from a CPU module to a master local module n in the table below represents the start I O number of the master local module When the start I O number of the master local module is 0030 Xn0 to X n 1 F X30 to X4F Yn0 to Y n 1 F Y30 to Y4F Signal direction Master local module CPU module Signal direction CPU module Master local module Input No Signal name Output No Signal name XnO Module error YnO Xn1 Host data link status Yn1 Xn2 Use prohibited Yn2 Xn3 Other station data link status Yn3 Xn4 Yn4 Xn5 Yn5 Xn6 Yn6 Xw Yn7 Xn8 Yn8 Xn9 Use prohibited Yn9 XnA YnA XB YnB XnC YnC Pw XnD YnD Z g XnE YnE 9 XnF Module ready YnF u Use prohibited an X n 1 0 Y n 1 0 a X n 1 1 Y n 1 1 z Xn4 Y n 1 2 Xn48 Y n 1 3 X n 1 4 Y n 1 4
332. her a temporary error invalid station has been set is stored OFF Not set ON Set The set station number is stored in SW007C to SWO007F Depending on the link refresh timing SB0076 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Temporary error invalid status SW007C to SW007F SB0077 5E7y b7 SB0078 5E7y b8 Parameter receive status Host station switch change detection Whether parameters have been received from the master station is stored OFF Received ON Notreceived Whether the setting of setting switches of the host station during data link has been changed is detected OFF No change ON Changed SB0079 5E7p b9 Master station return specification information Whether Master Station or Master Station Duplex Function has been set in Type in the network parameter window is stored OFF Master station ON Master station duplex function SB007B 5E7y b11 Host master standby master operation status Whether the host station is operating as a master station or standby master station is stored OFF The host station is operating as a master station during data link control ON The host station is operating as a standby master station standby status 345 sgs sAejas jeroeds xur1 e xIpueddy SMS susjsiBey jeroeds xur1 pue sgs s ej y jeroeds yu e xipueddy Availability
333. hin 10004 4096 word CEy CFy 206 207 prohibited oat The station number of the remote I O station where eight ite ilo points have been set in the remote I O station points setting is remote NN DO to D34 208 to 211 stored station Default 0 Not set setting Range The bit corresponding to the station number turns on 326 APPENDICES Address d Item Description Hexadecimal Decimal s The station number of the remote I O station where 16 points point have been set in the remote I O station points setting is remote I O auk D4 to D7 212 to 215 stored station Default 0 Not set setting Range The bit corresponding to the station number turns on 0 point The station number of the reserved station where 0 points reserved i 4 D8 to DB 216 to 219 i have been set is stored station Default 0 Not set setting Range The bit corresponding to the station number turns on Use DC to DF 220 to 223 T xm prohibited 1 This buffer memory area is used in the remote net Ver 2 mode 2 When 8 Points 8 Points Reserved has been set the station number is stored in both eight point remote I O station setting and 16 point remote I O station setting seeJy Aioway Jeyng Z xipueddy 327 2 Remote input RX and remote output RY This area is used when the remote net Ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected In the remote net Ver 1 mode data
334. his area stores parameter settings Do not write data in this area Doing so may cause an error Address ETE Item Description Hexadecimal Decimal Ou 0 Use prohibited The number of slave stations including a reserved station connected to the master 4 4 Total number of station is stored connected stations Default 64 stations Range 1 to 64 station The number of retries to a station where a communication failure has occurred is stored 2u 2 Number of retries f Default 3 times Range 1 to 7 time The number of slave stations that return to system operation by one link scan is 3 3 Number of automatic stored H return stations Default 1 station Range 1 to 10 station The standby master station number is stored Standby master Bn 4u 4 F T Default 0 0 no standby master station specified station specification j E Range 0 to 64 0 no standby master station specified 5H 5 Use prohibited The specified data link status if a programmable controller CPU error occurs in the Operation mater station is stored 6H 6 specification when Default 0 Stop CPU is down Range 0 Stop 1 Continued Whether to synchronize a link scan with a sequence scan is stored Default 0 Asynchronous TH 7 Scan mode setting Range 0 Asynchronous 1 Synchronous 8H 8 Delay time setting Delay time is stored Set 0 Reserved station specification status is stored Reserved
335. i RY20 1 Y1020 Station Station 1624 354 Station i 1 vioor AN MOM 05 No1 RY3F Y1040 1644 356 RY40 1 f h 1 1 A j i 1 1 1 I 1 Y105F 1654 357 i RY5F Remote output RY 1 1 Y1060 166 358 p RYOO 1 1 oy 1 1 I i 1 I Y107F 167H 359 RYAF re ok NH eel 1 me EXSI 1 r f 1 i 11090 Station Station TERMI Station 29 i 1 a T T I vtoor No 4 No 4 1691361 i n No4 uvar E JA i ue al Y10A0 16AH 362 EN RY40 B I 1 7 M i 1 I 1 H Y10BF 16BH 363 RYSF Dp ga occ ERUNT ceca mes E ERE lo ei tiie ei ae Gere oe ceed CPU module Remote station Remote output Device Module name p Signal name RY Y1000 RYOO to to Reserved Y1017 RY17 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Y1018 RY18 Initial data processing completion flag Y1019 RY19 Initial data setting request flag Y101A RY1A Error reset request flag 235 uoneunByuoo wayskS L Z OL uoHelS 99149 9jouie e pue uonels Jejse y e ueeweg suoreoiunuiuo Jo ejdurex3 ZOL 236 CPU module Remote station Remote output Device Module name Signal name RY Y101B RY1B to AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN to Reserved Y105F RY5F Y1060 RY0O CH 1 analog output enable disable flag Y1061 RY01 CH 2 analog output enable disable flag Y1062 RY02 CH 3 analog output enable disable flag
336. ic CC L Ink start p sien biss noni heeding bedded Ado he 158 8 3 4 Reserved station function iliis 161 8 8 5 Scan synchronization specification licieeel ene eee 162 8 3 6 Error invalid station setting function 0 0 0 cece e 166 8 8 7 Temporary error invalid station setting function llli ilis sse 167 8 3 8 Data link stop r start nik aape Shot Sentete nua Li adonde sd xa d RE RAT Ease 168 8 3 9 Remote I O station points setting remote net Ver 2 mode only 00 005 169 8 3 10 Master station duplication error canceling function 000 ccc cece eee eee 171 10 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 172 9 1 List of Dedicated Instructions Applicable Devices and Precautions 172 92 G R IRD e ero teta um reiche s scu etie hae ete d Ea ra 174 924 Program example Ave EEE oes ore cidade ETRURIAE SA CEA 179 gu v GIBERIWI cic Sica teen ser ce anita aan cast ia he ele dna ase taht ec Led 180 9 3 1 Program example 00 066 rl 185 or EC RR oY RD aOR EE ESTEE E 186 9 4 Program example x erbe a eed x da We o tee e a ave dared 190 gs JOB RIBENDS etti co tad iato te t2 qu p Nea edi cate Rad Latus iun Dat 191 9 54 Program example zn ple vete v IM RP Y eo Ye ae ein Puer 195 9 6 G PY RIER uen shade dad ek eet iets dur ere ade toe Pen Yep X acp dde 196 964 Program example neue meten re Pu erdt e RR PER eRe fa alee 199 B SGPIRITO edat 3 C
337. ice to be accessed or the type of the Access code buffer memory Refer to S 2 User Attribute code b15 to b8 b7 to bO b and C S 3 Buffer memory address Specify the start address of the buffer memory or the start number s r or device number of the device l 1 to 4807 S 4 Number of read points Specify the number of read data in word units i User 1 to 32 4 For details refer to the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station from which data are read When specifying the random access buffer specify the start address of the random access buffer as 0 2 The value indicates the maximum number of read data Specify the value within the buffer memory capacity of the local station or the intelligent device station or within the receive buffer area setting range set by a parameter 3 To read device data from the CPU module of the target station other than the QCPU Q mode QCPU A mode LCPU QnACPU or AnUCPU the setting range must be 1 to 32 words b Access code and attribute code When accessing to the buffer memory in the CC Link Attribute Buffer memory contents Access code code Buffer in the intelligent device station 00 Random access buffer 204 Remote input 214 Remote output 224 044 Buffers in a master station and a local station Remote register 244 Link special relay 634 Link special register 644 175 HIH d S ze c Access code a
338. igure the settings using Monitoring time setting SW0009 and Dedicated instruction retry count setting SWOOOB Availability of Dedicated instruction retry count setting SWO000B gt Page 348 Appendix 3 2 Dedicated instruction retry count setting SW000B is applicable to the following dedicated instructions O Applicable x Not applicable PTEE Station where dedicated instructions are executed Master station Local station G P RIRD O Oo G P RIWT O Oo G P RISEND Oo x G P RIRCV O x G P RIFR x x G P RITO x x G P RLPASET x x G P RDMSG x x No retry is performed if the target station is disconnected at the execution of the dedicated instruction Timing of the settings Set Monitoring time setting SW0009 and Dedicated instruction retry count setting SWO000B before executing dedicated instructions Version of a master local module Before using the retry count setting check the version of the master local module gt Page 395 Appendix 6 2 173 suonneoaJg pue seoi eg e qeoiddy suononuisu peyeorpeg Jo isi L 6 9 2 G P RIRD The G P RIRD instruction reads the specified points of data from the buffer memory or the device in the CPU module of the target station Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RIRD G RIRD Un S D1 D2 Command GPRIRD GPRIRD un
339. information parameter has error parameter exceeded 4k words Standby master station A value other than 1 to 64 is set B390 specification error in the standby master station Set the value within 1 to 64 O x parameter specification parameter Number of retries A value other than 1 to 7 is set in n B391 setting error Set the value within 1 to 7 O x the number of retries parameter parameter Operation specification A value other than 0 and 1 is set B392 when CPU is down in the operation specification Set 0 or 1 O x error parameter when CPU is down parameter A value other than 0 and 1 is set Scan mode setting B393 in the scan mode setting Set 0 or 1 O x error parameter parameter Number of automatic A value other than 1 to 10 is set B394 return stations setting in the number of automatic return Set the value within 1 to 10 O x error parameter stations parameter Please consult your local B395 System error NUM O x Mitsubishi representative Station number The station number is already in B396 already in use error use in the station information Set a unique number O x parameter parameter 296 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code 3 c Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station The station information parameter setting does not meet the following condition
340. ing JZ Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window 2 3 Start IJO No Operation Setting Type Master Station Data Link Type n Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected 1 Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Reaister RWw Wer 2 Remote Input RX VERSUS a Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay S8 Special Register SW Remote Device Station Initial Setting Interrupt Settinas l 1 This item is automatically set by the CC Link configuration window Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Setting Item Details Please input the start 1 0 No where the CC Link is connected in 16 point unit Print Window Acknowledge XY Print Window pista rian lear 2 Check the checkbox next to Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window at the top of the window for GX Works2 only 3 Input settings to the Network Parameter window gt Page 98 Section 7 3 2 4 Clickthe d button 5 Write the settings to the CPU module using the programming tool ZX Online lt gt Write to PLC 6 The settings are reflected by resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system When the reflection is completed data link is automatically started at
341. ink refresh timing SB0082 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Other station fuse blown status SWO0088 to SWO008B Whether the setting of setting switches of other stations during data link has been changed is detected OFF No change SB0083 Other station switch Et geg 5E8 b3 change status 2 a Depending on the link refresh timing SB0083 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Other station switch change status SWO008C to SWO008F Whether the line to the host station is normally operating dips Host line status E x O x 5E9 bO OFF Normal ON Error disconnected 346 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether a transient transmission error has occurred in other stations is stored OFF No error ON Error SW0094 to SW0097 SBO094 Other stations Even when the transient transmission is retried using a transienttransmission dedicated instruction the error will be detected O O x 5E9p b4 status Depending on the link refresh timing SB0094 may be updated with the time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Other stations transient transmission status SW0094 to SW0097 Whether the master station is normally performing Master station poni s SB0095 NEP MON UAT transient transmission is stored x
342. ion d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RIWT instruction is eight e Assignment of the send buffer The assignment of the send buffer is performed in Station Information Setting of the network parameter of a programming tool 7 s Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 3 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module ua When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When attempting to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruction is specified 4100 When the data that cannot be used for the instruction is contained When the number of data used for the instruction is set beyond the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 3 1 Program example This section shows an example of the program to write 10 word data from the area starting from DO in the master station to the area starting from D1000 in the local station station number 1 when XO is turned on in the following system configuration Assume that the I O number of the
343. ion Un G992 to Un G1503 7 gt Page 332 Appendix 2 4 The other contents are same as those for Remote Input RX described the above Same as Remote Input RX Same as Remote Output RY Same as Remote Register RWr Same as Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB Special Register SW Set the start device where SB and SW are transferred By setting these items SB and SW can be automatically transferred to a device in a CPU module without using a program Blank or the following range Device M L B D W R SB or ZR M B D W and SB for a MELSECNET H remote I O station Device No Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range Device M L B D W R SW or ZR M B D W and SW for a MELSECNET H remote I O station Device No Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Retry Count Automatic Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No PLC Down Select Scan Mode Setting Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting The settings are not required when a master local module is used as a local station or standby master station Except when Master Station Duplex Function is selected for Type Interrupt Settings Set the conditions used to issue a reques
344. ion and a local station RX RY also slide over if the points are changed in Remote Station Points of Station Information Setting Consider it when assign them Ex Assignment example when RWr RWw slide over E represents the station numbers that slide over by the number of points of remote I O stations Y Ld Master station Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote O station Remote device station Remote device station Station No 3 Range of the station No 1 sending data RX LELETET CECD Station No 1 Range of the station No 2 sending data RX Station No 2 Range of the station No 3 sending data Station No 3 Py E ee EEEE O 1 1 RY Range of the master station sending data to Station No 1 i the station No 1 Range of the master station sending data to Station No 2 the station No 2 Range of the master station sending data to the station No 3 E all c 4 RWr Range of the station No 2 sending data RWr Range of the CO Ce OOT station No 3 sending data Station No 2 Station No 3 RWw Range of the master station sending data to 2 the station No 2 RWw 1 1 I k 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Range of the master station sending data to Station No 3 the station No 3 Point The storage locations for each station can be checked using Sla
345. ion number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 w Station number 2 Station number 3 EE Station number 3 S tation number 4 Station number 4 Remote register RWw Remote register RWw lt gt sss R gt Station number 1 Station number 1 emote register RWW station number 2 Station number 3 ppg eee y eee Areas where the setting is configured for whether data are refreshed or compulsorily cleared Eug eee Areas refreshed regardless of the setting Only remote output RY is refreshed or compulsorily cleared according to the setting Remote input RX and remote register RWr RWw are refreshed even if the switches on the CPU modules in the master station and local stations are set to STOP regardless of the setting Point f the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP with Clears Compulsorily set a compulsory output to a slave station cannot be performed on a programming tool by using a device test or other methods The setting is enabled even if RY is refreshed using an intelligent function module device Un GD or TO instructions CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 2 Device to be set in the refresh device setting Whether remote output RY is refreshed or compulsorily cleared varies in the refresh device setting of the network parameter as described below When Y is set remote output RY is compulsorily cleared regardless of the parameter setting When a device other than
346. ion test result SBOOB4 When the test is not completed error on all the QJ61BT11N RUN M CL RUN stations va rome aN MST LED ON SD RD Il Flashing f ERR E LERR Pes ERR LED Flashing The error code is stored into Line test result SWOOB8 I s Page 291 Section 11 3 2 S9 SUI p g 9 BuulM Joy 1S8 1L 9 89 b Line test 2 1 Before the line test 2 check the following i High Perf del f QCPU TP OB DESI If the switch on the CPU module is set at STOP If the switch on the CPU module is not set at RESET CON f all the stations are connected with CC Link STOP dedicated cables RESET L CLR CD 2 Set the station number setting switches on the QU61BT11N RUN L RUN MST SMST master station to the station number of the slave station where the test is executed Set the start station number when the number of occupied stations is two or more 3 Set the transmission speed mode setting switch on L RUN the master station from 5 to 9 sue When setting the switch from 5 to 9 set the same transmission speed as that of during system operation L gt Page 21 CHAPTER 2 4 Reset the CPU module or power off and on the system 5 The line test 2 is started During the test the MST QJ61BT11N LED on the master station flashes RUN BB LJLRUN MST E
347. ions station with the last station number and stations 69A later than that are excepted Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on This pics item is checked and the result is stored only upon data link start and H the update of a parameter For a slave station with the transmission speed auto tracking setting whether the station number is already used for other stations may not be detected When the station number of a station is the same as that of the SMS suajsibeu jeroeds yur ze xipueddy standby master station the status cannot be detected SMS susjsiBey jeroeds Ju pue sgs s ejew jeroeds yu e xipueddy 355 Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether the connected module status matches with parameter settings is stored A mismatch error will occur in the following cases 1 The station types do not match 2 The number of occupied stations do not match 3 The expanded cyclic settings do not match 4 The CC Link compatible versions do not match 1 When the number of connected modules is smaller than or equal to the number of modules set using the parameter a mismatch error will not occur When a remote device station is actually connected and an intelligent device station has SWOO9C peat set using me
348. ipueddy Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station The number of occupied stations of the host station is SB0066 stored 5E6y b6 Number of occupied SB0066 SB0067 Number of host stations x Oo x occupied stations SB0067 1 OFF OFF 5E6p b7 2 OFF ON 3 ON ON 4 ON OFF Whether the switch has been correctly set is stored B Switch setting status pee eee wi i u 5E6p b10 ON Setting incorrect An error code is stored in O 9 O SWOO06A Whether the parameters have been correctly set is stored O SB006D Parameter setting OFF Correct For the x 5E64 b13 status ON Setting incorrect An error code is stored in SANON SWO068 number 0 only Whether data link with other stations is being performed is SBOO6E Host station operating stored x 5E6 b14 status OFF In process o O ON Not performed Setting status of block Whether the block guarantee of cyclic data per station has SB006F anea oi vde been set to the host station is stored x u i 5E6y b15 9 i OFF Not set 2 2 data per station ON Set Data link status is stored pega Master station OFF nds n Bes by the master station x i i 5E7y b0 information i Q S ON Data link control by the standby master station Whether a standby master station exists is stored B0071 Standby master P t MSS 5E7y b1 station information l 2 2
349. is in the remote net Ver 2 mode the refresh points with a remote I O station can be selected from 8 points 16 points and 32 points Changing the number of points can save the areas of the refresh device in a CPU module In modes other than the remote net Ver 2 mode only 32 points per station can be selected Page 169 Section 8 3 9 2 Transient transmission Function Communications using a dedicated instruction Description Communications can be performed with other stations at any timing Unlike cyclic transmission direct access to buffer memory areas in other stations can be performed This function is used to access data that is updated infrequently Reference Page 128 Section 8 1 2 Page 172 CHAPTER 9 34 3 RAS function CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Function Slave station cutoff function Description Data link can be continued in a normal station by disconnecting a slave station that cannot perform data link due to reasons such as power off No parameter setting is required Using this function prevents the entire system from going down when one station goes down Reference Page 129 Section 8 2 1 Automatic return function When a slave station that has been disconnected from data link due to reasons such as power off returns to the normal status data link is automatically restarted The time between an error and a return can be shortened Page 129 Section 8 2 1
350. is stopped in the entire system 1 Operation method Data link can be stopped or restarted using one of the following methods e CC Link diagnostics gt Page 317 Section 11 4 5 Link special relays SBs or link special registers SWs Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses and bit numbers Item Link special relay SB and link special register SW to be used e Data link stop SB0002 5EO b2 Data link stop acceptance SB0044 5E4 b4 Data link stop complete SB0045 5E4 b5 Data link stop result SW0045 6454 Data link stop Data link restart SBO000 5E0 bO Data link restart acceptance SB0040 5E4 b0 Data link restart complete 8B0041 5E44 b1 Data link restart result SW0041 6414 Data link restart CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 9 Remote I O station points setting remote net Ver 2 mode only When the master station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode the number of refresh points with a remote I O station can be selected from 8 points 16 points and 32 points Changing the number of points can save the areas of the refresh devices in a CPU module In modes other than the remote net Ver 2 mode only 32 points per station can be selected The remote I O station points setting is configured Remote I O station Station No 1 the number of occupied Remote I O station Station No 2 the number of occupied Remote I O station Station No 3 th
351. ise v de e RN MEA XPLORE EN GO LO ER AA 58 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 68 5 1 CC Link System Configuration lisse cette teens 68 5 2 Configuration of the System Where a Master Local Module is Mounted 69 5 2 1 Connectable modules and the number of connectable modules sls 69 5 2 2 Applicable programming tools 0 0 0 0 RII 72 5 3 Precautions for the System Configuration llle 73 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 76 6 1 Installing the Module t nee eens 76 8 3 6 2 WiringisiSo uf ath deo ha maso uai a Me tira de Ae aee Le tat TT 6 2 1 Preparation before Wiring 2 0 ccc RR rl TT 6 2 2 Wiring procedure lslsssssessee RR e al 78 6 2 3 T branch connection eena e esos eR DERI PERITO E TR REI EM oe eed 80 6 3 Station Number Setting o s ooo 00 0 ccc ttt 83 6 4 Transmission Speed Setting llli 86 6 5 Test After WAKING aero Ae eden AR oan cau s oe oat eed I Tav 87 6 5 jLinie teste sce tee Ls D ce Reb eb da ced V Re b ER a DRE d 87 6 5 2 Transmission speed test 0 0 cee ll 91 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS 94 7 1 Parameter Setting Method 0 0 ccc cent a 94 T2 Parameter Setting Lists ues er EEUUR dw ERE RS EA eee al AT ER 95 7 3 Parameter Settings for a Master Station llllelelel ree 97 oA Setting method ieir e EP TE ERI expert ca e d 97 1 32 Setting details t4 beste vota C et det ata LE SA thee de
352. ition TER 1 to 65535 seconds 16 hours 12 minutes and 15 seconds or 0 seconds No specification T tour 0 Minute 2 second ml Stop Logging Log Storage Area in CC Link Module c Logging Progress 0 The first 45 logged data after starting logging when checking RAM Flash ROM will be stored in RAM and flash ROM and will be stored only in RAM after it Please check logged data stored in the flash ROM after turning the power OFF gt ON or resetting programmable controller CPU When executing Clear Log selecting RAM Flash ROM in logged data stored area please execute Clear Log after stopping data link And please restart data link after completing clear log Log List The list will display up to 5 000 logs Selecting an item displays the status of selected date and time in the right window Date of Log Acquisition Error Error Details 2011 10 06 Returned normally Reserved Temporary error Error invalid Error station invalid station station 313 Buibbo smels ev LL ZSM XO Husn sonsouBeiq xur 29 t LL b Saving logs in a CSV file and reading the saved logs To save the information displayed under Log List in a CSV file click the Save button To read the saved CSV log file and display the contents under Log List click the Read button c Deleting logs 1 To delete logs in a master local module click the Clear Log button
353. ition 2 16 x A 54 x B 88 x C lt 2304 QOWNPI2A2 TD Number of remote I O stations lt 64 Number of remote device stations lt 42 Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 27 s jnpow p p uuoI jo Jequunu WNWIXeEN L Z suoneooadg SOUBWOLIOd ZE 2 Remote net Ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode The table below lists the maximum number of connected modules of when a system is configured only with Ver 2 compatible slave stations For the modes refer to Page 43 Section 3 6 2 64 modules of a remote I O station remote device station local station standby master station and intelligent device station can be connected in total for one master station Note however that the following conditions must be satisfied Item Number of modules Condition 1 Condition 2 a a2 a4 a8 b b2 b4 b8 x 2 ct C2 c4 c8 x 3 d d2 d4 d8 x 4 lt 64 a x 32 a2 x 32 a4 x 64 a8 x 128 b x 64 b2 x 96 b4 x 192 b8 x 384 c x 96 c2 x 160 c4 x 320 c8 x 640 d x 128 d2 x 224 d4 x 448 d8 x 896 lt 8192 Condition 3 f a x 4 a2 x 8 a4 x 16 a8 x 32 b X 8 b2 x 16 b4 x 32 b8 x 64 c X 12 c2 x 24 c4 x 48 c8 x 96 d x 16 d2 x 32 d4 x 64 d8 x 128 lt 2048 a2 b2 C2 d2 a4 b4 d4
354. itsubishi representative BA19 Corresponding station The target station of the line test Check the cables and the target o error cannot be communicated station A communication failure has BA1B Error in all stations occurred in all stations during Check the cables O x execution of the line test 1 302 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code Se Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station The following requests including the same request were tried to be executed to the same station at the same time Message transmission function BRO1 Concurrent execution Remote device station Perform the processes one by o o error initialization procedure one registration function G P RISEND or G P RIRCV instruction Access from a peripheral to a remote device station The remote I O net mode is set When setting the remote I O net BBC1 Mode setting error for a station other than the station mode set the station number O x number 0 setting switches to 0 A station number is set to a number other than 0 to 64 using Check the station number and the Station number setting the station number setting BBC2 number of occupied stations of O O error switches on the module or the the module last station number has exceeded 64 Reduce the number of master i stations on the same line to one
355. ived receiving s from the master station Local station For data receiving 21504 to 5400 to 7FFFy System area 5 7 32767 24 This buffer memory area is used when the remote net Ver 1 mode and remote net additional mode are selected 2 This buffer memory area is used when the remote net Ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode are selected Point Do not write data to System area Doing so may cause malfunction in the programmable controller system 40 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 6 Assignment and Modes For a master local module the mode can be selected according to the system used For example there is a mode to configure a new system or a mode to add a Ver 2 compatible slave station to a Ver 1 compatible slave station Depending on the mode the addresses of buffer memory areas to store RX RY RWr and RWw vary 3 6 1 Assignment In CC Link communications are performed between the master station and slave stations using RX RY RWr and RWw Data in RX RY RWr and RWw of the master local module are stored in the buffer memory This section describes the assignment using an example of data input and output of the master station and local station Remote I O station CPU Master Remote device station CPU module i Intelligent device station iw Haigh Be a oo sna adaa o eaa aa a ee 4
356. l completion Remains off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RISEND instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process End End End End process process process process Program PF Execution completion of ON the G P RISEND G P RISEND OFF l instruction instruction 7 0m T ON Completion device E ree ers Status display OFF completion Y deviceatcompletion iscan Send completion YS Request device OFF RYn Completion device OFF RXn E Receive completion d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RISEND instruction is ten e Assignment of the send buffer The assignment of the send buffer is performed in Station Information Setting of the network parameter of a programming tool 7 s Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 3 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module Es When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When attempt to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruction is specified 4100 When the data that can
357. lave station is displayed after the slash The model name of the module is displayed Model Name If the module information cannot be found Module without profile is displayed Station Type Select the station type Set the station type of the slave station actually connected Varies depending on the module that was set Version of STA Occupied Select CC Link version of the slave station Select the mode of the master local module if the slave station is a master local module 5 Page 43 Section 3 6 2 Page 50 Section 3 6 5 Select the same CC Link version as the version of the slave station actually connected If not data link cannot be performed Select the number of occupied stations of the slave station Varies depending on the module that was set Varies depending on the module that was set Expanded Cyclic Setting Select the expanded cyclic setting for the slave station The setting can be selected only when Ver 2 or Add is set to Version Varies depending on the module that was set Remote Station Points Reserved Err Invalid STA The number of points of remote I O RX RY occupied by the slave station is displayed The number of points can be changed for a remote I O station when Ver 2 Mode is set to Mode Setting Changing the number of points can save the areas of a refresh device in a CPU module 7 Page 169 Section 8 3 9 When setting eight points to t
358. le Ver 1 00 compatible The cables above cannot be used at the same time If used normal data transmission is not guaranteed In addition select a terminating resistor to be connected according to the cable type L gt Page 77 Section 6 2 1 3 Maximum overall cable distance maximum transmission distance Depends on the transmission speed and CC Link version 3 Page 29 Section 3 2 2 Page 30 Section 3 2 3 RAS function Standby master function Automatic return function Slave station cutoff function Error detection using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment intelli 32 points Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 46A Weight 0 12kg 1 In CC Link Ver 1 increasing the number of occupied stations can increase the number of link points per station In CC Link Ver 2 increasing the number of occupied stations and setting the greater value in the expanded cyclic setting can increase the number of link points per station For the points refer to the following table CC Link Ver 2 Item CC Link Ver 1 Expanded Cyclic Setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple 32 points 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points Remote I O RX RY 30 points for a 30 points for a 30 points for a 62 points for a 126 points for a local station local station local station local station local station R
359. lect the mode according to the system used CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Mode Application Connectable slave station Reference Remote net Ver 1 mode To configure a new system only with Ver 1 compatible slave stations Ver 1 compatible slave station Page 45 Section 3 6 3 Remote net Ver 2 mode To configure a system including a Ver 2 compatible slave station More points are used compared to the remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net additional mode To add a Ver 2 compatible slave station to an existing Ver 1 System using the program of the Ver 1 system Ver 1 compatible slave station and Ver 2 compatible slave station Page 47 Section 3 6 4 Page 50 Section 3 6 5 Remote I O net mode e To configure a system only with remote I O stations 1 This mode cannot be selected for a local station Remote I O station Page 54 Section 3 6 6 43 Sapo c 9 Sepo N pue j1ueuiuBissy 9 44 a Combination of the modes of a master local module The table below lists the combination of the modes of the master station and local station in a master local module O Data link can be performed x Data link cannot be performed Mode of a local station Mode of the master station Remote net Ver 1 Remote net Ver 2 Remote net additional mode mode mode Remote net Ver 1 mode O x Remote net Ver 2 mode o O x Remote net additional mode o O
360. letion SB0003 Data link stop SB0002 Data link stop complete SB0045 G P RLPASET instruction direction device Complete device Status display device of Abnormal end at completion When all the stations are faulty End process End process End Program propos Refresh stop Data link stop Host data link status X01 Refresh instruction when changing parameters Le scan al End process End process End process End process Refresh start Data link start A Return to system process PS G P RLPASET instruction completion by the dedicated instruction SB0003 Data link stop SB0002 Data link stop complete SB0045 G P RLPASET instruction direction device Complete device Status display device at completion 210 scan a 4 Return to system 7 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs 2112 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module 4002 When attempt to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruction is specified 4100 When
361. lligent function module device Un GO and FROM TO instructions transfers data between the buffer memory areas in a master local module and a device in a CPU module Use this function to use a different refresh device for each station or for other purposes Address Item Reference Hexadecimal Decimal EO to 15Fy 224 to 351 Remote input RX Page 328 Appendix 2 2 1604 to 1DF 352 to 479 Remote output RY 3 Storage locations of RX RY RWr and RWw Areas are assigned by 32 points in the order of station number to the remote input RX and remote output RY Ls Page 328 Appendix 2 2 55 pow jeu C ejoueM 9 9 s poy pue juewuBbissy 9 e CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION This chapter describes the procedure to be taken before operating a master local module Check column E 56 System planning L gt Page 41 Section 3 6 Plan the system configuration and device assignment Mount the master local module on the base unit Connect the slave station to the control panel and machine 3 Page 76 Section 6 1 Connect the modules with a CC Link dedicated cable Connect terminating resistors to the modules located at both ends 3 Page 77 Section 6 2 Items to check before powering on the module Check the module installation status Check the input power supply voltage Check that the switch on the CPU module is set to STOP Check that the
362. ly as a reference when inputting similar setting items Execute Only Set Default Execute Operational Condition Executional Condition Select whether to newly set the condition for the initial settings or use the same condition as the above line If Same as Prev Set is selected the following process is performed Ex Remote Device Station Initial Setting Procedure Registration Module 1 Target S x Input Format DEC v Execute Operational Condition Executional Condition Details of Execution Flag Condition Device Execute Write Device Write Device No Condition Devie No Data Execute Set New vix vl o1 ON v RY v 03 ON v Execute SameasPrev Set v RX zi oi oN v RWw v 02 15 SET RY3 MOV K15 RWw2 Set the condition to execute the initial settings Set New Same as Prev Set Default Set New Condition Device Select the device to execute the initial settings RX SB Default Blank Device No Set the device number of the device set to Condition Device Set 0 to the first device number for each station Ex For instance 0 to 1F can be set to the device number for the station number 4 as shown below Remote device station Station No 4 no of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Station No 1 no oi occupied stations 3 Master station For RX 0 to 3
363. m other stations Changing the station number to the one other than 64 allows access from other stations b Access to other stations using a CC Link system master local interface board Access to a local station and intelligent device station with the station number 64 cannot be performed from other stations Changing the station number to the one other than 64 allows access from other stations 4 When using a master local module in a MELSECNET H remote I O station In a MELSECNET H remote I O station an event issuance for the interrupt program and dedicated instructions cannot be used 5 When using a master local module in a redundant system For the precautions refer to the following QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 15 uoneJn iuo ulejs S eui 10 suonneoeJd E G CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 1 Installing the Module 1 How to install the module The precautions when a master local module is handled from the time it is unpacked until it is installed are described on this page For more details on the module installation refer to the following User s manual for the CPU module used hardware design maintenance and inspection 2 Handling precautions The following are the precautions for when a master local module is handled Do not drop or apply strong shock to the module case and terminal block since it is made from resin Do not remove the printed circuit board of each module from its case
364. m the error Master station Ayqey weysks eu Bulrciduy z g Point If a cable is disconnected data link cannot be performed because the terminating resistors are also disconnected The ERR LED turns on uJnjeJ oneulojne pue Jjo jno uoneis SABIS PZS Master station Local station Local station onoooo opoooa Remote station Remote station 0000000000000 0000 000000000 H i Doood ooooooooo IDoood 000000000 Disconnection 129 1 Setting method a Setting the slave station cut off function No setting is required in the master local module b Setting the automatic return function Set the number of slave stations that can be returned per link scan in Automatic Reconnection Station Count of the network parameter 7 5 Page 98 Section 7 3 2 130 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 2 2 Setting of the data link status upon an error in the programmable controller CPU of the master station If a stop error occurs in the CPU module of the master station whether to stop or continue data link can be selected L Page 122 Section 7 5 Point When a standby master station is set the standby master station starts to take in control without data link of the master station continued even if the setting of the data link status is set to Continue Use of the standby master function is prioritized 1 Setting method
365. m the failure setting Hold remote device station having a communication failure Clears the receive area Data Link Clear tom the local When a Faulty station havinga Holds the communication Station communication receive area fail h Setting of failure from the local allure suchas MI Ay Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue id oca Continue power off programming Holds the station having a occurs in a tool for local receive area communication local station station from the local failure Hold setting station having a communication failure 124 1 2 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS If parameter settings have been configured using dedicated instructions the data is held If parameter settings have been configured using a programming tool the data is cleared when Y is set to the refresh device of the remote output RY The data is held or cleared according to the parameter settings when the device other than Y is set When Y is set to the refresh device of the remote output RY in the local station that has stopped only the remote output RY in the stopped local station is cleared The data is held or cleared according to the parameter settings when the device other than Y is set Data link is continued for the other local stations 125 10113 ue je uoneig SARIS e pue uonelg Jeise A e uee eg eoueJeyiig SNIS 7 et mm mm mmnm omm mmm mmmn mn mm m m m
366. mal 844 Link special relay SB Oo Hexadecimal 63H Link special register SW O Hexadecimal 64H Special relay SM O Decimal 434 Special register SD Oo Decimal 44u Devices other than above cannot be accessed When accessing a bit device specify it as 0 or multiples of 16 The extended data register of address D65536 or later and the extended link register of address W10000 or later cannot be specified 182 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RIWT instruction Master station Target station us c kz O CPU module Master station Local station CPU module Command 2 H G P RIWT 1 Send buffer A j Buffer memory Device Device so Co Q 3 A 4 2 m 1 The data to be written to the target station is stored in the send buffer of the master station 2 The data specified by S2 is written to the buffer memory specified by S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified by 81 1 or written to the device in a CPU module 3 The target station sends the response of write completion to the master station 4 The device specified by D turns on b Simultaneous execution of the G P RIWT instruction The G P RIWT instruction can be simultaneously execu
367. master local module Set the station number and transmission speed of the master local module 7 gt Page 21 CHAPTER 2 Station No 1 Transmission speed 156kbps Online 2 Parameter settings by using a programming tool Connect a CPU module to a programming tool to set the parameters of the master local module 7 gt Page 97 Section 7 3 1 Createa project on a programming tool Select QCPU Q mode under PLC Series Select Q20UDH under PLC Type X Project gt New New Project Project Type simple Project I Use Label PLC Series ocru Q mode PLC Type azoubH uonejs E20 e JO sPumes EOL UOI E S E207 pue uonels Jejse y e ueewjeg suoneoiunuiulo2 Jo ejduiex3 eor Language Ladder s 259 2 Open the Network Parameter window to configure the setting as follows X 5 Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link Number of Modules 1 w Boards Blank No Setting sett 1 Start I O No 0000 Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station Data Link Type Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected Remote Input RX x1000 Remote Output RY Y1000 Remote Register RWr wo Remote Register RWw W100 Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay
368. master station is X Y40 to X Y5F Assume that SWO is set to the refresh device of the link special register SW M13 is the G P RIWT instruction executing flag Master station Local station CPU module Station No 0 Station No 1 RIWT request source Host station RIWT request target Target station xo M13 SW80 0 4 Ht PAS At MOV Ki Dio J MOV H405 D102 Control data setting MOV K1000 D103 MOV K10 D104 o do E w w LGRIWT U4 D100 DO MO J Dedicated instruction execution 0 T SET Mia 4 Set G P RIWT instruction a executing flag to ON 3 a MO Perform process for receive Process upon completion of 3 d completion reception e z o rL D M Perform process for normal I Process upon normal completion 3 completion of dedicated instruction E MI Perform process for abnormal _ Process upon abnormal end of e Lend 0 0 00 dedicated instruction ts M13 Set G P RIWT instruction J executing flag to OFF END 185 9 4 G P RIRCV The G P RIRCV instruction automatically performs handshaking with the intelligent device station and reads data from the buffer memory areas of the specified intelligent device station The instruction is available for modules that have a handshake signal e g AJ65BT R2 N Instruction Execution symbol
369. matic CC Link startup setting of the programming module switch setting tool Are there no disconnection short circuit incorrect wiring poor connection and coexistence of different Check if cables between the cables master station and slave TE Correct the wiring Do a transmission distance stations are not dis Cable or other station to station distance disconnected parts transmission cable and FG terminal grounding meet the specifications Are terminating resistors connected Check if terminating resistors are connected to the both ends in the CC Link system Connect terminating resistors to the both ends in the CC Link system To the next page 275 UONE S SARIS e JO uonoeuuoosip 0 ENP SWA GOlg L Z LL Suie qoJd 40 S SI Z LL Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Is the CPU module set to Check if the switch on the status other than RESET CPU module is not at the Cancel the RESET status when network parameters n RESET position are set A1 6 Link start Disable the intelligent Was the system started by Check if values are not set in function module switch the automatic CC Link the intelligent function f setting of the programming startup module switch setting tool Remove the error LLLI User s manual for the Check the error code of the CPU module used CPU module hardware
370. mation Setting a When the checkbox next to Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window is checked 1 Open the CC Link configuration window XJ Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt CC Link Configuration Setting button 2 Select modules in Module List and drag and drop them to List of stations Slave stations are added to List of stations The added modules are displayed in the device map area as well 3 When completing the setting close the CC Link configuration window CC Link Configuration lt gt Close with Reflecting the Setting For how to operate the CC Link configuration window refer to the following 1 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common fel CC Link Configuration Module 1 Start I O No 0000 i CC Link Configuration Edi View Mode Setting ver 1 Mode _x TX Speed is kbps Link Scan Time Approx 20 83 ms Module List Select CC Link Find Module My Favorites Expanded Remote ReservedjEr Intelligent Buffer Size word Station s cific Station Type Version of STA Occupied cy dic Setting Station Points Invalid Siam Send Receive Auto mode se ing me ES El List of stations x E General CC Link Module 1 E CC Link Module Mitsubishi Electric Corporatio E Master Local Module WR QI618T11N Master Local Module WEL26CPU BT Master Local Station Functio HB L26CPU PBT Master Local Station
371. me functionality Use either of Xn1 or SBOOGE for programming Note that the on off conditions of Xn1 are the opposite to those of SBOOGE The conditions of Xn1 are as follows OFF Data link stopped ON During data link Other station data link status Xn3 This signal indicates the data link status of other stations remote station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Other station data link status 8B0080 has the same functionality Use either of Xn3 or SB0080 for programming OFF All stations normal ON A faulty station exists The status of the faulty station is stored in SW0080 to SW0083 Point It takes maximum of six seconds for Other station data link status Xn3 to turn on after a slave station connected to the master station or local station becomes faulty The time until this signal turns on differs depending on the system configuration and error status 323 sjeuBis O I jo uonduoseq xipueddy 4 Module ready XnF This signal indicates whether the module is ready for operation When the module becomes ready this signal turns on This signal turns off under either condition An error has been detected in the switch setting of the module Module error Xn0 turns on Power on Module ready XnF Module error Xn0 324 APPENDICES Appendix 2 Buffer Memory Areas This appendix describes buffer memory areas 1 Parameter information area T
372. memory address of the first station For example when the station number 1 occupies two stations values are stored only in the RX RY RWw RWr offset size information of the station number 1 and those for the station number 2 remain the default b Size This area stores the sizes of RX RY RWw RWr assigned for each station unit word When the size is less than one word the storage value is rounded up therefore 1 is stored When eight points are set in the remote I O station points setting 1 is stored For the remote I O station points setting refer to Page 169 Section 8 3 9 If the target station is a reserved station 0000y is stored The following table lists the relationship between RX RY RWw RWr offset size information and buffer memory addresses for each station Buffer memory address Item Default hexadecimal Hexadecimal Decimal 3E0y 992 Station No 1 RX offset 0000 3E1y 993 Station No 1 RX size 0000 to to to 45Ey 1118 Station No 64 RX offset 0000 45Fu 1119 Station No 64 RX size 0000 4604 1120 Station No 1 RY offset 00004 4614 1121 Station No 1 RY size 0000 to to to 4DEy 1246 Station No 64 RY offset 0000 4DFy 1247 Station No 64 RY size 0000 4E0 1248 Station No 1 RWw offset 0000 4E1y 1249 Station No 1 RWw size 0000v to to to 55Ey 1374 Station No 64 RWw offset 0000 55F4 1375 Station No 64 RWw size 00004 5604 1376 Station No 1 R
373. meout error detection B1 3 B1 4 B1 5 Abort error detection B1 3 B1 4 B1 5 l Setting error detection A1 2 A1 3 A1 5 A1 7 A1 8 Other error detections B1 1 B1 3 B1 4 yyy o The numbers above correspond to those listed in the Check item column in Section 11 2 1 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station Take corrective action with reference to the corresponding item To the next page 270 Selected station information Check if the Parameter status matches with the status of the connected modules 1 Reservation setting mismatch 2 Error invalid setting mismatch o 3 Station type mismatch 4 Number of occupied stations CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING When a CC Link system is newly configured or the existing CC Link system is changed When the CC Link system has operated Link error mismatch gt 5 Expanded cyclic setting 1 1 mismatch A2 4 No error l i Y I Temporary error invalid I I Watchdog timer error ES Y N gt T oa Fuse blown error v gt P4 A Bo tae S 5 E e No error Error Transient error The numbers above correspond to those listed in the Check item column in Section 11 2 1 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station Take corrective action with reference to the corresponding it
374. mm m mm mm m m m 1 Overview of communications In CC Link communications are performed between the master station and slave stations using RX RY RWr and RWw Data in RX RY RWr and RWw of the master local module are stored in the buffer memory For assignment and a flow of input output data refer to Page 41 Section 3 6 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Basic Applications of the Functions Periodic communications cyclic transmission A master local module communicates with other stations periodically using RX RY RWr and RWw For example controlling the input and output in the CPU module of a master station controls the input and output in a slave station Master station Station No 0 Buffer memory RX RWr Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 RY RWw Range of the master station sending data to the station No 1 Range of the master station sending data to the station No 2 Range of the master station sending data to the station No 3 a Q Remote I O station 1 Remote device station RX RWr Range of the station No 1 sending data RY RWw Station No 1 Data sent from the master station Area where data is sent to di Data sent from slave stations a 7 Li L L L L L I L L LI L L L L L L L L L Intelligent device station p Station No
375. mmunications transient transmission In transient transmission data can be communicated when a request is issued unlike periodic communications cyclic transmission Direct access to the buffer memory and device in other stations can be performed in transient transmission CPU module Master station Local station CPU module Command H Histructon Device Write Device request Hasan 1234H 1234H 1 Communication method The dedicated instructions of the master local module are used for communications 7 7 Page 172 CHAPTER 9 128 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 2 Improving the System Reliability This section describes how to improve the CC Link system reliability using the functions 8 2 1 Slave station cut off and automatic return The slave station cut off function disconnects a slave station that cannot perform data link due to reasons such as power off to continue the data link in a normal station The automatic return function allows data link to be automatically performed again when the slave station that has been disconnected from data link returns to the normal state Using these functions prevents the entire system from going down when one station goes down Because no process is required for a return time between an error and a return can be shortened Continues data link excluding faulty stations Master station Recovering fro
376. mmunications between a master station St a ue per Staton oy ceci ae 2 and a local station 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee 254 Buffer oer Address a NU MEA E QR 13 Example of communications between a master station p tisrniemonidleie cscs ous coho TINO 325 and a remote device station 231 Built in Ethernet port QCPU SUP VI de ee ME a 13 Example of communications when the master station NI QM DTE duplex function is used 147 Execute Flag s oexetw RAE eo ote ed 109 C Executional Condition 0005 109 e Expanded Cyclic Setting 102 104 106 C Controller module na nn anaana naan 13 External dimension diagram 411 Cables 5i eam dox tee REOR ew Ue 77 Case of CPU STOP Setting 102 CC 10 DOMANDE UA SUA ERO AM 16 F CC Link dedicated cable 13 33 l CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compalible lt 77 Function version uaaa 408 CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible 0 00 0 cee eee ee eee 77 G CC Link Device Reference Window 232 CC Link diagnostics using GX Works2 308 G P RDMSG 0 ee 220 CC Link system configuration 68 G P JRIFR cesses nnn 196 CC Link versions llle 410 G P RIRCV eee nnn 186 Combination of the modes 0005 44 G P RIRD 2 6 eee nn 174 Communication buffer 336 G P RISEND 0 161 eee 191 Commu
377. mote Station Reserve Invalid Intelligent Buffer Select Word Station Type Setting Count Points Station Select Send Receive Automatic Remote I O Station v Jingle w Occupied Station 1 _ 32Points w No Setting Remote Device Station v Single v Occupied Station 1 v 32Points v No Setting Intelligent Device Station v Single Occupied Station 1 32Points v No Setting 64 64 Intelligent Device Station v Single w Occupied Stations 2 64Points Y No Setting 64 64 Intelligent Device Station of Station Type includes local station and standby master station Default Check End Cancel Appendix 7 2 Device test Execute a device test on the following menu W Online lt gt Monitor z Device batch monitor Wil Device batch monitor 1 Device Y1000 Monitor format Bit amp Word Display 16bit integer Value DEC T C set value Reference program C Bit C 32bit integer C HEX 2 MAN z C Word Real number single precision Real number double precision a C ASCII character eStop moniter n zl 0 0000 000o oo001 1 SEES EY 1010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 Y1020 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 Y1030 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 Device test Y1040 0000 0000 0000 0000 o Y1050 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 Y1060 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 Close Y1070 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 396 Appendix 7 3 APPENDICES CC Link diagnostics The CC Link diagnostics is operated in a different way from GX Works
378. n Remote I O Automatic Reconnection Station Count Oo x Net Mode is set to Mode tis automatically input when the standby master station is set in the CC Link Standby Master Station No A x configuration window The setting is not required when Remote I O Net Mode is set to Mode 95 Necessity of a setting Local station Item Remark Master station standby master station PLC Down Select O x Scan Mode Setting O x Delay Time Setting O The settings are not required when Remote I O Station Information Setting Oo x Net Mode is set to Mode Lem T Select it when graphically configuring Station Set the station information in the CC Link A j x Information Setting by referring to the network configuration window map display area for GX Works2 only The setting is not required when Remote I O Remote Device Station Initial Setting A x Net Mode is set to Mode Interrupt Settings A A 96 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS 7 3 Parameter Settings for a Master Station This chapter describes the parameter settings when a master local module is used as a master station 7 3 1 Setting method 1 Open the Network Parameter window from a programming tool Project window gt Parameter lt gt Network Parameter gt CC Link Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules 1 _ Boards Blank No Sett
379. n 43 stations of remote I O stations and remote device stations are connected using a CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible Transmission speed 10Mbps Because the cable length between the second station and the third station is 35cm the maximum overall cable distance is 80m Master station 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 43rd remote I O station remote I O station remote I O station remote I O station remote I O station Id o goi OO00 OO0000000 OOO 31 00 L 48A xur1 22 e ueisip ejqeo jeje o WNWIXEN e z suoneoiuioeds eoueuuoLeg ZE 2 When a system is configured with remote I O stations remote device stations local stations and intelligent devices stations Local station or intelligent Master station device station q i i 299 ommo Remote O station or remote device station Remote l O station device station or remote Local station Local station or intelligent or intelligent device station device station S S i i i oo o i i i ooo ommo ommo b b 12 Maximum overall cable distance 2
380. n Type Select the station type of the slave station Set the same type of the slave station actually connected Select Intelligent Device Station for a local station or standby master station Varies depending on the mode set to Mode Single Select the expanded cyclic setting for the slave station The setting Double Expanded Cyclic Settin can be selected only when Ver 2 Remote Device Station or Ver 2 Quadruple i 9 Intelligent Device Station is set to Station Type Octuple Default Single No Setting Occupied Count Select the number of occupied stations of the slave station Occupied Station 1 Occupied Station 2 Occupied Station 3 Occupied Station 4 Default Occupied Station 1 106 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Item Description Setting range Remote Station Points The number of points of remote I O RX RY occupied by the slave station is displayed The number of points can be changed for a remote I O station when Remote Net Ver 2 Mode is set to Mode Setting Changing the number of points can save the areas of a refresh device in a CPU module 7 gt Page 169 Section 8 3 9 When setting eight points to the remote I O stations set them to even numbers of the stations consecutively When setting eight points to odd numbers of the remote I O stations set 8 Points 8 Points Reserved to the last of consecutive remote I O stations Remote I O st
381. n a local station do not move over when the local station is in the remote net Ver 1 mode 3 When a local station is in the remote net Ver 1 mode data are stored in the Ver 1 compatible area When a local station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode data are stored in the Ver 2 compatible area 47 1 Points per module and per system For the points refer to the table of the performance specifications gt Page 24 Section 3 2 In CC Link increasing the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting can increase points per module Set the number of occupied stations and expanded cyclic setting for each slave station 7 s Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 Page 119 Section 7 4 2 1 Item Description The number of points is increased by increasing the station numbers occupied per module Number of Occupied Stations Note that the number of slave stations that can be connected to a CC Link system is decreased because one module occupies the station numbers for multiple modules The station numbers occupied by one module are not changed and only the number of points is increased Unlike Number of Occupied Stations the number of slave stations connected to a CC Link system is not decreased Note however that the transmission delay time is extended compared to that of when the number of points is increased in Number of Occupied Stations Expanded Cyclic Setting CC Link Ver 2 only 2 Data transfer between
382. n execution M6 SWa3 e Set G P RISEND instruction J r at t ESET Mii executing flag to ON M40 My Perform process for normal Process upon normal completion completion of dedicated instruction LN l Perform process for abnormal Process upon abnormal end completion of dedicated instruction pend o aa aa leti f dedicated instructi RST M6 Set write request to OFF r Set G P RISEND instruction LRT Mi executing flag to OFF END 195 jdwex weibold 66 auasi d o 6 9 6 G P RIFR The G P RIFR instruction reads data from the automatic update buffer of the target station The instruction is available for modules that have the automatic update buffer e g AJ65BT R2 N Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RIFR G RIFR Un n1 n2 D n3 Command GPRIFR GPRIFR Un ni n2 D n3 Applicable device Link direct Intelligent Setting Internal device E 3 File device function module Index Constant data System user i Others register JOO device register ZO UO GO Bit Word Bit Word K H S n1 O O Oo n2 O O Oo D O n3 O O _ Oo gt 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written with Un 0 to FE three digits The station number of the intelligent device station 1 to 64 n1
383. n speed of the slave station is the same as that of the master station can be checked by executing a transmission speed test gt Page 91 Section 6 5 2 2 How to set the transmission speed 1 Setthe transmission speed using the transmission speed mode setting switch on the master local module SEN Mode ipm n spoon Switch number setting Transmission speed 156kbps 0 Transmission speed 625kbps 1 Online Transmission speed 2 5Mbps 2 Transmission speed 5Mbps 3 Transmission speed 10Mbps 4 Line test Page 87 Section 6 5 1 Transmission speed 156kbps 5 When the station number setting switch is set at 0 Transmission speed 625kbps 6 Line test 1 Transmission speed 2 5Mbps 7 When the station number setting switch is set at 1 to 64 Transmission speed 5Mbps 8 Line test 2 Transmission speed 10Mbps 9 Transmission speed 156kbps A Transmission speed 625kbps B Hardware test 3 Page 321 Section 11 5 Transmission speed 2 5Mbps C Transmission speed 5Mbps D Transmission speed 10Mbps E Setting not allowed F 86 6 6 5 1 CC Link Diagnostics C 5 Test After Wiring Line test CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Whether a CC Link dedicated cable is properly connected and data link can be performed with slave stations can be checked A line test is executed in the master station 1 Using a programming tool Montt Stop M
384. n the buffer memory areas in a master local module and a device in a CPU module Use this function to use a different refresh device for each station or for other purposes Address Item Reference Hexadecimal Decimal EO to 15Fy 224 to 351 Remote input RX Page 328 Appendix 2 2 1604 to 1DFy 352 to 479 Remote output RY 1E0 to 2DFy 480 to 735 Remote register RWw Page 330 Appendix 2 3 2E0 to 3DFy 736 to 991 Remote register RWr 3 Storage locations of RX RY RWr and RWw Areas are assigned by 32 points in the order of station number to the remote input RX and remote output RY To the remote register RWr and RWw areas are assigned by four points in the order of station number Page 328 Appendix 2 2 Page 330 Appendix 2 3 46 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 6 4 Remote net Ver 2 mode This mode is selected when a new CC Link system including a Ver 2 compatible slave station is configured More points can be used compared to the remote net Ver 1 mode 7 gt Page 24 Section 3 2 Local station Remote net Ver 1 mode or remote net Ver 2 mode Remote device station Intelligent device station Ver 1 or Ver 2 compatible Remote l O station Ver 1 compatible Master station Remote net Ver 2 mode Station No 0 P Ver 2 compatible area Ver 1 or Station No 1 Station No 2 Station n No 3 Range of the master stati
385. nd buffer area setting range set by a parameter 33 To write device data to the CPU module of the target station other than the QCPU Q mode QCPU A mode LCPU QnACPU or AnUCPU the setting range must be 1 to 10 words b Access code and attribute code When accessing to the buffer memory in the CC Link Attribute Buffer memory contents Access code code Buffer in the intelligent device station 00h Random access buffer 204 Remote input 214 Remote output 224 044 Buffers in a master station and a local station Remote register 244 Link special relay 634 Link special register 644 181 lMIM d o ee c Access code and attribute code When accessing to the device in a CPU module Device contents Name codo OS Unit Access code ARUM Bit Word code Input relay X O Hexadecimal 014 Output relay Y O Hexadecimal 024 Internal relay M O Decimal 03H Latch relay L O Decimal 834 Link relay B O Hexadecimal 234 Timer contact T O Decimal 09 Timer coil T Oo Decimal OA Timer present value T O Decimal OCh Retentive timer contact ST O Decimal 894 Retentive timer coil ST O Decimal 8Ay Retentive timer present value ST Oo Decimal 8C 054 Counter contact C Oo Decimal 114 Counter coil C Oo Decimal 124 Counter present value C O Decimal 144 Data register D O Decimal 044 Link register Ww Oo Hexadecimal 24u File register R O Deci
386. nd 1214 ie 13A and 13By Bg 1544 and 155H 236 and 237 262 and 263 288 and 289 314 and 315 840 and 341 j EE and EFy 1084 and 109 3 1224 and 123H 37 13Cy and 13D 65 156 and 157 238 and 239 264 and 265 290 and 291 316 and 317 342 and 343 FOy and F1 2 10Ay and 10By is 1244 and 1254 ie 13E and 13F 1584 and 159 240 and 241 266 and 267 292 and 293 318 and 319 844 and 345 40 F24 and F34 23 10C and 10D 36 126 and 127 49 1404 and 1414 62 15A and 15B 242 and 243 268 and 269 294 and 295 320 and 321 846 and 347 F4 and F5y E 10E and 10F 1284 and 129 142 and 143 15Cy and 15D 244 and 245 270 and 271 296 and 297 322 and 323 848 and 349 F6 and F7 T 1104 and 111 12A and 12By 1444 and 145 Bs 15E and 15Fy 246 and 247 272 and 273 298 and 299 324 and 325 350 and 351 i F84 and F94 112 and 1134 ae 12Cy and 12Dy T 1464 and 1474 u 248 and 249 274 and 275 300 and 301 326 and 327 328 b Remote output RY APPENDICES A Buffer gt Buffer Buffer A Buffer Buffer Station IRI Station PARERE Station ineo Station Ine Station MEA number w number y number y number y number As address address address address address 160 and 161 17A and 17B 194 and 195 1AE and 1AF 1C8 and 1C9 1 14 n H 27 40 H 53 E n
387. nd attribute code When accessing to the device in a CPU module Device contents Name codo OS Unit Access code ARUM Bit Word code Input relay X O Hexadecimal 014 Output relay Y O Hexadecimal 024 Internal relay M O Decimal 03H Latch relay L O Decimal 834 Link relay B O Hexadecimal 234 Timer contact T O Decimal 09 Timer coil T Oo Decimal OA Timer present value T O Decimal OCh Retentive timer contact ST O Decimal 894 Retentive timer coil ST O Decimal 8Ay Retentive timer present value ST Oo Decimal 8C 054 Counter contact C Oo Decimal 114 Counter coil C Oo Decimal 124 Counter present value C O Decimal 144 Data register D O Decimal 044 Link register Ww Oo Hexadecimal 24u File register R O Decimal 844 Link special relay SB Oo Hexadecimal 63H Link special register SW O Hexadecimal 64H Special relay SM O Decimal 434 Special register SD Oo Decimal 44u Devices other than above cannot be accessed When accessing a bit device specify it as 0 or multiples of 16 The extended data register of address D65536 or later and the extended link register of address W10000 or later cannot be specified 176 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RIRD instruction Master station Target station
388. nding data Station E 8 ft eee B oe Sop suenan 1 No 4 TU i pd ru No 4 1 1 I 1 LI 1 I Vd ul 1 1 RWw NS l RWw K te RWw 1 1 C 1 Range of the EE 1 1 e e z i EN 1 Station X Station i i e station No 1 1 1 pod No 3 ts No 3 1 1 Panna chine maste 1 1 1 1 1 Range of l on sending data to i 1 1 W the station No 4 1 ation No 4 i4 b od ur d 1 sending data d 4 Area where data is sent to gt Data sent from the master station other stations gt Data sent from slave stations 50 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 1 Areas in RWr and RWw are occupied for the number of points of the remote I O station in the master station and local station When areas in RWr and RWw should not be occupied use the remote net Ver 2 mode 7 gt Page 47 Section 3 6 4 2 The last two bits in RX and RY cannot be used for communications between a master station and a local station Point The assignment of RX RY RWr and RWw in a Ver 1 compatible slave station is the same as that in the remote net Ver 1 mode therefore a program that has been used in the remote net Ver 1 mode can be used Buffer memory addresses where RX RY RWr and RWw are stored are Ver 1 compatible areas Aremote I O station does not have RWr or RWw However areas in RWr and RWw of the master station and a local station are occupied for the number of points of a remote 1 O station In the remote net additional mode ad
389. ndow on GX Works2 7 5 Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 a View 2 Docking Window gt CC Link Device Reference Window Master Local Start 10 No C Slave Station List Link Device List I Display Detailed Configuration Informati Display Option CSV File Output Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Host STA Target STA Target STA Target STA Target STA El pees sras eni Explanation STAR pel Explanation ee Explanation sras dei 2 Explanation RXO CHI AD conversion comp RYO Rwro CH1 digital output val RWw AD conv enable prohibit RX1 CH2 AD conversion comp RYL Wed CH2 digital output val RWwO O AD conv enable prohibit CH1 RXZ CHS AD conversion comp RYZ Rwr2 CH3 digital output val RWwO 1 AD conv enable prohibit CH2 RX3 CH4 AD conversion comp RY3 RWr3 CH4 digital output val RWwO 2 AD conv enable prohibit CH3 x4 CHS AD conversion comp IRYA RW CHS digital output val RWwO 3 AD conv enable prohibit CH4 RXS CH6 AD conversion comp RYS RWr5 CHE digital output val RWwO 4 AD conv enable prohibit CHS RX6 CH7 AD conversion comp RY6 RWIG CH digital output val RWwO 5 AD conv enable prohibit CH6 1 Je CHS AD conversion comp 1 RYZ Rwr7 CH8 digital output val 1 RWww0 6 AD conv enable prohibit CH7 gt RYe Rwre E
390. ne SW0117 7174 Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 8 SW0118 7184 SW0119 7194 Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 9 Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information target 10 The execution progress of the initialization procedure registration is stored Upper bit Next execution procedure number Upon completion FFy is stored Lower bit Target station number 358 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution SWO011A T1A4 individual information target 11 Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution SWO11B 7184 individual information target 12 Remote device station initialization The execution progress of the initialization procedure registration is stored SWO 1C procedure l l f i 71Cy registration Upper bit Next execution procedure number Upon completion FFy is O x x B execution stored individual Lower bit Target station number 8 8 information Dum target 13 E E ww Remote device Ne station ER xo initialization CE 9 SWO11
391. ng can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Use CC Link dedicated cables for a CC Link system If not the performance of the CC Link system is not guaranteed For the maximum station to station distance and the overall cable distance follow the specifications in Page 29 Section 3 2 2 to Page 30 Section 3 2 3 If not normal data transmission is not guaranteed Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the cable by the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal screw Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable
392. ng switches or transmission speed mode ON setting switch of the master local module Two or more master stations are connected on the same line Settings are incorrect A cable is disconnected Or a transmission path is affected by noise 1 A data link faulty station was detected Flashing ce Or the station number set for a remote station is already in use OFF Operating normally L ERR LED Indicates the error status of a data link ON A data link error has occurred at the host station Flashing at N regular The settings of the switches 2 and 3 were changed when the power was on Note that the change of the u j 9 Switch may not be detected at the time of error on all the stations intervals Flashing at The communications are unstable due to the following reasons irregular A terminating resistor is not connected intervals The communications are affected by noise OFF Operating normally 2 22 Station number setting switch Sets the station number of the master local module Default 0 Set the station numbers not used for other stations Setting range Master station 0 Local station 1 to 64 Standby master station 1 to 64 If a number other than 0 to 64 is set the ERR LED turns on CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES No Name Application Sets the transmission speed and mode of the master local module Default 0 Set the same value of the transmission speed for all stations
393. nication specifications for a T branch connection G P RITO 2 ee eee nn 200 rem APR 81 G PXRIWT sisse n n n ness 180 Conditions of use for the product 5 G P RLPASET 2 020 n nnn 204 Configuration of the system where a master local module General specifications llle 24 is TioUntedr aso adde cra A agis 69 GX Developer 1 1 eee ee eee eee 396 Connectable modules 00000 sss 69 Connection cable 0 eee ees 25 Countermeasure against an incorrect input 74 Creating a check sheet 45 315 Cyclic data assurance llle 150 Cyclic tansmission 13 126 413 H W LED Information 00005 320 H W SW Information 20005 320 Handling precautions llle 76 Hardware information 00 319 Hardware test dues ERR 321 High Performance model QCPU 13 Host data link status Xn1 00 323 How to check error codes lusus 288 How to perform the initial process only in a specified icu C as 154 How to set the station number 84 How to set the transmission speed 86 Installation llle 76 Installing the module sssssssss 76 Intelligent Buffer Select Word 107 Intelligent Buffer Size word LL 105 Intelligent device station 13 Intelligent function module
394. not be used for the instruction is contained When the number of data used for the instruction is set beyond the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range 194 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 5 1 Program example This section shows an example of the program to write 1 word data from D10 in the master station to the buffer memory address 111 in the AJ65BT R2 N station number 63 when M6 is turned on in the following system configuration Assume that the I O number of the master station is X YOO to X Y1F Assume that SWO is set to the refresh device of the link special register SW M11 is the G P RISEND instruction executing flag Assume that the settings of the interlock signal storage device are Request device RY4 Completion device RX4 Error code storage device RWr1 and Completion mode 1 Master station AJ65BT R2 N CPU module Station No 0 Station No 63 RISEND request source Host station RISEND request target Target station M6 M11 SW83 E FM tk 4 _ A a ov Fk D1 MOV H4 D2 Control data setting MOV H111 D3 MOV KI D4 MOV H4 D5 MOV H104 D6 Interlock signal storage device setting tp tov HA D7 r Sets data to be written to EMOY Kn Di9 intelligent device station JSGPRISEND UO DO D10 D5 M40 Dedicated instructio
395. not can be selected 7 gt Page 162 Section 8 3 5 Asynchronous A link scan does not synchronize with a sequence scan Input transmission delay time is shortened Synchronous A link scan synchronizes with a sequence scan The sequence scan and link scan start simultaneously Output transmission delay time is shortened Because of the synchronization extended sequence scan time increases link scan time Set 0 Stop Continue Default Stop Asynchronous Synchronous Default Asynchronous Station Information Setting Set information about a slave station connected to the master station 5 Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 Remote Device Station Initial Setting Set the procedure for the initial settings when registering the initial settings of a remote device station using a programming tool Page 108 Section 7 3 2 3 Interrupt Settings Set the conditions used to issue a request for the interrupt to a CPU module 5 Page 112 Section 7 3 2 4 4 The operations when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP vary depending on whether Y or the devices other than Y is set to Remote Output RY gt Page 134 Section 8 2 4 101 sjieyep Dbumes Z 7 uonejs 19 Se e 10 sBumes JejeureJegd EZ 1 Operation Setting Project window Parameter gt Network Parameter lt gt CC Link gt Operation Setting button Operation Setting Module 1 Parameter
396. nsient transient requests are completed O O change error E request or before the request is issued Increase the monitoring time A response is not received from value B404 Response error the request destination station If the error persists check the O O within the monitoring time modules and cables at the destination A transient request was issued to Set a local station or an intelligent a remote I O station or a remote device station as the target device station B405 Transient request error station Or wait for a while and O O Or too many transient requests send the request again overload were sent to the corresponding due to many transient requests station B407 Please consult your local O System error PAN O B409 Mitsubishi representative x The receive buffer size of the Receive buffer size mu B410 Sitor dedicated instruction is smaller Change the receive buffer size O O than the response data size The number of read write points Data length outside the in the control data of the Change the number of points B411 AE ds O O range dedicated instruction is outside within the range the range The station number stored in the a Station number outside Change the station number within B412 control data of the dedicated O O the range HEN the range instruction is outside the range Multiple dedicated instructions B413 Request error were executed to the same M
397. nstruction SBOOOD is off A remote Change the registration procedure registration Check Remote device device station DRE mec completed station initialization does not ue i i D5 1 Initial setting procedure registration become ready instruction result SW005F RXn1B Is the initial setting for the o remains off Check the parameter Correctly configure the initial remote device station correct Check the program setting for the station Has the initial setting been enabled Check if Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD has been turned on using a program Turn on Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD and check that the initial setting is enabled 284 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Problems due to cyclic data error in an intelligent device station local station Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Set the devices so that they Has the auto refresh been Check if no device overlaps f f do not overlap with ones correctly set RX RY RWw with ones used in programs used in programs and in RWr SB and SW or in other networks other networks Access the correct buffer Check if no device in the memory area in the master master station overlaps with station E14 Refresh data ones used in programs or in Set the devices so that
398. nt sheet 0 000 cee eee ee eens 402 Appendix 8 2 Network parameter setting sheet 0 0 ee eee 404 Appendix 8 3 Station information setting sheet 6 eee 406 Appendix 9 Checking the Function Version and Serial Number 00000 cee esses 408 Appendix 10 CC Eink Versions eV eLehtug x eL ac a ewe ed a GU 410 Appendix 11 External Dimension Diagram slssesee nen enn eens 411 INDEX 413 REVISIONS ees tamea EE xU A Ip KA eer de M UL EUMD UP UE MC 417 WARRANTY 2 cinznacnuimg ew kh Rcs eek ee eque ERE oy aoa ET alee Roe ALONE ace EXE RUE 419 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation HAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTIN 7 3 Parameter Settings for a Master Station This chapter describes the parameter settings when a master local module is used as a master station is used for window names and items 7 3 1 Setting met od The chapter of 1 shows operating the current page is shown procedures XC shows mouse operations is used for items in the menu bar and the project window 2 Check the checkbox next to Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window at the top of the window for GX Works2 only S Input settings to the Network Parameter window Item Desc
399. ntelligent function module device Un GD Reading writing data using the FROM TO instructions 2 Precautions when configuring the number of remote I O station points Set the number of points greater than the I O points of a remote I O station connected If the smaller number of points is set in a station data cannot be normally input to or output from stations after that 170 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 10 Master station duplication error canceling function Even if a master station duplication error has been detected the error can be cleared without resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system Point Before using this function check the version of the master local module s Page 395 Appendix 6 2 1 How to cancel the error 1 Remove the cause of a master station duplication error Another master station may exist on the same line or the line may be being influenced by noise 2 Turn on Master station duplication error canceling request SB0007 2 Link special relays SBs and a link special register SW related to the master station duplication error canceling function Link special relays SBs and a link special register SW related to the master station duplication error canceling function are listed below Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses and bit numbers Master station duplication error canceling request SB0007 5EO b7 Master station duplication error canceling a
400. ntrol data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by Stores the status when the instruction is complete 1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Value other than 0 Error code S1 1 Station number Specify the station number of the remote device station 1 to 64 1 to 255 1 2 Send data size Specify a send data size in bytes gt Page 221 Section 9 9 2 a User 0 to 255 Specify the maximum size of the device that stores received data in S1 3 Receivable data size ind Du lt i n 5 Page 222 bytes Section 9 9 2 b 0 to 255 1 4 Receive data size The size of received data in bytes is stored L gt Page 222 System Section 9 9 2 b a Send data size Programmable controller CPU Master station Remote device station Device Size TRA specified Y Request in S1 2 a L SSINGH d o 6 6 When the send data size S1 2 is an odd number of bytes the low byte of the last data is sent as the last byte Programmable controller CPU Master station Remote device station Device memory Request The low byte of the last data is sent 221 222 b Receivable data size and receive data size Set a receivable data size S1 3 so that it will satisfy the following conditional expression Receivable data size S1 3 Receive data size S1 4 Programmable controller CPU Master station Remote device
401. number of eight point remote I O stations set 8 Points 8 Points Reserved to the last of consecutive remote I O stations Ex When three output modules with eight points are connected Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote O station Station No 1 the Station No 2 the Station No 3 the Station No 4 the number of occupied number of occupied number of occupied number of occupied Master station stations 1 stations 1 stations 1 stations 1 Yo07 to Yoo i Stati pon Reserved ahora number 4 8 point output module M UL V 4 L JMouue 4 8 points 8 points reserved When the number of remote I O stations is odd eight points cannot be set in the remote station points Remote O station Remote I O station Remote O station Remote I O station Station No 1 the Station No 2 the Station No 3 the Station No 4 the number of occupied number of occupied number of occupied number of occupied Master station stations 1 stations 1 Stations 1 stations 1 H Yo to Yoo i i module Cannot be set The parameter cannot be set using dedicated instructions Therefore read or write data from to the device in a CPU module according to the number of I O points of each station using a program Consequently the areas in refresh devices can be saved e Reading writing data using an i
402. o error master station only was tried to master station be performed on a local station Specify a temporary error invalid A temporary error invalid station ME Temporary error invalid Mi i station while data link is being UK was specified while data link was B30F station specification performed with parameters set O x being performed upon automatic error using a programming tool or CC Link startup j dedicated instructions Execute Data link restart Data link restart SB0000 was SB0000 to the station where B310 Data link restart error executed to the station that was O O data link has been stopped using performing data link Data link stop SB0002 Data link stop SB0002 was Execute Data link stop SB0002 B311 Data link stop error executed to the station where O O to the station performing data link data link had been stopped Forced master switching Start the data link of the standby SB000C was executed in a Standby master station master station then execute B312 system where no standby master n O x absence error Forced master switching station existed or the standby SB000C master station was down Forced master switching Start the data link of the standby SB000C was executed in a master station then execute B313 Error in all stations MP O x system where all stations were Forced master switching faulty SB000C Forced master switching
403. occurred 25 Whether the data link restart instruction has been E 8 SB0040 Data link restart accepted is stored o o D 5E44 b0 acceptance OFF Not accepted 2 E ON Accepted I o o 0 Whether the data link restart instruction has been D o SB0041 Data link restart completed is stored o O E x 5E4u b1 complete OFF Not completed ON Started x o Refresh instruction Whether the refresh instruction at standby master m SB0042 acknowledgement Switching has been accepted is stored o E x 5 5E4u b2 status at standby OFF Not executed a master switching ON Accepted Refresh instruction Whether the refresh instruction at standby master a SB0043 complete status at switching has been completed is stored O g 5E4u 63 standby master OFF Not executed ew switching ON Switched Whether the data link stop instruction has been accepted SB0044 Data link stop is stored o o J 5E4 b4 acceptance OFF Not accepted ON Accepted 341 Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Whether the data link stop instruction has been completed SB0045 Data link stop is stored 5E44 b5 complete OFF Not completed O O ON Stopped Whether Forced master switching SB000C can be O Forced master SB0046 MR executed is stored Standby Switching executable x x 5E4y b6 EM OFF Cannot be executed master u ON
404. ocess for the remote output RY Upon completion of the process for the remote output RY the station specified by S1 1 turns on the remote input RX specified by S3 1 and the remote output RY specified by S3 0 is turned off Also the response indicating write completion to the master station is returned The device specified by D turns on b Simultaneous execution of the G P RISEND instruction The G P RISEND instruction can be simultaneously executed to multiple intelligent device stations But concurrent execution of the instruction is not allowed to the same station including other dedicated instructions If the dedicated instruction is executed before the completion of the former dedicated instruction the latter instruction is ignored Because several scans are required to complete the process of the dedicated instruction create a program so that the next dedicated instruction is executed after Completion device D turns on 193 auasim d o 6 c Check of the completion status There are two types of interlock signals for the G P RISEND instruction Completion device D and Status display device at completion D 1 Completion device Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RISEND instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P RISEND instruction Norma
405. odify the program O O station The value set to the interlock B414 Interlock signal data signal storage device of the Set the device value within the o 7 outside the range G P RIRCV or G P RISEND range instruction is outside the range The RLPASET instruction was Execution station type Check if the host station type is a B415 tried to be executed on a station x O error master station other than the master station Please consult your local B416 to B418 System error Ee aad O x Mitsubishi representative 299 IS 9poo JOU Z LL S9po2 JOU Delectability Error code Sx A i Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station An unsupported request was Check the request data and the B601 Request type error i O O received target station number Too many transient requests Transient request j Wait for a while and send the B602 and B603 were sent to the corresponding O O overload error request again station Transient transmission was Wait for a while and send the B604 Line test in progress O x performed during a line test request again Transient storage f The transient storage buffer data Wait for a while and send the B605 buffer data failed to be O O was failed to be obtained request again obtained Please consult your local B606 Sy
406. odule Embedded 1 0 Adapter E a ie wi STARO Master a Dip beat aT Block an tandby Master Station No E Output Module Screw 2 piece Termii PLC Down Select Stop E eee ES 8 Output Module Screw 2 biece Terminal Y Total STARS Scan Mode Setting synchronous z ki AJGSSBTB3 AIGSSBTB2 AJESVBTCU Delay Time Setting 0 0 NaS GEDAVN Station Information Setting CC Link Configuration Setting amp i j i Remote Device Station Initial Setting Initial 2 Interrupt Settinas Interrupt Settinas output 4 1 This item is automatically set by the CC Link configuration window Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Setting Item Details Please input the start I O No where the CC Linkis connected in 16 point unit Print Window Print Window nene d Clear Check End Cancel Parameters of a master station can be also set using a program gt Page 204 Section 9 8 When parameters are set using a program parameter settings of the master station can be changed without resetting the CPU module 18 CHAPTER 1 FEATURES b Diagnostics using a programming tool The status of a CC Link system can be checked using a programming tool Error locations and error causes are displayed in a programming tool enabling the user to quickly troubleshoot the problem gt Page 308 Section 11 4 CC Link Diagnostics Start Monitor Stop Monitor 1 4 Intell ST
407. odules the number of CC Link IE Field Network master local modules the number of MELSECNET H modules x 3 4 Precautions a When a system is changed during data link upon automatic CC Link startup When changing a system such as a module replacement during data link execute a line test in all the stations If a station with a start station number used by another station returns a station where data link is already being performed only a station with a station number used may also go down b Use of a temporary error invalid station When the automatic CC Link startup is executed a temporary error invalid station cannot be used c When using a Basic model QCPU In a Basic model QCPU the automatic refresh is performed only in stations with station numbers 1 to 32 The automatic refresh is not performed in stations with a station number 33 or later Read or write data from to those stations using an intelligent function module device Un GO or FROM TO instructions 160 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 4 Reserved station function Slaved stations that are not actually connected but will be connected in future are not detected as Data Link Faulty Station in the master station and local station By setting slave stations that will be connected in future as reserved stations slave stations can be added without a program change because the RX RY RWr RWw assignment is not changed In addition the number of points of a slave station that
408. odules ni Total number of occupied stations ST Constant 250 ni x 10 RT Retry processing time Only the link scan with a faulty slave station where data link is being performed is added a B x number of detected faulty stations 1 o Retry processing time of the first station BT x 778 5 R x 3 R 13 2 NI x 4 8 B Retry processing time of the second and subsequent stations BT x 778 5 P x 3 P 10 8 F Return processing time added only when there is a faulty station BT x 243 1 ST euin ueos qur jp xipueddy aul BuisseooJg yU ejeq p xipueddy 365 Ex When the transmission speed is 10Mbps in the following system configuration It is assumed that there is no faulty station and retry in this example Master station Station number 1 1 Station number 2 1 Station number 3 1 Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote l O station E TE R mmm 5 EENUOUMSNNEDER LM 5 E g D i OOOO OOOCOOOOOCO OOOO OOOOOOOCOO OOOO OOOOOOOOCO ogo OOOOOOOOO ooog OOOOOOOOO 2OOOC OOOOOOOOO 1 The number of occupied stations 1 BT 0 8 ST 250 ni x 10 NI 38 250 3 x 10 N 3 280 ni 3 nw 10 LS 0 8 27 8 x 4 8 3 x 30 3 x 4 8 280 415 84us 0 42ms 366 Appendix 4 2 Transmission delay time This section describes transmission delay time tim
409. of a master local module The cables need not be connected in the order of station number The star topology cannot be used Note however that the T branch connection can be used lt _ gt Page 80 Section 6 2 3 78 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2 Terminal block of the master local module a Solderless terminal Use a solderless terminal and wire specified in the following table Tighten a solderless terminal within the specified torque range Use a UL listed solderless terminal and a tool recommended by the manufacturer of the solderless terminal for processing Solderless terminals with sleeves cannot be used Solderless terminal Wire Model 3 E Temperature Tightening torque range Diameter Type Material name rating 1 25 3 0 42 to 0 58Nem 22 to 16AWG Stranded Copper 60 C or higher b Screws and tightening torque The table below lists the screws of the terminal block and the tightening torque Screw type Tightening torque range 0 42 to 0 58N m 0 66 to 0 89N m Terminal block screw M3 screw Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 screw 3 Wiring check Connect the master station with the slave station Check whether the slave station is turned on and off by turning on and off the device of the master station 7 gt Page 58 Section 4 1 BuulM 29 eunpeooJd BuutlM zZ Z 9 79 6 2 3 T branch connection This section describes how to connect
410. of a term PLC was changed to programmable controller Addition Section 7 9 Appendix 2 9 Partial correction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 2 2 1 Section 4 3 6 Section 4 4 3 Section 5 4 1 Section 7 2 1 Section 7 4 Section 7 7 2 Section 8 1 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Section 9 1 2 Section 13 2 Section 13 3 Section 13 4 Appendix 2 Appendix 2 1 to 2 7 Appendix 6 Appendix 7 Jan 2009 SH NA 080394E J Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 3 Section 2 2 4 Section 3 1 Section 5 3 1 to 5 3 3 Section 5 4 1 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 7 2 1 Section 7 3 to 7 6 Section 7 8 Section 7 9 Section 8 2 2 Section 13 3 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 2 5 Appendix 6 Aug 2009 SH NA 080394E K Addition Section 13 3 1 Partial correction Section 2 2 1 2 2 3 5 2 3 8 4 2 11 4 4 13 3 2 Appendix 7 Nov 2010 SH NA 080394E L Addition Section 4 4 15 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 4 Section 4 1 Section 4 4 1 Section 4 4 2 Section 4 4 3 Section 4 4 15 Section 5 1 Section 5 4 1 Section 6 3 2 Section 6 4 2 Section 6 7 Section 7 3 Section 7 5 Section 8 4 1 Section 10 2 5 Section 10 1 3 Sec
411. of dedicated instruction 3 MI Perform process for abnormal Process upon abnormal end of o Vt end dedicated instruction RST M12 Set G P RIRD instruction executing flag to OFF 179 9 3 G P RIWT The G P RIWT instruction writes the specified points of data to the buffer memory areas of the target station or the device in the CPU module of the target station Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RIWT GP RIWT d I 4 Command GRIWT Un st 82 D GP RIWT Un S1 S2 D Applicable device Link direct Intelligent Setting Internal device i d File device function module Index Constant data System user Others register JO O device register ZO s UO GO Bit Word Bit Word K H S S1 O S2 Oo D O 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Start I O number of the module First two digits of I O number written NE Un a 0 to FE 16 bit binary with three digits Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored e specified device Device name i Within the range of the S2 Start number of the device to which data to be written is stored specified device D D 1 also turns on at an abnormal end Device that turns on f
412. of devices by assigning zero points to RWr and RWw in a remote l O station gt Page 47 Section 3 6 4 3 Mount the master local module on a base unit L s Page 76 Section 6 1 ejduex3 uonejedQo p 61 4 Connect a CC Link dedicated cable to each module Connect terminating resistors to the modules at both ends 7 7 Page 77 Section 6 2 Wiring diagram Master station AJ65BTB2 16T AJ65BTB1 16DT Blue Blue N Terminating i DA white TE D Terminating resistor 1 DB em m 7 X X resistor 1 1109 1 2W DG Borea IECIT S A 1102 1 2W SD i CC Link dedicated cable Terminating resistor 1102 1 2W Terminating resistor 1 7 z 5 7 s 1109 1 2W 1 When a Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable or CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible is used connect 1109 1 2W Brown Brown Brown terminating resistors When a CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 00 compatible is used connect 1309 1 2W Brown Orange Brown terminating resistors After connecting the terminating resistors check the following If the modules are properly connected Voltage of the input power supply f the switch on the CPU module is set at STOP If the switch on the CPU module is n
413. of devices where data from a master station station operating as a master station to a standby master station station operating as a standby master station are backed up using a program vary depending on the system CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS h If an error is detected in the master station in the initial status before data link is started The operation is not switched from the standby master station to the master station and data link is not started This applies only to the master station switching function and master station duplex function i Data link start function using a standby master station Parameters and program set in the master station and standby master station Set the same parameters and program in the master station and standby master station If not the operation is not guaranteed Line test When the data link start function by a standby master station is used a line test cannot be executed using the switch on the master local module Use a programming tool to execute a line test L Page 87 Section 6 5 1 1 6 Link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs related to the standby master function Link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs related to the standby master function are listed below a Link special relays SBs Link special relays SBs related to the standby master function are listed below Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses and bit numbers e Refre
414. on SB000D b Signals that are required to be always on even after the initial process is completed Turning off Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD after the initial process is completed turns off all the remote output RY s that turned on during the initial procedure registration For signals that are required to be always on such as a conversion enable signal turn them on using a program c When a faulty station exists in the station to which the initial settings are to be executed Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5F does not turn on unless the execution is completed to all the stations that are registered in the remote device station initial setting of a programming tool If a faulty station exists create the program so that Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is turned off depending on the completion status of other stations 4 A program when the module is connected to a Redundant CPU For precautions for programming and a program example refer to the manual for the Redundant CPU used I QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System BuituuueJBoJg 10 suonne eJd LOL 229 5 For the configuration where a remote I O station is connected in the remote net Ver 2 mode Different from the remote net Ver 1 mode RWr RWw slide over by the number of points of remote I O stations in a master stat
415. on do not obtain the transmission speed setting using GX Works 2 and the check sheet creating wizard at the same time After the transmission speed test is completed the transmission speed of each station is displayed on the right side of the window 91 1S9 peeds uoissiusueJ Z 9 Buu Joy 1S8 9 2 Using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs A transmission speed test is performed in the master station 1 Before the transmission speed test check the following If the switch on the CPU module is set at STOP If the switch on the CPU module is not set at RESET f all the stations are connected with CC Link dedicated cables Universal model High Performance model RESET RUN STOP RUN CO CD STOP 3 Set the transmission speed mode setting switch on the master station from 0 to 4 When setting the switch from 0 to 4 set the same transmission speed as that of during system operation L gt Page 21 CHAPTER 2 QU61BT11N RUN LRUN MST SMST sD ERR LERR STATION 4 Reset the CPU module or power off and on the system 5 Turn on Data link stop SB0002 to stop data link 6 Turn on Transmission speed test request SB000B to start a transmission speed test When the transmission speed test is started Transmission speed test accept status SB0185 turns on The transmission speed test is completed in about 10 seconds 7 When the transmission speed test i
416. on may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative During execution of message on Check the operation of the target transmission a data link error remote device station Message transmission Occurred on the station handshake failure During execution of message f I Stop the data link and then transmission some parameters change parameters were changed BC51 Check the program to see if any Oo x With the message transmission function abnormal data were received prohibited remote output RY has not been accessed If the same error persists after checking the above the master module or remote device station may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 304 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code 3 c Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station mE Increase the value for Monitoring In the message transmission SN time setting SW0009 function a communication i If the error occurs again check Message transmission timeout has occurred BC52 and BC53 the target module and cables O x handshake timeout Data link stop SB0002 was Stop data link after completion of executed during the message bet rae message transmission transmission Execute the message transmission function again With the message transmission If t
417. on 11 1 2 To check error details a programming tool is required ve A The numbers above correspond to those listed in the Check item column in Section 11 2 1 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station Take corrective action with reference to the corresponding item 267 sq31 buisn Bunoousejqnod Lb LL Ssueuowo J Buroouse qnoJ LLL 268 1 Troubleshooting when the RUN LED on the master station is off No s power being supplied to the power supply module y Supply power to the power supply module Yes Is the LED on the power supply module on The hardware of the power supply module is faulty Replace the hardware The overcurrent protection circuit has been activated Check the current consumption of the mounted modules Yes Is the CPU module being reset Yes y Cancel the reset operation No Are the modules properly mounted No yx Remove the modules and mount them again Yes Troubleshoot the problem with reference to Troubleshooting common to modules Page 269 Section 11 1 1 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Troubleshooting common to modules Perform the hardware test C Page 321 Section 11 5 Was the hardware test performed No No Is the hardware test completed normally Replace the target module If
418. on C or earlier AJ61QBT11 Hardware version C or earlier A1SJ61BT11 Hardware version D or earlier A1SJ61QBT11 Hardware version D or earlier 110Q x596 1 2W x 4 pieces Connection between DA and DG and between DB and DG at both ends Terminating resistor model name Ex ERDS1TJ111 Manufactured by Panasonic Corporation The 1109 and 130 terminating resistors that are included with the master local module cannot be used 80 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2 Communication specifications for a T branch connection The following table lists the communication specifications upon T branch connection For those not listed below refer to the performance specifications _ 7 Page 24 Section 3 2 Item Specifications Remark Transmission speed 625kbps 156kbps 10M 5M and 2 5Mbps cannot be used i A cable length between terminating resistors Maximum length of the main ims 100m 500m The length branch line length of a T branch cable is i not included Maximum length of the branch ine 8m A total cable length for each branch i Overall branch line length 50m 200m A total length of all branch cables Maximum number of connected modules on the branch line 6 modules per branch The total number of connected modules depends on the CC Link specifications Connection cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compati
419. on Remote device station Intelligent device station Remote I O station e EE ptem rint Poor R ears o oono g p 000 S Mite 5 O i EE 9 0000 O00000000q OOOOOOOOCO 1 The number of 2 The number of 8 The number of occupied stations 1 occupied stations 2 occupied stations 4 expanded cyclic expanded cyclic setting Quadruple setting Single BT 0 8 ST 2300 EX 50 110 x 1 160 NI 12 5 16 1 800 12 x 15 980 NW 11 316 2 900 3 x 50 1050 N 5 3 1200 11 x 100 2300 ni 12 A 12 B 3 C 11 nw 10 LS 0 8 27 16 x 4 8 16 x 9 6 5 x 30 12 x 4 8 10 x 9 6 2300 160 2908 8us 2 91ms APPENDICES 2 In the remote I O net mode LS BT 27 NI x 4 8 N x 30 ni x 4 8 ST RT F us BT Constant transmission speed Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BT 51 2 12 8 3 2 1 6 0 8 NI Last station number The value should be multiples of 8 A Last i 1to8 9 to 16 17 to 24 25to 32 33to40 41to48 49to56 57 to 64 station No NI 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 N Number of connected m
420. on of a slave station 1 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station when a CC Link system is newly configured or the existing CC Link system is changed Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Are the transmission speed values set within the range t Transmission Check the transmission A1 2 and same between the Correct the value speed speed values of all stations master station and slave stations Is the online mode set to the Check the mode of the i A1 3 Mode f i Set the online mode master station master station Check the network parameters of the CPU Are the network module on the master parameters for CC Link station using the such as the number of programming tool stations and station Check Host station number Correct the network information correctly set SW0061 and Mode setting parameter Does the master station status SW0060 Format the CPU module have no error Check SW0068 SW0069 memory then write the Parameter i A1 4 Are the network SWO0070 SW0071 network parameters setting parameters for a network Swo0072 SW0074 to Data link other than CC Link SW0077 SW0098 to cannot be 2 correctly set SWO009B SWOO9C to performed in SWO009F and SW0144 to the entire SWO0147 system Disable the intelligent Check if values are not set in f Are the settings correct function module switch the intelligent function Auto
421. on sending data to the station No 1 Range of the master station sending data to the station No 2 Range of the master station sending data to the station No 3 Station No 1 Station No 3 Range of the master Range of sasusuduuuud the station No 1 a Range of the station aumrnsnsudunas Station No 1 Range of the station No 1 sending data RWw Station No 1 Station No 2 RX Ver 2 compatible Station No 1 Station No 2 Station RY Station No 1 Station No 2 D No 3 area Range of the l station No 3 IT sending data RWr Station No 1 Station No 3 Station No 1 powu Z JeA jeu BJOWBY y 9 E s po pue j1uauuuBissy 9 Range of the station No 3 sending data station sending data to the station No 1 2 Range of the master station sending data to the station No 3 wee wwe we ee ee ee we ee ee ee ew ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ew ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee eX Area where data is sent to other stations gt Data sent from the master station gt Data sent from slave stations 1 The last two bits in RX and RY cannot be used for communications between a master station and a local station 2 In the master station and a local station 0 points are assigned to RWr and RWw in a remote I O station Buffer memory areas move over Note that buffer memory areas for RWr and RWw i
422. onitor Link 1 ST Intel ST Return to the original Display All jon Selected Station Error Information us Twist Single Bus Max 2ms Min 2ms Current 2m Legend Close Stop Data Link E Create Check Sheet Double click the icon The test result appears MELSOFT Application X Temporary error invalid station L Looptest completed SERE Result of Loop Test int executed Bernal iere Obtained Transmission Speed Setting bps ited 156K 625K Osm um Open the CC Link diagnostics window ona programming tool XX Diagnostics z CC Link Diagnostics Double click Loop Test on the bottom left corner of the window If Loop Test is not displayed click the Related Functions button on the bottom left corner of the window Select Loop Test under Test Type Select the slave station where the line test is executed under Test Target Selecting All stations Station 1 64 executes a test on all the connected stations Selecting Specified station executes a test on a specified station Set the start station number when the number of occupied stations is two or more Clicking the button executes the line test Do not write data to the buffer memory areas buffer memory addresses 5E0 and 608p durin
423. ook dimly lit or off depending on the communication status Point Ifthe operation above does not turn on the output Y of the slave station or the input X of the master station check the RX RY RWr and RWw assignment of the module using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 Before turning on or off the output using a device test ensure the safety of the external device Failure to do so may break the external device or cause an accident 16 when the connection status is normal create a control program 7 Page 227 CHAPTER 10 Write the program to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system ejduex3 uonejedo p 67 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 1 CC Link System Configuration A CC Link system is configured with a master station remote I O station remote device station intelligent device station and local station Master station Remote I O station Ero Terminating resistor Local station Terminating resistor m The CC Link version and the number of slave stations that can be connected vary depending on the mode of the master local module lt s Page 27 Section 3 2 1 Page 43 Section 3 6 2 Master local modules of other series can be also used in a CC Link system 68 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 2 Configuration of the System Where a Master Local Module is Mounted This section describes the MELSEC Q series system
424. or one scan upon completion of writing Within the range of the specified device Bit 180 1 The local device and the file register of each program cannot be used as a device for setting data a Control data CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS i Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range Stores the status when the instruction is complete S1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Value other than 0 Error code T Specify the station numbers of the master station local station and 81 1 Station number i 0 to 64 User intelligent device station Specify the type of the device to be accessed or the type of the Access code buffer memory Refer to 81 2 User Attribute code b15 to b8 b7 to bO b and C 81 3 Buffer memory address Specify the start address of the buffer memory or the start number 4 jane or device number of the device ee l 1 to 480 S1 4 Number of write points Specify the number of write data in word units 5 User 1to 10 4 For details refer to the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station to which data are written When specifying the random access buffer specify the start address of the random access buffer as 0 2 The value indicates the maximum number of write data Specify the value within the buffer memory capacity of the local station or the intelligent device station or within the se
425. ot set at RESET Point Use terminating resistors supplied with the modules 62 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION 5 Set the station number and transmission speed using the switches on the master local module C gt Page 21 CHAPTER 2 The transmission speed should be 156kbps Station No 0 Transmission speed 156kbps Online 6 Set the station number and transmission speed using the switches on the AJ65BTB2 16T and AJ65BTB1 16DT ee ee ee ee ee eee AJ65BTB2 16T Transmission speed 156kbps e m m m mm m m m m om m m m uem 7 d X1 B 9 1 gt 2 gt Station No 1 9 0 3 S 54 J y g EXER NEED URN TEES KI iR N y 3 o AJ65BTB1 16DT d Transmission speed 156kbps Pi x1 5 gt Station No 2 3 4 eA Point Set the station numbers not used for other modules Pay extra attention when a module with the number of occupied stations of two or more is connected lt 5 Page 83 Section 6 3 Set the same transmission speed on all the connected modules 7 gt Page 86 Section 6 4 63 7 Power on the system 8 Set the parameters on the master station using a programming tool Create a proj
426. ote I O station depending on the functions of the master local module used Check the version of the MELSECNET H remote I O station in the appendix of this manual Page 393 Appendix 6 0 Insufficient power capacity may be caused depending on other connected modules and the number of connected modules Before connecting modules check the power capacity If the power capacity is insufficient change the combination of modules connected 3 Using a multiple CPU system Before using a master local module in a multiple CPU system refer to the following Manual for the CPU module used multiple CPU system a Master local modules supporting a multiple CPU system Master local modules from the first release to the function version B support a multiple CPU system b Parameter of a master local module network parameter Set the network parameter in the control CPU of the master local module s npow e qej2euuoo jo Jequinu eui pue sejnpoul ejqejeuuoS L Z G pejunoy s ejnpojg e201 Je1se N 9JeuM ueis S 94 jo uoneunBijuo z s 71 5 2 2 Applicable programming tools 72 The following two programming tools support a master local module GX Works2 GX Developer The version of a programming tool that can be used varies depending on the CPU module used For the applicable versions refer to the following User s manual for the CPU module used hardware design maintenance and inspection Some restrictions apply
427. other than a remote I O Invalid station type in aM f Set all stations as a remote I O B3A2 station is set in the station type O x remote I O net mode station parameter using a dedicated instruction In the remote net Ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode the total number of remote station f Change the number of remote B3A3 Assignment error points set in the station O x i i station points information parameter has exceeded 8192 the maximum number of points 298 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code Se Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station While the standby master station was operating as a master station by the master station Undo the network parameter B3A4 Parameter mismatch O A duplex function the network setting of the master station parameter setting of the faulty master station was changed The mode set in the control data of the G P RLPASET instruction Invalid mode f Correct the control data or the B3A5 differs from that set using the O x parameter p switch 3 setting switch 3 of the intelligent function module switch setting Please consult your local B3F1 to B3F3 System error EN O x Mitsubishi representative The parameter setting was Change the parameter after all Parameter setting B401 changed during tra
428. patible remote device station Ver 1 compatible remote device station SW0145 7454 CC Link ver Ver 1 compatible remote device station Ver 2 compatible remote device station installation para O swo14eg Teter matching b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 bi bO aep oo SW0144 SW0145 SW0147 SW0146 7471 SW0147 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations Reserved stations station with the last station number and stations later than that are excepted The mode set to a system is stored SWO0148 Parameter 0 Remote net Ver 1 mode o o 7484 mode 1 Remote net additional mode 2 Remote net Ver 2 mode The mode set to the host station is stored SWO0149 Host parameter 0 Remote net Ver 1 mode O o o 7494 mode 1 Remote net additional mode 2 Remote net Ver 2 mode 360 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station euntes Transmission The result of a transmission speed test is stored 783 speed test 0 Normal O O x result Values other than 0 Error code _ gt Page 291 Section 11 3 2 SWO0184 The result of the transmission speed test for each station is stored 7844 0 Normal same transmission speed as the master station or no response from the module SW0185 1 Error different transmission speed from the master station 7854 Transmission Speed test b15
429. ply and input external power supply Remote station Internal 5VDC Input Xn T er off the input external power supply turns off an input a uoneJn amp yuo uiejs s eui 10J suonneoeJld E S after the response time between the input module turning on and it turning off 73 b Countermeasure against an incorrect input Supply power to the power supply module stabilized power supply and AC input external power supply from the same power supply CPU Master module station Remote station Power supply module Module power supply Stabilized 24NDG power supply power supply CPU module Master station Remote station Module power supply Power supply module Stabilized power supply 24VDC or ESSE When supplying power to multiple remote stations from one power supply select applicable cables and properly wire them to prevent a voltage drop caused by the power supply When a remote station has a receiving end voltage within the specified range for the remote station used it can be connected Stabilized power supply Remote station Remote station 74 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 Access to a station with the station number 64 a Access from other stations using a programming tool and GOT Access to a local station with the station number 64 cannot be performed fro
430. point is rounded up k LS SL The decimal point is rounded up m Constant according to the extended cyclic setting Expanded Cyclic Setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple m 1 3 7 15 Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode N rmalvalie SM x n LS x 1 x m 1 SM x t x 2 SL x SM LS x 1 x m 1 SM x t x 2 SL x k 1 k 1 SL Max value OM M ILS x 2x m 1 SM x t x 3 SL x SM LS x 2 x m 1 SM x1 x3 SL x k 1 k 1 SL When master station sequence scan time is 20ms link scan time is 3ms the expanded cyclic setting is Double and local station sequence scan time is 10ms Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode 20 x 1 3 x 1x 3 1 Normal value 10 x 1 1 52ms 20 x 1 x 2 10x 20 3 x 1x 3 1 10 1 1 60ms 42ms euin ejep uoissiuisueJ zy xipueddy eui BuisseooJg yur ejeq p xipueddy 20 x 1 x 2 40ms 20 x 1 3 x 2x 3 1 Max value 10 x 1 1 61ms 20 x 1 x 3 10x 20 3 x 2x 3 1 10 1 1 80ms 51ms pope c 375
431. port the functions 1 Available functions of CPU modules O Can be used x Cannot be used QCPU QJ72LP25 25 excluding a Basic model QJ72LP25G Function Basic model QCPU QJ72LP25GE QCPU QJ72BR15 Communications with a remote I O station O O O Communications with a remote device station O O O Communications with a local station O O O Basic applications Communications with an intelligent device station O O Oo O O O Parameter settings using a programming tool O O O Parameter settings using dedicated instructions O O x Slave station cutoff function O O O Automatic return function O O O Setting of the data link status upon an error in the o o o programmable controller CPU of the master station Setting of a status input from a data link faulty er O O O Applications to station improve the system Setting whether to refresh or compulsorily clear a reliability slave station when the switch on a programmable O O O controller CPU is set to STOP Standby master function O O x Data link start function using a standby master O O H station Block data assurance per station Oo x x 393 e npo N E20 1 1e se N e jo SuOnOUNY eu Buipeu6d i 9 xipueddy QCPU QJ72LP25 25 excluding a Basic model QJ72LP25G Function Basic model QCPU QJ72LP25GE QCPU QJ72BR15 Remote device station initialization procedure
432. program Un GO or FROM TO instructions The points for each station can be checked using Slave station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 gt Page 332 Appendix 2 4 Buffer memory areas of the refresh sources gt Page 46 Section 3 6 3 2 Page 49 Section 3 6 4 3 Page 55 Section 3 6 6 3 When Remote Net Ver 1 Mode or Remote Net Additional Mode is set to Mode Data in Ver 1 compatible area are transferred to a CPU module When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode is set to Mode Data in Ver 2 compatible area are transferred to a CPU module 2 3 Overlaps with other devices Set the devices without overlaps with the following Refresh parameters of modules on the network 1 0 numbers used for I O modules and an intelligent function module Auto refresh settings of an intelligent function module Auto refresh using a multiple CPU shared memory To set X or Y to a refresh device Set a number later than the I O numbers used for I O modules and an intelligent function module Refresh timing Data are refreshed in the END process of a CPU module 4 5 Blank or the following range Device X M L B D W R or ZR M B D and W for a MELSECNET H remote I O station Device No Within the device range of the CPU module or MELSECNET H remote I O station Default Blank Blank or the following range Device Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR M B D and W
433. ramming tool Select QCPU Q mode under PLC Series Select Q20UDH under PLC Type Project gt New New Project Project Type Simple Project Cancel Use Label PLC Series ocru Q mode PLC Type Jo20UDH uoneis Jajsew e Jo sPumes z Z 0L ules 9ol e 9jouie e pue uonels Jejse y e ueeweg suoreoiunuiuio Jo ejdurex3 z OL Language Ladder m 241 242 2 Open the Network Parameter window to configure the setting as follows X Project window 2 gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link Number of Modules 1 z Boards Start I O No Operation Setting Type Blank No Setting Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected 1 Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB Special Register SW Retry Count Automatic Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No 1 PLC Down Select Stop Scan Mode Setting Delay Time Setting Asynchronous Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Interrupt Settinas Mode Setting ver 1 Mode TX Speed 156kbps Link Scan Time Approx
434. range setting W103 RWw3 Average processing specification W104 RWw4 CH 1 average time number of times setting W105 RWw5 CH 2 average time number of times setting AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN W106 RWw6 CH 3 average time number of times setting W107 RWw7 CH 4 average time number of times setting W108 RWw8 CH 5 average time number of times setting W109 RWw9 CH 6 average time number of times setting W10A RWwA CH 7 average time number of times setting W10B RWwB CH 8 average time number of times setting W10C RWwO CH 1 digital value setting W10D RWw1 CH 2 digital value setting W10E RWw2 CH 3 digital value setting W10F RWw3 CH 4 digital value setting W110 RWw4 CH 5 digital value setting W111 RWw5 CH 6 digital value setting AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W112 RWw6 CH 7 digital value setting W113 RWw7 CH 8 digital value setting W114 RWw8 Analog output enable disable setting W115 RWw9 CH 1 to 4 output range setting W116 RWwA CH 5 to 8 output range setting W117 RWwB HOLD CLEAR setting 240 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 10 2 2 Settings for a master station 1 Settings for a master local module Set the station number and transmission speed of the master local module 7 gt Page 21 CHAPTER 2 Station No 0 Transmission speed 156kbps Online 2 Parameter settings by using a programming tool Connect a CPU module to a programming tool to set the parameters of the master local module 7 Page 97 Section 7 3 1 Createa project on a prog
435. rd data from the offset value 100 of automatic update buffer in the master station 4004 in the intelligent device station to the area starting from DO when XO is turned on in the following system configuration Assume that the I O number of the master station is X Y40 to X Y5F Assume that SWO is set to the refresh device of the link special register SW RIFR request source Host station XO SW80 0 Master station AJ65BT R2 N CPU module Station No 0 Station No 1 1 Automatic to iupdate bufferi memory d eee Automatic update buffer Dedicated instruction execution GP RIFR U4 K1 H100 DO K10 LEND TE 199 jdwex weibold 9 6 W di d o 9 6 9 7 G P RITO The G P RITO instruction writes data to the automatic update buffer of the target station The instruction is available for modules that have the automatic update buffer e g AJ65BT R2 N Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G RITO G RITO Un n1 n2 D n3 Command GP RITO cprito Un n1 n2 D n3 Applicable device 4 Link direct Intelligent Setting Internal device B File device function module Index Constant data System user Others register JO O device register ZO z UO GO Bit Word Bit Word K H S n1 O O O n2 O O Oo E D O
436. re the Bee ca f initialization procedure T remote device station DNE Turn on the instruction in the B124 WENN registration instruction was x O initialization procedure master station station number 0 Va turned on in a station other than registration function is i the master station to be performed The remote device station initialization procedure Set the remote device station registration instruction was initialization procedure turned on without setting the registration then turn on the remote device station remote device station initialization initialization procedure procedure registration instruction Remote device station registration initialization procedure i B125 s i p i A bit other than the one O x registration function corresponding to the start station parameter not set number was turned on in Turn on only the bit corresponding Specification of remote device to the start station number in station to be initialized SW0014 Specification of remote device to SW0017 to instruct the station to be initialized SW0014 remote device station to SW0017 initialization procedure registration Check the communication status A data link error has occurred in Corresponding station of other stations if a temporary B201 i the corresponding station during DN O O error during sending Kb error invalid station is set or if the transient transmission mM corresponding station is stopped Pl
437. reading data The G P RIFR instruction reads data while it is being executed But the concurrent execution of the instruction from two or more locations is not allowed for the same intelligent device station c The number of allowable read points The maximum number of points that can be read by the G P RIFR instruction is 4096 d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RIFR instruction is nine e Assignment of the automatic update buffer The assignment of the automatic update buffer is performed in Station Information Setting of the network parameter of a programming tool s Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 197 198 3 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs Zu When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When attempt to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruction is specified don When the number of read points n3 is set beyond the setting range When the station number specified by n1 does not exist CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 6 1 Program example This section shows an example of the program to read 10 wo
438. rectly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to an actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Please make sure that the end users read this manual Operating procedures are explained using GX Works2 When using GX Developer refer to Page 396 Appendix 7 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Safety Guidelines This manual is included with the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional measures To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to one of the manuals listed under 1 Memo CONTENTS SAFES PREGAWMIONS oe er me cae ewe oie Dee ween pvc Ir Et ween 1 CONDIMONSIO RUS Eq FOR MHEPRODUC TAS E E T E T 5 INTRODUCTION ner cre rcp tw EE do MEI c A A A 6 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 0 000 cece cence eee 6 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZAT ON sec cece see se eee a a ne fos fu EE rave 12 SIRE RIMS re tees rar cetero P dU racer AD BA M Ter
439. ription Select the number of master local modules number of modules to be mounted on one base unit that are set using Number of Modules a programming tool Do not include the number of master local modules that are set using the dedicated instruction G P RLPASET Varies depending on a CPU module lt gt Page 69 Section 5 2 1 Default Blank The section of the current page is shown The station Information is not set in the CG Set the station Select it when graphically configuring Station information LNK configuration window not checked information inthe CC Seting by referring to the network map display area for GX The Station information is set in the CC Link Link configuration configuration window checked window Works oni CSS Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 4 Default The station information is not set in the CC Link configuration window not checked PoquBuwes FEL uoneis Jersey e 404 Gunes Jaweed lt shows reference pages Point To change the settings for a master station or a slave station stop data link at the master statio page 317 Section 11 4 5 When change the settings for a slave station change the settings for the master station accordingly shows setting or gue m stations operating examples require attention Point Pshows notes that VERE cigar ion vole ns bon QA shows reference eaa Velai ope cual GEen
440. ritieetop parameter SB0002 Check Data link stop result Take a corrective action Does no error occur SW0045 according to the error code Check the program Correctly set the link special Is Data link restart Check the refresh devices relay SB Data link SB0000 on set in the network Turn on Data link restart cannot be parameter SB0000 stopped Check Data link restart Take a corrective action restarted Does no error occur i result SW0041 according to the error code G1 2 Data link restart Check cables visually or by the line test using a programming tool Correct the cables and Isn t the corresponding Check the parameter settings of the station disconnected Check the operating status corresponding station and of the CPU module on the start the system corresponding station for local station Check Error invalid station a Cancel the error invalid specified status SW0078 to station setting Error invalid station Isn t the station set as an SW007B A faulty station A setting error invalid station Check Temporary error cannot be G2 1 i Cancel the temporary error invalid status SW007C to detected invalid station setting SW007F Are station numbers Are station numbers Check the station number i Correct the station number unique unique setting Check the switch setting of Set the transmission speed Can a faulty station the faulty station same as the master station be iden
441. rror code gt RWw0 7 AD conv enable prohibit CH8 RY RWIS RWwWO B RYOA Rwra RWw0 9 RYOB Rwre RWWO A RXOC EEPROM write error IRYoC Rwro CH1 set val check code RWw0 8 When a master station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode In the system configuration of the program example the assignment is the same as that in the remote net Ver 1 mode except for buffer memory addresses of data storage locations 7 gt Page 47 Section 3 6 4 Page 50 Section 3 6 5 The remote I O RX RY and remote register RWr RWw of the AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN For details on the signals refer to the following Manual for the remote station used a Remote input RX Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 402 Appendix 8 1 1 CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address Device Station number Module name Remote I O RX RY Hexadecimal Decimal X1000 to X100F E0 224 RXO to RXF 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN X1010 to X101F E14 225 RX10 to RX1F X1020 to X102F E24 226 RX20 to RX2F 2 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN X1030 to X103F E34 227 RX30 to RX3F X1040 to X104F E44 228 RX40 to RX4F 3 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN X1050 to X105F E54 229 RX50 to RX5F X1060 to X106F E64 230 RXO to RXF 4 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN X1070 to X107F E7y 231 RX10 to RX1F X1080 to X108F E84 232 RX20 to RX2F 5 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN X1090 to X109F E94 233 R
442. rting from D40 in the master station when M1 is turned on in the following system configuration Assume that the I O number of the master station is X YOO to X Y1F Assume that SWO is set to the refresh device of the link special register SW M10 is the G P RIRCV instruction executing flag Assume that the settings of the interlock signal storage device are Request device RY2 Completion device RX2 Error code storage device RWr2 and Completion mode 1 Master station CPU module RIRCV request source Host station Station No 0 RIRCV request target Target station M1 MIO SW83 E Ar AF MOV K63 D11 MOV H4 D12 MOV H400 D13 MOV K1 D14 MOV H2 D15 MOV H202 D16 MOV HI D17 c L GP RIRCV uo D10 D40 D15 M20 M1 SW83 E At 4 SET M10 M20 M2 Perform process for normal at completion 1 Lz TS RST M10 190 END AJ65BT R2 N Station No 63 gt Control data setting Interlock signal storage device setting 2 Dedicated instruction execution Set G P RIRCV instruction executing flag to ON Process upon normal completion of dedicated instruction Process upon abnormal end of dedicated instruction Set read request to OFF Set G P RIRCV instruction executing flag to OFF CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 5 G P RISEND The G P RISEND instruction autom
443. ruction uto fran E44 Refresh changing parameters by the when changing parameters when changing parameters utpu id instruction dedicated instruction by the dedicated instruction by the dedicated instruction SB0003 on SB0003 is on SB0003 f Check if the function version A local station When using the meets the following Use a local station where a does not A 1S J61BT11 or f AJ61BT11 DZ or later module supporting the operate with A 1S J61QBT11 does the SAN s AJ61QBT11 DZ or later setting is mounted the specified E5 1 Function version module support the number of occupied stations Occupied stations 2 or Occupied stations 3 setting e ATSJ61BT11 EZ or later A1TSJ61QBT11 EZ or later Set Occupied station 1 or Occupied station 4 as the number of occupied stations 285 101419 ejep oio o 0 enp suiejqoud ZZ LL Suie qoJd 40 S SI Z LL 11 2 3 Problems due to transient data error 1 Problems due to transient data error in an intelligent device station local station Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Is the transient transmission Refresh data A d Check if the correct Access the correct area in F1 1 dedicated instruction Ded i area destination is accessed the corresponding station correctly performed Parameter Do the parameter settings Check if a remote I O station Match the model s
444. s frequency of occurrence of Reduce the transmission noise is reduced speed Replace modules on the A2 9 Failure of a slave Do slave stations normally Shi tinned Ghose Repair or replace the u i station operate aS module on the faulty station ion Check if the standby master Sanab masier Isn t the standby master station is not set as a station Reboot the system so that A2 10 station controlling the data controlling the data link by the master station will station link the CC Link diagnostics of the master station control the data link 2 8 To the next page CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Check item Description Check method Corrective action Are cables and connectors Check cables between the Cable or other zh A3 1 aris securely connected and do master station and slave Correct the wiring they meet specifications stations Check if the sequence scan time is within the allowable range Isn t the sequence scan time Set the asynchronous mode Parameter 10Mbps 50ms ae A3 2 long in the synchronous or reduce the transmission setting 5Mbps 50ms mode speed 2 5Mbps 100ms 625kbps 400ms 156kbps 800ms Is the power on and is the Check power supplied to the ES Power supply for NR Apply the voltage within the A3 3 AA applied voltage within the master station and all slave B communications m f specified range specified range stations
445. s with ones used in programs Have refresh devices RX or in other networks RY SB and SW been Note that the number of Set the devices so that they correctly set in the network points of 8 point or 16 point do not overlap with ones parameter I O modules per station is 32 used in programs and in points fixed except the other networks case when the remote I O station points setting is configured Refresh data Are the auto refresh to C1 1 refresh devices using the area Check the program network parameter and the Cyclic data Check the refresh devices Execute either of the refresh refresh process using a cannot be set in the network processes program Un GO or read written parameter FROM TO instructions executed at the same time Check the program Access the correct buffer Note that the number of f memory area in the points of 8 point or 16 point Is the correct buffer memory IH corresponding station I O modules per station is 32 area read written RX RY Set the devices so that they points fixed except the SB and SW do not overlap with ones case when the remote I O eye used in programs and in station points setting is other networks configured gt Check if the bit Isn t a station to which y a corresponding to the faulty Parameter reading writing cannot be SERA Cancel the reserved station C1 2 a station is not 1 in Reserved setting performed specifi
446. s added to an existing Ver 1 system and cyclic points are expanded Unlike the remote net Ver 2 mode RX RY RWr and RWw in a Ver 1 compatible slave station are stored into buffer memory for the Ver 1 same buffer memory addresses therefore a program in the remote net Ver 1 mode can be used Remote device station Remote device station Master station Intelligent device station Remote I O station Intelligent device station Local station Remote net additional mode Ver 1 compatible Ver 1 compatible Ver 2 compatible Remote net additional mode xa um mum mm m m m mm mm a Sp my m m m am mm mm m x Camo a mom Ee ae EE E EC x Station No 0 1 1 Station No 1 4 1 Station No 2 E 1 Station No 3 3 4 Station No 4 h Ver 1 compatible RX 1 1 RX j i RX F I RX Ver 1 compatible j 1 1 BE Station 1 of 3 Ld Station 1 Pete ITE the station YOO CECEEELE EERE ELLET EEE eee eee 1 1 1 1 No 1 i No 1 1 i 1 i KA 1 1 No 1 1 7 SANLE Range of 1 1 1 1 Saun B feet B EROR A R Station 1 No 2 1 i l No 2 i i MC A No 2 1 1 i j Pg sending data 1 x eA j RY v RY j 1 I 1 I 1 LI A 1 C TT e 1 1 Range of the master 1 1 d s 1 1 station sending data to Station fey Station 1 i the station No 1 1 1 No 1 RY tes No 1 j 1 Rangeiontnemaster
447. s by using a programming tool A cV a teat lalind chee 94 Parameter settings by using the dedicated instruction G P RLPASET instruction 94 Parameter settings for a local station 115 Parameter settings for a master station 97 Parameter settings for a standby master station T cpu Tc 115 Partinames s 20 24 v recuerda TA 21 Performance specifications llus 24 Periodic communications cyclic transmission 17 PLC Down Select 2000000005 101 Precautions for programming 227 Preparation before wiring 20 TT Problems due to cyclic data error 283 Problems due to disconnection of a slave station Juv OCT cy telat tp aN ME 275 Problems due to operation error in the master station iesu seek eal ey tye Sent Docs rd a hac Rags xe 287 Problems due to transient data error 286 Procedure before the operation 56 Process CPU ndi eee eV 13 Processing time of dedicated instructions 377 Programming 000 ee eee ee ees 227 Programming tool llle 13 72 Q QCPlIJ 3i ee Be DA ARRIUS 13 OHAGPU s 2 base god Zope nu rec I ants 13 R RAS i ro a s ccr Mee d etas 13 RD LED 28 360 24 2 2a AE 21 Redundant CPU 000000 eee eee 14 Redundant system 000 eee eee eee 75 Refreshing compulsorily clearing a slave station when the switch on a programmable controller CPU is
448. s completed Transmission speed test completion status SB0186 turns on 92 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 8 The test result is stored in Transmission speed test result SW0183 0 Normally completed Values other than 0 Error code Whether the transmission speed setting of the slave station is the same as that of the master station can be checked using the following link special relay SB and link special registers SWs For a slave station excluding a standby master station Transmission speed test result for each station SW0184 to SW0187 For a standby master station Transmission speed test result for standby master station SB0184 9 After checking the test result turn off Transmission speed test request SB000B 3 Timing chart of the link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs used in a transmission speed test pr Executed by the master local module Tena ER gt Executed on the program Data link stop SB0002 OFF Transmission speed test request SB000B Transmission speed test accept status SB0185 OFF Transmission speed test Transmission speed test completion status SB0186 OFF Transmission speed test result SW0183 Transmission speed test result for each station SW0184 to SW0187 Transmission speed test result for standby master station SB0184 Test result 7 BuulM J Yy 1S8 1L 9 1S9 peeds uoissiu
449. s completed and turns off in the next END process Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P RIRD instruction Normal completion Remains off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RIRD instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process End process End process End process End process Program Fe Fe a ee a a FM Execution completion of G P RIRD instruction c Completion device BE ee i NEN A Normal completion L 1 scan Status display device OFF at completion d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RIRD instruction is eight e Assignment of the receive buffer The assignment of the receive buffer is performed in Station Information Setting of the network parameter of a programming tool 7 5 Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 3 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module des When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When attempting to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for
450. s of the SB status 20 SWO006D SWO00BA to SWO0B7 lt a SWOO06E SW00B8 S SWOO06F F SW0070 5 Es 0 o a T L 361 Appendix 4 Data Link Processing Time This appendix describes data link processing time such as link scan time and transmission delay time When all the stations in a CC Link system are normally performing data link the retry processing time RT and return processing time F that are included in the formulas are not required to be added Appendix 4 1 Linkscan time This section describes the scan time of a CC Link system How to calculate the link scan time of when a master local module is in the remote net mode and remote I O net mode is explained 1 In the remote net mode LS BT 27 NI x 4 8 NW x 9 6 N x 30 ni x 4 8 nw x 9 6 TR ST EX RT F us BT Constant transmission speed Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BT 51 2 12 8 3 2 1 6 0 8 NI Last station number in A B and C The number of occupied stations is included but a reserved station is excluded The value should be multiples of 8 A Last station number in a remote I O station B Laststation number in a remote device station The number of occupied stations is included C Last station number in local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations The number of occupied stations is included NW Last station number in B and C The n
451. s remote device stations Number of concurrent The peripherals sent requests to execution error the remote device station Reduce the number of execution BC70 Q remote device station exceeding the number of to four or less at one time access concurrent execution The remote device station access Unsupported function function was attempted to be Perform the function from the BC71 error remote device j x O performed to a station other than master station station access the master station 305 ISl 9poo JOU Z LL S9po2 JOU Error code Delectability Mitsubishi representative i Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station The remote device station to be accessed from the peripherals is any of the following The station is not set in the Target station error network parameter i ND Check the parameters or BC72 remote device station The station is not the station O x operations of the target station access with the start station number The station has been reserved A data link error including an error in all stations has occurred Target station ae The remote device station to be Check the station number and specification error uz BC73 accessed from the peripherals is station type of the specified target O x remot
452. s selected the CPU module holds the device status even after its status is changed to STOP For how to stop data link refer to Page 317 Section 11 4 5 in this manual If a CC Link dedicated cable is disconnected the network may be unstable resulting in a communication failure of multiple stations Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely even if communications fail Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction Design Precautions NCAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions NCAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the
453. s switch Set the unit digit of the station No using this switch 2 Resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system reflects the set station number 3 Ifthe ERR LED is on or flashing check if the station number is not used for other stations ERR LED Description The station number 0 is already in use Check the station number of the station ON connected again Switch setting status SBOO6A turns on and the error code is stored in Switch setting status SW0064 One of the station numbers 1 to 64 is already in use Check the station number of the station connected again Whether the station number is already in use can be Flashing checked in Loading status SWO0069 and Station number overlap status SWO0098 to SWOO9B Even if the station number is in use data link is performed with a normal station Point Correct the station number already in use Resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system clears error information stored in a link special register SW or others CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 3 Precautions a Detecting overlapped station numbers of the master local module An overlapped station number is detected in a master local module if a station number other than a start number is in use Local station Station Station Station Station Station No 1 no of occupied stations 4 No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Same station No Remote device
454. s used for an I O module and an intelligent function module Auto refresh settings of an intelligent function module Auto refresh using a multiple CPU shared memory Number of Modules 1 vj Boards Blank No Setting Iv seti 1 2 Start I O No C Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station X Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode X 2 Total Module Connected 1 Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Refresh device Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Mer 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay 5B Special Register SW Retry Count EE 3 Automatic Reconnection Station Count 1 Standby Master Station No 1 PLC Down Select Stop Scan Mode Setting Asynchronous X Delay Time Setting 2 __ Station Information Setting Ed CC Link Configuration Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Initial Setting Interrupt Settinas Interrupt Settinas 228 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 3 Remote device station initial settings using a programming tool a Reflection of the settings The initial settings registered using a programming tool are reflected to a remote device station by writing the settings to a CPU module and turning on Remote device station initialization procedure registration instructi
455. scan time 5 Page 362 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps speed BC 6 7 9 11 12 1 2 SL Local station sequence scan time Apply 0 when data is written to buffer memory in CC Link WT Monitoring time set in SWO0009 3 Page 348 Appendix 3 2 RT Number of retries set in SWOOO0B 7 Page 348 Appendix 3 2 Ex When the CPU module is a QO6HCPU transmission speed is 10Mbps link scan time is 5ms the number of write points is 20 words buffer memory in CC Link monitoring time is 10 seconds and the retry is not set OT LS x BC number of write points 16 72 x 1 13 SL WT x RT x 1000 0 5 5 x 12 20 16 72 x 1 13 O 10x 0 x 1000 0 5 5x 12 1 x 1 13 0 66 15 66 2ms The decimal point is rounded up Time that occurs when a dedicated instruction is retried APPENDICES b Local station master station The time between a local station issuing an instruction and it receiving a response from the master station is calculated as follows Formula lt Maximum value gt G P RIRD instruction OT LS x BC number of read points 16 72 x 1 13 SM WT x RT x 1000 ms OT Processing time of QCPU dedicated instructions Basic model QCPU Q02CPU 1ms A QCPU excluding a Basic model QCPU and Q02CPUJ 0 5ms LS Link scan time 5 Page 362 Appendix 4 1 BC Constant Transmission speed BC 6 7 9 11 12
456. sentative File register capacity The file register capacity is not B814 Set the capacity O O setting error set Transient transmission was Module mode setting performed although the I O mode Set the intelligent mode for the B815 O O error had been set for the target target station station B817 Please consult your local System error n A O B821 and B822 Mitsubishi representative Remote control mode The mode setting of the remote B823 2 Check the setting O O error control is incorrect B824 Please consult your local System error RM O O B826 Mitsubishi representative 301 8I p09 JOU Z LL s po9 JOU SL Delectability Error code e i Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station A transient request was issued to RENE 1 Secure a communication buffer B903 Transient request error a station that had not secured a O O st area using the parameter communication buffer When a dedicated instruction was executed the Send 2 Communication buffer m Set the communication buffer size B904 communication buffer size of the M O O size setting error i within the range corresponding station was outside the range When the dedicated instruction m Increase the communication was executed the transient data Transient data length buffer size so that it may be
457. served station D1 2 s station is not 1 in Reserved setting performed specified as a b setting station specified status reserved station SW0074 to SW0077 Word data Pamer Do the parameter settings Check if a remote I O station Match the model set by the cannot be D2 1 gettin match with the status of the is not connected to the parameter with that of the i read written B connected modules corresponding station connected module Cyclic data Check if a module with the Match the number of Do the parameter settings lower area Parameter small number of occupied occupied stations set by the D3 1 match with the status of the cannot be setting stations is not connected to parameter with that of the k connected modules read written the corresponding station connected module Datatannotbs Is Refresh instruction when Check if Refresh instruction Turn on Refresh instruction GUIDUESOI D4 1 Refresh changing parameters by the when changing parameters when changing parameters utpu a instruction dedicated instruction by the dedicated instruction by the dedicated instruction 1 SB0003 on SB0003 is on SB0003 Were Initial data processing Has the initial setting completion flag RYn18 and Perform the initial data completed Initial data setting request process flag RYn19 turned off Check if Remote device station initialization Has the remote device procedure registration station initialization i
458. settings are required for each station O The setting is required A The setting is required as the occasion demands x The setting is not required Necessity of a setting Local station Item Remark Master station standby master station Number of Modules O O Start I O No O O Parameter Name A A Data Link Faulty Station A A Setting E Case of CPU STOP Setting A A Operation Setting Number of Occupied Stations x O Set it only when Remote Net Ver 2 Mode or Expanded Cyclic Setting x O Remote Net Additional Mode is set to Mode Block Data Assurance per A A Station It is automatically input when Station Type is Type O O i ANC set in the CC Link configuration window Master Station Data Link Type x x It is automatically input when Mode is set in T Mode O O i i the CC Link configuration window v e It is automatically input when the station S Total Module Connected O x information is set in the CC Link configuration S window E Remote Input RX A A Q Remote Output RY A A 5 Remote Register RWr A A Remote Register RWw A A Ver 2 Remote Input RX A A Ver 2 Remote Output RY A A Set it only when Remote Net Additional Mode Ver 2 Remote Register RWr A A is set to Mode Ver 2 Remote Register RWw A A Special Relay SB A A Special Register SW A A Retry Count O x The settings are not required whe
459. sh instruction at standby master switching 8B0001 SEO b1 Forced master switching SBOOOC 5E0 b12 Refresh instruction acknowledgement status at standby master switching SB0042 5E4 b2 e Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching 8B0043 5E4y b3 Forced master switching executable status SB0046 5E44 b6 Master switching request acknowledgement SB005A 5E5 b10 Master switching request complete SBOO5B 5E5y b11 Forced master switching request acknowledgement SB005C 5E5y b12 Forced master switching request complete SB005D 5E5 b13 Host standby master station setting information SB0062 5E6 b2 Master station information SB0070 5E7y bO Standby master station information SB0071 5E7y b1 uonounij Jejseui Aqpuels Z8 Ayqey ueisAs y Bulrcidu z g Master station return specification information 8B0079 5E7 y b9 Host master standby master operation status 8B007B 5E7 b11 b Link special registers SWs Link special registers SWs related to the standby master function are listed below Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses e Refresh instruction at standby master switching result SW0043 6434 e Forced master switching instruction result SWO005D 65D Standby master station number SW0073 6734 145 146 c ON OFF timing of link special relays SBs related to the standby master function The following figure shows the ON O
460. single 8H Ver 2 compatible remote device station double 9H Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station double BH Ver 2 compatible remote device station quadruple CH Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station quadruple EH Ver 2 compatible remote device station octuple FH Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station octuple 604 to 7Fy 96 to 127 mH prohibited The buffer memory sizes assigned for a local station 80H Send buffer 8 128 Send buffer 8 intelligent device station and standby master station during 81H Receive buffer 129 Receive buffer o M 82H Automatic update 130 Automatic update transient transmission are stored buffer 8 buffer S l Default 99 2 g Assignment Send buffer size 404 64 word FE Fe to to of Receive buffer size 404 64 word 2 g communica i Automatic update buffer size 804 128 word CBu Send buffer 203 Send buffer tion buffer Range CCu Receive buffer amp 204 Receive buffer 5 and uu CDu Automatic update N 205 Automatic update N 2 automatic Communication buffer buffer E 2 buffer E Op 0 word not set or 404 64 word to 1000 4096 word T update Note that the total size of the communication buffer must be within buffer 1000 4096 word Automatic update buffer Op 0 word not set or 804 128 word to 10004 4096 word Note that the total size of the automatic update buffer must be wit
461. specification error station specification A station other than an intelligent device station is set as the station f Specify the standby master type of the station set in Standby station as an intelligent device Master Station No of the Standby master station station B39C i network parameter for the master O x setting error akan Set the same mode for the master ion station and the standby master The mode setting of the master i station station differs from that of the standby master station Zero points are set for a reserved station in the remote net Set the remote net Ver 2 mode 0 point setting error ds B39D additional mode O x reserved station Zero points are set for a station Set zero points for a reserved other than a reserved station station 297 ISl p09 JON Z LL S9po2 JOU Error code Delectability i Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station The remote I O station points setting is set to 8 points or 16 M Set the remote net Ver 2 mode points in the remote net 8 point 16 pointsetting additional mode B39E error remote I O 8 points or 16 points are set for a O x Set 8 points or 16 points for a station station other than a remote I O remote I O station station 8 points and 16 points are setfor Set either 8 points or 16 points for the same remo
462. st source A response has not been Check modules and cables at the B778 Response timeout received from the request MD O O MEN request destination destination Please consult your local B779 System error AW O O Mitsubishi representative Transient transmission was Module mode setting performed although the I O mode Set the intelligent mode for the B780 O O error had been set for the target target station station Please consult your local B781 System error O O Mitsubishi representative 300 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delectability Error code c Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station When connection to another station has been set the sending Check the station number of the Station number i NA B782 SM destination station and the destination or change the setting O O specification error sending source station are the to connection to the host station same When data larger than 1k was being sent in transient 4 Transient storage rap Wait for a while and send the B783 transmission an error has O O buffer error request again occurred in the transient storage buffer Access code setting A non existing access code or Set the correct access code or B801 O O error attribute is set attribute A non existing access code was B80
463. station double 94 Ver 2 compatible remote device station quadruple Bu Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station quadruple Cy Ver 2 compatible remote device station octuple Ey Ver 2 compatible intelligent device station octuple Fu 1 2 3 206 Configure settings as many number as the one set for the total module connected of the control data Select the intelligent device station for a local station or standby master station Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal end CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS c Reserved station specification data A Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range Specify reserved stations 2 0 Not specified 1 Specified b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 bO S3 0 Specification of sa3wo 16 45 44 13 4 3 2 1 adus S3 O User S3 3 stations S3 1 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 S3 2 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 83 3 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers Default value is 0 Not specified for all stations dd Configure settings for station numbers up to the largest one set for the slave station setting data 2 Set the start station number of the module only for a slave station that occupies two or more stations d Error invalid station specification data Settin
464. station Station Station Station No 4 no of occupied stations 2 No 4 No 5 If a start station number is in use it is not detected The station number 0 of the master station is detected if it is in use Check whether the station number of the station where a data link error has occurred is not already used for other stations using Other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 Ex A local station station number 1 with the number of occupied stations of 4 and a remote device station station number 1 with the number of occupied stations of 2 In the following case the overlapped station number is not detected Correct station numbers of the remote device station Local station Station Station Station Station Station Station No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 j No5 No6 Same station No Remote device Station Station station No 1 No 2 Incorrect station numbers of the remote device station Bunes 1equinN uoneis 9 85 6 4 Transmission Speed Setting This section describes the transmission speed setting in CC Link 1 Conditions for transmission speed Set the same transmission speed in all the stations in the CC Link system If even one station has a different transmission speed data link cannot be performed normally e The transmission speed that can be set varies depending on the overall distance gt Page 29 Section 3 2 2 Page 30 Section 3 2 3 Point Whether the transmissio
465. station standby master station master station Remote I O RX RY 32 points 30 points for a local station Remote register RWw 4 points master station remote device station local CC Link Ver 1 station intelligent device station standby master station Remote register RWr 4 points remote device station local station intelligent device station standby master station master station Number of link pains Expanded Cyclic Setting per remote Item station local Single Double Quadruple Octuple station intelligent Remote T b 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points device station standby RX RY 30 points for a 30 points for a 62 points fora 126 points for a master station CC Link Ver 2 i local station local station local station local station Remote register 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points RWw Remote 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points register RWr 24 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Item Specifications Communication method Broadcast polling method Synchronization method Frame synchronization method Encoding method NRZI method Network topology Bus RS 485 Transmission format Error control system HDLC compliant CRC X8 x12 x5 1 Connection cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 00 compatible CC Link dedicated high performance cab
466. stem error EU O O Mitsubishi representative Target station CPU The CPU module on the target B607 P Check the CPU module O O error station is in error Transient transmission Transient transmission was Set the intelligent mode for the B608 target station mode performed to the AJ61BT11 or O O j target station setting error A1SJ61BT11 in the I O mode B60C Please consult your local System error mM O O B700 Mitsubishi representative Reduce the load placed on the transient transmission and e perform the transmission again Transient transmission T B701 to B704 failure Transient transmission failed If the same error persists after O O ilu taking the above action please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Please consult your local B705 and B706 System error PA O O Mitsubishi representative Too many transient requests Wait for a while and send the Transient request B771 were sent to the corresponding request again overload due to O O overload error i station many transient requests Please consult your local B772 and B773 System error a hinted O O Mitsubishi representative The target station was not an Check if the target station is an B774 Transient request error p P A O O intelligent device station intelligent device station Unsupported transient data was Check the application of the B775 to B777 Transient type error O O received reque
467. ster Device Module name g Data name RWr wo RWr0 CH 1 digital output value W1 RWr1 CH 2 digital output value W2 RWr2 CH 3 digital output value w3 RWr3 CH 4 digital output value WA RWr4 CH 5 digital output value w5 RWr5 CH 6 digital output value AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN W6 RWr6 CH 7 digital output value W7 RWr7 CH 8 digital output value ws RWr8 Error code w9 RWr9 to to Reserved WB RWrB WC RWr0 CH 1 check code WD RWr1 CH 2 check code WE RWr2 CH 3 check code WF RWr3 CH 4 check code W10 RWr4 CH 5 check code W11 RWr5 CH 6 check code AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W12 RWr6 CH 7 check code W13 RWr7 CH 8 check code W14 RWr8 Error code W15 RWr9 to to Reserved W17 RWrB 238 d Remote register RWw Plan the assignment using the assignment sheet on Page 403 Appendix 8 1 2 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address Remote register Device Station number Module name g Hexadecimal Decimal RWr RWw W100 1E0 480 RWwO W101 1E1y 481 RWw1 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN W102 1E2y 482 RWw2 W103 1E3y 483 RWw3 W104 1E4y 484 RWw4 W105 1E5y 485 RWw5 2 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN W106 1E64 486 RWw6 W107 1E7y 487 RWw7 W108 1E8 488 RWw8 W109 1E9 489 RWw9 3 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN W10A 1EAQ 490 RWwA W10B 1EBy 491 RWwB W10C 1ECy 492 RWwO W10D 1EDy 493 RWw1 4 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN W10E
468. storage device does not exist set FF User FFy 3 0 The host station completes the process by checking b15 to bO the contents of one device RXn S3 2 completion mode 1 The host station completes the process by checking 0 1 User the contents of two devices RXn and RXn 1 RXn 1 turns on at an abnormal end 1 The same error code as that for Completion status of the control data is stored in the error code storage device 192 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RISEND instruction Master station CPU module Master station EI 8 Target station te H OOO 3 8 j e 3 O mar 7 co E oe HT Intelligent device station 5 Executes request process Buffer memory 9 7 Writing of data to the buffer memory specified by S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified by The data to be written to the target station is stored in the send buffer of the master station Data are written to the buffer memory specified by S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified by The master station turns on the remote output RY specified by S3 0 Device Send buffer 1 S1 1 is commanded 2 3 S1 1 4 5 The station specified by 81 1 performs the pr
469. sueJ Z 9 93 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS For CC Link set parameters both for a master station and a slave station For a master station set the information about a slave station to be connected to a CC Link system For a slave station set the station number of the slave station Manual for the slave station used This chapter describes how to set the parameters for a master local module 7 1 Parameter Setting Method Parameters for a master local module can be set by using a programming tool or a dedicated instruction Select the setting method depending on the application Item Application Use a programming tool for the following cases Parameter settings by using a To set parameters on a window in a simply way without creating program programming tool To transfer data automatically from RX RY RWr RWw SB and SW in a master local module to a device in a CPU module Reference Page 97 Section 7 3 Page 115 Section 7 4 Use the dedicated instruction for the following cases To connect nine or more master local modules to one programmable controller system To change the parameter settings while a CPU module is set to RUN Parameter settings by using the dedicated instruction G P RLPASET instruction Page 204 Section 9 8 94 7 2 Parameter Setting List CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS This section lists the parameter setting items for a master local module and whether the
470. switch on the CPU module is not set to RESET Switch setting Use the switches on the master local module to set the station number transmission speed and mode Page 83 Section 6 3 Set the station number and transmission speed for the slave station as well Page 86 Section 6 4 gt gt Page 21 CHAPTER 2 wv To the next page CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION Powering on the system Power on the system Parameter setting Set the parameters on the master local module a Write the parameter settings to the CPU module Reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Page 94 CHAPTER 7 Checking operation with the LED display When data link is performed normally the L RUN LED is turned on and the ERR LED is turned off Programming gt gt Page 227 CHAPTER 10 Create a control program Write the program to the CPU module Reset the CPU module or power off and on the system 1 The parameters can be set using dedicated instructions gt Page 204 Section 9 8 57 4 1 Operation Example This section describes an example of the operation until starting up the system using the procedure described in Page 56 CHAPTER 4 1 Design a system configuration The following system is used for explanation purpose Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode N Model name Q20UDHCPU QJ61BT11N QX10 QY10 Start I O number X Y00 to X Y1F X20 to X2F Y30 to Y3F
471. t for the interrupt to a CPU module 7 gt Page 120 Section 7 4 2 2 1 The operations when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP vary depending on whether Y or the devices other than Y is set to Remote Output RY gt Page 134 Section 8 2 4 118 1 Operation setting CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS D Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Operation Setting button Operation Setting Module 1 Parameter Name Number of Occupied Stations Occupied Station Y panded Cyclic Setting Single Data Link Faulty Station Setting Hold Input Data Case of CPU STOP Setting Block Data Assurance per Station Clears Compulsorily Enable Setting Item Description Setting range Parameter Name Set the name of the setting if needed This item is displayed when the setting details of the network parameters are printed using a programming tool Eight characters Default Blank Data Link Faulty Station Setting Select whether to clear or hold data input from a data link faulty station Page 122 Section 7 5 Page 132 Section 8 2 3 Clear input data not checked Hold input data checked Default Clear input data not checked Case of CPU STOP Setting Select whether to refresh or clear compulsorily output sending data to a master station when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP Page 122 Section 7
472. ta of the remote stations with the number of occupied stations of 3 and 1 Remote station Remote station Station No 1 Station No 4 CPU module the number of the number of device Master local module occupied stations 3 occupied stations 1 Data Station No 1 Station No 1 Station No 1 uaraniasd to the to the to the g station No 3 Auto refresh station No 3 station No 3 Data guaranteed 150 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS c Setting method Configure the setting in the master station local station and standby master station where data needs to be assured 1 Open the Operation Setting window Project window gt Parameter z Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Operation Setting button 2 Check the checkbox in Block Data Assurance per Station Operation Setting Module 1 Parameter Name Data Link Faulty Station Setting Hold Input Data Case of CPU STOP Setting Clears Compulsorily Point When configuring the setting in the block data assurance per station set the refresh devices as well Number of Modules 1 _ Boards Blank No Setting IV Set LESS i d Start I O No E 3 Operation Setting Q 9 Type Master Station 9 9 Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start S a Mode m E Total Module Connected 1 S o Remote Input RX a e Remote Output RY Y1000 c a Remote
473. tation The default values are send buffer size 404 receive buffer size 404 and automatic update buffer size 80 4 Automatic update buffer Oy no setting 80 to 10004 0 word no setting 128 to 4096 words Configure settings for stations specified as local stations or intelligent device stations in the slave station setting data starting from the smallest station number The total size of the communication buffers must be within 10004 4096 word Specify the size of data to be communicated plus seven words for the communication buffers sizes Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal end The total size of the automatic update buffer must be within 10004 4096 word Specify the necessary size for each intelligent device station as the automatic update buffer size Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal end CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Functions a Operation chart of the G P RLPASET instruction CPU module Master station Command G P RLPASET Network 1 parameter Device 4 Execution result 2 3 Data link start gt The network parameters set in S1 to S5 are transferred to the master station specified by Un The master station analyzes the settings of the network parameters C Nu If the network parameter settings are correct the data link is started 4 The device specified
474. tation Number of Modules 1 z Boards Blank No Setting v Set f CC Link Configuration Module 1 Start 1 0 No 0000 i CC LinkConfiguration Edit View Mode Setting ver 1 Mode TX Speed 156kbps Link Scan Time Approx 16 44 ms PU Model Name Station Type Version of STA Occupied a L WB 1 1 QUIBTIIN Local Station Verl 1 Station Occupied Single E 2j2 AJ6SBT 64DAI Remote Device Station Ver l 2Stations Occupied Single 2 3 4 Gen Intelligent Device Station Intelligent Device Station Ver 1StationOccupied Single STAHT STAH2 3 Host Station STANO Master Ver All Connect Count 3 Total STAH 4 QJ61BT1IN AJESBT 64 Gen Intelig DAI ent Device Station c Parameter settings for a standby master station Number of Modules 1 Boards Blank No Setting set OOO oO om pert setting Spesunseug Laster Staton Dota rk Type Ei EU NI NMEM 147 uonounj Jejseui Aqpuejs g z 8 Ayqey ueisAs eui Buroudui z g d Program example Control start relay when the master station is operating M10 Control start relay when the standby master station is operating M11 ae SET M10 Control start relay when the master Initial device station is operating set SET M11 Control start relay when the station master station is local s
475. tation Reserved station tanon number occupies 1 station occupies 1 station Local station occupies 1 station 1 Create a project on a programming tool Select QCPU Q mode under PLC Series Select Q20UDH under PLC Type W Project gt New New Project Project Type Simple Project l Cancel Use Label PLC Series ocru Q mode l PLC Type azoupH x Language Ladder z 212 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Open the I O Assignment tab of PLC Parameter and configure the settings as follows Project window 2 gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter lt gt I O Assignment tab Q Parameter Setting PLC Name p c System p c File p c RAS BootFile Program src Device YO Assignment Multiple CPU Setting Serial Communication I O Assignment 1 Points Switch Setting Intelligent w QI61BT11N 32Points Intelligent v QueieTiiNn 32Points Detailed Setting Intelligent 32Points Intelligent 32Points Intelligent v QJ61BT11N mE Intelligent v QJ61BT11N Q361BTLIN 3 Open the Switch Setting for I O and Intelligent Function Module window by clicking the Switch Setting button and configure the settings as follows D Click the Switch Setting button Switch Setting for I O and Intelligent Function Module Input Format HEX y se m c A ijo f
476. tation is operating X0 X1 XOF SB7B LAS 1 1 DA Mc NO MO J NO MO SB5A B M BMOVP K4X1000 W1000 K8 BMOVP K4Y1000 W1100 K8 Save RX RY RWr RWw data to W device LBMOVP WO W1500 K16 4 BMOVP W100 W1600 K16 SB5B 7 d Control ladder 1 BMOVP Wi000 K4Y1000 K8 when the UON master station BMOVP W1100 224 K8 J is operating Set the saved data to RY RX RWw RWr ee HBMOVP W1500 W100 K16 UON E LBMOVP W1600 G736 K16 4 SB5A SB5B E J LSET SB1 J Refresh change instruction request ON SB42 SB43 z 4 LRST SB1 Refresh change instruction request OFF KO sw43 SET M10 Mm ae 1 Control program when the master station is operating 1 1 1 1 1 1 _ McR No W X0 X1 XOF SB7B N AF 1 H MC Ni M1 J Control ladder when the Ni Le standby master l station is L Mil Control program when the standby master operation is operating r operating L local station operation i 2 1 1 Local station I 1 operating mire E i i Ci LC Lc ici ind SM400 J RST M10 MCR MI n r J 148 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS e When the right of controlling data link is compulsorily transferred from the standby master station to the master station In the program example in Page 148 Section 8 2 5 7 d change the sections in the dotted lines and as follows Program M10 Control program when the master station is operating ontrol start relay when the master station is operating
477. tation local station local station local station local station 4 Remote stations register 16 points 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points occupied RWw Remote register 16 points 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points RWr 26 3 2 1 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Maximum number of connected modules A CC Link system can be configured with the number of modules meeting the following conditions 1 Maximum of 26 modules 1 station in each system m Master station Maximum of 42 modules m Remote device station Remote net Ver 1 mode A Local station Maximum of 64 modules m Remote 1 O station CC Link dedicated cable S Intelligent device station 64 modules in total The table below lists the maximum number of connected modules of when a system is configured only with Ver 1 compatible slave stations For the modes refer to Page 43 Section 3 6 2 64 modules of a remote 1 O station remote device station local station standby master station and intelligent device station can be connected in total for one master station Note however that the following conditions must be satisfied Item Number of modules Condition 1 1 x a 2 x b 3 x c 4 x d lt 64 Number of modules occupying one station Number of modules occupying two stations Number of modules occupying three stations Number of modules occupying four stations Cond
478. tations after the 17th station b Number of initial settings registered per remote device station Up to 16 items of the initial settings can be registered per remote device station Use a program to register 17 items or more A programming tool and program cannot be used together for the initial setting in one remote device station If they are used together a remote device station may malfunction 2 If the process has stopped Information about an initial setting in progress is stored in Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information SW0110 to SWO11F of a master local module If the process has stopped halfway information such as the number of the procedure that has stopped and the number of the station where the procedure has stopped can be checked 3 How to configure the initial setting Configure the setting in Remote Device Station Initial Setting of the network parameter in the master station Then use Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD to reflect the initial setting to the remote device station gt Page 108 Section 7 3 2 3 Page 231 Section 10 2 suoloun y Jo suoneoiiddy jnjes e g uonounj uoneJsibeJ eanpeooud uonezijeniur uonejs eoiep ejoules g 153 4 How to perform the initial process only in a specified station specification of remote device station to be initialized When a remote device station in operation
479. tations with Quadruple ave stations occupying three stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Quadruple Number of Ver 2 compatible s the expanded cyclic setting of Number of Ver 2 compatible s the expanded cyclic setting of Number of Ver 2 compatible s the expanded cyclic setting of Number of Ver 2 compatible s ave stations occupying four stations with Quadruple ave stations occupying one station with Octuple ave stations occupying two stations with Octuple ave stations occupying three stations with the expanded cyclic setting of Octuple Number of Ver 2 compatible s the expanded cyclic setting of ave stations occupying four stations with Octuple Condition 4 16 x A 54 x B 88 x C lt 2304 og Number of remote I O stations lt 64 Number of remote device stations lt 42 Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 28 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 2 Maximum overall cable distance CC Link Ver 1 10 This section describes how transmission speed and a cable length are related when a system is configured with products of CC Link Ver 1 10 or later and Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables Configure a CC Link system that satisfies the following conditions
480. tch Master station em Used Line CH 0 CH 0 Side Line Status Normal CH 1 Side Line Status Line Type Twist Single Bus Link Scan Time Max 2ms Min 2ms Current 2ms Related Functions gt amp B Loop Test Status Logging Create Check Stop Data Link Sheet 308 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Display contents of the CC Link Diagnostics window Item Diagnostics Result Description Displays the number of errors and warnings that occur in the master local module Module list diagnostics target selection area Lists master local modules The number of errors and warnings is also displayed The diagnostics target can be changed by clicking a module icon 9 Updates the list gt Switches the displayed modules in units of eight modules Station list Lists the icons of stations that configure a CC Link system In the Detail Display mode the 24th or later stations are displayed by clicking the Next gt gt button The display status can be switched by clicking the _ Display all and Detail Display buttons In the Display All mode information on all stations can be viewed in one window The icons can be freely located by drag and drop To display the icons in the order of station number click the Return to the original button E 0 Master ST 0 pa 5 6 7 m Master ST Intell ST Intell ST VO ST Intell ST mm En Mov
481. te I O station and remote device station only 2 This applies to a system configuration including a local station and intelligent device station 3 4 Refer to the following figure Maximum length of the main line not including the branch line length Distance between T branches cem Terminating Terminating le 9 4 i resistor mm Em 3 3 7 iN 48 resistor Branch line length 8m or shorter R R Represents a remote I O station or a remote device station R 3 Represents a local station or an intelligent device station Branch line length 8m or shorter 82 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 3 Station Number Setting This section describes how to set the station numbers for CC Link and a master local module 1 Station number setting for CC Link For CC Link follow the rules below to set the station numbers Set the station numbers not used for other stations If a station number already in use is set an error occurs Set consecutive station numbers for stations in the same system To set empty station numbers for future use set the stations as reserved stations Setting the stations as reserved stations prevents the stations from being detected as a faulty station Set reserved stations in the master station using the network parameter of a programming tool gt Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 Page 161 Section 8 3 4 When the number
482. te Net Ver 2 Mode Remote Net Additional Mode x Mode Remote Net Additional Mode Remote I O Net Mode Offline Default Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Remote I O Net Mode Offline Total Module Connected 1 to 64 Default 64 Remote Input RX refresh device Device name Select one from X M L B D W R and ZR Remote Output RY refresh device Device name Select one from Y M L B T C ST D W R and ZR Remote Register RWr refresh device Remote Register RWw refresh device Device name Select one from M L B D W R and ZR Device name Select one from M L B T C ST D W R and ZR Ver 2 Remote Input RX refresh device Device name Select one from X M L B D W R and ZR Ver 2 Remote Output RY refresh device Device name Select one from Y M L B T C ST D W R and ZR Ver 2 Remote Register RWr refresh device Device name Select one from M L B D W R and ZR Ver 2 Remote Register RWw refresh device Device name Select one from M L B T C ST D W R and ZR Special Relay SB refresh device Device name Select one from M L B D W R SB and ZR Special Register SW refresh device Device name Select one from M L B D W R SW and ZR 404 APPENDICES Item Setting range Setting value 1to7 Retry Count Default 3 1 to 10 Automatic Reconnection Station Count
483. te l O station the station In the remote net additional In the remote net additional mode mode the maximum station set the network parameter so that Remote net additional number of Ver 1 compatible slave the maximum station number of B39F mode station number station is set greater than the Ver 1 compatible slave station O x invalid minimum station number of may be less than the minimum Ver 2 compatible slave station in station number of Ver 2 the network parameter compatible slave station The mode setting is invalid in the master station local station or standby master station The mode of the master station differs from that of the standby master station Invalid mode DAN A local station is set to the Correct the mode setting in the among the master E A i remote net additional mode master station local station or B3A0 station local station 2 x O and the master station is setto standby master station then reset and standby master station the mode other than the the CPU module i remote net additional mode A local station is in the remote net Ver 2 mode or the remote net additional mode and the master station is in the remote net Ver 1 mode An invalid value is set for the B3A1 Standby master setting switch 5 of the intelligent function Set a correct value to the switch o invalid module switch setting parameter 5 using a dedicated instruction In the remote I O net mode a station
484. ted or the transmission path has been affected by noise SW0058 Detailed LED TIME ERROR Responses cannot be received from any station due to the cable being disconnected or the O O O 658 display status transmission path being affected by noise PRM ERROR Invalid parameter value M S ERROR Multiple master stations exist on the same line SW ERROR Error in switch settings LOCAL The station is operating as a local station S MST The station is operating as a standby master station MST The station is operating as a master station ERR Error RUN The module is operating normally Transmission speed setting status is stored 0 Cleared 1 Set b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO SWO0059 Transmission 6594 speed setting 10Mbps 9 z 9 5Mbps gt 2 5Mbps 625kbps 156kbps Forced master Whether the forced master switching instruction using SBOOOC has been O SWO005D switching normally completed is stored Standby 65Dy instruction 0 Normal completion master x x station result Values other than 0 Error code _ 3 Page 291 Section 11 3 2 y only 350 APPENDICES Availability O Yes x No Number Name Description Online Master Local Offline station station Remote device station mm T BE Whether the initialization procedure registration instruction using SWOO5F Inialiaation SBOOOD has been normally completed is stored 65
485. ted to multiple local stations or intelligent device stations But concurrent execution of the instruction is not allowed to the same station including other dedicated instructions If the dedicated instruction is executed before the completion of the former dedicated instruction the latter instruction is ignored Because several scans are required to complete the process of the dedicated instruction create a program so that the next dedicated instruction is executed after Completion device D turns on 183 184 c Check of the completion status There are two types of interlock signals for the G P RIWT instruction Completion device D and Status display device at completion D 1 Completion device Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RIWT instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P RIWT instruction Normal completion Remains off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RIWT instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process End process End process End process End process Program E 1 See E ON the G P RIWT aub on G P RIWT instruction or A 20 Completion device BER Md 4 AEN Abnormal end 1 EX ae E A Normal completion 1 scan Status display device OFF at complet
486. ter station 7 4 1 Setting method 1 Open the Network Parameter window from a programming tool Project window lt gt Parameter lt gt Network Parameter gt CC Link Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules f1 z Boards Blank No Setting IT Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window 1 E 3 Operation Setting Local station Master Station Data Link Type Mode Remote Net ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected Remote Input RX Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Remote Register RWw Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB Special Register SW Retry Count Automatic Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No PLC Down Select Scan Mode Setting Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting Interrunt Settinas Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Setting Item Details Pine wn Pige Mendon Sees ees 2 Input settings to the Network Parameter window 7 gt Page 116 Section 7 4 2 3 Clickthe 5 3 button 4 Write the settings to the CPU module using the programming tool XX Online lt gt Write to PLC 5 The settings are reflect
487. ter local module issues the interrupt to a CPU module Detection Device Code Device No Method 0001 Edge Detect v ON Item Description Setting range Input Format Select the input format of Word Device Setting Value DEC HEX Default DEC Device Code Device No Set the device for the interrupt condition Detection Method Interrupt Condition Select the timing of the interrupt detection for the device set to Device Code and Device No Word Device Setting Value Set the word device value for the interrupt condition if RWr or SW is set to Device Code Channel No Connection No The setting is not required for a master local module Interrupt SI No Set the interrupt SI No used for the interrupt pointer setting of the PLC parameter The interrupt SI No is the control number on the master local module side to issue a request for the interrupt from a master local module to a CPU module This is not the device used for an actual program Refer to the following table Point P Only one interrupt condition can be set for one interrupt program 120 Setting range If the interrupt condition is established upon the completion of a link scan the interrupt is issued If Scan Completed is set to Device Code the interrupt is issued without condition upon the completion of a link scan CHAPTER
488. ter local module operating as a local station When a master local module is started up with the station numbers 1 to 64 it is started up as a local station The table below lists the parameter settings of when CC Link is automatically started up by a master local module dnyejs xXurq 92 oneuojny eg suonoun J y Jo suoneoriddy jnjes e g operating as a local station Item Setting details Operation Setting Refer to Page 159 Section 8 3 3 2 a Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Refresh devices Refer to Page 159 Section 8 3 3 1 b a Operation Setting Item Setting details Data Link Faulty Station Setting Clear the input data Case of CPU STOP Setting Refresh Number of Occupied Stations Occupied Station 1 Block Data Assurance per Station Disable the setting 159 3 Number of modules connected a When two or more master local modules are connected in one programmable controller system The automatic CC Link startup function applies to a module with the smallest start I O number only In a multiple CPU system the function applies to a master local module with the smallest start I O number among master local modules controlled by each CPU module b Number of connectable network modules When the automatic CC Link startup is performed the number of network modules that can be connected to the CPU module of a master station is as follows The number of CC Link IE Controller Network m
489. the data that cannot be used for the instruction is contained When the number of data used for the instruction is set beyond the allowable range Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range including a dummy device The number of points required for each data is described below Control data 8 points Slave station setting data 64 points 4101 Reserved station specification data 4 points Error invalid station specification data 4 points Communication and automatic update buffer assignment data 78 points Ex If D12284 is set as the start device number of the slave station setting data S2 on the condition that DO to D12287 is set to the device in the CPU module the slave station setting data S2 becomes D12284 to D12347 64 points and an error occurs due to values out of the range 211 lasvdTM d O 8 6 9 8 1 Program example parameter setting example This section shows an example of configuring settings for a master local module in the following system configuration Master station Model name Q20UDHCPU QJ61BT11N Start O number X Y100 to X Y11F Terminating resistor Terminating resistor ooo0o000 Station number 2 Station number 3 Remote I O station Remote I O station Stati beri Error invalid s
490. the instruction is specified 4100 When the data that cannot be used for the instruction is contained When the number of data used for the instruction is set beyond the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range 178 CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 2 1 Program example This section shows an example of the program to read 10 word data from the area starting from D1000 in the local station station number 1 to the area starting from DO in the master station when XO is turned on in the following system configuration Assume that the I O number of the master station is X Y40 to X Y5F Assume that SWO is set to the refresh device of the link special register SW e M12 is the G P RIRD instruction executing flag Master station Local station CPU module Station No 0 Station No 1 RIRD request source Host station RIRD request target Target station x Mov Ki D101 MOV H405 D102 gt Control data setting IOV K1000 D103 J MOV K10 D104 o GRIRD U4 D100 DO MO Dedicated instruction execution d bs Q Set G P RIRD instruction D g LSET Miz J executing flag to ON Ss p Mo Perform process for receive Process upon completion of E completion i reception zi Yr Perform process for normal Process upon normal completion I completion
491. they area Is the accessed buffer other networks do not overlap with ones Cyclic data memory area correct RX used in programs cannot be RY RWw RWr SB and Access the correct buffer read written SW Check if no device in the memory area in the local local station overlaps with station ones used in programs or in Set the devices so that they other networks do not overlap with ones used in programs s Check if the bit Isn t a station to which corresponding to the faulty Parameter reading writing cannot be SERA Cancel the reserved station E1 2 ry station is not 1 in Reserved setting performed specified as a x setting station specified status reserved station SW0074 to SW0077 Word data Paramete Do the parameter settings Check if a remote I O station Match the model set by the cannot be E2 1 Setin match with the status of the is not connected to the parameter with that of the i read written 9 connected modules corresponding station connected module Cyclic data Check if a module with the Match the number of Do the parameter settings lower area Parameter k small number of occupied occupied stations set by the E3 1 match with the status of the cannot be setting stations is not connected to parameter with that of the A connected modules read written the corresponding station connected module ae eRe aNd Is Refresh instruction when Check if Refresh instruction Turn on Refresh inst
492. tics gt System Monitor Z System Error History button Error History Monitor Status Connection Channel List Stop Monitor serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image Refine Search Match all of the criteria below None Clear Refine Criteria Enter Refine Criteria Error History Error History List Error Details Displayed Errors Errors 10 10 Error Code Notation C DEC HEX Model Name QU61BTLIN No Error Code Date and Time Model Name Start 1 0 Start YO 0000 20 es ET RR rr m T 1 0640 2011 10 18 14 12 30 Qo2uceu 0640 2011 10 18 14 12 25 Q 2ucPu B404 2011 10 18 14 12 02 QJ6IBTLIN 0000 0640 2011 10 18 14 11 39 QU2UCPU 0640 2011 10 18 14 09 02 Q 2ucPu 0640 2011 10 18 14 08 49 QU2UCPU Item Information 0640 2011 10 18 14 07 58 Q02UICPU Action status Normal 0640 2011 10 18 14 03 51 QO2UCPU Data link status Data Linking 0640 2011 10 18 14 00 45 QU2UCPU Other station data link status stat 0000000000 Other station data link status stat 0000000000 Other station data link status stat 0000000000 Other station data link status stat 0000000000 Line status Normal Master station information Data link cont Standby master station information Not present Scan mode setting information Asynchronou Operation specification when CPU Stop Error and Solution nj 2 Module Information Clear History Refresh Create CSV File
493. tified using Can a faulty station be Check ifthe cablesare 3 A station Other station data identified using Other Correct the wiring properly wired becomes faulty link status SWO0080 station data link status at a certain G3 1 to Swo0s3 SWO0080 to SW0083 Check I Neicabios are s v ods US grounded by the shielded Ground the shielded part transmission Do communications Do communications normal speed normal at a slower ata slower transmission part transmission speed speed e g 156kbps Are terminating resistors Connect terminating e g 156kbps connected to the both ends resistors to the both ends in in a CC Link system the CC Link system When multiple remote stations are simultaneously Increase the transmission powered off at Number of retries Check the number of speed G4 1 Number of retries setting a speed of 156kbps the L RUN LED turns off temporarily setting retries Reduce the number of retries 287 UOI E S JOISEW 94 ui 10119 uoneJedo oj enp suilejqgoud HZ LL Suie qoJd 40 S SI SLL 1 1 9 Error Codes If an error such as a data link error occurs the error cause can be identified by checking an error code 11 3 1 How to check error codes Error codes can be checked using a programming tool as well as link special registers SWs gt Page 348 Appendix 3 2 1 Checking in the Module s Detailed Information window This window displays error codes
494. time from other modes Rough indication When transmission speed is 10Mbps Remote net Ver 1 mode Number of stations Remote I O net mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode 8 0 61ms 1 20ms 16 0 94ms 1 57ms 32 1 61ms 2 32ms 8 29m s BMS 54 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 1 Points per module and per system For the points refer to the table of the performance specifications gt Page 24 Section 3 2 2 Data transfer between RX RY RWr and RWw and a device in a CPU module a Automatic transfer by parameter settings using a programming tool Setting a refresh device using the network parameter can automatically transfer data between RX RY RWr and RWw in a master local module and a device in a CPU module gt Page 98 Section 7 3 2 Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration Number of Modules TEES Boards Blank No Setting Iv Set 1 2 Start IJO No 0000 Operation Setting Operation Setting Type Master Station Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start X Mode Remote I O Net Mode Total Module Connected 1 Remote Input RX x1000 Remote Output RY 1000 Remote Register RWr wo Remote Register RWw w100 Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output R Y Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB SBO Special Register Sw swo b Transfer using a program Using an inte
495. ting Operation Setting Master Station Duplex Function Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start Mode Total Module Connected 1 Remote Net Ver 1 Mode 1 Remote Input RX xi000 Remote Output RY Remote Register RWr Y1000 wo Remote Register RWw W100 Ver 2 Remote Input RX Ver 2 Remote Output RY Ver 2 Remote Register RWr Ver 2 Remote Register RWw Special Relay SB 580 Special Register 5W Retry Count SWO Automatic Reconnection Station Count Standby Master Station No 1 PLC Down Select Stop Scan Mode Setting Asynchronous 1 1 Delay Time Setting Station Information Setting Remote Device Station Initial Setting i CC Link Configuration Setting Initial Setting Interrunt Settinas Interrupt Settinas CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b Settings for a standby master station Configure the settings in Type and Mode of the network parameter as follows For other settings refer to Page 116 Section 7 4 2 1 Set the station number from 1 to 64 using the station number setting switches on the master local module Set the same number as that of Standby Master Station No that was set for the master station QJ61BT11N RUN LRUN MST SMST ERR LERR 2 Open the Network Parameter window to configure the setting in Type as follows KO Project window gt Parameter gt N
496. tion Receive completion N Request device RYn Completion device RXn OFF Other end station send ready d Basic number of steps The basic number of steps of the G P RIRCV instruction is ten e Assignment of the receive buffer The assignment of the receive buffer is performed in Station Information Setting of the network parameter of a programming tool 7 gt Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 3 Operation error For the following cases an operation error occurs Error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Condition that an operation error occurs When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module in When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When attempt to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices for the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the device that cannot be used for the instruction is specified 4100 When the data that cannot be used for the instruction is contained When the number of data used for the instruction is set beyond the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range 189 AOWlM d r6 9 4 1 Program example This section shows an example of the program to read 11 word data from the buffer memory address 400 or later in the AJ65BT R2 N station number 63 to the area sta
497. tion Selected Station Error Information Point The data link status of each module can be also checked using Other station data link status SWO0080 to SW0083 66 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE THE OPERATION 15 Check whether data link is being performed normally Turning on Y1000 of the master station on Device Buffer Memory Batch on the programming tool turns on RYO YO of the AJ65BTB2 16T station number 1 Turning on XO of the AJ65BTB1 16DT station number 2 turns on X1020 of the master station Online lt gt Monitor 2 Device Buffer Memory Batch Turn on Y 1000 in the master station RYO in the AJ65BTB2 16T is turned on MITSUBISHI NESC S Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device Device Name 1000 o T C Set Value Reference Program Reference C Buffer Memory zi el x LI Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format P l4 Device FE D c B A 9 8 7 6 s 4 3 21 0 S Y1000 000000000000000 SO Eee eT ee E ee ae ni c ee ee ae ee ANT Fay v1010 0000000000000000 0 Y1020 00000000000000020 0 1 1 9 ON i H 4 1 9 Flashing 1 1 1 O OFF i s_This LED is turned on AM ma Ue a ms are a a aa a a o aa eee Rn Ri 4 The LED may l
498. tion SB0071 Displays whether a standby master station exists Scan mode setting information SB0072 Displays the setting status of the scan mode 289 290 Item Description Operation specification when CPU is down status SB0073 Displays the operating status if a CPU module goes down set by the parameter Reserved station specified status SB0074 Displays the status of the reserved station setting configured by the parameter Error invalid station specified status SB0075 Displays the status of the error invalid station setting configured by the parameter Temporary error invalid station setting information SB0076 Displays the status of the temporary error invalid station setting Parameter receive status SB0077 Displays whether parameters have been received from the master station Host station switch change detection SB0078 Displays detected setting changes in the setting switches on the host station during data link Master station return specification information SB0079 Displays which of Master Station or Master Station Duplex Function has been set in Type in the network parameter window Host master standby master operation status SB007B Displays whether the host station is operating as a master station or a standby master station Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting status in case of programmable controller CPU STOP SB007C
499. tion 10 2 3 Section 10 3 3 Section 10 3 5 Section 11 2 4 Section 11 3 4 Section 11 4 4 Section 13 3 1 Section 13 3 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 2 5 Appendix 2 8 Appendix 6 Appendix 7 Deletion Section 7 2 2 May 2012 SH NA 080394E M Complete revision layout change Japanese Manual Version SH 080395 N This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2003 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 418 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall b
500. tion 4 1 Section 4 3 3 Section 4 4 14 Section 7 2 1 Section 8 2 2 Section 8 3 1 Section 8 3 2 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Section 13 1 Section 13 3 Appendix 3 Dec 2004 SH NA 080394E C Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Chapter 1 Section 2 2 1 Section 3 1 Section 4 4 1 Section 4 4 2 Section 4 4 3 Section 4 4 14 Section 5 4 1 Section 7 3 Section 8 4 2 Section 13 3 Appendix 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 2 4 Appendix 2 5 Appendix 2 6 Appendix 2 7 Jul 2005 SH NA 080394E D Addition Section 11 1 Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 2 Section 4 4 3 Section 4 4 6 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 1 Section 6 3 2 Section 6 4 1 Section 6 4 2 Section 6 5 1 Section 6 5 2 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Section 9 1 2 Section 10 1 2 Section 10 2 2 Section 10 3 2 Section 11 1 2 Section 11 2 3 Section 11 2 4 Section 11 2 5 Section 11 3 2 Section 11 3 3 Section 11 3 4 Section 11 3 5 Section 11 4 2 Section 11 4 3 Section 11 4 4 Section 11 4 5 Section 13 3 Appendix 2 7 Appendix 7 1 Apr 2006 SH NA 080394E F Addition Section 4 3 8 Appendix 2 1 Partial correction Section 1 3 Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 3 Section 2 2 4 Section 3 1 Section 4 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 4 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 1 Section 6 3 3 Section 6 4 1 Section 6 4 3 Section 6 5 1 Section 6 5 3 Section 6 6 1 Section 7 1 Section 7 5 Section 8 3 2 Section 8 4 1
501. tion is specified don When the number of write points n3 is set beyond the setting range When the station number specified by n1 does not exist CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9 7 1 Program example This section shows an example of the program to write 10 word data from the area starting from DO in the master station to the offset value 1004 of automatic update buffer or later 400 or later in the intelligent device station when XO is turned on in the following system configuration Assume that the I O number of the master station is X Y40 to X Y5F Assume that SWO is set to the refresh device of the link special register SW Master station AJ65BT R2 N CPU module Station No 0 Station No 1 RITO request source Host station 1 Automatic Automatic to 4 update buffer update bufferi memory aeg X0 SW80 0 E At GP RITO U4 Ki Hi00 DO K10 Dedicated instruction execution LEND OLlM d o 46 ejduiexe wesbold 776 203 9 8 G P RLPASET The G P RLPASET instruction sets the network parameters to the master station and starts up the data link Instruction symbol G RLPASET G RLPASET Execution condition Command Un G0 S2 Command GP RLPASET eP RLPASET Un S1 s2 s3 84 85 o Applicable d
502. tion number Because a master local module does not support a production number display a hyphen is displayed Point The serial number on the rating plate and the front of the module may differ from that on the production information list window of a programming tool The serial number on the rating plate and the front of the module indicates the management information of the product The serial number on the production information list window of a programming tool indicates the functional information of the product The functional information of the product is updated when a new function is added Jequinw eleS pue uoisJeA UOWOUN y BuryoeyD 6 xipueddy 409 Appendix 10 cc Link Versions 410 There are Ver 1 and Ver 2 for CC Link versions 1 2 3 Ver 1 00 and Ver 1 10 Ver 1 10 is a standard where restrictions of station to station cable lengths in Ver 1 00 have been cleared and the length of all station to station cables is 20cm or longer Ver 1 00 is a traditional standard For the maximum overall cable distance of Ver 1 10 refer to Page 29 Section 3 2 2 The following are conditions where all station to station cables have a length of 20cm or longer All the modules in a CC Link system are Ver 1 10 compatible All the cables are Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables Ver 2 Ver 2 compatible module is a module that supports the cyclic points expansion The specifications of a cable are th
503. tion of remote device station to be initialized SW0014 to SW0017 is Master station ignored and the initial process is performed in all the remote device stations set in the network parameter In a remote device station where a module has been replaced due to failure the initial process is completed Remote device station The initial process may not be completed in a remote device station that is normally operating If the initial process is not completed check Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information SW0110 to SW011F 156 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 2 Event issuance for the interrupt program A request for the interrupt to a CPU module is issued when the conditions that have been set using a programming tool are satisfied and the interrupt program can be executed This function is used to stop the control and execute an interrupt program upon an error or for other purposes Because the conditions are set using a programming tool the number of steps in a program is reduced shortening the scan time An event can be issued to all stations 1 Conditions for event issuance Up to 16 conditions for event issuance can be set The following conditions can be set for interruption When RX RY or SB is turned on or off Match mismatch of data in RWr and SW When a link scan is completed 2 How to configure the interrupt settings Configure the settings in Interrupt Se
504. to RX1F v x Y1000 to Y105F Remote output RYO to RY1F amp a oo WO to WB Remote register RWrO to RWrB AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN 3o D W100 to W10B Remote register RWw0 to RWwB Page 232 Section 10 2 1 2 S 9 D500 to D501 CH 1 digital output value CH 2 digital output value 83 23 D508 Error code S X1060 to X10BF Remote input RXO to RX1F e o Y1060 to Y10BF Remote output RYO to RY1F D WC to W17 Remote register RWrO to RWrB AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN D W10C to W117 Remote register RWw0 to RWwB L3 Page 232 Section 10 2 1 2 n D510 to D511 CH 1 check code CH 2 check code 3 D518 Error code i 7 8 2 2 o Po D 3 o c 0 lt o 0 p a 23 247 2 Program example 1 Create the following program on a programming tool Confirmation of the data link status X0 XOF Xi SW80 0 AF E 1 H AF Mc NO M100 Data link is normal ENDS AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN E AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN SW80 0 gt Data link error Yag AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN SW80 3 vai Data link error AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN NO M100 2 initialization procedure registration x 1 SB5F 1 RST SBOD Turn off the initialization i procedure registration instruction 1 X101B X107B M I I X1018 i SBOD Turn on the initialization 1 procedure registration instruction 1 X1078 1 s H vA 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Initial setting change X20 A D conversion enable
505. to the version of a programming tool depending on the functions of the master local module used Refer to Upgrading the Functions of a Master Local Module in this manual s Page 393 Appendix 6 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 3 Precautions for the System Configuration This section describes notes to be paid attention upon system design to prevent an incorrect input from a remote station 1 When turning on and off the power Power on the remote station then start data link In addition stop data link before turning off the remote station Failure to do so may cause an incorrect input Data link starts Data link stops During Master station execution data link status Stopped ON Remote station i ower supply status p pply OFF 2 Upon a momentary power failure of a remote station If a momentary power failure occurs in the power supply 24VDC of the remote station an incorrect input may occur a Cause of an incorrect input due to a momentary power failure The hardware of a remote station internally converts the power supply of a module 24VDC into 5VDC If a momentary power failure occurs in a remote station the time until the 5VDC power supply in the remote station turns off becomes greater than the response time after an input module turns on and off therefore refreshing data within the time as shown in 1 below causes an incorrect input Ts 3 Remote station Module power sup
506. toate cts dede Stale fet tc le ts 13 340 Scan Mode Setting 005 101 Scan synchronization 05 162 Ie MC EE 79 SD LED daara en oetotdge toe aes Peace is 21 Serial number 0 0 0 0 0c cee ee eee eee 408 Serial number display 0005 23 Set the station information in the CC Link configuration WINKOW os oed bead sae 98 103 106 Setting and canceling a temporary error invalid station acne 318 Setting of the data link status upon an error in the programmable controller CPU of the master station Setting of the status of the input data from a data link faulty station a rainen a aok ee eaten EE 132 Setting sheet iea in aa i aai aa a 402 Slave station spica a ee 14 Slave station cut off a na aaau anaa 129 Slave station offset size information 332 Solderless terminal aeaa 79 Special Register SW nnana naaa 101 Special Relay SB n nnan aana 101 Specification of remote device station to be initialized AEI EE R dert EEES 154 Specifications enida a n ita a aa 24 Standby master function 136 Standby master station 000 000 ee 14 Standby Master Station No 101 Start l D No ee ee ee EL eee eee 98 Station Information Setting 101 103 Station information setting sheet 406 StationNo ee 104 106 Station number setting 83 Station number setting swit
507. ttings of the network parameter and in Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting of the PLC parameter 7 gt Page 112 Section 7 3 2 4 Page 120 Section 7 4 2 2 suonoun J y Jo suoneorjddy jnjes e g ueJ60Jd 1dnuejui eui JO eouenssi JUSAQ ZEB 157 8 3 3 Automatic CC Link startup Data link can be performed with the default settings by powering on the master local module This function is used to check the operation of when a system is configured This function can be also used in a system containing a remote I O station as well as a remote device station and intelligent device station Master station Remote I O station Remote device station Intelligent device station 1 Default parameter settings when CC Link is automatically started up with a master local module operating as a master station When a master local module is started up with the station number 0 it is started up as a master station The table below lists the parameter settings of when CC Link is automatically started up by a master local module operating as a master station Item Setting details Operation Setting Refer to Page 158 Section 8 3 3 1 a Mode Remote Net Ver 1 Mode Total Module Connected 64 Refresh devices Refer to Page 159 Section 8 3 3 1 b Retry Count 3 Automatic Reconnection Station Count 1 Standby Master Station No No setting PLC Down Select
508. twork parameter is set I H Check network parameters or Message transmission The specified station No is not BCO3 f remote device stations O x target station failure the head station number n operations The station is set as a reserved station A data link error including All stations data link error has occurred The message transmission was Message transmission BC04 performed for any other than Check the target station O x target station error remote device stations The station No specified for the Station No out of e dd message transmission function is M BC05 range Message Check the specified station No O x n outside of the range between 1 transmission function to 64 MM Execution of the message Message transmission NM Execute the message i transmission function was NA BC06 function executing transmission function on the x O a attempted from other than the station invalid master station master station In the message transmission Send data size out of DD Change the send data size so that BCO07 function the send data size is nM Ded O x range it will be within the range outside the range Check the program to see if any prohibited remote output RY has P not been accessed With the message transmission If the same error persists after BC50 function abnormal data were O x checking the above the master received f module or remote device stati
509. type Remote I O station CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Remote 1 0 station cyclic data failure Are all RY outputs disabled C1 1 C1 2 Remote device station cyclic data failure ready signal of the remote device station remain off Is the read write of word data disabled failed to be read written b the number of occupied Are all RY outputs disabled D1 1 D1 2 D5 1 D2 1 D3 1 D4 1 Intelligent device station local station Intelligent device station cyclic data failure Operation disabled for the specified number of occupied stations Is the read write of word data disabled Are data failed to be read written by the number of occupied stations Yes Are all RY outputs disabled Is the read write of cyclic data disabled E1 1 E1 2 Intelligent device station transient data failure Does the error code return to the response status No Master station F4 1 F4 2 Master station operation error Is the link stop restart disabled faulty stations disabled or does it take time G1 1 G1 2 G3 1 G4 1 The numbers listed to the left correspond to those listed in the Check item column in Section 11 2 2 Problems due to cyclic data error Take corrective
510. ual F000 to FFFF Error detected in a MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 network system LL MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual 307 IS 9poo JON Z LL S9po2 JOU LI 11 4 cc Link Diagnostics Using GX Works2 The status of a CC Link system can be checked using a programming tool Unlike link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs the system status can be checked on a graphical window therefore corrective action can be easily taken This section describes the CC Link diagnostics using GX Works2 For the CC Link diagnostics using GX Developer refer to Page 397 Appendix 7 3 11 4 1 Monitoring the host station other stations Data link status of the host station station to which a programming tool is connected and other stations stations other than the host station can be monitored 1 Open the CC Link Diagnostics window XX 5 Diagnostics 2 CC Link Diagnostics 2 Referto the subsequent descriptions for operation k Diagnostics Monitoring Stop Monitor Module list diagnostics target selection area Too Master ST Intell ST Station list Return to the original Display All Connecting Station Information Selected Station Information Selected Station Error Information Connecting Station Master station 0 Data Link Status Data linking MasterST Operation Status Normal Master Station Swi
511. umber of occupied stations is included but a reserved station is excluded The value should be multiples of 8 Last 3 1to8 9 to 16 17 to24 25to 32 33to 40 41to 48 49to 56 57 to 64 station No NI NW 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 N Number of connected modules A reserved station is excluded ni a b c A reserved station is excluded a Total number of stations occupied by a remote I O station b Total number of stations occupied by a remote device station c Total number of stations occupied by local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations nw b c A reserved station is excluded TR Transient processing time only when a transient request is issued When a master station issues a transient request 180 When a local station issues a transient request 40 8 x number of stations that issued a transient request 362 APPENDICES ST Constant The largest value in the results of 1 to 3 below When B is 0 the result of 2 is ignored When C is 0 the result of 3 is ignored 1 800 Ax 15 2 900 B x 50 3 C lt 26 1200 C x 100 C gt 26 3700 C 26 x 25 EX Constant only when a master local module is used in the remote net Ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode 50 total numbers found as listed in the table below Expanded Number of Occupied Stations Cyclic Setting Occupied Station 1 Occupied Station 2 Occupied Station 3 Occ
512. unction Description Reference Line test Whether a CC Link dedicated cable is properly connected and data link can be performed with slave stations can be checked Page 87 Section 6 5 1 Transmission speed test Whether the transmission speed setting of a slave station is the same as that of the master station can be checked The station number of the slave station having a different transmission Speed setting can be also checked therefore corrective actions upon a transmission error can be easily taken Page 91 Section 6 5 2 CC Link diagnostics The status of a CC Link system can be checked using a programming tool Unlike link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs the system status can be checked on a graphical window therefore corrective actions can be easily taken Page 308 Section 11 4 Hardware test The hardware in the master local module can be checked Page 321 Section 11 5 35 suonoun Jo jS 5 Other functions Function Remote device station initialization procedure registration function Description The initial setting of a remote device station that was performed on a program can be registered in advance using a programmable controller and can be saved by turning on the link special relay SB A program for the initial setting is not required Reference Page 153 Section 8 3 1 Event issuance for the interrupt program A
513. units of 16 P Start I O No module points Default Blank Operation Setting Set the operations to be performed at an error or when the switch on a CPU module is set to STOP Page 102 Section 7 3 2 1 98 CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTINGS Item Description Setting range Type Select Master Station To configure the system that switches the control to the standby master station if the master station goes down set as follows K_ Page 136 Section 8 2 5 Operation Setting When a failed master station becomes normal again it does not return as a standby master station Master Station When a failed master station becomes normal again it returns as a standby master station When only the standby master station is started up it starts data link as a master station Master Station Duplex Function Master Station Master Station Duplex Function Default Master Station Master Station Data Link Type PLC Parameter Auto Start is displayed The setting is not required Mode Total Module Connected Select the mode of a master local module lt _ gt Page 43 Section 3 6 2 to Page 54 Section 3 6 6 If the mode is selected in the CC Link configuration window for the station information setting the mode selected in the CC Link configuration window is automatically set Set the number of modules to be connected to a slave station
514. upied Station 4 Single 0 0 0 0 Double 70 x number of stations 80 x number of stations 90 x number of stations 100x number of stations Quadruple z humberor stations 110 x number of 130 x number of 150 x number of stations stations stations Octuple 110 x niimber of 160 x number of 210 x number of 260 x number of stations stations stations stations RT Retry processing time Only the link scan with a faulty slave station where data link is being performed is added a B x number of detected faulty stations 1 a Retry processing time of the first station BT x 200 R x retry count setting value 178 5 With a transient request R 13 2 NI x 4 8 NW x 9 6 180 ss Without a transient request E z R 13 2 NI x 4 8 NW x 9 6 N a B Retry processing time of the second and subsequent stations xs BT x 200 P x retry count setting value 178 5 z P 10 8 a F Return processing time added only when there is a faulty station 5 3 BT x 243 1 210 8 x number of automatic return modules 1 ST 9 9 2 3 8 363 Master station 364 Ex When the transmission speed is 10Mbps in the following system configuration It is assumed that there is no faulty station transient transmission and retry in this example Station number 8 3 Local station Station number 1 1 Station number 2 2 Station number 4 Station number 12 1 Remote I O stati
515. ure shows the operations of a link special relay SB and link special register SW when the remote device station initialization procedure registration is performed Specification of remote device station to be initialized Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction Execution status of remote device station initialization procedure Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure Remote device station initialization procedure registration execution individual information gt Executed by the master local module cai eta gt Executed on the program SW0014 to SW0017 SB000D OFF SB005E OFF SBOOS5F ofr SWO0110 to SW011F 111 siiejep Dunes Z 7 uonejs 19 Se e 10 sBumes vejoweseg Z 4 Interrupt Settings W Project window Parameter gt Network Parameter gt CC Link gt Interrupt Settings button 1 In Interrupt Settings window set the conditions on which a master local module issues the interrupt to a CPU module 2 Click the End button and close the setting window Interrupt Settings Module 1 Input Format 5 8 Detection Interrupt Word Device Channel No Interrupt Device code iDevice NOs method Condoni Set Valde SI No RX 0001 Edge Detect v ON x a RWr OD04 LevelDetect Unequal 1 Clear Check End Cancel Item Description Settin
516. urs in the AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADVN an error code is stored into D508 After the cause of the error is removed and X25 is turned on the error is reset Turning on X22 sets the digital value of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Turning on X23 outputs the analog value from the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN If an error occurs in the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN an error code is stored into D518 After the cause of the error is removed and X26 is turned on the error is reset CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 10 2 6 Program example when the initial setting is configured only on a program This section provides an example of when the initial setting is configured only on a program not ona programming tool 1 Devices to be used Devices are the same as those when the initial setting is configured on a programming tool 7 gt Page 247 Section 10 2 5 1 2 Program example 1 Create the following program on a programming tool Confirmation of the data link status xo XOF xi SW80 0 Data link is normal AF mc NO M100 J AU65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN SW80 3 SW80 0 j Data link error Yao AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN SW80 3 P Data link error u Y31 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN NO__ M100 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Initial setting X1018 r A D conversion enable prohibit J L D EMME SUME wine specification RWwO r 4 CH 1 to 4 input range setting LMOVP H31 w101 7 RWw1 4 Averaging process specification LMOVP H200 W103 4 RWw3 MOVP Ki6 wi
517. usly executed to multiple intelligent device stations But concurrent execution of the instruction is not allowed to the same station including other dedicated instructions If the dedicated instruction is executed before the completion of the former dedicated instruction the latter instruction is ignored Because several scans are required to complete the process of the dedicated instruction create a program so that the next dedicated instruction is executed after Completion device D2 turns on CHAPTER 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS c Check of the completion status There are two types of interlock signals for the G P RIRCV instruction Completion device D2 and Status display device at completion D2 1 Completion device Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RIRCV instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P RIRCV instruction Normal completion Remains off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on in the END process of the scan where the G P RIRCV instruction is completed and turns off in the next END process End End End End process process process process Program SS EE fe Im O z G P RIRCV instruction SHE Completion device Status display device at comple
518. valid station in Station Information Setting of the network parameter 7 7 Page 103 Section 7 3 2 2 166 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 7 Temporary error invalid station setting function Even if a data link error occurs in a slave station the station is not detected as a faulty station in the master station and local station This setting can be configured even during data link unlike the error invalid station setting function This function is used to exchange slave stations for maintenance or for other purposes during data link Point If an error occurs in all the slave stations set as a temporary error invalid station the ERR LED turns on 1 Input and output status of a temporary error invalid station Cyclic transmission data in a station set as a temporary error invalid station are all refreshed If an error occurs in a station set as a temporary error invalid station the input is held and the output is turned off 2 Setting method Configure the setting using one of the following methods e CC Link diagnostics 7 s Page 318 Section 11 4 6 Link special relays SBs or link special registers SWs Values in parentheses are buffer memory addresses and bit numbers Item Link special relay SB and link special register SW to be used Temporary error invalid request SB0004 5EO b4 Temporary error invalid acceptance status SB0048 5E4 b8 Temporary error invalid complete status S
519. ve columns under Delectability in the table as explained below When a standby master station is operating as a master station Master station column CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING When a standby master station is operating as a standby master station Local station column Delectability Error code e d Description Error cause details Corrective action Master Local hexadecimal station station Error detected in a CPU module 4000 to 4FFF LL QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Error detected in a serial communication module 7000 to 7FFF LL Serial Communication Module User s Manual and other relevant manuals B002 x B101 and B102 Please consult your local O ____ J System error E O B103 to B106 Mitsubishi representative x B109 A data link error occurred on Data link error in target Check the operation of the target B10A target stations during a message O x stations n remote device station transmission L Check the station No of the target The message transmission he i station Message transmission function was executed for the B10C j Or check if the target station O x function unsupported remote device station that does supports the message not support the function P transmission function Transient data B110 i A line error has occurred Modify the line O O
520. ve station Buffer memory address Remote register Device Station number Module name Hexadecimal Decimal RWr RWw wo 2E0y 736 RWwO W1 2E1y 737 RWw1 1 QJ61BT11N W2 2E2y 738 RWw2 W3 2E3y 739 RWw3 CPU module Master station Slave station Buffer memory address Remote register Device Station number Module name Hexadecimal Decimal RWr RWw W100 1E0y 480 RWrO W101 1E1y 481 RWr1 1 QJ61BT11N W102 1E2y 482 RWr2 W103 1E3 483 RWr3 CPU module Master station Local station CPU module 4 Device Buffermemory Buffer memory Ded 1 Remote register RWr Remote register RWr i i wo 2E0n 736 2E0x 736 wo Station dus Station Station o gt i Station No 1 1 No 1 i No 1 E No 1 i i w3 i 2E3H 739 2E3H 739 w3 i i Remote register RWw Remote register RWw i W100 E 1E0H 480 1E0H 480 W100 Station p Station j Station p Station No 1 No 4 i i No 1 i im No 1 i 1 W103 i 1E3H 483 1E3H 483 W103 i CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 10 3 2 Settings for a master station 1 Settings for a master local module Set the station number and transmission speed of the master local module 7 gt Page 21 CHAPTER 2 Station No 0 Transmission speed 156kbps Online 2 Parameter settings by using a programming tool Connect a CPU module to a programming tool to set the parameters of the master local module
521. ve station offset size information Un G992 to Un G1503 LC Page 332 Appendix 2 4 230 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 10 2 Example of Communications Between a Master Station and a Remote Device Station This section describes an example of how to configure the initial settings for the remote device station and perform an analog input and digital output If an error occurs the error code of the remote device station is stored in the device of a CPU module 10 2 1 System configuration 1 System configuration The following system is used for explanation purpose Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode N Module name Q20UDHCPU QJ61BT11N QX10 QY10 Start I O No X Y00 to X Y1F X20 to X2F Y30 to Y3F ee pee Se ee E Terminating resistor Terminating resistor uoneunByuoo wayskS p Z OL uOHelS 9eol e 9jouie e pue uonels Jejse y e ueeweg suoreoiunuiuio Jo ejdurex3 z OL AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN Ver 1 compatible remote device station Ver 1 compatible remote device station station number 1 station number 4 Occupies Occupies 3 stations 3 stations 231 2 Assignment of the remote I O RX RY and remote register RWr RWw In the program example the following assignment is used to perform data link Point P The status of a device assignment can be checked on GX Works2 by setting information of a slave station on the CC Link configuration wi
522. veT Invalid Eror Station Type Occupied Number Status EN ERE Ver 1 Intelligent 1 Start Monitoring APPENDICES 3 Line test Whether a CC Link dedicated cable is properly connected and data link can be performed with slave stations can be checked 1 Open the CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics window Diagnostics lt gt CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics 2 In Module Setting select CC Link Then select a master station to be monitored in Module No or I O Address 3 Click the Start Monitoring button 4 Click the Loop Test button The Loop test window appears Loop test Operation state of all stations Bl Normal m Illegal E Reserved EJ Invalid Loop test Target station All stations 1 64 C Selected station No 5 Specify the station where a line test is executed in Target station Then click the Execute Test button To execute a test in all the stations Select All stations 1 64 To execute a test in a specified station Select Selected station and enter the station number 6 The test result is displayed in Operation state of all stations Point e Ifthe Loop Test button cannot be clicked check that the master station has been selected in Module Setting Do not write data to the buffer memory areas buffer memory addresses 5E0 and 6084 during line test Do not execute a line test using a program and other peripherals at
523. ved Local station from the master station For data receiving 992 to Slave station Stores the offset and size of Page 332 3E0 to 5DF4 4503 offset size RX RY RWw RWr in each Read only O O Appendix 2 information slave station 4 Read P 335 150410 Link special l i bonn 5E0 to SFFYy Stores the data link status write Appendix 2 1535 relay SB Data can be 5 written only O O Page 336 1536 to Link special to areas with f 600 to 7FF i Stores the data link status Appendix 2 2047 register SW the first 32 6 addresses 6 2048 to 800 to 9FFy System area 7 B 2559 Page 336 2560 to Random access Stores any data and is used Read AO00y to FFFy n O O Appendix 2 4095 buffer for transient transmission write 7 Stores sending receiving data and control data when transient transmission ao communications using a Page 336 4096 to Communication IE Read 1000 to 1FFF communication buffer is O O Appendix 2 8191 buffer write performed with a local 8 station standby master station and intelligent device station Stores data automatically updated when transient transmission Page 337 8192 to Automatic EM Read 2000 to 2FFFy communications using the O Appendix 2 12287 update buffer i write automatic update buffer is 9 performed with an AJ65BT R2 N 12288 to 3000 to 3FFFY System area 5 16383 Master station Ver2 Stores the status of the data O er
524. wering off and on the system 23 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the specifications functions I O signals buffer memory remote I O RX and RY and remote register RWr and RWw of the master local module 3 1 General Specifications For the general specifications of the master local module refer to the following User s manual for the CPU module used hardware design maintenance and inspection 3 2 Performance Specifications Item Specifications Transmission speed Selected from 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps and 10Mbps Maximum number of connected modules master station 64 gt Page 27 Section 3 2 1 Number of occupied stations local station 1 to 4 stations The number of stations can be changed using a programming tool i Remote I O RX RY 2048 points Remote register RWw 256 points master station remote device station local CC Link Ver 1 station intelligent device station standby master station Remote register RWr 256 points remote device station local station intelligent device Maximum number of station standby master station master station link points per system Remote I O RX RY 8192 points Remote register RWw 2048 points master station remote device station local CC Link Ver 2 station intelligent device station standby master station Remote register RWr 2048 points remote device station local station intelligent device
525. where a master local module is mounted Master local module Software package available for Connectable modules and the master local modules number of connectable modules _ Page 72 Section 5 2 2 73 Page 69 Section 5 2 1 Point Some restrictions apply to the versions of a CPU module mater local module and programming tool depending on the functions of the master local module used Check the versions in the appendix of this manual 5 Page 393 Appendix 6 5 2 1 Connectable modules and the number of connectable modules 1 Connecting a master local module to a CPU module A master local module can be mounted on any slot of a main base unit or extension base unit The following table lists connectable CPU modules and the number of connectable modules Connectable CPU module Number of connectable modules When the parameters are When the parameters are CPU type Model name set on a programming set using dedicated tool instructions Q00JCPU Basic model QCPU QOOCPU Up to 2 modules Up to 2 modules Q01CPU QO2CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Up to 8 modules Up to 64 modules High Performance Programmable model QCPU controller CPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU QO6PHCPU x Process CPU Up to 8 modules 2 Up to 64 modules Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 69 se npoui e qej2euuoo jo Jequinu eui pue sejnpoul ejqejpeuuo9 L Z G pejunoy s ejnpojg je201 4e1se N 9JeuM ueis S 94 jo UOeINBYUOD
526. xecute Set New Execute Same as Prev Set Same as Prev Set Same as Prev Set Same as Prev Set Set New Set New Set New Set New Set New Set New Set New Set New Set New Set New Execute Set New 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 SO EA E RA EA EA EA EU EA SU RA EH EU E aA E 4 4 4 Default Cancel Configuring the initial setting executes the following processes from the first condition Condition Description 1st The channels 1 and 2 are set to the analog output enable An output range is set 2nd Channel 1 0 to 5V Channel 2 User range setting 1 10 to 10V The HOLD CLEAR setting is configured 3rd Channel 1 CLEAR Channel 2 CLEAR 4th Initial data processing completion flag is turned on 5th Initial data setting request flag is turned on eth Initial data processing completion flag is turned off 7th Initial data setting request flag is turned off The initial setting of a remote device station can be also configured on a program 7 Page 251 Section 10 2 6 6 Click the End button to terminate the setting 7 Write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system Data link is started XX Online lt gt Write to PLC uiu or power off on 244 CHAPTER 1

MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents